Using EPM Workspace - Oracle Help Center
Oracle® Enterprise Performance Management Workspace,
Fusion Edition
User’s Guide
RELEASE 11.1.1.4
EPM Workspace User’s Guide, 11.1.1.4
Copyright © 1989, 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Authors: EPM Information Development Team
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective
owners
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and
disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or
allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit,
perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation
of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find
any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of
the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS:
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government customers
are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition
Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and
adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract, and, to
the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial
Computer Software License (December 2007). Oracle America, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not
developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications that may create a risk of
personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all
appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates
disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products, and services
from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any
kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible
for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third-party content, products, or services.
Contents
Documentation Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 1. Using EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
About EPM System and Enterprise Performance Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
About EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preparing to Use EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Deployment Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
EPM Workspace Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Modules Used to Perform Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Accessing Items from Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
User Types and Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Module Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
EPM Workspace User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Reporting and Analysis Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
File Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Logging on to EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Customizing the Logon Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Changing Native Directory Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Web Analysis Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Interactive Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Production Reporting Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Analytic Services Features Available to the Studios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Financial Management Features Available to the Studios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Planning Details as a Database Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
SAP BW Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Relational Access Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Contents
iii
Starting Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Creating Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Accessing Navigate Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Opening and Printing Documents or URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting File Properties and Moving Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Renaming Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adding and Removing Documents from Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Using Open Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Using Smart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Personalizing EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Subscribing to Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Working with Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using Workspace Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Launching a EPM Workspace Object as a tab in EPM Workspace from Dashboard . . . 47
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Standard Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Web Analysis Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Financial Reporting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Book Editor Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Batch Editor Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Production Reporting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Interactive Reporting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Batch Scheduler Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Explore Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Administer and Impact Manager Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Schedule Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Navigate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Favorites Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Shortcut Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
iv
Contents
Chapter 2. Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting General Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting Authentication Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting Explore Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Formatting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
About Module Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting Web Analysis Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Preferences for Oracle BI Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting Preferences for Oracle Business Intelligence Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Managing Dimension Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . 85
Personalizing Your EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Resizing the View Pane and Content Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Displaying Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Sorting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Showing Specific File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Standard Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Chapter 3. Exploring and Managing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Using Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Supporting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Other Standard Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Basics of Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing Priorities, Exceptions, and Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Managing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Opening or Selecting Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Creating Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Creating Documents or Collections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Moving or Copying Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Renaming Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Contents
v
Deleting Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Searching for Files or Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Linking to Web Analysis Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Creating E-mail Links to Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Using the E-mail Recipient List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Using Ambiguous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Registering a File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Exporting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Exporting to Smart View for Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
About Hyperion Reporting and Analysis Smart View Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Importing Reporting and Analysis Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Installing Smart View From EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Exporting Financial Reporting Reports and Snapshots to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . 105
Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Changing Analytic Services and Planning Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Adding Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selecting an Application and Database Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Editing Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Deleting Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Using the Key Figure Manager for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Chapter 4. Using Search Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Indexing Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using the Search Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Using Advanced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Search Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Supported MIME Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 5. Importing Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Interactive Reporting Documents and Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
HTML Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Importing Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Importing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
vi
Contents
Importing Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Importing Files as Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Importing a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Using EPM Workspace URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Opening a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Opening a URL in a New Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Updating a URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Importing a Financial Reporting File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Importing Microsoft Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Setting Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Creating Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Working with Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
General Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Output Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Interactive Reporting Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Setting Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HTML File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
URL Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Working with Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Opening a Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Adding a Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Version Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Listing Multiple Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Deleting Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 6. Viewing and Organizing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Using Different File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Creating a New Book, Batch, Document, or Workspace Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Selecting a Data Source for a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Adding Items to Your Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Pushing Items to Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Contents
vii
Managing Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Creating a Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Modifying or Removing Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Subscribing to Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Receiving and Viewing Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Using Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Customizing Personal Page Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Working With Personal Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Workspace Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Creating Workspace Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Chapter 7. Launching Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Launching Oracle's Hyperion Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 8. Using Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EPM Workspace Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Interacting with Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Enabling Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Preview Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Logging On to Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Changing Expired Passwords for Essbase Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Viewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Printing Reports and Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Changing User POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Responding to Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Using Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Using Related Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Changing Members for Grid POVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Viewing Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Viewing Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Viewing Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 9. Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
About Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Designing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Creating Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
viii
Contents
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Available Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Assigning Special Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Prompt Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Selecting the User Point of View as a Member in the Book Point of View . . . . . . . . . 192
Assigning Members Using Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Selecting Multiple Members Based on Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Searching for Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Previewing Selected Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Saving Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Opening Books or Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Features of a PDF File Generated from a Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Changing the Book Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Setting Table of Contents Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Printing PDF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Printing Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Microsoft Word Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Designing Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Defining Prompts for a Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Opening Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Chapter 10. Interactive Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Using the Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Standard EPM Workspace Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Standard Interactive Reporting Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Paging Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Alert Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Understanding Interactive Reporting Document Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Creating An Interactive Reporting Document File (BQY) From Another Interactive
Reporting Document File (BQY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Interactive Reporting Database Connection File (OCE) Selection For Interactive
Reporting Document (BQYs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Contents
ix
Selecting an Interactive Reporting Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Accessing Interactive Reporting Document Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Saving Interactive Reporting Document Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using the Save Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using the Save As Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Sections Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Selecting Interactive Reporting Document File Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Adding Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Moving Between Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Duplicating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Renaming Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Deleting Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Dashboard Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Refreshing Interactive Reporting Document File Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Printing Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Exporting a Section as a .PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Exporting an Interactive Reporting Document File in Native File Format . . . . . . . . . 222
Query Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files (OCEs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Data Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Topics and Topic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Query Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Inserting a New Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Working with Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Working with Items on the Request Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Picture (BLOB Image) Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Adding a Computed Item in Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Computed Items and Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Applying A Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Variable Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Applying Query Sorts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Refreshing a Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Results and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adding a Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Working with Columns and Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
x
Contents
Sorting Results/Table Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Number Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Applying a Results and Table Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Results and Table Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Adding Computed Items in Results and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Paging Through Results Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Chart Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Understanding Chart Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Chart Data Layout Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Changing Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Working with Charted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Working with Chart Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Paging Through the Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Pivot Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Pivot Table Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Working with Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Working with Row and Column Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Working with Pivot Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Analyzing Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Paging Through Pivot Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Common Chart/Pivot Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Sorting Charts/Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
DrillDown into Dimensional Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
OLAPQuery Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Working with OLAP Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
OLAP Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
CubeQuery Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
About Essbase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
About Multidimensional Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Catalog List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
OLAPQuery and CubeQuery Data Layout Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Building a CubeQuery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
DB Logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Searching Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Filter Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Contents
xi
Navigating CubeQuery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Using Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Downloading to Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Formatting CubeQuery Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Query Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Launching Smart View from CubeQuery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Embedded Section Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Report Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Paging Through the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Chapter 11. Using Production Reporting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Viewing a Production Reporting Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Using the Navigation Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Navigating with the Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Chapter 12. Using Web Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Presentation Access and File Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
User and Group Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Document and Folder References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Opening Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Notes on Opening Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Closing Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Creating Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Creating Documents from Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Modifying Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Modifying Filter Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Selecting Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Searching for Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Locating Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Selecting Members Using Analytic Services Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Selecting Financial Management User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Filtering by SAP BW Member Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Using SAP BW Select Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
xii
Contents
Selecting Financial Management Member Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Selecting Substitution Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Selecting Personal Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Applying Point of View (POV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Defining Dynamic Time Series Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Defining Previous Member Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Navigating Data Objects and Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Navigation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Repositioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Keep Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Remove Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Drilling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Expand on Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Selected Member Data Display Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Drilling Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Default Drilling Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Drill-Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Changing Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Data Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Saving Selections to the User POV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Pinboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Pinboards Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Pinboard Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
SQL Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Freeform Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Resizing the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Managing Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Related Content Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Order of Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Default Analysis Tools Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Activating and Deactivating Analysis Tools Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Show/Hide Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Asymmetrical Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Creating Show/Hide Only Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Editing Show/Hide Only Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Traffic Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Financial Intelligence Variations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Contents
xiii
Creating Traffic Lighting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Editing Traffic Lighting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Creating Sorting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Editing Sorting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Restrict Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Creating Restrict Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Editing Restrict Data Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Server-Based Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Multiple, Filter-Axis Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Creating Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Editing Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Editing Data Formatting Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Spreadsheet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Sizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Sizing Individual Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Sizing All Columns to a Common Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Autosizing Column Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Formatting Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Formatting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Other Kinds of Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Formatting Order of Precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Data Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Formatting Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Cell Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Sizing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Changing and Locking Display Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Spreadsheet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Charts and Chart Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Chart Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Selecting Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Font Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Cumulative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Creating Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Modifying Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Analytic Services Attribute Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
xiv
Contents
Print as PDF from EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Print via PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Database Connection Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Database Connection Access and Document Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
User and Group Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Integrating OLAP and Relational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Analytic Services Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Restrict Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Edit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Suppress Missing Rows, Zeros, and Shared Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Label Mode and Alias Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Analytic Services Drill Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Linked Reporting Objects (LROs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Relational Drill-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Analytic Services Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Attribute Dimensions and Attribute Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Financial Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Financial Management Features Available in Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . 416
Related Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Cell Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Line-Item Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Related Content Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Organization by Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Financial Management Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Display Entity Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Financial Management Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
SAP BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
SAP BW Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
SAP BW Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Relational Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Custom Document SQL Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Custom Document Freeform Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Relational Drill-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Relational Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Contents
xv
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Controlling Query Result Set Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Custom Web Analysis Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Content Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Data Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Subscription Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
SQL Spreadsheet and SQL Subscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Linking Components by Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Common Data Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Unlinking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Linking Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Editing Data Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Tips for Edit Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Chapter 13. Using Oracle BI EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Oracle BI Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Oracle BI Delivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Chapter 14. Scheduling Jobs and Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Scheduling and Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
About Job Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Event Status and Schedule Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Running Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Using Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Managing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Managing Job Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Viewing Job Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Using the Consolidated Job Status List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Retrieving Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Scheduling Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
xvi
Contents
Scheduling Batches to Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Selecting a Member for the Batch Point of View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Scheduling Job Bursting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Specifying the Batch Destination and Bursted Output Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Creating an E-mail List for Batch Bursting Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Setting Up E-mail Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Selecting E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Batch Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Deleting Batches from the Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Deleting Batches from the Batch Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Automatic Removal of Batch Scheduler Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Retrieving the Exported Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Providing Logon Credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Chapter 15. Using Interactive Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Interactive Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Import Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Pass-Through Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Setting Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Setting Data Source and Query Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Setting Interactive Reporting General Properties and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Setting Job Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Selecting Database-Connection File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting, Database-Connection Files . . . 464
Setting Processing and Metadata Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Setting Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Setting Single-Cycle Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Modifying Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Setting Multiple-Cycle Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Job Parameter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Process Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Action Options for Multiple-Cycle Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Contents
xvii
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Chapter 16. Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Dependency Analysis Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Connectivity and Run Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Compile Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Generic Job Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Required Files for Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Database Connectivity for Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Output Options for Generic Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
E-mail Notification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Output Directory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Access Privileges on Secure Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Security Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Recommendations for Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Programmer Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Viewing Security Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Production Reporting Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Chapter 17. Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Customizing Parameter Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Parameter Form Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Assigning Parameter Forms Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Assigning the Standard Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Editing Parameter Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Parameter Form Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Element Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
xviii Contents
Required Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Nonrequired Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Standard Parameter Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Standard Parameter Form Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Chapter 18. Annotation Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Showing Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Viewing an Annotation Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Viewing Annotation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Searching for Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Context Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Advanced Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Setting Annotation Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Responding to Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Setting Preferences for Printing Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Appendix A. Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Enabling Screen Reader Support for EPM Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Setting High-Contrast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Using the Tab Key in the EPM Workspace UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Using Global Navigation Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
EPM Workspace Graphic with Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Accessibility Behaviors for General UI Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Content Tab Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Accessibility for File Type Drop-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Accessibility for Sidebar Icon List (File Preferences/Properties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Accessibility for Show Columns dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Accessibility for Favorites Manager Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Accessibility for Explore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Accessibility for File Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Accessibility for File Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Template Selector Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Accessibility for Financial Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Financial Reporting Graphic with Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Accessibility for Foundation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Contents
xix
Accessibility for Interactive Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Accessibility for Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
xx
Contents
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at
http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support. For information, visit http://
www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?
ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
21
22
Documentation Accessibility
1
Using EPM Workspace
In This Chapter
About EPM System and Enterprise Performance Management........................................23
About EPM Workspace ....................................................................................24
Preparing to Use EPM Workspace ........................................................................25
Deployment Workflow .....................................................................................26
EPM Workspace ............................................................................................26
EPM Workspace Capabilities..............................................................................27
Module Tasks...............................................................................................29
EPM Workspace User Interface ...........................................................................29
Reporting and Analysis Repository .......................................................................30
Logging on to EPM Workspace............................................................................31
Setting Preferences ........................................................................................33
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis ..............................................34
Using Smart View ..........................................................................................45
Personalizing EPM Workspace ............................................................................45
Toolbars.....................................................................................................50
Menus.......................................................................................................54
Shortcut Menu Commands................................................................................59
About EPM System and Enterprise Performance
Management
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System offers a comprehensive
Enterprise Performance Management (EPM) system that consists of these products:
l
l
l
Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, Fusion Edition—Management
reporting including query and analysis in one coordinated environment
Oracle's Hyperion® Application Builder for .NET—Coordinated planning, consolidation,
and scorecard applications
Oracle's Hyperion® Foundation Services—Used to ease installation and configuration,
provide metadata management, and support a common Microsoft Office interface
About EPM System and Enterprise Performance Management
23
About EPM Workspace
EPM Workspace, a modular business intelligence platform, provides management reporting,
query, and analysis capabilities for a wide variety of data sources in a single coordinated
environment. EPM Workspace is also a zero-footprint client that provides the user interface for
viewing and interacting with content created using Oracle's Hyperion Reporting and Analysis
authoring studios, financial applications, and Oracle Business Intelligence products.
EPM Workspace provides access to the following content:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting, Fusion Edition—for scheduled or on-demand highly
formatted financial and operational reporting from almost any data source, including Oracle
Hyperion Planning, Fusion Edition, Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, Fusion
Edition, Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management, Fusion Edition, Oracle BI
Answers, Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards, Oracle BI Delivers, and Oracle Business
Intelligence Publisher
Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive Reporting—for ad hoc, relational query, self-service
reporting and dashboards against any ODBC data source
Oracle's Hyperion® SQR® Production Reporting—for high volume, enterprise-wide
production reporting
Oracle's Hyperion® Web Analysis—for interactive ad hoc analysis, presentation, and
reporting of multidimensional data
Oracle Hyperion Performance Scorecard, Fusion Edition—a Web-based solution that
enables your organization to set goals, and to use scorecard methodologies to measure and
monitor business performance
Financial Management and Planning—for consolidation and planning application tasks
Profitability and Cost Management—for managing cost and revenue allocations that are
necessary to compute profitability for a business segment
Oracle BI Answers—Oracle BI Answers provides true end user ad hoc capabilities in a pure
Web architecture
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards—Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards provides intuitive,
interactive access to information that is actionable and dynamically personalized based on
the individual's role and identity
Oracle BI Delivers—Oracle BI Delivers provides business activity monitoring and alerting
that can reach users through multiple channels such as email, dashboards, and mobile
devices
BI Publisher—BI Publisher (formerly known as XML Publisher) offers efficient; scalable
reporting solution available for complex, distributed environments
EPM Workspace, which includes Reporting and Analysis and Oracle Essbase, is part of a
comprehensive EPM system that integrates this business intelligence platform with Oracle's
Hyperion financial applications, Performance Scorecard, and Oracle Business Intelligence
Enterprise Edition products.
24
Using EPM Workspace
Note: Studio refers to Java or Windows components that have a rich authoring environment.
EPM Workspace refers to the user thin client (UTC) or common user interface of the
product.
Preparing to Use EPM Workspace
Prior to using EPM Workspace, familiarize yourself with your documentation set.
Additional information that you need:
l
Browser information– See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Security Administration Guide.
l
EPM Workspace URL and domain
l
User account – the user name and password assigned to you. See your system administrator.
l
Logon information – “Logging on to EPM Workspace” on page 31
l
access permissions – “Toolbars” on page 50
l
Preferences – “Setting Preferences” on page 33
l
Oracle's Hyperion® Shared Services Console user name and password
l
Database information
For Financial Reporting, Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer. Before you
can view reports in PDF, a PDF writer (Adobe Acrobat Distiller, GNU Ghostscript or AFPL
Ghostscript) must be installed with your print server. If a PDF viewer is not available, only report
names are listed. For information on printing PDF and text files, see the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
ä To enable the use of Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) for viewing PDF reports on EPM
Workspace:
1
Open Internet Explorer.
2
Select Tools , then Internet Options.
3
In the Internet Options dialog box, select the General tab, and then in the Temporary Internet Files
topic, select Settings.
4
In the Settings dialog box, in the Check for newer versions of stored pages topic, select Every visit to
the page.
Note: Oracle recommends that you add EPM Workspace to the exceptions for your Web
pop-up blocker. When you perform some EPM Workspace tasks on the Web such as
loading data, a status window pops up showing the task status. If you have a pop-up
blocker enabled on your computer, the status window is not displayed.
Preparing to Use EPM Workspace
25
Note: The first time you access a database connection, you may be prompted to log on. This
occurs if the user name and password you use to log on to the Web application differs
from the user name and password for the database connection. Your administrator
can provide you with the required database connection logon information.
For Internet Explorer, status information is displayed in the browsers status bar while interacting
with EPM Workspace. For Firefox, the status bar is disabled by default.
ä To enable the status bar for Firefox for additional progress information:
1
Select Tools, then Options.
2
Select Web Features.
3
Select Advanced.
4
From the Advanced Javascript Options dialog box, select Change status bar text.
5
Click OK.
Deployment Workflow
For deployment task information, see Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management Deployment
Guidelines.
EPM Workspace
From EPM Workspace access the following from the Navigate menu:
l
l
l
l
l
26
Applications enables you to access Financial Management, Planning, Performance
Scorecard, Profitability and Cost Management, and Oracle Business Intelligence
applications. Applications is only displayed when a user has rights and applications are
available.
From Workspace Pages, access My Workspace Pages and Shared Workspace Pages. My
Workspace Pages can be stored in any folder that the user has access to. My Workspace Pages
is similar to a favorites folder – allows a user to go to one location to access all of their personal
Workspace Pages without having to navigate through the repository. Shared Workspace
Pages are stored in a system folder that authorized users can access from Explore module.
Users that have access to this folder can move their personal pages manually within the
Explore module to promote them to the rest of the organization.
Administer enables you to manage users, groups, user preferences, roles, SmartCuts, Explore
Annotations, and authentication methods.
Schedule enables you to manage jobs and schedule batches and events for automated
processing.
Impact Manager enables you to update Interactive Reporting documents when database
structures, database connections, or links to external data sources change.
Using EPM Workspace
For an overview of the Reporting and Analysis reporting solution architecture, see the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
EPM Workspace can also be installed with the following Reporting and Analysis thin client
products: Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting, Web Analysis, and
Performance Scorecard. These products are used to create documents and modify document
elements. These installed components determine your available features. For example, Web
Analysis must be installed to view Web Analysis documents. For information on tasks performed
in these modules, see “Module Tasks” on page 29.
The main function of the repository is to store files. Every repository file features properties that
identify the file and control user and group access. Your access permissions, set by your system
administrator, determine which repository items you can view, modify, run, and delete. See
“Reporting and Analysis Repository” on page 30.
EPM Workspace Capabilities
EPM Workspace tasks:
l
Viewing documents and dashboards
l
Accessing the following products:
m
m
m
m
m
Financial Management—For more information on using Financial Management
applications from EPM Workspace, see Oracle Hyperion Financial Management User’s
Guide
Performance Scorecard—For more information on Performance Scorecard from EPM
Workspace, see Oracle Hyperion Performance Scorecard User Guide
Planning applications available to users that have access and rights—For Planning
applications from EPM Workspace, see Oracle Hyperion Planning User’s Guide
Oracle Business Intelligence—Includes Oracle Business Intelligence Answers, Oracle
Business Intelligence Interactive Dashboards, Oracle Business Intelligence Delivers, and
BI Publisher. For more information on the Oracle BI EE products, see the Oracle Business
Intelligence New Features Guide. For more information on Oracle BI Publisher, see the
Oracle BI Publisher User's Guide.
Profitability and Cost Management—For more information on Profitability and Cost
Management from EPM Workspace, see Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost
Management User's Guide
l
Scheduling batches, jobs, or events to automatically execute reports or create notifications
l
Create Web Analysis and Interactive Reporting documents, books, or batches
l
Personalizing EPM Workspace and thus managing information delivery by using a start
page (also known as Home page), personal pages, favorites, and EPM Workspace pages
From EPM Workspace, you use menus, buttons, and items from the Navigate menu to perform
tasks. Based on the following criteria, menus and toolbar buttons are updated as you use the
system:
EPM Workspace Capabilities
27
l
l
The roles granted you by the administrator. Roles determine which modules are displayed
in the View pane and toolbar.
The Navigate menu items being used and the task being performed. For example, if you use
Administer, the menus and toolbar icons contain tasks associated with administration
related tasks. If you use Explore, the menu contains file tasks.
Modules Used to Perform Tasks
You use EPM Workspace to perform user tasks:
l
l
l
l
Navigate Menu – access Applications, Workspace Pages, Administer, Schedule, Impact
Manager, and Open Items.
Applications – access and view applications such as Financial Management, Planning, Oracle
Business Intelligence applications, Profitability and Cost Management and Performance
Scorecard.
Workspace Pages – aggregate content from Oracle and non-Oracle sources. Workspace Page
is a page made up of content from multiple sources including documents, URL's, and other
content types.
Schedule– automatically run and manage documents, such as batches, jobs, and events
Note: The Administer and Impact Manager are used only by administrators. See the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide .
l
Open Items – view all documents or items you have open in EPM Workspace.
Accessing Items from Navigate
To access an item, perform an action:
l
From Navigate, click the <item name>.
l
From the toolbar, select the <item name> button.
The variable <item name> is replaced by Applications, Workspace Pages, Administer, Schedule,
Impact Manager, or Open Items.
User Types and Tasks
For a complete listing of the different users available from EPM Workspace, see the Oracle
Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide.
28
Using EPM Workspace
Module Tasks
The available tasks from EPM Workspace depend on the roles and permissions assigned to you
by the system administrator. For information on roles, see the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise
Performance Management System Security Administration Guide.
EPM Workspace User Interface
When you log on, the default EPM Workspace start page or Home page is displayed. The default
is set from the Preferences dialog, “Setting Preferences” on page 33.
The EPM Workspace user interface includes these areas:
1. Menu Bar – Commands and sub-commands that organize tasks and modules (See “Menus”
on page 54)
2. Standard toolbar – Buttons for performing tasks, see “Toolbars” on page 50
3. View pane – Area that provides buttons that enable jumps between panels (each panel having
a specific use and corresponding controls) and displays the list of documents and modules
(Hiding this pane provides a larger content frame in which to use EPM Workspace. Select
View, then View Pane to hide and display).
4. View Pane or Content Area Adjuster – Setting to adjust the size of the View pane and content
area.
Module Tasks
29
5. Content area – Area in which you view active-module documents, tasks, or files
6. Process bar – Location of the current folder, document, or step.
7. Document tab bar – Information bar specific to the current module (If multiple documents
are open, the current document tab is highlighted).
Reporting and Analysis Repository
The repository is used to store, access, and share documents and files. You can access items such
as documents, files, and folders in various ways, including browsing or searching for documents,
subscribing to folders, and using dashboards. You make documents, files, and folders available
to others by importing documents to the repository.
Documents show information and data in a predefined format. You can use jobs and batches
to generate documents automatically. You can run jobs and batches at any time or schedule
them to run automatically.
Note: Your file permissions determine which repository items you can view, modify, run, and
delete.
Actions
l
l
l
Documents, files, and folders can be opened in four formats:
m
Interactive HTML
m
Portable Document Format (PDF), displayed by Adobe Reader
m
Text files
m
Operation messages, which are generated by applications or services and stored in logs
Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting, and Financial Reporting users can subscribe
to documents. When the documents are changed or updated, the users are informed.
Interactive Reporting, Production Reporting, and Financial Reporting users must import
documents before the documents can be accessed by other users. Importing distributes
previously private information for public consumption.
Locations
User preferences specify default startup options:
l
The Content area can be Explore, documents, Workspace Pages, repository locations, or
applications such as Performance Scorecard, Financial Management, Planning, Profitability
and Cost Management, or Oracle Business Intelligence application products. Startup
options are loaded and displayed when users log on to EPM Workspace.
Tip: Set a folder to the directory which contains the most frequently-accessed content.
30
Using EPM Workspace
l
A Favorites folder contains a users most frequently sought repository content. All user
profiles feature Favorites folders, the files of which are accessed through the Favorites menu.
Favorites Manager can push content to users’ Favorites folders, providing one access point
for content.
File Permissions
EPM Workspace file permissions determine who has access to what files or folders and what
operations can be performed. You obtain access items as a user, as a group member, or through
a role given to you by the system administrator. For information on roles, see the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide. The level at which
you can access items and perform tasks is called access privilege.
Access to specific repository items is controlled by the document owner. Access to operations,
such as importing, running jobs, or updating document POV, is controlled through roles. For
example, the owner gives you the modify and run access privilege to Job A, but you can run the
job only if you have the Job Runner role. The owner gives you the full control access privilege
to Document B, so you can open and update the file. For information on setting file permissions,
see Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items .”
Tip: When there are equivalent permissions that conflict with each other, the permission that
grants lesser access takes precedence.
When you import a file, you become the file owner, and you specify the access level of other
users. You might specify that all users can read the file, your group can modify the file, and only
you can delete, change access for, and move the file.
Logging on to EPM Workspace
You can access EPM Workspace in two ways: through a URL provided by your administrator
or through an Oracle application link.
Note: Access through Oracle application links requires that single sign-on be enabled.
ä To start a EPM Workspace session:
1
In your Web browser, go to EPM Workspace Web page.
2
Enter user name and password.
Tip: The user name and password may be case sensitive. To determine if user name and
password are case sensitive, refer to authentication sources documentation.
3
Click Log On.
Logging on to EPM Workspace
31
Your start or home page is displayed. For more information on setting your start or home
page, see Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace”.
Customizing the Logon Page
You can customize the logon page to add a proprietary disclaimer. This allows a company to
broadcast this to all users when logging in to EPM Workspace. This information is displayed
below the Copyright information.
ä To customize the logon page:
1
Backup the file <workspace> \WEB-INF\classes\msgs
\JSPResources_en.properties.
Note: All instances of JSPResources_xx.properties where xx is the language that the
customer supports would have to be modified.
2
Edit the file <workspace> \WEB-INF\classes\msgs\JSPResources_en.properties.
3
Search for the property logon.copyright.string.
Note: There may be two instances, modify the last instance.
4
32
Append your text to the end of the string using \n to get a new line.
Using EPM Workspace
5
Restart EPM Workspace Web Application.
Tip: Use \n to prevent a line from going to far to the right. If a string is to long, it causes the
logon group box to be off center. Keep lines of text as wide as the logon group box
border.
Changing Native Directory Password
If you are using Oracle Internet Directory as the Native Directory, Oracle's Hyperion® Shared
Services enforces the Oracle Internet Directory password policies. Shared Services prompts
Oracle's Hyperion product to change their passwords based on these policies. Because your
Native Directory account is segregated from the user accounts created to support other corporate
applications, Native Directory password changes affect only Oracle's Hyperion products. See
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide for
more info.
Note: You can change your Native Directory password at any time by modifying your Native
Directory user account.
ä To change password in Native Directory:
1
In Current Password, enter your existing password.
2
In New Password and Confirm Password, enter your new password.
Note: The new password must adhere to the Oracle Internet Directory password policies.
3
Click OK.
Setting Preferences
As a designer, you can set defaults for the general appearance of EPM Workspace user interface,
Explore, Reporting and Analysis products, Oracle Business Intelligence products, and
authentication for changing user passwords. Preferences for Planning are not set from EPM
Workspace. For Planning end-user preference settings see the Oracle Hyperion Planning User’s
Guide and for administrator and application preferences, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning
Administrator’s Guide. Financial Management preferences are set from EPM Workspace, see the
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management User’s Guide. Preferences for Oracle Business
Intelligence products in EPM Workspace are set in EPM Workspace. Default startup options
can be set for the content area. Some settings can be overridden through menu options. See
Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace”.
Note: Your e-mail address, which you cannot update, defaults to the e-mail address registered
in your user security settings.
Setting Preferences
33
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
Data sources (generic data storage mechanisms) can be multidimensional databases, relational
databases, or files. Database connections are portable files stored in the repository. They define
the terms, conditions, and methods for connecting to data sources. In EPM Workspace, you
cannot create or modify database connections; rather, you must use the applicable Reporting
and Analysis product. You see only database connections that you own and to which you are
granted permissions. Multiple permissions are needed to read, write, edit, and change databaseconnection file properties. For permission descriptions, see the Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Database servers typically use server, application, and database names to create unique
identifiers. Such identifiers make database references not readily portable. The studios use
database aliases instead of long identifiers. Aliases are easier to remember and more economical
to employ and enable a database to be maintained on multiple servers.
Repository documents are dependent on a database-connection file to query data sources for
values. A document can use only one database connection but can use any of several data sources.
For a complete list of supported data sources and relational databases by Reporting and Analysis
product, see Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and
Configuration Guide.
l
l
Different data sources have different system requirements. See the Oracle Hyperion
Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and Configuration Guide for
descriptions of system requirements.
The View pane displays specific information for the document currently open in the content
area. For example, the database connection used by the current data object. The View pane
displays two database connection segments for Web Analysis:
m
m
The Database segment displays the database connection name for the current data
object.
The Database User Name segment displays the user name by which access to the database
connection was granted.
Web Analysis Studio
Oracle's Hyperion® Web Analysis Studio users can construct seamless liaisons between OLAP
data and relational data sources. Navigation from OLAP to relational data is typically called
relational drill-through.
After relational drill-through is configured, users can navigate to level 0 (the bottom) of the
OLAP database and drill down to relational data. Relational drill-through, a client-based
integration solution, is comparable to the server-based Analytic Integration Services drillthrough.
Relational drill-through supports an array of JDBC relational data sources but does not support
queries by level, generation, or previously selected member. Relational drill-through definitions
are saved as a property of the database-connection file.
34
Using EPM Workspace
Reporting Studio
For Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio, Fusion Edition, you must be defined as a user,
with a user name and password, in the data source that your document uses. For example, if you
want to view documents that use Analytic Services, you must logon to the database connections
with a user account defined in Analytic Services. Logging on usually occurs automatically.
However, if you are not registered in the database, you are prompted for logon credentials.
Interactive Reporting Studio
Interactive Reporting documents can contain multiple Query sections, each of which can access
a range of data sources (relational databases, OLAP servers, imported data sets, and local joins).
Each section can reference zero (if using only local joins) or one database-connection file. The
file can reference only one data source. When a query section associated with a relationaldatabase connection or using only local joins is processed, a corresponding Results section is
produced. If the database-connection file is associated with a multidimensional database
connection, results are shown in the Query section.
Production Reporting Studio
With Oracle's Hyperion® SQR® Production Reporting Studio, users can easily develop a range
of reports, from small ad hoc reports to mission-critical operational reports. Various data sources
can be used; for example, relational databases, OLAP servers, and transactional systems.
After you create a data source connection, you can use the Production Reporting Studio wizard,
layout editor, and explorers to design and customize enterprise reports. You can also insert and
update database tables to incorporate data transformations into report processing.
Whether you are creating budgets, building exception reports, producing invoices from millions
of records, or distributing Web-based reports to help end-users make quick, effective decisions,
Production Reporting manages the secure delivery of content across the enterprise.
Analytic Services Features Available to the Studios
Analytic Services integrates data from multiple sources, meets user needs across an enterprise,
adds value to previously inaccessible data, and transforms data into actionable information.
Analytic Services features available to studios:
l
Data restriction
l
Top and bottom only retrieval
l
Data edits
l
Suppression of rows that contain #MISSING values, zero values, and shared members
l
Label mode and alias tables
l
Drill settings specific to Analytic Services
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
35
l
Linked reporting objects
l
Relational drill-through
l
Analytic Integration Services drill-through
l
Advanced member selection
l
Attribute dimensions and attribute calculations
For feature details, see the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management Workspace Users Guide.
Financial Management Features Available to the Studios
Financial Management is a centralized, scalable, financial management and reporting solution.
Financial Management features that are extended through EPM Workspace:
l
Organization by period
l
Advanced member selection specific to Financial Management
l
Cell text – related content
l
Line item, detail-related content
l
Advanced member selection
l
User–defined fields
l
Entity currency display
Planning Details as a Database Connection
After you install the Planning Details ADM driver, you can choose Planning Details as a database
connection for Financial Reporting Studio. The Planning Details ADM driver is optimized as a
data source to provide Planning features such as supporting details, planning unit annotations,
and metadata filtering. If your report grid does not use Planningfeatures, for optimal
performance, choose Essbase as the database connection. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
SAP BW Data Sources
You can use the studios to access SAP BW data sources. Using the custom-report, free–form
grid component, you can present OLAP, relational, and manually entered data on a data object
and leverage all data sources in integrated dynamic calculations. The studios offer visually
compelling SAP BW reports that satisfy the presentation, reporting and distribution
requirements of information consumers.
SAP BW Features
SAP BW features:
36
Using EPM Workspace
l
BEx Query Variables
l
Period-to-date values
l
Top and bottom retrieval
l
Attributes (member properties)
l
Searches for SAP BW characteristic values
l
Currency conversion
l
Unit of measure conversion
l
Unicode
SAP BW Prerequisites
To access an SAP BW data source, install the SAP BW client on the server. After installation,
define SAP Logon parameters used to communicate with the SAP data source.
Note: For information on accessing SAP JCO data sources and authenticating users against an
SAP server, see Configuring SAP Data Source Access and Authentication in the Oracle
Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Installation and Configuration
Guide.
SAP BW InfoProviders Supported by Reporting and Analysis
l
InfoCubes/Remote InfoCubes
l
ODS objects
l
InfoSets
l
BEx query cubes
l
Multiproviders
Note: Using the SAP BW BAPI driver, you cannot issue MDX queries on cubes that have more
then 50 characteristics. You can, however, have up to 255 characteristics in an SAP
InfoCube.
SAP Variable Support
In this section:
l
About SAP Variables
l
Variables and Processing Types
l
Variable Options
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
37
About SAP Variables
SAP variables are query parameters defined in the BEx Query designer. They function as a store
for characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts, and formula elements.
SAP variables are displayed in a Variable dialog box when creating a new Web Analysis,
Production Reporting, or Financial Reporting document, opening a Web Analysis, Production
Reporting, or Financial Reporting document, or explicitly selecting to refresh the variables from
the shortcut menu in the Content pane. SAP variables are displayed only if the database
connection is created against a BEx query with variables defined.
Users are prompted for variable values only if the variable was created in the original BEx query
with Ready for Input selected. For variables that do not have Ready for Input selected, the default
variable values are applied to the Web Analysis, Production Reporting, or Financial Reporting
document upon creation.
Variables and Processing Types
In order to run a variable, it must be associated with a processing type, which identifies the way
the variable is processed.
Table 1
Variable and Processing Type Combinations
Processing Type
Characteristic Values
Hierarchies
Hierarchy Nodes
Formula
Variable Type
Manual Entry/Default Value
X
X
X
X
Customer Exit
X
X
X
X
SAP Exit
X
X
X
Authorization
X
X
Replacement Path
X
X
The following table lists the variable type and their corresponding descriptions.
Table 2
Variable Descriptions
Variable/Processing Type
Description
Characteristic
Most common type of variable. Most common processing type is manual/default with ready for input setting.
Allows characteristic value to be selected at query run time. Authorization processing type—looks to the endusers’ authorization settings as defined with transaction RSMM and uses the value found there as input for
the variable.
Hierarchy
Behaves in same manner as characteristic variables. Represent an entire hierarchy tree for a given
characteristic. Allow the query user to select new hierarchies versus simply selecting a different node within
the same hierarchy.
Hierarchy Node
Behaves in same manner as characteristic variables. Represents a given substructure within a hierarchy.
38
Using EPM Workspace
Variable/Processing Type
Description
Formula
Query parameters set in the query definition and not filled with values (processed) until the query is inserted
into a workbook. Formula variables function as a store for individual formula elements.
The following table describes the processing type descriptions.
Table 3
Processing Type Descriptions
Variable/Processing Type
Description
Manual Entry/Default Value
Variables processed with this processing type allow you to manually enter a value before inserting the
query into the workbook. When you create the variables, you determine whether to enter a default value
using the default value data.
Customer Exit
ABAP code that may be written by SAP customer to fill a variable.
SAP Exit
ABAP code written by SAP to fill a variable value.
Authorization
Indicates that variable value is stored with user authorization.
Variable Options
There are five options for each variable type (with the exception of Hierarchies variables with
all processing types and any variable type with the Replacement Path processing type) that
determine the way values are selected for each variable. In the BEx variable dialog box, they are
listed under Variable Represents. Values for each of these options are supported in the Variable
dialog box.
Table 4
Variable Options
Option Name
Variable Represents
Single Value
One value only.
Multiple Single Values
Number of single values. Useful in hierarchy nodes, for example, to allow you to enter several single nodes.
Interval
From and to value, that is, an interval.
Selection Option
Any combination of single values and intervals.
Precalculated Value Set
Set of values that are staged persistently in a database table by the Reporting Agent.
There are three additional options for each variable type that determine whether a value is
required for the variable. In the BEx Variable dialog box, they are listed under Variable Value
Is.
Table 5
Options for Variable Value Is
Variable Value Is
Option
Description
Optional
Variable does not need a value during runtime.
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
39
Variable Value Is
Option
Description
Mandatory
At least one value must be entered for the variable during runtime:
Mandatory, Initial
Value Not Allowed
l
Initial value (#) is permitted explicitly
l
Initial value # means “unassigned”, that is, you cause it to explicitly select all data that has no booked values
for this characteristic
At least one value must be entered for the variable during runtime; Initial value (#) is not permitted (that is, you
must enter one or more concrete values in order to execute the query).
Note: Variable Value Is can be modified after creating a variable in BEx, but Variable
Represents can be set only at variable creation time.
SAP Attribute Support
Supported SAP attributes include:
l
l
Display attributes—Users can select, search, filter, and include Display Attributes as part of
queries and reports.
Navigation Attributes—Navigation attributes are selected from the field catalog like
characteristics, and are used for navigation in Web Analysis, Production Reporting, and
Financial Reporting documents. They can also be passed on to Web Analysis, Production
Reporting, and Financial Reporting as selection criteria.
SAP Security Integration
SAP BW provides single sign-on login for Web Analysis, Production Reporting, and Financial
Reporting users integrating with SAP. For detailed information, see the section titled “Working
with an SAP Provider” in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System
Security Administration Guide.
Relational Access Methods
Some documents, such as Web Analysis documents, can access OLAP, Oracle, and supported
relational databases.
Methods for accessing relational data from Web Analysis:
l
Custom document SQL spreadsheet
l
Custom document free-form grid
l
Relational drill-through
l
Relational database connection
l
Analytic Integration Services drill-through
l
Repository
40
Using EPM Workspace
Controlling the Size of the Query Result Set
Query governors vary for relational access methods. Custom document SQL spreadsheets and
relational drill-through methods enable users to declare query governors as they create SQL
queries or relational drill-through definitions.
When you drill from OLAP to relational data, passing only the drilled OLAP dimension member
to the relational data source may result in a large query result set. To reduce and simplify the
query result set, you can pass the page and filter dimensions specified in the OLAP document.
In Interactive Reporting documents, Query section properties can govern the number of rows
returned from relational data sources and impose time limits on queries. Users can cancel queries
through the keyboard in some cases.
Starting Tasks
Most tasks in EPM Workspace start the same way.
Note: Some tasks can also be performed using the toolbar, menus, and shortcut menus. For a
list of EPM Workspace toolbars, menus, and shortcut menus, see “Toolbars” on page
50.
ä To begin a task:
1
From Navigate,
or Open Items.
2
From any of the menus, select a task. For example, from the File menu, select New, then Workspace
Page.
, select Applications, Workspace Pages, Administer, Schedule, Impact Manager,
Creating Documents
With EPM Workspace, you can use the new document wizard to create Web Analysis or
Interactive Reporting document, Financial Reporting book or batch, or create a Workspace page.
ä To create a Web Analysis or Interactive Reporting document, Financial Reporting book or
batch, or Workspace page:
1
Select File , then New , then Document.
2
Select an option:
l
Create an Interactive Reporting Document
l
Create a Web Analysis Document
l
Collect reports into a Book
l
Batch Reports for Scheduling
l
Create a Workspace Page
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
41
See Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books,”
Chapter 10, “Interactive Reporting,” Chapter 12, “Using Web Analysis,” and Chapter 6,
“Viewing and Organizing Information.”
Selecting a Data Source for a Document
To create a document, you must specify a data source. The data source determines the document
type.
l
l
To create a Web Analysis document, specify a Web Analysis database connection.
To create an Interactive Reporting document based on an existing document, specify the
existing document.
Note: In the following procedures, <item name> is Applications, Workspace Pages, Administer,
Schedule, or Impact Manager.
Accessing Navigate Items
ä To access an item from Navigate, select Navigate and click the <item name>.
Opening and Printing Documents or URLs
ä To open a document:
1
Select File , then Open, then Document.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
2
Select a document.
Note: The list of open documents can be located from the Open Items option from the
Navigate menu and from tabs at the bottom of EPM Workspace. You can toggle
between open documents.
ä To open a URL:
1
Select File, then Open, then URL.
2
Enter the URL name.
3
Select OK.
Note: The following procedure only applies to Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, or
Production Reporting documents.
42
Using EPM Workspace
ä To print a document:
1
Select File, then Open, then Document.
2
Open a document, for example, a Financial Reporting document.
Note: You may need to open the document as HTML or PDF.
3
Select File, then Print, then HTML or File, then Print, then PDF.
Setting File Properties and Moving Files
ä To set file properties:
1
From Explore, select a document without opening.
2
Select File, then Properties.
The General Properties option is selected by default in the Properties Dialog.
You can modify the file name, description, and change the owner of an object. To change
ownership of an object, the user must have full control over that object. For additional
property settings, for example Permissions, see Chapter 5, “Importing Artifacts.”.
ä To move files or folders in Explore:
1
From Explore, select a document or folder.
2
Select Edit, then Cut or Copy. See “Moving or Copying Files or Folders” on page 99 for details on
copying.
3
Select a repository location, and select Edit, then Paste.
Renaming Files
ä To rename files:
1
From Explore, select a document or folder.
2
Select Edit, then Rename.
3
Enter a name.
4
Select Save.
Adding and Removing Documents from Favorites
ä To add a document or folder to favorites:
1
From Explore, select a document or folder.
2
Select Favorites, then Add to Favorites.
Using Data Source Elements for Reporting and Analysis
43
3
Select Favorites.
The document or folder that you added is displayed as a menu option.
ä To remove a document or folder from Favorites:
1
Select Favorites, then Manage Favorites.
2
Clear Show, or select Remove.
ä To create a shortcut to a Production Reporting document:
1
From Explore, select the document.
2
Right-click the document, and select Create Shortcut.
3
Complete the General Properties dialog box, and select OK.
For instructions, see Chapter 11, “Using Production Reporting Documents.”
Using Explore
In Explore, you organize, search for, or assign access permissions to files. When you select
Explore, the View pane shows folders, and the content pane shows files and folders.
Explore features:
l
l
Folder tree-Navigate through EPM Workspace folders
View File Properties-View file information, such as type, owner, creation date, access
permissions, modified date, and description
Using Schedule
Use Schedule to manage and schedule batches, jobs, and events and to view status. Schedule is
primarily used by Financial Reporting, Interactive Reporting, and Production Reporting.
Schedule features:
l
Batch Scheduler
l
Job Queue
l
Job Notifications
l
Show Parameters
l
Jobs Running
l
Manage Events
l
Consolidated Job Status
See Chapter 14, “Scheduling Jobs and Batches.”
44
Using EPM Workspace
Using Open Items
Open Items from Navigate displays a list of opened documents, so you can quickly switch
between the opened documents.
Using Smart View
Oracle Hyperion Smart View for Office, Fusion Edition provides a common Microsoft Office
interface for Essbase, Financial Management, Planning, and four EPM Workspace components:
l
Financial Reporting
l
Production Reporting
l
Web Analysis
l
Interactive Reporting (Smart View export options not enabled)
The centralized interface enables simultaneous use of multiple Oracle products and improves
integration with Microsoft Office (2000, 2002, and 2003). The Smart View implementation
provides the following EPM Workspace functionality:
l
l
l
Exports the current page of the current data object to Excel, Word, or PowerPoint
Exposes Financial Management and Essbase functions in Excel, Word, and PowerPoint
content
Notifies you when you can upgrade to new releases of Smart View
Smart View enables two export options:
l
l
You can export the current page of the current data object to Word, PowerPoint, or Excel
as an image, and later, re-query the Web application to refresh the image.
You can export documents to Excel as query-ready or formatted HTML.
When you export content as query-ready HTML, the current page of the current data object is
converted to HTML, and Oracle-specific formatting is removed. Thus, Smart View can re-query
the data source independent of the Web application.
When you export content as formatted HTML, the current page of the current data object is
converted to HTML, and Oracle formatting definitions and calculated members are retained.
Thus, Smart View cannot directly query the data source, but Oracle content can be leveraged by
Microsoft Office applications. Not all export options are supported by all data sources and Web
applications. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items .”
Personalizing EPM Workspace
You can use EPM Workspace favorites, Workspace pages, and personal pages to personalize the
process of organizing, accessing, and viewing documents. See Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences
and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
Using Smart View
45
Subscribing to Documents
When documents are changed or updated, subscribing users can be informed:
l
By e-mail notifications with attached files
l
By bookmarked personal pages
l
By images that represent bookmarks
For information on Subscribe, see Chapter 6, “Viewing and Organizing Information.”
Working with Favorites
Favorites provide quick access to frequently used items and documents. With appropriate access
permissions, you can add items (push items) to other users’ favorites.
Using Workspace Pages
Workspace Pages enable users to create, edit, and aggregate content from Oracle (Reporting and
Analysis and Application products) and non-Oracle sources (URL and Office documents), into
a single environment. Templates are provided for users to create a Workspace page. There are
two types of Workspace Pages, My Workspace pages and Shared Workspace pages. My
Workspace pages can be stored in any folder that the user has access to. There is a favorites like
implementation for Workspace Pages that creates shortcuts to the My Workspace Pages that
can be stored in any folder. Shared Workspace pages are stored in a system folder that authorized
users can access from Explore. Users that have access to this folder can move their personal pages
manually within Explore to promote them to the rest of the organization. See “Workspace Pages”
on page 164 for additional information.
Using Personal Pages
Personal pages provide a way to view frequently used information. You can have multiple
personal pages and choose a default personal page, which is displayed when you open Personal
Pages from Favorites. You can customize personal page content and layout, create personal
pages, and copy and customize imported personal pages.
Personal page features:
l
Broadcast Messages—A link to a folder, the contents of which are set up and managed by
the administrator. Folder contents are displayed as one or more content window, and
displayed to every user. The Broadcast Messages folder contains two sub-folders:
m
m
l
46
Personal Page Content—published personal pages
Sample Personal Page-content set up by the administrator and content added by
subscription
My Bookmarks—Links to Web pages or repository items that open as new tabs in EPM
Workspace.
Using EPM Workspace
l
l
l
l
Image bookmarks—Graphic links to Web pages or repository items.
HTML file or job output displayed as a file content window-Workspace HTML items and
URLs
Exceptions Dashboard-Traffic light indicators. If the traffic light is red, the item is flagged
as an exception or the job generated an exception. If the traffic light is green, the job did
not generate an exception.
Displayable Interactive Reporting sections—Sections from Interactive Reporting
documents and job output that you can access.
For details on the following tasks, see Chapter 6, “Viewing and Organizing Information”:
l
Adding personal page contents
l
Modifying personal page layout
l
Changing personal page colors
l
Displaying HTML content on personal pages
l
Creating bookmarks
l
Using exception notifications
l
Embedding Interactive Reporting document sections in personal pages
Launching a EPM Workspace Object as a tab in EPM
Workspace from Dashboard
Create a text label dashboard graphics object and add a script similar to examples below into the
objects title in the Properties dialog:
l
To launch a Financial Reporting report:
@HTML(<script> function newtabFR()
{top.gModuleManager.launchRelatedContentUri(top.location.href + "?
module=tools.relatedcontent&repository_path=/<encoded path to repository
object>&showViewPane=false");}</script><span id="idnameFR" onClick="newtabFR()"
style="cursor:pointer"><title text></span>)
l
To launch a Financial Management application:
@HTML(<script> function newtabHFM()
{top.gModuleManager.launchRelatedContentUri(top.location.href + "?
module=hfm.appcontainer&sourceApp=<hfm app>&cluster=<clustername>");} </
script> <span id="idnamehfm" onClick="newtabHFM()" style="cursor:pointer"><title
text></span>)
l
To launch a Planning application:
@HTML(<script> function newtabPlan()
{top.gModuleManager.launchRelatedContentUri(top.location.href + "?
module=HyperionPlanning.planning&sourceApp=<Planning application name>");} </
Personalizing EPM Workspace
47
script><span id="idnameplan" onClick="newtabPlan()" style="cursor:pointer"><title
text></span>)
l
To launch any URI:
@HTML(<script> function newtabURI() {top.gModuleManager.launchUri(<"valid
URL”>);} </script><span id ="idnameuri" onClick="newtabURI()"
style="cursor:pointer"><title text></span>)
Note: top.location.href is http://server:port/context
For more example of supported URLs, see “URLs Supported by EPM Workspace” on page
48.
Enumerating the Repository Contents of a Folder in Dashboard
This allows a user to list and launch repository contents of a folder within a dashboard. In the
dashboard, create an embedded browser object and set the URL similar to following:
http://server:port/workspace/browse/dyn?page=/jsp/com/hyperion/tools/workspacepages/
folderlisting.jsp&repository_path=<encoded path to repository object>
Other parameters include:
l
Optional: showViewPane=true/false
False to hide the view pane when launching enumerated content. Default value is true.
l
Optional: showIcons=true/false
False to hide the icons in the listing. Default value is true.
Enumerating EPM Workspace Applications in Dashboard
This allows a user to list and launch EPM Workspace Applications within a dashboard. In the
dashboard, create an embedded browser object and set the URL similar to following:
http://server:port/workspace/browse/dyn?page=/jsp/com/hyperion/tools/workspacepages/
appslisting.jsp
URLs Supported by EPM Workspace
The following are published URLs that EPM Workspace supports:
l
Normal URL:
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/
48
Using EPM Workspace
Note: Included in the URL is the trailing slash and no index.jsp. Using index.jsp is not
recommended since the Web browser's Back button is enabled, and selecting it can
cause issues. Using the trailing slash is encouraged. Without it, the Web server does
a redirect to the URL with the trailing slash. Prior to 9.3.1, the Install Start Here
Guides omitted the trailing slash.
Additional parameters:
m
Optional: sso_username=<username>
The name of the user attempting to log in.
m
Optional: sso_password=<password>
Password of the user attempting to log in.
m
Optional: fullscreen=true/false
True launches page in full screen. Default value is false.
l
URL to launch repository content:
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/?module=tools.relatedcontent&repository
_path=<encoded path to repository object>
Additional parameters:
m
Optional: bpm.logoff=true/false
False prevents system from logging off if using the same session. Default value is true.
l
URL to launch Financial Management (Consolidation) Application:
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/?
module=hfm.appcontainer&sourceApp=<hfm_application_name>&cluster=<clustername>
&workspace=true&iscontained=yes&reopen=true
Additional parameters:
m
Optional: showViewPane=true/false
False to hide left pane when module is loaded. Default value is true.
m
Optional: bpm.logoff=true/false
False prevents system from logging off if using the same session. Default value is true.
l
URL to launch Planning Application:
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/?
module=HyperionPlanning.planning&sourceApp=<appname>
Additional parameters:
m
Optional: showViewPane=true/false
False to hide left pane when module is loaded. Default value is true.
m
Optional: bpm.logoff=true/false
False prevents system from logging off if using the same session. Default value is true.
Personalizing EPM Workspace
49
URL to launch EPM Workspace log on page as full screen:
l
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/?fullscreen=true
There are two ways to allow a user to specify credentials after a custom log in fails:
l
1. WebClient.UserInterface.Login.AllowLoginONCustomFail=true (false by default). See the
Configuring and Monitoring Console (CMC) chapter of the Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide for more information.
2. URL to launch EPM Workspace if custom log in fails:
http://<server>:<port>/workspace/?allowLogin=true
URL parameter: allowLogin=true
If you try to login to EPM Workspace when a custom login policy is specified and credentials
from the custom login policy are not valid, then either option above allows a user to specify
correct credentials.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide quick, context-sensitive access to commonly used features. Button availability
is determined by the content-area module.
Note: For Firefox 2.0, use Shift+Alt+key as a key combination to invoke access key for the
button. For Macintosh operating systems, use Ctrl + key, and for UNIX, use Ctrl +
Shift + key.
Note: Your role determines which toolbars, menus, shortcut menus, and modules are displayed
on the user interface. For example, if your role enables you to create documents, the
toolbar menu item File, then New is displayed.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar is used for common EPM Workspace features. These are displayed prior
to opening any item from the Navigate menu.
Table 6
Button
50
Standard Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
File, then New, then Document
Create documents, such as Financial Reportingbooks and batches, Web Analysis
documents, Interactive Reporting document, and Workspace Pages
File, then Open, then Document
Open repository documents
Using EPM Workspace
Button
Menu Command
Description
NA
Displays the default startup option for content area
NA
Open Explore, to display the repository as a file management system
File, then Logoff
End the current session
Help, then Help on This Topic
Displays help for the page displayed in the content area
Web Analysis Toolbar
The Web Analysis toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
Table 7
Button
Web Analysis Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
View, then Data Layout
Display the Data Layout dialog box, used to redefine queries and dimension member selections
File, then Save
Save documents to the repository
File, then Save As
Save documents to the repository under new names or to new locations
NA
Display the browser Print dialog box, used to define print parameters and options
Financial Reporting Toolbar
The Financial Reporting toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
Table 8
Button
Financial Reporting Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
File, then Open in, then PDF Preview
Open documents in the browser in PDF
File, then Open in, then HTML Preview
Open documents in the browser as HTML
Book Editor Toolbar
The Book Editor toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
Toolbars
51
Table 9
Button
Book Editor Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
Edit, then Add Document
Add reports and snapshots to books
Edit, then Delete
Remove reports and snapshots from books
Edit, then Member Selection
Open the member selection dialog box
Edit, then Move Up
Move reports or snapshots up in the list
Edit, then Move Down
Move reports or snapshots down in the list
Batch Editor Toolbar
The Batch Editor toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
Table 10
Button
Batch Editor Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
Edit, then Add Items
Adds reports, books, or snapshots to batches
Edit, then Delete
Removes reports, books, and snapshots from batches
Production Reporting Toolbar
When viewing Production Reporting documents in EPM Workspace, no buttons are displayed
in the toolbar area except for navigation buttons. Navigate among HTML-report pages and
viewing reports in multiple output formats. The navigation buttons are dynamic, based on job
output. For button descriptions, see Chapter 11, “Using Production Reporting Documents.”
Interactive Reporting Toolbar
The Interactive Reporting toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it. For button
descriptions, see Chapter 10, “Interactive Reporting” for details.
Batch Scheduler Toolbar
The Batch Scheduler toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
52
Using EPM Workspace
Table 11
Button
Batch Scheduler Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
File, then New Scheduled Batch
Opens the Schedule Batch dialog box
Edit, then Properties
Displays the details for scheduled batches; for example, the time for which a batch is
scheduled
Edit, then Delete
Deletes scheduled batches
View, then Refresh
Updates the EPM Workspace with changes to scheduled batches
Action, then Retrieve Output
Retrieves results for the latest batch job
Action, then Show Details
Displays batch details; for example name, start time, and destination
Explore Toolbar
The Explore toolbar displays standard buttons and buttons specific to it.
Table 12
Button
Explore Toolbar Buttons
Menu Command
Description
File, then New Folder
Creates folders
NA
Navigates up to the repository location that contains the current folder
Edit, then Cut
Marks repository files to be moved
Edit, then Copy
Marks repository files to be duplicated
File, then Properties
Open the Properties dialog box, used to set file properties; for example, file permissions
Edit, then Paste
Pastes files to the current repository location
View, then Refresh
Updates EPM Workspace with changes to scheduled batches
Toolbars
53
Administer and Impact Manager Toolbars
The Administer and Impact Manager toolbarsenable you to manage EPM Workspace properties,
performance, and user interaction. For button descriptions, see the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Schedule Toolbar
Schedule module toolbars enable you to perform the following tasks:
Run and schedule job types:
l
m
m
m
Interactive Reporting job – An Interactive Reporting document imported in EPM
Workspace as a job and its associated files.
Production Reporting job – A Production Reporting report or program and its
associated files. A Production Reporting job can be secure or nonsecure.
Generic job – A report or program from another software provider (for example, an
Oracle report or a Crystal report), and any associated files.
Run and schedule batches, which are collections of reports.
l
Menus
From EPM Workspace, the standard menus are Navigate, File, View, Favorites, Tools, and
Help. These are explained in the following tables.
l
Menus and buttons are updated as you use the system, based on the following criteria:
l
m
m
The roles granted to you. Role determines which items are displayed from Navigate.
The Navigate item being used and the task being performed. For example, if you use
Explore, the menus contain file or folder tasks.
Navigate Menu
The Navigate menu is available for all EPM Workspace modules. Options displayed for each
item depend on your role and rights.
Table 13
Navigate Menu
Command
54
Using EPM Workspace
Description
Command
Description
Applications,
Opens applications that are
available based on rights and
roles
then Consolidations (Financial Management Applications),
then Planning (Planning Applications),
then Performance Scorecard
Profitability and Cost Management
Oracle Business Intelligence Answers
Oracle Business Intelligence Interactive Dashboards
Oracle Business Intelligence Delivers
BI Publisher
Note: If instanced products are installed but the current user is not provisioned for any application
instances, the Navigate, then Applications menu displays a No Applications disabled menu item
followed by a Refresh menu item. The No Application labels and Refresh menu items are not displayed
if the user is provisioned for any application instances. The same applies to the File, then Open, and
then Applications menu.
Administer
General
Shared Services Console
Explore Annotations
Physical Resources
Mime Types
Notifications
Smartcuts
Use Administer module to manage
settings that control how end
users interact with EPM
Workspace. For details on using
these menu items, see Oracle
Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace
Administrator’s Guide , Oracle
Hyperion Financial Management
Administrator’s Guide, and Oracle
Hyperion Planning Administrator’s
Guide.
Row Level Security
Usage Tracking
Event Tracking
Change Ownership
Dimension Library
Application Library
Data Synchronization
Application Upgrade
Job Console
Classic Application Administration, then Consolidation Administration or Planning Administration1
Consolidation System Messages
Consolidation Users on System
Manage Consolidation Servers and Application
Menus
55
Command
Description
Schedule,
Schedule enables you to manage
jobs and schedule batches and
events for automated processing
then
Batch Scheduler
Job Queue
Job Notifications
Show Parameters
Jobs Running
Manage Events
Consolidated Job Status
Impact Manager,
then
Synchronize Metadata
Update Data Models
Impact Manager enables you to
update Interactive Reporting
documents when database
structures, database connections,
or links to external data sources
change.
Javascript Update
Custom Update
Manage Task List
Show Task Status
Show Impact of Change
Open Items (List of open modules)
Displays items open in EPM
Workspace
1Classic Application Administration is enumerated with both Consolidation Administration and Planning Administration if a user has Dimension
Editor and application creator roles for Financial Management and Planning.
File Menu
The File menu is available for all EPM Workspace modules. Option availability depends on the
content of the current window, module from which the menu is accessed, and user role. For
example, user with Explorer role does not have File, then New option available.
56
Using EPM Workspace
Table 14
File Menu
Command
Description
File, then
Create documents, such as books, batches, or analysis documents,
use repository documents, open applications, Personal Pages,
Workspace Pages.
New, then
Document, Personal Page, Workspace Page
Open, then
Document
Workspace Pages, then My Workspace Pages or Shared Workspace
Pages
Application, then
Open option is used to open documents, such as books, batches, or
analysis documents, use repository documents, open applications,
Personal Pages, Workspace Pages.
Close option is used to close only the current document you have
open and is in focus or all documents that are open can be closed.
The Others option is used to close all documents except for the one
in focus or active.
Consolidations (Financial Management Applications),
Planning (Planning Applications),
Performance Scorecard
Profitability and Cost Management
Oracle Business Intelligence Answers
Oracle Business Intelligence Interactive Dashboards
Oracle Business Intelligence Delivers
Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher
Close, then
Current
All
Others
URL
Note: If instanced products are installed but the current user is
not provisioned for any application instances, the File, then Open,
and then Applications menu displays a No Applications disabled
menu item followed by a Refresh menu item. The No Application
labels and Refresh menu items are not displayed if the user is
provisioned for any application instances.
Preferences
Opens the Preferences dialog box, used to change your password
(using native authentication) and e-mail address and set the default
for opening snapshots (PDF Preview or HTML Preview)
For Financial Reporting, you can also change your language selection
and enable XBRL editing
Logoff
End the session
Exit
Exit EPM Workspace
View Menu
The availability of View menu options depends on the content of the current window and the
module from which the menu is accessed.
Menus
57
Table 15
View Menu
Command
Description
View pane
Show or hide the View pane
Favorites Menu
Use the Favorites menu to set up personal pages and favorites and to select from a list of favorite
documents.
Table 16
Favorites Menu
Command
Description
Manage Favorites
Opens the Favorites Manager dialog box
Show Subscribed Items
Display documents to which you are subscribed and manage personal pages
Manage Personal Pages
Displays list of available application products, for
example Performance Scorecard.
Displays in alphabetical order a list of favorite documents or folders defined by you
or pushed to you
My Personal Page
Opens your personal page
Tools Menu
The Tools menu is always available. Command availability is determined by product and roles.
Table 17
Tools Menu
Command
Description
Advanced Search
Introduces additional search filters
Links, then
Connect to Web Analysis Studio documents or launch applications or custom links from the Tools
menu
Web Analysis Studio
Install, then
Install the Interactive Reporting Web Client.
Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive
Reporting Web Client
Smart View, see “Using Smart View” on page 45 for more information.
Smart View
Oracle BI for Microsoft Office
Oracle BI for Microsoft Office. For Oracle BI Microsoft Office, see Oracle BI Help from product.
Offline Planning allows the user to execute the offline Planning installer by downloading the offline
executable. For more information, see Oracle Hyperion Planning User’s Guide.
Offline Planning
Help Menu
You use the Help menu to access EPM Workspace Help and information about EPM Workspace.
58
Using EPM Workspace
Table 18
Help Menu
Command
Description
Help on this Topic
Displays help for the current topic
Contents
Opens the online help Contents tab, from which you can search for specific topics
Oracle Support
Opens the Oracle Technical Support home page
Oracle Technology Network
Opens the Oracle Technology Network home page
Oracle Web site
Opens the Oracle home page
About Hyperion Workspace
Opens the About Hyperion Workspace window, which contains information about Hyperion Workspace,
including Workspace, UI, and Server versions and version details
Shortcut Menu Commands
To perform tasks, you can use shortcut menu commands, which are displayed when you rightclick in Explore for a document. Option availability depends on the content of the current
window and the module from which the menu is accessed.
Table 19
Shortcut Menu: Explore
Explore - Right Click Menu
Menu Command
Description
Go Up A Level
Display the contents of the parent folder
New Folder
Add folders to the repository
Open
Select, open, and use repository documents
Open In, then HTML Preview
View documents in browsers as HTML or PDF
PDF Preview
Import,
then File,
Open the Import to Repository dialog box, used to import reports, books, snapshot reports and books,
Microsoft reports, report objects (grid, text, image, and chart) and row and column templates into the
repository
then URL,
then File as Job,
then Financial Reports,
Microsoft Reports
Expand
From the View pane, display sub-folders under selected folder
Collapse
From the View pane, collapse selected folder
Shortcut Menu Commands
59
Explore - Right Click Menu
Menu Command
Description
Export
Open the Export dialog box, used to export saved reports, snapshot reports and books, and report objects
(grids, text, image, and chart) from the repository
E-mail Link
Display the E-mail Editor dialog box, used to indicate recipient names and e-mail message subjects. Email Links Editor creates hyperlinks to files so recipients can view the files in Web browsers. Only Financial
Reporting users can view hyperlinked files.
Cut
Remove repository items and place copies on the clipboard
Copy
Copy a repository item
Paste
Place cut and copied items in reports
Delete
Remove files from the repository upon confirmation
Delete with Outputs
For Interactive Reporting documents, delete items with job outputs, if there are outputs
Rename
Changes name of file or folders
Properties
Display scheduled batch detail; for example, the time for which a batch is scheduled
Run Job
For Interactive Reporting jobs, set job parameters and run jobs
Subscribe
Inform subscribing users of document changes
Create Shortcut
Create document shortcuts, for example, create shortcuts to Interactive Reporting, PDF, and HTML
documents
Retrieve
Download and save an Interactive Reporting document
Schedule Job
Schedule Interactive Reporting Job
Add to Favorites
Add files to the favorites list
Refresh
Refresh the repository to include new folders and files
Edit Permissions
Change or update access rights for an artifact
Apply Permissions to Children
Select the access rights to apply for all children objects of a folder.
Note: The only objects updated are the ones you have Full Control permission.
60
Using EPM Workspace
2
Setting Preferences and
Personalizing EPM Workspace
In This Chapter
Setting Preferences ........................................................................................61
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting Documents..........................................83
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV for Financial Reporting........................85
Personalizing Your EPM Workspace ......................................................................85
Standard Files ..............................................................................................89
Setting Preferences
Set defaults for initial view of EPM Workspace following login, Explore, authentication,
applications, file types, Reporting and Analysis products, Oracle BI EE, and Oracle BI Publisher
products. Preferences are also set for Accessibility Mode in EPM Workspace, see Appendix A,
“Accessibility.” For Planning end-user preference settings see the Oracle Hyperion Planning
User’s Guide and for administrator and application preferences, see the Oracle Hyperion Planning
Administrator’s Guide. For Financial Management end user preference settings see the Oracle
Hyperion Financial Management User’s Guide. For Performance Scorecard, see the Oracle
Hyperion Performance Scorecard User Guide and the Oracle Hyperion Performance Scorecard
Application Designer's Guide. For Profitability and Cost Management, see the Oracle Hyperion
Profitability and Cost Management User's Guide and the Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost
Management Administrator's Guide. Use these preference tabs:
l
“Setting General Preferences” on page 61
l
“Setting Explore Preferences” on page 65
l
“About Module Preferences” on page 67
Note: User interface settings from the View menu override default settings defined in General
Preferences and remain until logging off. See “Personalizing Your EPM Workspace” on
page 85.
Setting General Preferences
All users have access to general preferences. For example, a Planning or Financial Management
user can set an application as their default startup item at logon. General preferences set defaults
for default start page for the Content area, displaying document paths, prompting to save files,
setting accessibility mode, and a default e-mail address. Change passwords after logging on to
Setting Preferences
61
EPM Workspace. This option is available to users with native authentication parameters
specified, not external authentication.
Changes made using Preferences go into effect next time you log on.
ä General preferences:
1
File then Preferences.
Note: The e-mail address displayed is your e-mail address registered in your user security
settings. You cannot update it.
2
Hide document file paths in the progress bar by clearing Show Path For Documents.
3
EPM Workspace prompts you to save unsaved files by checking Prompt to Save Unsaved Files.
4
In Default Startup Options, select an option to display by default whenever you log in to EPM Workspace.
The default option is Explorer, if users have the Explorer role and None if not.
5
Depending on your selection in step 4, complete the following:
l
l
l
Explore option, click Select. From Select, select a folder and click OK. The path and
folder displays in Folder.
Document option, select Select. From Select, select a document and click OK. The path
and document name displays in the Document text box. You can also select a Workspace
Page as your home page. A sample Workspace page is included with EPM Workspace
in the Shared Workspace Pages folder. See also, “Using Home Page” on page 63.
Favorite option, select one of the following:
m
m
l
Select a favorites page you have saved from the Favorites menu to display in the
content area.
Click My Personal Page.
For Application option, select the drop-down arrow next to the Application field. Select
the following:
m
Consolidation for Financial Management applications
m
Planning for Planning applications
m
Profitability and Cost Management
m
Oracle BI EE applications
Note: If instanced products are installed but the current user is not provisioned for any
application instances, the Navigate, then Applications menu displays a No
Applications disabled menu item followed by a Refresh menu item. None of these
three items appear if the user is provisioned for any application instances. The
same applies to the File, then Open, and then Applications menu.
l
Scorecards
Note: In the Scorecard/Map text box, enter the Scorecard name or leave it blank.
62
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
6
Perform one of the following tasks:
l
Save changes, click OK.
l
Cancel changes, click Cancel.
Note: For details on Accessibility Mode, see Appendix A, “Accessibility.”
Using Home Page
Home page provides a starting point for users and launching point for EPM Workspace
functionality. Home page can be used as follows:
l
l
Home Page is the default startup document for users with a BI+ role. The Home page file
installed with EPM Workspace is your default home page. This file is located in the Shared
Workspace Pages folder.
When you select the Home button, it opens the Home page that was selected from the
Preferences dialog, Default Startup Options. For example, if you created a Workspace Page
you can point to this file as your home page.
This home page file displays recently opened documents, Workspace Pages, and Quick Links to
Favorites and Applications that a user has access to. For more information on Workspace pages,
see “Workspace Pages” on page 164.
Home Page Features
The default home page consists of recently opened items, Workspace pages, and Quick links.
Recently Opened
Recently Opened has the following functionality:
l
Stores recently opened items for each user provisioned in EPM Workspace
l
Items listed have an icon followed by item name
l
Clicking on an item opens it in the module content area
l
Items supported include EPM Workspace repository items and applications
l
l
If documents currently displayed are deleted from repository or user is deprovisioned from
application, items is removed.
Selecting the Open link displays the Open dialog from which you can open a document
Workspace Pages
Workspace Pages has the following functionality:
l
Maximum size of files listed for each My Workspace Pages and Shared Workspace Pages is
four. If only one of the listings is displayed, for example only My Workspace Pages are listed
then the maximum number displayed is nine. If the user has access to more My Workspace
Setting Preferences
63
pages and Shared Workspace pages a More link is displayed which when selected displays a
context menu to display all the remaining items.
l
l
Maximum number of documents displayed is 10. If there are more then ten, links are
displayed which display a context menu listing the remaining items
Clicking on an item opens the item in the module content area
Quick Links
Quick links has the following functionality:
l
l
l
Favorite items are displayed followed by application items
Maximum size of each listing is four. If there are more items, then links are displayed for a
context menu listing the remaining items. If there are no applications to list, then the
maximum number of Favorites that can be displayed is 23.
Clicking on an item in a section opens the item in module content area
Setting Start Page back to Home Page
If you change the Default Startup Options preferences to an application or document other than
Home page you can set it back to the default Home page shipped with EPM Workspace.
ä To set the EPM Workspace start page back to Home page installed in the Shared Workspace
Pages folder:
1
Select File then Preferences.
2
Select Document from the Content drop-down menu.
3
Click Select. From the Select dialog, select the Shared Workspace Pages folder and select the Home
Page Workspace page.
4
Select Show Hidden Items and select the file named HomePage.
5
Select OK for both the Select and Preferences dialog. The next time you login, the Shared Workspace
Home page is displayed.
Setting Authentication Preferences
Set Authentication preferences to change your EPM Workspace login password.
ä Set Authentication preferences:
1
Select File then Preferences, click Authentication.
2
In Change Password, enter your current password and a new password.
3
Re-enter your new password to confirm.
4
Click OK.
64
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
ä For Interactive Reporting and Production Reporting authentication:
1
Select File, then Preferences, click Authentication.
2
Repeat step 2 through step 4 above in the In Credentials Used for Pass-Through area.
Setting Explore Preferences
Set Explore preferences to define default folders and default permissions for items that you create
or import. You can specify default permissions for specific users, groups, or roles. If you do not
set these preferences, the Default folder and New Document folder are set to the top-most, or
root folder and permissions for items are set to Empty.
You can modify the following Explore Preferences:
l
l
l
Default Folder - Your default folder is shown when you use Explore. Set it to the folder you
access most frequently.
New Document Folder -The New document folder is the default folder where the new
document wizard searches for Web Analysis database connection files and Interactive
Reporting documents. If you are creating new Interactive Reporting documents and browse
for data sources this folder is used.
Default Permissions - Default permissions are applied when you create a folder or import
artifacts. Default permissions determine:
m
The ability of a user, group, or role to access the item.
m
Whether to automatically push the item to the user, group, or role favorites.
Note: These default permissions are automatically applied to all artifacts you create or
import. You can override these defaults by manually changing the permissions
when you create or import the artifact.
ä Set default folders:
1
Select File, then Preferences, then select Explore.
2
Set the Default folder and New Document folder.
3
Click Select, and do one of the following steps:
l
From Look in, select a folder.
l
From the list of names:
m
Select a folder
m
To navigate, double-click a folder
The folder you select is displayed in the Name text box.
Tip: Do not type a name in the Name text box.
4
From Default Permissions, select one of the following:
l
Interactive Reporting documents
Setting Preferences
65
l
Interactive Reporting jobs
l
Production Reporting jobs
l
Generic jobs
l
All other documents
l
Folders
5
Click OK or Cancel.
6
To continue setting default permissions, repeat step 3.
ä Set default permissions:
Select Set Permissions to set default permissions for users, groups, and roles. The Permissions
dialog is displayed. See “Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts” on page 129.
Formatting Preferences
The following preferences can be set for all reports created from EPM Workspace:
l
“Default Formatting Preferences” on page 66
l
“User Preferences and Formatting Options” on page 67
Default Formatting Preferences
Default Formatting preferences specify default data formatting for all subsequently created
reports. Options are organized by their ability to amend, format, or replace data returned from
the data source.
Table 20
Formatting Options
Description
Leading and Trailing Formatting
Currency Symbol
Inserts the following currency formatting symbols into the Positive Prefix and Negative Prefix text boxes:
Dollar ($), Cents (¢), Pound (£), Euro(E), Deutschmark (DM), Franc (F), and Yen (¥).
Positive Prefix
Enters character to precede positive numeric values.
Positive Suffix
Enters character to follow positive numeric values.
Negative Prefix
Enters character to precede negative numeric values. Warning: The minus sign (-) is the default prefix.
Deleting the default prefix without replacing it causes negative values to display positively.
Negative Suffix
Enters character to follow negative numeric values.
Numeric Formatting
Grouped Thousands Check Box
Displays numeric digits as grouped by thousands.
Minimum Decimals
Indicates the minimum number of decimal places to display.
66
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Formatting Options
Description
Maximum Decimals
Indicates the maximum number of decimal places to display.
Scale
Enables abbreviated values by tens, hundreds, thousands, ten-thousands, hundred-thousands, millions,
and billions.
Use Negative Color Check Box
Indicates that negative numbers are signified by a selected color.
Select Negative Color
Enables you to select the color representing negative values.
Samples
Update Samples
Updates the samples panel based on the most recent formatting selections.
Replace Missing With
Replaces missing values with either a text string or zero.
l
Zero
l
Text
User Preferences and Formatting Options
There are identical formatting options and user preferences. User preferences are global settings
applied to new documents. User Preferences can be overridden by database connection
formatting and document-based formatting.
Order of Formatting Precedence:
1. Options saved with documents
2. Options saved with the database connection
3. Options specified in the User Preferences dialog box
Spreadsheet user preferences and chart user preferences are identical to spreadsheet options and
chart properties. They are only applied to subsequently created documents.
About Module Preferences
Web Analysis, Financial Reporting, Production Reporting, Interactive Reporting, Performance
Scorecard, Financial Management, Planning, Oracle BI EE, and Oracle BI Publisher preferences
are accessed from the Preferences dialog box:
l
l
l
Setting Web Analysis Preferences are organized on three tabs. These options specify the
active preference file, set default leading and trailing data value formatting, numeric
formatting, and database connection parameters for Web Analysis documents.
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting include options for how you want to preview
documents, POV settings, export options, and formatting options, preferences for designing
reports, the language to use, units of measure and guidelines document layouts.
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting include scanning folders for Production
Reporting Jobs.
Setting Preferences
67
l
l
l
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting include options for setting locale defaults based
upon the country of origin, date and time formatting, and number formatting.
Setting Preferences for Oracle BI Publisher includes options for UI language, report locale,
SVG supports in HTML, report time zone, and setting password.
Setting Preferences for Oracle Business Intelligence Products includes viewing general
account information, preferences for default dashboard, locale, and language, time zone,
delivery options, and so on.
ä To display the Preferences dialog box, select : File, then Preferences.
Setting Web Analysis Preferences
Preferences are stored in the repository as preference files. A preferences file is located in every
users Profiles folder. Share preference files with other users. Although multiple preference files
can be defined, only one preference file can be active at a time.
Note: Only subsets of Web Analysis preferences are set through EPM Workspace. The Web
Analysis Studio offers a comprehensive interface for specifying Web Analysis preferences.
EPM Workspace and the Web Analysis Studio modify the same files.
Setting the Active Preferences File
The Preferences dialog box Active Preferences tab specifies the current preferences file.
Selecting Use My Preferences indicates you are using and editing the preferences file located in
your Profiles folder. Selecting Use Shared Preferences indicates you are using a shared
preferences file at the specified repository location.
Note: The default location for Shared Preferences files is in the User\<Profiles> folder.
Changing the Active Preference does not impact opened documents in the content area. User
and shared preferences are only applied to subsequently created documents.
Upon editing shared preferences files, change the default behavior for users referencing that file.
To prevent users from changing your preferences, restrict yourself to using your own preferences
file.
Default Document Open Mode
l
l
l
68
Selecting HTML or Web Analysis Studio, as your default document open mode, opens Web
Analysis documents in the default mode selected
Selecting HTML opens the document in EPM Workspace.
Selecting Web Analysis Studio launches a Web Analysis Studio session, automatically
logging in and opening the selected document.
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Note: This option will open one Web Analysis document per session in the Web Analysis
Studio.
Web Analysis Database Preferences
Web Analysis Databases user preferences provide an inventory of available database servers and
database connections by listing the database connection name, description, alias table, and
repository location.
To review database connection names, click Edit. The Database Preferences dialog box is
displayed. It has three tabs:
l
Details
l
Point of View
l
Personal Variable
Click Connect to connect to data sources and retrieve values. If you are unable to connect, you
may browse to another database connection file.
About Alias Tables
Alias tables are database tables that store aliases, or alternate description labels, for dimensions
or members. Essbase enables you to define multiple alias tables. Web Analysis user preferences
enable you to specify which alias table to use. The alias table selection is saved as a Web Analysis
Database user preference.
Label mode enables you to select whether dimension members are listed by ID number or
description. Label mode options are data source-specific, and are set for database connections,
specific documents, and specific dimensions.
Label mode indicates whether the description or ID number is used and the database alias table
provides the displayed value. Set the alias table before opening documents using Web Analysis
Database user preferences.
Specify which description label to use in specific dimensions, using Dimension Browser and set
a default label mode after querying the data source using Data Display options on the data object
right-click menu.
Setting Alias Tables
ä Specify default alias tables for database connections:
1
Select File, then Preferences.
2
Click Web Analysis.
3
Click Active Preferences, and select either Use My Preferences, or Use Shared Preferences. If you
select Use Shared Preferences, click Browse and select a shared preferences file from the repository.
4
Click to make the Databases tab the current tab.
Setting Preferences
69
The Databases tab lists all available database connections for the active user.
5
Optional: To edit database preferences for a database connection, select the database connection from
the list then click Edit.
6
Optional: To add a database connection to the list, click Add.
The Database Preferences dialog has three tabs: Details, Point of Views, and Personal
Variables. Point of Views and Personal Variable tabs are disabled until a database connection
is identified.
7
Optional: To identify database connection files, perform one:
l
l
Click Browse and navigate to a database connection file in the repository. Select the file,
click Open then OK.
Enter the repository location and filename for existing database connection files in the
text area.
If you do not have access to database connection files, consult your Web Analysis
administrator.
8
Click Connect to retrieve the latest values from the database connection.
To log on to the data source, enter log on credentials, click OK.
When you have connected to the data source, the Database File Location text area is disabled,
and the Connect button is converted to a Disconnect button. Data sources supporting Point
of View, Personal Variables and Alias Tables have these controls.
9
Select an alias table from the Alias Table drop down list.
10 Click OK.
Whenever the specified database connection is used, the selected label mode is also used.
Subsequent label mode selections made in the Cube Navigator or the Dimension Browser
overwrite these default settings.
Setting the Database Logon Method
Web Analysis enables you to select among several data source log on options, and to save that
selection as a Web Analysis Database user preference.
ä Set default log on methods for specific database connections:
1
Select, File then Preferences.
The User Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2
Click Web Analysis.
3
Click Active Preferences, select Use My Preferences or Use Shared Preferences. If you select Use
Shared Preferences, click Browse and select shared preferences file from the repository.
4
Click to make the Databases tab the current tab.
The Databases tab lists all available database connections for the Active user.
70
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
5
Optional: To edit database preferences for a database connection, select the database connection from
the list then click Edit.
6
Optional: To add database connections, click Add.
The Database Preferences dialog box is displayed. It has three tabs: Details, Point of Views
and Personal Variables. The Point of View and Personal Variable tabs are disabled until
database connections are identified.
7
Optional: To identify database connection files, perform one:
l
l
Click Browse and navigate to database connection files in the repository. Select the file
and click the Open dialog box OK button.
Enter the repository location and filename for existing database connection files in the
text area.
If you do not have access to any database connection files, consult your Web Analysis
administrator.
8
Click Connect to retrieve the latest values from the database connection.
Enter valid log on credentials, click OK.
When you have connected to the data source, the Database File Location text area is disabled,
and the Connect button is converted to a Disconnect button. Data sources supporting Point
of View, Personal Variables and Alias Tables, have these controls.
9
Select one option from the Default Logon group:
Table 21
Default Logon Options
Description
Use User's name and Password
Connects to the database connection using the Web Analysis user name and password.
Prompt for User Name and
Password
Connects to the database connection by prompting the user for a Web Analysis user name and
password.
Enter User Name and Password
Connects to the database connection using a user name and password for the database
connection, if it varies from the Analyzer Login parameters. You must enter the valid values in the
corresponding text areas.
10 Click OK.
About Point of View Definitions
Point-of-view database preferences enable you to automatically insert dimensions and members
that are of interest to them into the documents of others. Point of View definitions must be
defined and activated specifically for a database connection.
When a point of view (POV) is activated, the Use Point of View check box in Cube Navigator
and the Document Creation wizard are enabled. All subsequently created and loaded documents
use the specified POV until it is deactivated. You can also deactivate use of POV by deselecting
the Cube Navigator Use Point of View option as needed.
Setting Preferences
71
Point of View definitions consist of both axes and dimension member selections. The entire
definition is used when new documents are created with the activated POV.
When you apply a point of view definition to an existing document, only the dimension member
selections are applied. This prevents points of view from automatically arranging nonfunctioning layouts (such as moving all dimensions to a single axis).
If all POV member selections are custom filters, you may not see obvious changes to your
document. Check to see which POV is applied on the View pane Information Panel tab, Point
of View segment.
Using a point of view definition is a three part process. First, create a point of view definition.
Next, activate the point of view definition. Lastly, set an existing document to use the activated
point of view definition or create a new document that uses it.
Consider the following benefits:
Generic and Specific Documents
Document designers in large enterprises can create sets of generic documents, knowing that
individual users can superimpose diverse and user-specific member selections into documents.
Replacing Member Selection Statements
Apply the complex calculations and analysis tool definitions of others' documents to the
dimensions and members they track, using Point of View. This eliminates the need for the user
to investigate and recreate these analyses.
Default Dimension Layout and Member Selections for New Documents
When Point of View is activated, the document-creation process is simplified. Cube Navigator
is loaded with the dimension member selections designated by the current Point of View.
Session-based Point of View
Point of View is session-based. Point of View definitions are saved and recalled as part of
individual database connections. This enables them to be used on all the documents using the
corresponding database connection.
Reloading Documents
You must reload the document for the applied Point of View definition to be displayed.
Point of View and Personal Variables
Point of View definitions replace all existing member selections for corresponding dimensions
and database connections. Personal variables augment existing member selections for single
dimensions. Leverage personal variables in the creation of Point of View definitions.
72
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
About Personal Variables
Define and name complex member selections. Leverage personal variables when they are
presented with the corresponding dimension and database connection.
Generic and Specific Documents
Other users create personal variables using the same name, dimension, and database connection
that contain the dimensions members that are of interest to them. This technique creates hybrid
documents with generic and user-specific content.
Point of View and Personal Variables
Point of View definitions replace existing member selections for corresponding dimensions and
database connections. Personal variables augment member selections for single dimensions.
Leverage personal variables in the creation of Point of View definitions.
Setting Preferences for Financial Reporting
The Financial Reporting Preferences dialog box contains two tabs; the General tab for setting
EPM Workspace preferences and the Financial Reporting Studio tab for setting client
preferences.
ä Set Financial Reporting preferences:
1
Select File, then Preferences, then Financial Reporting
2
From Financial Reporting General tab, select HTML Preview or PDF Preview to indicate default
preference when previewing documents.
3
From User Point of View:
l
l
l
Select On to enable the User Point of View to display prior to running a report or Off
to disable. Off is the default.
Select where on the EPM Workspace you want to display the Point of View. In View
Pane is the default. You can also select to display above the report or book.
Select Setup Members to select members you want available when using the User POV.
The Setup User POV dialog is displayed. See the “Setting Up the User POV for Financial
Reporting Documents” on page 83 for more information.
4
Select a character for the Thousands Separator. The options are comma (,), period (.), underscore (_),
and Space.
5
Select a character to represent decimal points (for example, 1,000.06) for the Decimal Separator. The
options are comma (,), period (.), underscore (_), and Space.
6
From Export to Office Application, select either Office 2000 or Office 2002 or higher as the version of
Microsoft Office that you have installed.
Setting Preferences
73
Note: If Office 2000 is selected, Excel is the only Microsoft Office application to which you
can export; If Office 2002 or higher is selected, Excel, Word, and PowerPoint are the
applications to which you can export.
7
Select Merge Equivalent Prompts to respond only once or deselect to respond consecutively to prompts
and variables that are repeated multiple times.
Note: The setting for Merge Equivalent Prompts takes precedence in the EPM Workspace.
However, if the Merge Equivalent Prompt is not set in the EPM Workspace, the default
setting in the fr_global.properties file is used.
8
Select Show Annotation to add, edit, and display annotation in a report.
9
Select Annotation Print Details to specify how annotations should print. See “Setting Annotation
Printing Preferences” on page 74.
10 From the Financial Reporting Studio tab, use the drop-down menus to activate default Financial
Reporting Studio settings.
l
Language—The language to display on the designer labels
l
Units—The default units setting on the report designer; Inches or Centimeters
l
Guidelines—The background settings on the report designer; Color, Style (dot or line),
and Snap to Guide Line setting
You can also select whether you want to enable XBRL editing. See the Oracle's Hyperion
Financial Reporting – User’s Guide
11 Select OK.
Setting Annotation Printing Preferences
You can specify how annotations should print. There are 2 main preference settings:
l
l
Details — When selected, a system-defined footnote is created. The Use Footnote Details
area is enabled where the user can select print options such as the annotation elements to
print and the number of annotation replies to print. Generic formatting is applied and the
system-defined size and fonts are used.
Text Object — When selected, the footnote function in the report's text object is used to
print annotations. Footnote functions are created by the report designer. This option
provides more flexibility in terms of formatting and printing of annotations. For example,
the footnote function may specify to print only grid annotations with different size, font,
and color to be applied to the heading and content.
ä To set annotation printing preferences
1. In the Annotation Printing Preferences drop-down, select one:
l
Details - Use system-defined footnote details and printing of annotations. Generic
formatting is applied.
a. In Use Footnote Details, select the annotation elements to print.
74
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Note: If you select Include replies, indicate to include All replies, Top number of
replies or Bottom number of replies. Enter the number of replies to print in
the space provided.
l
Text Object — Use customized formatting and printing of annotations.
a. In Use Footnote text object, click Select and search for a text object in the repository.
2. Click OK.
Setting Preferences for Production Reporting
Use this for Production Reporting files.
ä Set preferences for Production Reporting:
1
File, then Preferences, then Production Reporting.
2
Do one of the following:
l
Select All Folders to scan folders listed in Explore.
l
Select the Selected Folders option to search folders listed in the Folder window.
3
Use the Add and Remove buttons to add and delete folders from the Folder window. Selecting the Add
button opens a Select dialog from which you can select the folders to add to your search. To remove a
folder from the Folder window, select the folder and click the Remove button.
4
Select OK.
Setting Preferences for Interactive Reporting
ä Set preferences for Interactive Reporting:
1
File, then Preferences, then Interactive Reporting.
2
Select the country from the locale drop-down menu that you are setting the defaults for. The locale
selected sets the locale or country associated with the default format that you want to use. The locale
that you select determines the available number, date, and currency formats.
3
Select a format for the date, timestamp, time, and month from each of the drop-down menus. Date sets
the default date format, timestamp sets the default time and date format, time sets the default time
format, and month sets the default month format for the month used in Add Date Groups.
4
Select a format for the real number, integer, and null option from each of the drop-down menus. Null
sets the default format for null values. Null values are empty values for which no data exists. Null values
are not equal to zero. Real sets the default format for real values and integer sets the default format
for integer values.
5
Select OK.
Setting Preferences
75
Default Open Interactive Reporting Format
The Default Open Format drop-down on the Interactive Reporting Preferences window enables
you to set the default program to open Interactive Reporting documents when you select open
from the menus. The default program can be set to HTML or Interactive Reporting Web Client.
If the Interactive Reporting document is opened as HTML, the document is displayed in HTML
format in the Content pane. In Interactive Reporting Web Client format, the document is opened
in a special application file placed in a Web browser's plug-in directory.
ä To select the default program:
1
Select File, then Preferences, then Interactive Reporting.
2
Select the default program to open the document from the Default Open Format drop-down and click
OK.
Setting Preferences for Oracle BI Publisher
Use the Preferences page to set the following:
l
UI Language
l
Report Locale
l
Report Time Zone
l
SVG support in HTML
l
Report Viewer Height
ä To set preferences for Oracle BI Publisher:
1
Select File, then Preferences.
2
Select Oracle BI Publisher. Complete the tasks in the following sections.
Setting UI Language
The UI language is the language that your user interface displays in.
Note: The Locale and Use Interface Languages lists are read-only, because you cannot modify
them. The locale and language are inherited from EPM Workspace. See the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, Fusion Edition Administrator's Guide for
information on setting the locale.
Setting Report Locale
A locale is a language and territory combination, for example, English (United States) or French
(Canada). Oracle BI Publisher uses the report locale selection to determine the following:
l
The template translation to apply
l
The number formatting and date formatting to apply to the report data.
76
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Note: A particular report must have an available template translation for the selected locale.
If not, Oracle BI Publisher applies a locale fallback logic to select the template. For
more information, see Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher User's Guide.
The appropriate number and date formatting are applied independently of the template
translation.
Setting Report Time Zone
Select the time zone to apply to your reports. Reports run by this user display the time according
to the time zone preference selected here. You can override this setting for a particular report.
See Schedule Report in the Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher User's Guide.
Note: The time displayed on the user interface and reflected in report processing times is
governed by the Oracle BI Publisher server time zone.
Enable SVG for HTML
You can choose to have graphics in your HTML reports displayed using scalable vector graphics
(SVG) technology. Your browser may require a plug-in to enable SVG. If so, you are prompted
to download this plug-in the first time you attempt to view an HTML graphic with SVG enabled.
If you do not wish to use the SVG plug-in, select No.
Report Viewer Height
You can set report viewer height by entering a value in the text box.
Setting Preferences for Oracle Business Intelligence
Products
You can perform the following actions from the Preferences page:
Note: The Locale and Use Interface Languages lists are read-only, because you cannot modify
them. The locale and language are inherited from EPM Workspace. See the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, Fusion Edition Administrator's Guide for
information on setting the locale.
l
View general account information, such as your display name and user ID.
l
View and modify your preferences such as a default dashboard.
l
View and modify your delivery options for Oracle BI Delivers iBots.
l
View the Presentation Services groups to which you currently belong.
Setting Preferences
77
Note: Depending on your privilege settings, not all of these options may be available.
ä To change your preferences:
1
Select File, then Preferences.
2
Select Oracle Business Intelligence.
3
In the Preferences section, perform one of the following actions:
l
l
In the Default Dashboard drop-down list, select the dashboard you want to display when
you log in to Oracle BI.
Select a time zone from the Time Zone drop-down box. For details on setting time zones,
see “Setting Your Oracle BI EE Time Zone” on page 78.
Setting Your Oracle BI EE Time Zone
You can use the time zone option to choose your Oracle BI EE account's preferred time zone.
This option allows system users who do not reside in the same physical location to override the
default time zone that was set by the system administrator. For example, suppose the Oracle BI
server that sends you alerts resides in the US Pacific time zone, but your work location is in the
US Central time zone. After you set the Central time zone as your preferred time zone setting,
the delivered time on your alerts appears in Central time. Your account's time zone automatically
apply to any items that you create, modify, run, receive, and print.
The date and time columns included in reports appear according to the report designers
specifications. The report designer can force a specific time zone to appear in the column, or
allow the users default time zone to appear in the column. A clock icon appears in the column
heading, and when you mouse over this icon, the name of the time zone used in the column is
displayed.
For more information on how the administrator sets the Oracle BI Presentation Server's time
zone, see the Oracle Business Intelligence Presentation Services Administration Guide.
Setting Your Oracle BI EE Delivery Options
This section of the Oracle BI EE preferences dialog allows you to add or modify the devices on
which you receive notifications from Oracle BI Delivers.
Note: If devices or profiles have been preconfigured for you, do not change them without first
consulting your Oracle BI administrator.
For more information on setting your delivery options, see “Configuring Your Oracle BI Delivers
Devices, and Delivery Profiles” on page 79.
78
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Configuring Your Oracle BI Delivers Devices, and Delivery Profiles
Oracle BI users can configure delivery devices and delivery profiles through the My Account
link. These links are available on the main page in Oracle BI Answers, Oracle BI Delivers, and
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards.
Devices and delivery profiles control how Oracle BI Delivers reach you when an alert is triggered
by an iBot. After you add one or more devices, you can create delivery profiles, and specify which
delivery profile should be your active profile for receiving alerts.
Note: If your Delivery Options area already contains devices and profiles, do not make any
changes to the Delivery Options area without first consulting your Oracle BI administrator
(any changes you make will override the delivery device and profile information that was
configured for you).
Users can also add devices, specify alternative default devices, and configure their delivery
profiles.
ä To configure a delivery option for Oracle BI Delivers:
1
Select File, then Preferences.
2
Select Oracle Business Intelligence.
3
To add a device, perform the following steps:
a. Select the tab for the device you want to add. For example, select the Email tab.
b. Select the Add Device link (for example, the Add Email Device link). The Device page
appears with the Device Name field populated, and options are available in the Device /
Provider list.
c. Select the appropriate option for the device category from the Device / Provider dropdown list.
d. Enter the address for the device in the Address field. For example, this would be an email
address for email, or a telephone number for a digital phone.
Note: When typing a phone number for a device, do not use punctuation such as spaces,
dashes, or parentheses.
e. Select Finished to return to the My Account page. The device appears in the Devices
area for the appropriate category (for example, Email devices).
f.
To change information for the device, select the Edit link to go back to the Device page.
g. If you decide you do not want the device, select the Delete link. This removes the device
from the Devices area.
h. To add another device, repeat the preceding steps.
4
To specify an alternative default device, perform the following:
a. Select the tab for the device category in which you want to set a default device (for
example, Email, Phone). All devices for the selected device category are displayed.
Setting Preferences
79
b. Click the Radio button next to the device that you want to select as the default. If you
select a default device here (for example, Email1), and select the Email check box in the
iBot Destinations page, the default device overrides other Email devices in your active
delivery profile. For more information, see Selecting Destinations for an Oracle BI
Delivers iBot.
5
To add a delivery profile, perform the following:
a. Select the Add Delivery Profile link. The Delivery Profile page is displayed.
b. Enter a delivery profile name in the Name field. For more information about your
choices at the Delivery Profile page and how delivery profiles work, see “Using Oracle
BI Delivers Delivery Profiles” on page 80.
c. Select Finished to return to the Delivery Profile page. The profile appears in the Delivery
Profiles list.
d. To change information for the delivery profile, select the Edit link to go back to the
Delivery Profile page.
e. If you decide you do not want the delivery profile, select the Delete link. This removes
the delivery profile from the Delivery Profiles area.
f.
6
To add another delivery profile, repeat the preceding steps.
To make a delivery profile the active profile, select the radio button next to the profile. The radio button
next to the profile is filled in to indicate that it is the active delivery profile.
Using Oracle BI Delivers Delivery Profiles
Oracle BI Delivers uses your active delivery profile to determine how to reach you when an alert
is triggered by an iBot, and which devices should receive delivered content. You configure your
delivery profile from the My Account page. For information about accessing the My Account
page to configure your delivery profile, see “Configuring Your Oracle BI Delivers Devices, and
Delivery Profiles” on page 79.
iBot contents can be delivered to a range of devices, including Web, wireless, and mobile devices.
By default, iBot contents are available for delivery to the dashboard and the appropriate devices
defined in your active delivery profile (based on the priority of the iBot contents). Content may
be specifically directed to a device, and if so, you will receive content on that device if it is defined,
even if it is not in your active delivery profile.
Content is delivered to the intersection of devices as determined by the active delivery profile
and the specific devices defined for the target content. Content is delivered only once to a device,
even if that device is in your active delivery profile and specifically selected as a delivery device
for the iBot content. If a specifically requested device or active delivery profile cannot be found,
iBot content is automatically pushed to the dashboard.
iBot content is assigned a specific priority. The default priority is normal. When you select devices
for your active profile, you can indicate what priority content should be sent to that device. For
example, if you have added a pager to your delivery profile, you might associate it with high
priority content only. When you know that you will be away from your office frequently, and
out of email range, you may select to receive only low priority content through your office email.
80
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
You can create any number of delivery profiles. However, only one profile can be active at any
given time.
ä To add or edit an Oracle BI Delivers delivery profile:
1
At the Delivery Profile page, enter the name of the profile in the Name field.
2
For each device you want to use in the profile, select the priority of the content to be delivered.
Note: Do not set the priority for devices that you do not want to use. Devices that do not
have a priority selected are not used by the profile.
You can select any or all priorities by clicking the appropriate check boxes.
3
Select Finished to save this profile and return to the My Accounts page. The delivery profile appears in
the Delivery Profiles list.
Selecting Destinations for an Oracle BI Delivers iBot
Use the Destinations tab to specify a range of desired devices and destinations for iBots. This
section contains the following topics:
l
About User Destinations for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
l
About Specific Devices for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
l
About System Services for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
ä To specify devices and destinations for the iBot:
l
Select a check box next to a device or destination to select it for the iBot.
About User Destinations for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
This section describes the user destinations available for the iBot on the Destinations page.
l
Interactive Dashboard
Active iBots appear in a Dashboard Alerts section as well as on the Alerts! page. A link to
this summary appears together with the application navigation links when new iBots are
delivered. After these are cleared on the Alerts page, the alert link is removed.
l
Active Delivery Profile
iBots will be sent to specified devices in the active delivery profile. The active delivery profile
is configured through the My Account page. For more information, see “Configuring Your
Oracle BI Delivers Devices, and Delivery Profiles” on page 79.
About Specific Devices for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
If you select a specific device on the Destinations page, the default device selected on the My
Account page will override the devices set in the active delivery profile for a user. Devices specified
on the Destinations page act as additions to the active delivery profile. An iBot, for example,
Setting Preferences
81
need not be dependent upon a users configuration. The iBot could just be configured to use
device information from default devices in the Devices area in the My Account page.
For more information about active delivery profiles and Devices, see “Configuring Your Oracle
BI Delivers Devices, and Delivery Profiles” on page 79.
These are the available devices:
l
Email
l
Pager
l
Digital Phone
l
Handheld Device
l
Other Device
About System Services for the Oracle BI Delivers iBot
This section describes the system services available for administrators on the Destinations page.
l
Oracle BI Server Cache
This is used for seeding cache.
Oracle BI administrators can create Server cache for individual users. The cache seeding
operation allows administrators to run requests on dashboard pages or requests stored in
the Presentation Catalog, and create a Server cache. This speeds up response time for users
when they actually run the requests on the dashboards. If data already exists in the cache for
a given request, the data is deleted and refreshed when the iBot runs.
The cache for the request or the dashboard page is created at the appropriate schedule for
the indicated set of users.
Note: To have the cache created for each user, choose the Personalized option for data
visibility at the General tab.
You would typically not select any other destination for this kind of request.
l
Disconnected Application Cache
This setting is for organizations that have licensed Disconnected Analytics or a disconnected
application such as Oracle's Siebel Pharma Mobile Analytics. It is related to the preprocessed
synchronization mode in Disconnected Analytics applications.
You can create server datasets for users of disconnected applications, so that when they
synchronize their applications, the data downloads are faster.
The preprocessed synchronization mode is the recommended data download mode for users.
It avoids the potential overhead that can occur from running data creation requests in online
mode during normal business hours and reduces wait time for the download. Preprocessed data
is stored under each users directory on the computer running Oracle BI Web. If you decide to
use this mode to schedule data cache creation, make sure that adequate disk space is available.
82
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
For more information about Oracle Disconnected Analytics, see Siebel Business Intelligence Server
Administration Guide.
Note: To have the disconnected application cache created for each user, choose the Personalized
(individual data visibility) option for Data Visibility at the General tab. (Nonpersonalized
data is not used for Disconnected Analytics users.)
You would typically not select any other destination for this kind of request.
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting
Documents
Dimensions often contain members that you may never access. Setting up the user POV enables
you to create a choices list for any dimension in a specified data source. If a choices list is set up
for a dimension, only the members in the choices list are displayed when the dimension is
accessed from the user POV. Any members not included in the choices list are hidden. See
“Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV for Financial Reporting” on page 85.
ä Set up user POVs for Financial Reporting in the EPM Workspace:
1
File, then Preferences.
2
Click Financial Reporting.
3
From the User Point of View area of the General tab, select the Setup Members button.
Tip: Select Refresh to update the list of database connections.
4
Select a data source from Database Connection.
5
If prompted, enter log on credentials, select OK.
Note: Use the Planning Details data source only if your grid will contain Supporting Detail
or Planning Unit Annotations. In all other cases, use Essbase as the data source.
6
Click Go to Member Selection: Dimension button, , to select the members you want to be available
when using the User Point of View. The Setup User POV page is displayed for member selection.
7
Expand the views to select available members, then click the Add to Selected button,
members are displayed in the Selected column and are in the Choices list.
. The selected
Note: The Choices list is displayed whenever you are using the specified data base
connection in a member selection.
Setting Up the User POV for Financial Reporting Documents
83
Managing Dimension Members
The procedures for managing members are found here:
l
Showing Dimension Properties
l
Arranging the Selected Members
Showing Dimension Properties
Determine the properties to display for dimension members by performing the following.
Note: The changes made apply only to the dimension selected. Each dimension has different
display properties. The properties list varies from one dimension to another.
ä Modify the properties displayed for dimensions:
1
On Select Members of the Setup User POV dialog box, click Show Properties,
properties list is displayed.
2
Perform one of the following:
l
Select an unchecked property to add the column to the table.
l
Select a checked property to remove the column from the table.
3
Repeat step 2 until only the desired columns are displayed.
4
Click OK to retain the changes.
5
The dimension properties table displays the choices you made.
. The dimension
Arranging the Selected Members
The members in the Setup User POV member selection Dialog box can be arranged in a
particular order.
ä To change the order in which members are displayed in the selected member list:
1
From the Select column of the Setup User POV member dialog box, select a member to move.
2
Perform one of the following:
l
Click
, to move members up.
l
Click
, to move members down.
3
Repeat the first two steps until the member order arrangement is complete.
4
Click OK to save all changes.
84
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV for
Financial Reporting
Select how members display in the user POV Financial Reporting documents in EPM
Workspace. Members are displayed by name of member, by alias/description, or both member
name and alias/description. Specify how to display the member label or whether dimension
labels are included.
ä Display aliases/descriptions in the user POV:
1
File, then Preferences, then Financial Reporting.
2
From User Point of View, click General, select Setup Members.
Tip: Select the Refresh button to update the list of database connections.
3
Select data sources from Database Connection.
4
If prompted enter your log on credentials, click OK.
Note: Use the Planning Details data source only if your grid will contain Supporting Detail
or Planning Unit Annotations. In all other cases, use Essbase as the data source.
5
Select the member label you prefer from Display Member Label. The label selection is based on the
data source you are using.
6
From the Dimension Labels are: drop-down list, select whether to include or not include dimension
labels.
7
Perform one of the following tasks:
l
Click OK to save your current changes and return to the repository screen.
l
Click Cancel to cancel your current changes.
l
Click Apply to save the changes and continue manipulating dimensions for other
database connections.
Personalizing Your EPM Workspace
When using EPM Workspace, perform customization tasks to change the user interface
appearance. Use the View menu or user preferences for customization.
Note: The user interface settings made with the View menu override the default settings defined
in the General Preferences tab and remain in effect until you log off.
The following table describes the tasks you can perform to customize EPM Workspace user
interface.
Displaying Aliases and Descriptions in the User POV for Financial Reporting
85
Table 22
Customization Task
Modules
Menu Bar Command
Show/hide the View pane
All modules
View, then View Pane
Resize the View pane and content area
All modules
See “Resizing the View Pane and Content Area” on page 86
Which file types are listed in the content area
Explore
View, then Display Items of Type. See “Showing Specific File
Types” on page 87
Whether to show hidden files in the content area
Explore
View, then Show Hidden
Which item properties are displayed in the content area
Explore
View, then Show Columns. See “Displaying Columns” on page
86
Sort items in the content area
Explore
See “Sorting Items” on page 87
Resizing the View Pane and Content Area
ä Resize the View pane and content area:
1
Drag the mouse and point to the column border between the View pane and the content area.
Tip: You must point to the View Pane/Content Area Adjuster which is displayed as a faint
double line in the border.
2
When the pointer changes to a horizontal double-headed arrow, drag the border to the right or left.
Displaying Columns
From Explore, items and properties display in the columns within the content area. The setting
you make for the columns are retained after you log-off.
ä Hide or display columns:
1
View, then Show Columns.
2
Display or hide columns by setting or clearing its check-box. For example, select the check box for Size
to display as a column in the content area.
3
To specify the column width, click a column check box, and enter the new column width in pixels.
Note: You cannot specify the column width for exceptions, priority, or versions.
4
Click Save to save or Cancel to discard your changes.
1. To reorder columns, do one of the following steps:
and
l
Click a column, use
l
View, then Show Columns.
86
arrows.
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
l
From the content area, drag and drop the columns.
ä Resize column widths:
1
Drag the mouse and point to a column border in the column header.
2
When the pointer changes into a horizontal double-headed arrow, drag the border to the right or left.
Sorting Items
From Explore, alphabetically sort by items in the columns within the content area. Sort using
any column heading. Date columns are sorted chronologically.
ä To sort a column, click the column heading, then do one of the following:
l
To sort items in ascending order, click the icon next to the column heading to point up.
l
To sort items in descending order, click the icon next to the column heading to point down.
Showing Specific File Types
From Explore, you can specify which file types to display in the content area.
Note: Your role and permissions also determine if an item is displayed.
ä Display specific file types:
1
Select View,
then Display Items of Type. You have the following options to choose from:
l
All Files—Displays all files in Explore
l
Select from a list of file type groups—See step 2.
l
l
2
Hyperion or Standard—Displays either Hyperion type files or standard files, see
“Standard Files” on page 89.
Other—select a particular file from the dialog box displayed.
Optional:For the list of file type groups, you can select only one file type group from the list.
Table 23
File Type Groups
Option
Description
All Jobs (and Output)
Displays all jobs and all job output.
All Jobs
Displays all jobs. This includes all items imported as a job.
All Job Output
Displays all job output produced from running a job.
External Links
Displays all items imported as a URL.
Personalizing Your EPM Workspace
87
Option
Description
All Office Files
Displays Microsoft Word, Excel, Power Point, and Project files. It also displays files with the file extensions .
mht, .mhtml, or .nws.
All Reports
Displays:
Production Reporting documents
l
Interactive Reporting documents
l
Web Analysis documents
l
Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports, books, snapshot books and batches
All Financial
Reporting Objects
Displays all Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports, books, snapshot books and batches.
All Connections
Displays all database connection files:
All Images
Hyperion
88
l
l
Interactive Reporting database connection
l
Web Analysis Analytic Services (Essbase) database connection
l
Web Analysis Financial Management database connection
l
Web Analysis Relational database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP Info Cube database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP Multiprovider database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP InfoSet database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP ODS database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP Query Cube database connection
Displays all image files with the following extensions:
l
.gif
l
.jpeg
l
.png
l
.bmp
l
.tiff
l
.xbm
l
.xwb
Displays the following:
l
Production Reporting documents
l
Interactive Reporting documents
l
Web Analysis documents, presentations, database-connection files.
l
Financial Reporting reports, snapshot reports, books, snapshot books and batches
l
All jobs
l
All Job output
l
All connections
l
HTML files
l
SPF security files
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Option
Description
Standard
Displays files with the following extensions:
Other
l
.xls
l
.doc
l
.mpp
l
.ppt
l
.pdf
l
.html
l
.txt
l
.xml
l
.zip
l
.rtf
Select one file type to display from the list of file types.
Standard Files
Standard files include text files, log files, HTML files, and Microsoft Office files. The
administrator sets up the types of files that the repository supports. See Chapter 3, “Exploring
and Managing Items .” Open the following standard file types from EPM Workspace:
l
.xls
l
.doc
l
.mpp
l
.ppt
l
.pdf
l
.html
l
.txt
l
.xml
l
.zip
l
.rtf
Standard Files
89
90
Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace
Exploring and Managing Items
3
In This Chapter
Using Explore ...............................................................................................91
Items ........................................................................................................91
Basics of Explore...........................................................................................95
Viewing Priorities, Exceptions, and Versions.............................................................96
Managing Files .............................................................................................97
Linking to Web Analysis Studio ......................................................................... 101
Creating E-mail Links to Items .......................................................................... 101
Using Ambiguous Items ................................................................................. 102
Registering a File Type................................................................................... 102
Exporting Items........................................................................................... 103
Exporting to Smart View for Office ...................................................................... 103
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting .......................................... 107
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections................................................ 108
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting ........................................... 110
Using Explore
Explore enables you to list and navigate repository contents; manage and control files and folders;
and use elements, like the Open dialog box, that present the repository as a file management
system. User’s roles and the installed Reporting and Analysis modules determine what parts of
the user interface are shown — as a result some documents are displayed in the content area
and others can also be opened in their own studios. For example, for Interactive Reporting, you
can have it set to always open documents in the Interactive Reporting Web Client.
Access privileges or permissions determine which items you can view, modify, run and delete
in the repository. See “Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts” on page 129.
Items
Items are objects stored in the repository, including files, folders, URL's and shortcuts. Items
are HTML files, Interactive Reporting database connections, jobs, batches, documents, reports,
and presentations.
Using Explore
91
All items have properties which store information about files such as attributes and access control
information. Properties include: type, a description of the file, and search keywords.
Items are categorized into the following:
l
“Documents” on page 92
l
“Collections” on page 93
l
“Supporting Files” on page 93
l
“Other Standard Files” on page 95
l
“Folders” on page 95
Documents
Documents are files created using Oracle's Hyperion applications. Documents include
Interactive Reporting documents, Financial Reporting reports, snapshots, Web Analysis
documents and Production Reporting documents. Documents are listed and viewed using
Explore. Items opened from Explore display as tabs at the bottom of the EPM Workspace. The
following table describes viewable documents. Documents can contain and generate the
following:
l
l
Dashboard—Collection of metrics and indicators provide interactive summaries of your
business.
Report—Formatted data values and interactive elements. Reports are displayed in tabular,
grid, or chart formats.
Table 24
92
Type
Description
Created in
File Extension
Production Reporting
document
Reports querying a relational data source
SQR Production Reporting Studio
.spf
Interactive Reporting
document
Formatted, dynamic, document that generates
reports or dashboard typically querying a relational
data source.
Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive
Reporting Studio, Oracle's
Hyperion® Dashboard Development
Services, and EPM Workspace
.bqy
Web Analysis
document
Web Analysisdocument typically querying an OLAP
data source.
Web Analysis Studio and EPM
Workspace
.ard
Financial Reporting
report
Highly formatted reports containing dynamic data
from OLAP data sources.
Reporting Studio
.des
Snapshot report
Highly formatted reports containing static data from
OLAP queries.
Reporting Studio
.rpt
Exploring and Managing Items
Collections
Collections contain references to groups of documents, such as books, presentations, or job
output files. Collections are listed and viewed using Explore. Items opened from Explore display
as tabs at the bottom of the EPM Workspace.
Table 25
Collections in the Repository
Type
Description
Created in
File Extension
Job Output
Collection of files resulting from running a job.
EPM Workspace
Files are a variety of
extensions, such as .pdf, .
html, or .txt.
l
Interactive Reporting job
output
l
Production Reporting job
output
l
Generic job output
Books
Collection of Reporting Studio documents.
Dynamically specify dimension sections and
dimension changes for Books.
EPM Workspace
.kbk
Snapshot Books
Generated books containing static data.
EPM Workspace
.kbt
Batches
Collection of executable Reporting Studio
documents and books with special properties and
are executed to generate reports.
EPM Workspace
.bch
Presentation
Collections ofWeb Analysis documents.
Web Analysis Studio
.apt
Supporting Files
The following tables lists EPM Workspace supporting files used when authoring or managing
documents or collections.
Items
93
Table 26
Type
Description
Job
Items with special properties that execute to
generate output. Jobs contain Interactive
Reporting documents, Production Reporting
documents or generic documents.
Studio created in
l
Interactive Reporting created with EPM
Workspace by importing
Interactive Reporting
documents.
File Extension
l
l
l
l
Production Reporting created with EPM
Workspace by importing
Production Reporting
program files (*.sqr).
l
Generic - created with
EPM Workspace by
importing Oracle reports
or batch files. Generic
reports use a command
line interface.
Interactive
Reporting jobs do
not have file
extensions.
Production
Reporting jobs
have .sqr file
extensions.
Generic jobs can
have a variety of file
extensions, such
as .sh, .bat.
Interactive Reporting database
connection
Portable files defining terms, conditions, and
methods for connecting to data sources.
Interactive Reporting Studio
.oce
SQR Production Reporting
Studio files used by a
Production Reporting
document or Production
Reporting job.
Files that Production Reporting program
references when executed:
SQR Production Reporting
Studio
File extensions include .
cvs, .img, or .inc.
l
Include files (#include commands)
l
Input data files (Open for-reading
commands)
l
Image files (print-image and declareimage commands)
Folder
Containers that contains other folders and
files.
not applicable
none
Shortcut
Pointer to a repository item. Creates shortcuts
when you want an item to display in folder A,
though it is stored in folder B.
not applicable
none
URL
Link to Web sites or HTML pages.
not applicable
none
Grid
Reporting Studio object containing data from
external sources. Grids contain rows,
columns, and optionally, a page axis.
Reporting Studio
.rog
Chart
Reporting Studio object containing charts.
Reporting Studio
.roc
Image
Reporting Studio image object.
Reporting Studio
.roi
Text
Reporting Studio text object.
Reporting Studio
.rot
Row and Column Template
Templates used to author Financial Reporting
reports.
Reporting Studio
.ros
94
Exploring and Managing Items
Type
l
l
l
l
l
Web Analysis Essbase
database connection
Web Analysis Financial
Management database
connection
Studio created in
File Extension
Portable files that defines the terms,
conditions and methods for connecting to
data sources for Web Analysisdocuments.
Web Analysis Studio
.adc
Web Analysis Relational
database connection
Web Analysis SAP Info
Cube database
connection
Web Analysis SAP
Multiprovider database
connection
l
Web Analysis SAP InfoSet
database connection
l
Web Analysis SAP ODS
database connection
l
Description
Web Analysis SAP Query
Cube database
connection
Other Standard Files
Other standard files include text files, log files, and Microsoft Office files. The administrator sets
the types of files that the repository supports. See “Registering a File Type” on page 102.
Folders
Folders exist with the repository and are arranged in a hierarchical structure. Folders are used
for organization, they can contain subfolders and items such as jobs, documents, and URLs. The
root folder contains all files and folders.
Basics of Explore
Use Explore to list, find or view content. Items opened in Explore display as tabs at the bottom
of the EPM Workspace. The View pane displays folders.
When items have high priority, multiple versions, or is manually flagged as an exception, an
icon is displayed. In order to see these icons the priority, version, or exception column must be
displayed.
ä Folder Contents:
l
Sub-folders in the left pane; click the plus button next to the folder name.
l
Folders in the left pane and items in the content area; double-click the folder.
Basics of Explore
95
l
Contents in the content area; click an item.
Note: When entering names for items in the repository such as files and folders, you can use
upper and lowercase letters and numbers. Spaces cannot be used at the beginning or end
of folder names. Invalid Name characters are as follows: \,/,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,". Invalid Path
characters are as follows: \,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,".
Note: Since importing Financial Reporting objects with invalid characters in their Names/Path
is still allowed, those objects once imported in EPM Workspace, should be renamed.
Scheduled Batches containing object names with invalid characters will fail when PDF
and HTML are selected as output options.
Viewing Priorities, Exceptions, and Versions
When an item is listed in Explore, an icon displays indicating priorities, exceptions, or multiple
versions. You can view and set the following conditions:
Priority - High or low priority.
l
Table 27
Priorities
File Type
m
Description
All items that have versions
Use version properties to set an item’s priority to Normal or High. Only available if your administrator
activated the priority feature.
Note: Priorities for scheduled jobs differ from an item’s priority. Set priorities on schedules
you associate with jobs. Priority is a property of schedule. If multiple job are scheduled
to run simultaneously, the high priority job is run first. The priority icon is not
displayed next to the job. See “Scheduling Jobs” on page 436.
l
Exceptions - Indicator of conditions or results such as a threshold being reached. Notify
subscribing users when an exception has been generated and monitor exceptions on the
Exceptions dashboard on your Personal Pages.
Table 28
l
96
Exceptions
File Type
Exceptions
Items with versions
Manually flag an exception on an item. See “Version Properties” on page 140.
m
Production Reporting jobs
m
Interactive Reporting jobs
m
Generic jobs
Programmatically enable jobs to generate exceptions. The exception icon is not displayed next to
the job. See “Using Exceptions” on page 157.
Versions - Indicates an item has multiple versions. See “Working with Versions” on
page 138.
Exploring and Managing Items
ä To display the priority, versions or exceptions column:
1
View, then Show Columns.
2
Click Priority, Version, or Exception.
Managing Files
This section describes the following tasks associated with managing files and folders in the
repository.
l
“Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 97
l
“Saving Files” on page 98
l
“Creating Folders” on page 99
l
“Creating Documents or Collections” on page 99
l
“Moving or Copying Files or Folders” on page 99
l
“Renaming Files or Folders” on page 100
l
“Deleting Files or Folders” on page 100
l
“Searching for Files or Folders” on page 100
Opening or Selecting Files or Folders
After opening files or folders, it's contents display in the content area. Items have multiple
versions. Imported files are collections containing a single version. You can later save or import
additional versions. Versions can be revisions of the same file or completely different files. See
also“Saving Files” on page 98.
ä Open files using the shortcut menu:
l
From the content area of Explore, right-click a file, from the shortcut menu select Open
In, then select a format. See one of the following:
m
m
m
m
m
For Financial Reporting items, see “Viewing Reports” on page 174.
For Interactive Reporting items, see “Selecting an Interactive Reporting Data Source ”
on page 213.
For Web Analysis items, see “Opening Presentations” on page 337 and “Creating
Documents from Documents” on page 342.
For Production Reporting items, see “Viewing a Production Reporting Document” on
page 331.
For generic files, you can select an option to open the file in a browser window.
ä Open files using default formats:
1
From Explore, double-click the file or folder.
2
To view or interact with the opened item, see “Using Different File Types” on page 143.
Managing Files
97
ä Open or select a file or folder:
1
Select File, then Open, then Document.
2
Navigate to the file or folder, perform the following:
l
From the Name column, double-click the file or folder to open.
l
From Look in, select a folder.
l
To filter the list of items, from the Type list box, click the arrow, select the file type.
Tip: Click Go Up A Level to move up the folder hierarchy specified in the Look in: text
box.
3
Click Open.
4
Optional: To open a file with another application:
l
Click Options.
l
From Open As: select an application to open the file.
Note: Every file type on your local system maintains information about which
application will launch that type of file, and where the application resides. See
“Registering a File Type” on page 102.
5
Optional: To open a version of the item, from Versions list, select the version, click Open.
6
To view and interact with the opened item, see “Using Different File Types” on page 143.
Saving Files
Save files to replace them or save files using a new name, which creates a copy of the file. You
can save the following files in EPM Workspace:
l
Interactive Reporting document
l
Web Analysis document
l
Snapshot Book
l
Book
l
Batch
l
Workspace Page
ä To save
1
Open the file.
2
Select File, then Save.
3
To save the file with a new name; File, then Save As, specify a name and location.
98
Exploring and Managing Items
Creating Folders
Create folders to organize files and documents.
ä To create folders:
1
From Explore, select File, then New, and then Folder.
2
Type a name for the folder, select Save.
Note: When entering names for items in the repository such as files and folders, you can use
upper and lowercase letters and numbers. Spaces cannot be used at the beginning or end
of folder names. Invalid Name characters are as follows: \,/,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,". Invalid Path
characters are as follows: \,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,".
Creating Documents or Collections
You can create the following documents or collections:
l
Interactive Reporting, see “Using the Toolbars” on page 208
l
Web Analysis, see “Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 339
l
Book or Snapshot book, see “Creating Books” on page 187
l
Batch, see “Designing Batches” on page 201
l
Job, see “Importing Files as Jobs” on page 126
Moving or Copying Files or Folders
You can move or copy a file or folder to another location. The following applies to copying:
l
Copying of all document types in the EPM Workspace repository is supported with the
exception of Production Reporting job output files. A user must have a minimum of View
access
l
The user that copies the repository object becomes the owner
l
Multiple documents can be selected for copy and paste
l
All metadata associated with a document is copied except for Job parameters and Schedules
l
Folders and its contents can be copied except for objects within a folder that have No Access
permission
l
Hidden files are copied if a user has View access
l
Copying of nested folders is not allowed
ä To move or copy files or folders:
1
Select
2
Edit, then Cut or Copy.
, then the file or folder you want to or move or copy.
Managing Files
99
3
Click the folder where you want to copy or move the item.
4
Edit, then Paste.
Tip: To select consecutive files or folders to copy or move, select the first item, press and
hold down SHIFT, and select the last item. To select files or folders that are not
consecutive, hold down CTRL, and select each item.
Renaming Files or Folders
Rename files or folders by changing properties.
ä Rename files or folders:
1
Select Explore.
2
Edit, then Rename.
Note: When entering names for items in the repository such as files and folders, you can
use upper and lowercase letters and numbers. Spaces cannot be used at the beginning
or end of folder names. Invalid Name characters are as follows: \,/,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,".
Invalid Path characters are as follows: \,%,?,+,<,>,|,`,*,".
3
Click OK.
Deleting Files or Folders
ä Delete files or folders:
1
Select Navigate, then Explore.
2
Edit, then Delete.
Caution!
Deleted files cannot be restored.
Searching for Files or Folders
Search Services enables users to search for and retrieve documents, reports, and dashboards from
any repository in EPM Workspace. The search operation returns a list of results based on locating
the users keywords in document-specific metadata; for example, document name, date created
or owner (for Financial Reporting Word or PDF documents only), and extracting content-based
information from documents. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Using Search Services.”
100 Exploring and Managing Items
Linking to Web Analysis Studio
You can open Web Analysis Studio from EPM Workspace. Web Analysis Studio enables you to
access and create documents and presentations.
ä Link to Web Analysis Studio by selecting Tools, then Links.
Creating E-mail Links to Items
E-mail links to items in the repository. E-mailing link rules:
l
l
l
Recipients must be defined as a user with a EPM Workspace user name and password to
open the linked item in a Web browser.
Recipients need proper access privileges to view the item.
Items in the link can be viewed in Web browsers. A link to the item is sent not the item.
When you click on the link, EPM Workspace is opened and the item is displayed.
l
You cannot send an e-mail link to a folder.
l
You must select and send e-mail links one item at a time.
l
You can add text to the e-mail message.
ä Create e-mail links:
1
From the repository, select the item to e-mail.
Tip: If the e-mail link option does not display for an item, that item cannot be sent as an e-
mail link.
2
File, then E-mail Link. The Email Link dialog box, containing the URL links is displayed.
Note: If your default e-mail address is not specified, you are prompted to request from the
Administrator to update your e-mail address listed through Shared Services. Your email address is used as the sender for the e-mail link.
3
Perform one of the following tasks:
l
Enter the recipient’s e-mail address.
l
Use the Recipient List, see Using the E-mail Recipient List.
4
Optional: Update the Subject text associated with the e-mail message.
5
Click Send.
Note: You cannot recall a message after it is sent.
Linking to Web Analysis Studio 101
Using the E-mail Recipient List
Use the e-mail recipient list to organize a list of recipients to which you send e-mail links. By
entering addresses in this list you do not need to retype e-mail address again. Two e-mail recipient
lists are maintained; one to e-mail links, one to e-mail batch notifications.
ä Use the e-mail recipient list:
1
Select File, then Email Links.
2
Click Select to display Email Link, and select recipients.
3
Optional: To add a recipient, in New Recipient, type the e-mail address and click
4
Optional: To remove an e-mail from the selected recipient list, select an e-mail and click
.
.
Using Ambiguous Items
It is possible for different items to have the same name and reside in the same folder. These are
ambiguous items. When an ambiguous item is accessed, a list of items with the same name are
displayed. Select the item you want to use. This may happen when you perform the following:
l
Create e-mail links to an ambiguous item.
l
Prompted to select related content links that link to an ambiguous item.
ä Select ambiguous items:
1
From the list, select the item you want.
2
To determine the differences between the items, do the following:
l
To view the item properties, right-click the item, select Properties.
l
To open and view the item, see “Opening or Selecting Files or Folders” on page 97.
Registering a File Type
The server maintains information about Repository items and which application to launch to
open that type of file and where the application resides.
Administrators create file types (technically, new MIME Types) or add file extensions to file
types. You may be informed of the new type by your administrator, or you may discover it while
browsing or trying to open a file. If there is a file type that your browser cannot open, you are
prompted for a program to open it. To avoid that prompt, you need to register the type in your
browser or operating system.
The procedure to register new file extensions or MIME types varies with each operating system,
its version, your browser, and the browser’s version. Consult the documentation or on-line help
of the browser or operating system or ask your system administrator.
102 Exploring and Managing Items
Exporting Items
From Explore, only Financial Reporting items have an export option. Export items for the
following usages:
l
l
Locations outside of EPM Workspace. You can import items into a Studio or back into EPM
Workspace later. Financial Reporting items can export from testing environments to
production environments.
For use in Smart View, see “Exporting to Smart View for Office” on page 103.
ä Export items:
1
Click Navigate, then Explore.
2
File, then Export.
3
To navigate to items, preform the following:
l
From the Look in: list box, select a folder.
l
To filter the list of items, from the Type list, select the file type.
4
Select the items, click OK.
5
Click Save.
6
Navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file.
7
Click Save.
Exporting to Smart View for Office
This section describes Smart View functionality, concepts and procedures.Smart View provides
a common Microsoft Office interface for the following EPM Workspace components:
l
l
Financial Reporting, see “Exporting Financial Reporting Reports and Snapshots to
Microsoft Office” on page 105
Production Reporting, “Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel” on
page 107
l
Web Analysis, “Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office” on page 106
l
Interactive Reporting, Interactive Reporting does not enable Smart View export options
It also provides a common Microsoft Office interface for Essbase, Financial Management and
Planning.
The centralized interface enables simultaneous use of multiple Hyperion products and improves
integration with Microsoft Office (2000, 2002, and 2003). The Smart View implementation
provides the following EPM Workspace functionality:
l
l
Exports the current page of the current data object to Excel, Word, or PowerPoint
Exposes Financial Management and Essbase functions in Excel, Word, and PowerPoint
content
Exporting Items 103
l
Notifies you when you can upgrade to new releases of Smart View
About Hyperion Reporting and Analysis Smart View Export
Options
Smart View enables the following export options:
l
You can export the current page of the current data object to Word, PowerPoint or Excel
as an image. After insertion, you can re-query the corresponding Web application to refresh
the image.
You can export documents to Microsoft Excel as either query-ready HTML or formatted HTML:
l
l
When you export content as query-ready HTML, the current page of the current data object
is converted to HTML and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed. This enables Smart
View to re-query the data source independent of the Web application.
When you export content as Formatted HTML, the current page of the current data object
is converted to HTML with the Hyperion formatting definitions and calculated members.
This specific formatting content prevents Smart View from directly querying the data source,
but enables Hyperion content to be leveraged by Office applications.
Not all export options are supported by all data sources and Web applications. The following
table indicates export options to Smart View:
Table 29
Smart View Export Options
Web Applications
Export Image to Microsoft Word, and
PowerPoint
Export Formatted HTML to Excel
Export Query-ready HTML to
Excel
Analytic Services
Yes
Yes
Yes
Financial Management
Yes
Yes
Yes
Planning
Yes
Yes
Yes *
Financial Reporting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interactive Reporting
N/A
N/A
N/A
Production Reporting
N/A
Yes
N/A
Web Analysis
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: To export Hyperion Planning data sources in query ready format, you must use the
Hyperion Analytic Services provider.
Note: Exporting charts from Production Reporting is not supported in this release.
104 Exploring and Managing Items
Because Excel worksheets prevent users from entering data into read-only cells, some Excel
functions such as AutoSum, F9, and some formatting functions are disabled in Smart View. Also
note that you must have Microsoft Excel, Word, and PowerPoint installed on the computer
running the Hyperion Reporting and Analysis client.
Importing Reporting and Analysis Content
Using Smart View, you can import Financial Reporting through EPM Workspace. You can use
smart tags to import Reporting and Analysis content. For information on importing content
and using smart tags, see the Hyperion System 9 Smart View for Office User's Guide.
Installing Smart View From EPM Workspace
Smart View is installed with Hyperion Reporting and Analysis but to use Smart View you must
also separately install a client component. This Office client component is displayed as a
Hyperion menu and toolbar within the Microsoft Office suite.
Note: Before installing Smart View, exit the Interactive Web Client and Microsoft Office
applications, and enable pop-ups.
ä To install the Smart View client from EPM Workspace:
1
Select Tools , then Install, then Smart View.
The Hyperion Smart View installation wizard is launched.
2
Accept the default installation options.
By default, the installation wizard installs Smart View program files to C:\Hyperion
\SmartView. You can specify an alternative installation directory.
3
Reopen the Microsoft Office application.
Note: If Word fails to display the Hyperion menu, create a data source connection in Excel
then restart Word.
Exporting Financial Reporting Reports and Snapshots to
Microsoft Office
Note: When exporting multiple pages to PowerPoint, all pages are placed in a single slide. To
have them automatically placed in separate slides, use Smart View in PowerPoint to
import the reports.
Exporting to Smart View for Office 105
Note: To export Financial Reporting report and snapshots to Microsoft Word or PowerPoint
as an image, you must install and configure either GNU or AFPL Ghostscript on the
Financial Reporting Print server.
ä To export a report or snapshot to Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint:
1
Open a report and select File , then Export.
2
Select one of the following submenu commands:
l
To export the current page of the current financial report as query-ready HTML, select
Excel , then Query-Ready Grid and Text. You cannot use this option to export
snapshots.
Note: Because of limited object positioning in html, exported objects may overlap and
will need to be repositioned in Microsoft Excel.
l
l
l
To export the current financial report as formatted HTML, select Excel , then FullyFormatted Grid and Text.
To export the current page of the current financial report to Microsoft Word as a static
image, select Word.
To export the current page of the current financial report to Microsoft PowerPoint as
a static image, select PowerPoint.
Snapshots are always exported as static images.
The File Download dialog box displays profile information about exported content.
3
Select an option:
l
Select Open to display exported content in the specified application.
l
Select Save to save the content.
Note: When exporting Financial Reporting grid objects to Excel the values are exported as
displayed in the report. The desired number of decimal places for precision should be set
in the report before exporting.
Exporting Web Analysis Documents to Microsoft Office
ä To export the current page of the current data object of the current Web Analysis document
to Microsoft Excel, Word, or PowerPoint:
1
Right-click a data object and select Export.
2
Select one of the following submenu commands:
l
l
To export the current page of the current data object as query-ready HTML, select
Excel , then Query-Ready Grid and Text.
To export the current page of the current data object as formatted HTML, select Excel ,
then Fully-Formatted Grid and Text.
106 Exploring and Managing Items
l
l
To export the current page of the current data object to Microsoft Word as a static image,
select Word.
To export the current page of the current data object to Microsoft PowerPoint as a static
image, select PowerPoint.
Although the image is static, you can re-query the Web application as needed.
Data is exported to the Microsoft Office application and displayed in a worksheet.
Note: Exporting an SQL spreadsheet to Microsoft Excel is not supported.
Exporting Production Reporting Content to Microsoft Excel
ä To export content to Microsoft Excel as Fully-Formatted HTML:
1
Select Navigate , then Explore and choose File , then Import , then File as job.
2
Click Browse and select an SQR job.
3
Proceed through the pages in the wizard. When you get to the last page, select Excel (.xls) as the output
option.
4
Look in the Table of Contents for the Excel output.
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial
Reporting
You can change the server for selected reports and grids or both in EPM Workspace repository
by specifying a new URL or a substitution variable. For example, you may want to change the
related content servers when moving reports and grids from a development server to a
production server.
ä To change the related content server in EPM Workspace repository:
1
Select Explore, then Tools, and then Change Related Content Links.
2
In Select, select a file and click OK.
3
In Change from the Related Content server named, change the URL to that associated with the selected
documents, if it is not already displayed.
4
In To Related Content server name, select an option:
l
l
To specify a server through a URL, select URL, then enter the path and server name in
the text box. The URL must start with either http:// or https://.
To specify a server using a substitution variable, select Substitution variable, then select
a variable from the drop-down list.
Changing Related Content Servers for Financial Reporting 107
Note: For information on setting up substitution variables in the
fr_configcache.properties file, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting
Studio User’s Guide.
5
Click OK. The number of occurrences found and replaced is displayed.
6
Click OK.
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections
You can change the database connection for reports and books in EPM Workspace repository.
You change the database connection when moving from a development environment server to
a production environment server.
When the dimensions in the changed database connections do not match the previous
dimensions, an error message similar to the following is displayed:
1012:Report contains an invalid grid. The following dimensions could
not be found: Measures
The following actions occur when you open and save a report that has mismatched dimensions:
l
l
Dimensions that existed in the old database connection but not in the new database
connection are removed. The dimensions and its members that existed in the rows and or
columns are removed from the grid. If, as a result of the removal, no dimension exists in the
row or column, you need to add a valid dimension to the cleared row or column in order
for the report to run.
Dimensions that exist in the new database connection but not in the old one, are added to
the POV.
If the report contains at least one dimension in both the row and column, it can be run and
opened when the error message is received. The report can also be exported from the repository.
If you do not like the modifications that are automatically made for mismatched dimension,
you can close the report and change to the original database connection.
When you change the database connection for reports or books, you can also select to validate
that the databases have the same dimension. When this option is selected for a report, and
dimensions do not match, you are prompted that the action failed. Likewise, if dimensions do
not match for a specific report in a book, you are prompted that the action for the entire book
failed. If you do not choose to validate, the database connection for the reports and books are
changed and you are not prompted for mismatched dimensions. However, errors may occur
when you open or run the reports or books.
ä To change the data source in the repository:
1
From EPM Workspace, select Explore to display the Select dialog box, then select Tools and, then Change
Database Connections.
2
In the Type field, select a report type to change, and click OK. Change Database Connection is displayed.
3
Select the item and click OK.
108 Exploring and Managing Items
4
In Find all references to the Database Connection, select the database connection to change.
5
In Replace With, select a database connection.
Note: To create a new database connection, click New Database Connection. See “Adding
Database Connections” on page 111.
6
Make changes to all items that you selected.
7
Click OK.
Changing Analytic Services and Planning Details
When changing a report from Analytic Services database connection to a Planning Details
database connection or vice versa, there are several restrictions. The data source reference is the
only change and there is no conversion.
Changing from Analytic Services to Planning Details
The following is a list of considerations when changing the database connection from Analytic
Services to Planning Details for a report:
l
The dimensions and functions defined in reports and books must exist in the target data
source. The following limitations apply:
m
Attribute dimensions are only supported for Essbase.
m
Hsp_Rates is not available as a dimension.
m
m
l
The cell text function cannot be used, because Linked Reporting Objects (LROs) are not
supported.
Only the member selection using a level 0 is supported.
Validate that dimensions exist prior to opening the report. If a dimension defined on a grid
is not available in the Planning Details data source, no change is made. If an invalid function
is used, an error is returned. The report designer has to remove the invalid function or
dimension.
Changing from Planning Details to Analytic Services
There are several features that may be defined in a Planning Details report that are irrelevant for
Analytic Services report, including PlanningAnnotations, Supporting Detail, and OrderBy. If
Supporting Detail is defined in the report, the details are ignored. If PlanningAnnotations or
OrderBy are used, they return an error. The report designer must remove the
PlanningAnnotation function and OrderBy for the report to run.
Changing Financial Reporting Database Connections 109
Managing Database Connections for Financial
Reporting
The Database Connection Manager provides a means to manage reports, books, saved reports
objects (row/column templates, grids), batches, and scheduled batches. Reports and report
objects can be moved from a development environment to a production environment, or
between production servers. The Database Connection Manager provides the following
information about each database connection:
l
Name—The database connection name
l
Type—The data source type (Analytic Services, Financial Management, Planning, SAP BW)
l
Value—The connection path
A designer can use EPM Workspace to create, maintain, and assign names to database
connections.
Users can select an existing database connection when prompted throughout the Reporting
Studio; for example, while adding a grid to a report. A database connection consists of a database
name, ID, password, and several values that are different for each data source.
Table 30
Valid Database Values by Database
Database
Values
Essbase
Server
Application
Database
Data Source Type
Financial Management
Server
Application
Data Source Type
Planning
Application
Database Connection
Data Source Type
SAP BW
Server
System Number
Client
Application
Database
Data Source Type
110 Exploring and Managing Items
Database
Values
SSAS
Server
Application
Database
Data Source Type
Related Content:
For more information on managing database connections, see the following topics:
l
“Adding Database Connections” on page 111
l
“Editing Database Connections” on page 112
l
“Deleting Database Connections” on page 112
Adding Database Connections
When you create a database connection, it is appended to the list in the Database Manager dialog
box.
ä To add a database connection
1
In EPM Workspace, select Explore. Then select Tools, then Database Connection Manager.
2
Click New.
3
In Database Connection Properties, enter a Database Connection Name.
4
Select a data source Type.
5
The remaining values will differ, based on the data source selected. See Table 30 to view values that
display for each data source.
6
To add application and database names, click,
, and make your selections.
Note: The Application Lookup button displays a tree view of the applications and
corresponding databases; the applications are listed as parents and the databases are
listed as children. You can search on an application or database. For data sources that
are not associated with a database, only applications are listed.
7
Click OK.
8
The database connection profile is appended to the list in Database Connection Manager Dialog.
Selecting an Application and Database Name
The Select Application dialog box displays a tree view of the applications and corresponding
databases; the applications are listed as parents and the databases are listed as children. You can
search on an application or database
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting 111
ä To Select an Application and Database Name:
1
Scroll through the list to locate your selection, or enter an application or database name in the
Application/Database field.
Note: For data sources that are not associated with a database, only applications are listed.
2
For a data source associated with a database, select the database and click OK. For a data source that
is not associated with a database, select the application and click OK.
Editing Database Connections
You can edit database connections, when required.
ä To edit a database connection:
1
In EPM Workspace, select Tools, then Database Connection Manager.
2
In Database Connection Manager, select the database connection to edit, then click Edit.
3
Make your changes, then click OK.
Deleting Database Connections
You can delete database connections, when required.
ä To delete a database connection:
1
In EPM Workspace, select Explore. Then select Tools, then Database Connection Manager
2
In Database Connection Manager, select the database connection to remove, then click Delete.
3
An information prompt is displayed. Select Yes to delete.
4
The database connection is removed from Database Connection Manager.
Using the Key Figure Manager for Financial Reporting
Key Figure Manager is used against an SAP BW data source only. A key figure is a dimension
contained in every SAP BW cube. Financial Reporting allows the creation of two additional types
of key figures: calculated and restricted. Using Key Figure Manager, you can create calculated
and restricted key figures. The Calculated and Restricted key figures created in the Key Figure
Manager become additional members for the SAP BW key figure dimensions within the Select
Members dialog in Reporting Studio; calculated key figures are contained in the Calculated Key
Figure folder and restricted key figures are shown in the Restricted Key Figure folder. The report
designer can use those key figures in place of or in addition to the SAP BW defined key figure
members to return more definitive values in a report.
l
Calculated — You can recalculate the key figures for use in Financial Reporting using
formulas. Calculated key figures consist of formula definitions containing basic key figures.
112 Exploring and Managing Items
You can create a calculated key figure based on a key figure or any functions listed in the
Key Figure Manager.
l
Restricted — Restricted are key figures of the cube that are filtered by one or more dimension
member selections, and are needed in order to define a detailed report. By using restricted
key figures, you can focus the query result on certain values.
New Calculated and Restricted key figures are stored in Key Figure Manager and are available
for use in Member Selection. You can now use the calculated and restricted key figures in
your Reporting Studio.
ä To define a new calculated key figure:
1
Navigate to the Key Figure Manager by selecting Tools, then Manage Key Figures.
2
In Key Figure Manager, select a SAP BW data source, then click New Calculated.
Note: You may be prompted to enter a database connection.
3
In Calculated Key Figure, enter a name for the calculated key figure you are creating.
4
In the Add Function container, select Key Figure and/or function, then click Add.
Note: When you select a function, your calculation is based on a dimension other than Key
Figure. For functions, the Formula dialog box is displayed where you select the
Dimension and Measures fields.
5
in Member Selection, select a Member for your formula and click OK. The member is entered into the
Formula text box in Calculated Key Figure dialog box.
6
In Calculated Key Figure, define the variable and values for your formula by using the Add Literals keypad.
7
Click OK to accept the formula. The Calculated Key Figure information is stored in Key Figure
Manager and is added to Select Members for a SAP BW data source in Reporting Studio.
Note: An error message is displayed for an invalid formula.
ä To define a new Restricted key figure:
1
Navigate to the Key Figure Manager by selecting Tools, then Manage Key Figures.
2
In Key Figure Manager, select a SAP BW data source, then click New Restricted.
Note: You may be prompted to enter a database connection.
3
In Restricted Key Figure, enter a name for the restricted key figure you are creating.
4
In the Dimension container, select Key Figure, then select click
5
Optional. in the Dimension container, select a Dimension, then click
to select members for which
you want to display members. To select another dimension members, repeat this step.
6
Click OK to accept the restricted key figure information. The Restricted Key Figure information is stored
in Key Figure Manager and is added to Select Members for a SAP BW data source in Reporting Studio.
to select a key figure member.
Managing Database Connections for Financial Reporting 113
ä To edit a calculated or restricted key figure, click Edit.
Note: The Key Figure Name cannot be edited.
ä To delete a calculated or restricted key figure, click Delete.
114 Exploring and Managing Items
Using Search Services
4
In This Chapter
Introduction............................................................................................... 115
Indexing Keywords ....................................................................................... 116
Using the Search Service................................................................................ 116
Using Advanced Search ................................................................................. 117
Search Syntax ............................................................................................ 118
Supported MIME Types .................................................................................. 119
Security ................................................................................................... 121
Introduction
Search Services enables users to search for and retrieve documents, reports, and dashboards from
any repository in EPM Workspace. The search operation returns a list of results based on locating
the users keywords in document-specific metadata; for example, document name, date created
or author (for Financial Reporting Word or PDF documents only), and extracting content-based
information from documents.
The following searches can be performed:
l
l
l
l
General search—Search keywords in any part of all supported content published in EPM
Workspace
Context-sensitive search—Search keywords associated with specific aspects of some content
in all supported content published in EPM Workspace
Search within a hierarchy—General or context-sensitive searches restricted to selected
branches of EPM Workspace or to selected repositories (Scorecard for example)
Data or metadata search—If content is static in nature, then both metadata and data is
indexed (for example, filter name and selected values for the filter). If content is dynamic
in nature, then only metadata is indexed (for example, column name only).
When a search request is initiated, the index is searched for terms entered in the request. The
results are returned on another page as a list of document references and synopses, ranked in
order of relevance.
Search results are:
l
Categorized based on content type, modified date, and file locations within EPM Workspace
Introduction 115
l
Sorted by relevance or by modified date
l
Authorized; user credentials ensure that only user-authorized content authorized is returned
Search Services can also integrate with external applications and services. Connectors are
available for Oracle Secure Enterprise Search and Google OneBox. See “Integrating Search
Services with External Applications” in the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management
Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Indexing Keywords
Search Services are based on an index of keywords that is updated whenever documents are
modified. Different document types require different methods for keyword extraction.
Specialized parsers generate keyword information for different document types in a common
format. Whenever documents are published or updated in EPM Workspace, the appropriate
parser is activated to index or re-index keywords. The specialized parser understands the
document content and returns keywords to the indexing facility in a standard format. The
indexing facility creates the keyword index to facilitate a prompt search operation.
Parsers are available for the following content:
l
Interactive Reporting files (.bqy, .oce files)
l
Production Reporting (SQR programs, reports) files
l
Web Analysis files (.apt, .ard, database connection files)
l
Financial Reporting files (.des files)
l
Oracle's Hyperion® Annotations – database content
l
Oracle's Hyperion® Impact Management Services transformation scripts (.js files)
l
HTML, PDF, RTF and TXT files
l
Microsoft Office documents (.doc, .xls and .ppt files)
Using the Search Service
A search can be initiated by typing one or more keywords in a text box located in the upper right
hand part of all EPM Workspace screens, and then either pressing Enter or clicking the search
button.
ä To use the Search Service:
1
Enter a keyword in the Search text box.
A Suggestion feature is available that spell-checks text and suggests alternative keywords if
available.
The search results are displayed on a separate page and include:
l
File name (clicking on this launches the document)
116 Using Search Services
l
Description
l
Document type
l
Last modified date
l
File path (double-clicking on this launches the folder)
If a Planning result is selected, a Planning tab is launched and supporting detail is displayed.
2
Optional. Order the search results according to Score or Last modified date.
By default, search results are sorted by score. A document’s score or relevance is determined
by how many times the keyword appears in the document and how many other keywords
are in the document. For example, a document where the keyword appears three times but
only has five words scores higher than a document where the keyword appears 10 times but
with 1000 other keywords.
3
Optional. Filter the search results according to document type, modified date, or publish location.
Using Advanced Search
Search Services includes an Advanced Search feature that provides a convenient way to generate
advanced search queries.
ä To use advanced search:
1
Click the Advanced Search link on the Search Results page, or select Tools, then Advanced Search.
2
Enter or select the desired search criteria and click Search.
Advanced search options include:
l
l
l
l
All words—Each document in the search results contains all the keywords entered.
At least one word—Each document in the search results contains at least one of the keywords
entered.
Without the words—Each document in the search results does not contain any of the
keywords entered.
Written in (language)—Restricts the results to documents written in a specific language.
The language is determined by an entry in the metadata and may not be applicable to all
document types.
To refine a search to allow for multiple languages, edit the search text field at the top of the
Search Results page.
l
Created in the past—Restricts results to documents created within a specific time frame,
such as within the past 24 hours or the past week.
The Custom date option activates a calendar control to search for documents created on a
specific date.
Using Advanced Search 117
The Custom date range option activates calendar controls to search for documents created
between a specified date range.
Modified in the past—Restricts results to documents modified within a specific time frame.
l
The Custom date option activates a calendar control to search for documents last modified
on a specific date.
The Custom date range option activates calendar controls to search for documents last
modified between a specified date range.
l
In folder––Restricts results to a specific repository and folder name.
l
Only search (document type)—Restricts results to documents of a specific MIME type.
To allow for multiple document types, edit the search text field at the top of the Search
Results page. For example, change sales +MimeType:application/x-brioquery to
sales +(MimeType:application/x-brioquery MimeType:application/pdf).
Hidden file options—Defines whether to retrieve hidden files. The "hidden" attribute of a
file is set within the context of its repository. For example, it can be viewed or altered by the
Properties dialog in the EPM Workspace repository.
l
Priority—Restricts the results to documents of High or Normal priority. The "priority"
attribute of a file is set within the context of its repository. For example, it can be viewed or
altered by the Properties dialog in the EPM Workspace repository.
l
Order by—Defines the sort sequence of the search results.
l
Table 31
Advanced Search Examples
Search Term
Request
"sales +LanguageCodes:de"
Documents that contain the term ‘sales’ and the language to be German
"sales +(LanguageCodes:de LanguageCodes:es)"
Documents that contain the term ‘sales’ and the language to be German, or documents
that contain the term ‘sales’ and the language to be Spanish
Search Syntax
The basic Search Services syntax follows a number of rules. Terms can be logically grouped using
the following operators:
Table 32
Search Syntax Operators
Syntax
Description
+
AND
-
NOT
()
Parenthesis – Apply an operator to a group of keywords
““
Quotes – Search for the exact occurrence
118 Using Search Services
Syntax
Description
[]
Brackets – Search for a range value
*, ?
Wild-card – Used in the middle or at the end of words to indicate any values in place of the *
You can further restrict searches by searching for or excluding a specific category. The syntax
for a category is of the form category:search_term. Use quotes to search for exact strings in
categories. Use AND and NOT operators to logically add or remove categories.
Examples
Search for documents containing sales but not oracle:
+sales –oracle
Search for documents containing the phrase radio sales:
“radio sales”
Search for documents containing sales but not oracle, or sales but not radio:
+sales –(oracle radio)
Search for documents containing the terms sales and oracle:
+sales +oracle
Search for documents containing the terms rent and sales or rent and oracle:
+rent +(sales oracle)
(+rent +sales) (+rent +oracle)
Search for documents that have a file name starting with revenue but are not in the Sample
Content folder:
+FileName:revenue* -Path:”Sample Content”
Search for documents modified in the date range 15th Dec 2007 and 21st Dec 2007
+LastModifiedDate:[2007-12-15 TO 2007-12-21]
Search for documents modified in 2007
+LastModifiedDate:[2007]
Search for documents modified in December 2007
+LastModifiedDate:[2007-12]
Supported MIME Types
The following Mime Types are indexed by Search Services and can be used with Search
expressions.
Supported MIME Types 119
Table 33
MIME Types
MIME Type
Description
application/hyperion-analyzer-presentation
Presentation
application/hyperion-analyzer-report
Web Analysis Document
application/hyperion-annotation
Annotations
application/hyperion-reports-batch
Financial Reporting Batch
application/hyperion-reports-book
Financial Reporting Book
application/hyperion-reports-chart
Financial Reporting Chart
application/hyperion-reports-grid
Financial Reporting Grid
application/hyperion-reports-image
Financial Reporting Image
application/hyperion-reports-report
Financial Reporting Report
application/hyperion-reports-row_column
v Row and Column Template
application/hyperion-reports-snapshot_book
Financial Reporting Snapshot Book
application/hyperion-reports-snapshot_report
Financial Reporting Snapshot Report
application/hyperion-reports-text
Financial Reporting Text
application/msword
PDF File (.pdf)
application/pdf
PDF File (.pdf)
application/rtf
RTF File (.rtf)
application/sqr_viewer
Production Reporting Document (.spf)
application/vnd.ms-excel
MS Excel File (.xlsx,.xls)
application/vnd.ms-powerpoint
Powerpoint File (.pptx,.ppt)
application/x-brioquery
Interactive Reporting Document (.bqy)
application/x-SQR
application/x-SQR Production Reporting Job (.sqr)
BrioQueryJob
Interactive Reporting Job
OCEFile
Interactive Reporting Database Connection (.oce)
text/html
HTML File (.htm,.html)
text/im-javascript
Oracle's Hyperion® Impact Management Services JavaScript File (.js)
text/plain
text/plain Plain Text (.text,.txt)
120 Using Search Services
Security
End user queries return results and related content without breaching the security of documents
or data. Search results are based on a users security profile. The results do not include documents
that users are not authorized to see.
Security 121
122 Using Search Services
Importing Artifacts
5
In This Chapter
Importing.................................................................................................. 123
Importing Artifacts ....................................................................................... 125
Using EPM Workspace URLs ............................................................................ 127
Setting Permissions...................................................................................... 129
Creating Shortcuts ....................................................................................... 134
Working with Properties ................................................................................. 134
Working with Versions ................................................................................... 138
Importing
Importing artifacts to the repository makes them available to others. You might give users the
ability to modify one artifact, while limiting others. See “Setting Permissions” on page 129 for
detailed information on permissions.
Note: If you try to import an artifact whose MIME type is not defined, you get an error message.
Contact your administrator to create the MIME type.
Table 34 shows the Reporting and Analysis products and artifacts you can import:
Table 34
Reporting and
Analysis Product
Financial
Reporting
Description
l
Dynamic report (*.des)
l
Snapshot reports (*.rpt)
l
Books (*.kbk)
l
Snapshot Books (*.kbt)
l
Batch files (*.bch)
l
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 93
Note: To import these files, you must use the Import, then Financial Reports menu item.
Importing 123
Reporting and
Analysis Product
Production
Reporting
Interactive
Reporting
Web Analysis
Description
l
Documents to view (*.spf)
l
Program files to run as jobs (*.sqr)
l
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 93
l
Documents to view and modify (*.bqy)
l
Documents to run as jobs (*.bqy)
l
Supporting files, see “Supporting Files” on page 93
l
Documents and presentations (*.apt)
l
Supporting files are automatically imported with the document or presentation, see “Supporting Files” on page
93
Note: To import these files, you must use the Web Analysis Studio.
Microsoft Reports
A user can browse the Microsoft Report server repository. The user can then import a link to a Microsoft Report as a
URL object into EPM Workspace repository. See “Importing Microsoft Reports” on page 129 for more information.
Interactive Reporting Documents and Jobs
Import an Interactive Reporting document as a file to use it with interactive analysis. Import an
Interactive Reporting document as a job for scheduled or on-demand execution and distribution
of output. The import essentially creates the job.
Note: If the Interactive Reporting document you are importing uses row-level security, the row-
level security feature is applied when job queries are processed. When users process queries
to get more detailed information, their row level security restrictions would be applied at
the more detailed levels, such as sales data for their region or department only.
Table 35 The following table describes when to import an Interactive Reporting file or job.
Table 35
Function
File
Interactive with EPM Workspace
X
Job
Schedule automatic execution
X
Distribute output via E-mail
X
Produce multiple-cycle output
X
Distribute output to network directories
X
Import current results for analysis with Interactive Reporting Web Client
X
FTP output
X
124 Importing Artifacts
Function
File
Job
X
Print output
HTML Files
HTML image links and other HTML files are dependent on their folder locations. Ensure the
links remain functional after you import them:
l
Use relative links in the HTML
l
Create folders that mirror the folder structure
Importing Artifacts
Import from Explore using File, then Import and these instructions:
l
Importing Files
l
Importing Multiple Files
l
Importing Files as Jobs
l
Importing a URL
l
Importing a Financial Reporting File
Importing Files
Import files into the repository with the following exceptions:
l
For Financial Reporting files, see Importing a Financial Reporting File.
l
For importing files as jobs, see “Importing Files as Jobs” on page 126.
l
l
For Interactive Reporting .oce files, see “Setting Processing and Metadata Options” on page
464.
For importing URLs, see “Importing a URL” on page 127.
ä To import files:
1
From Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to import the artifact.
2
Select File, , then Import, then File.
3
Browse to the file you want to import.
4
Enter a description, click Next or select Finish without specifying any Advanced options. If you select
Finish, skip the following steps.
5
Enter properties, see “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
6
Complete permissions, , see “Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts” on page 129.
7
Click Finish.
Importing Artifacts 125
Note: To return to a previous pages, click Back.
Importing Multiple Files
l
l
l
Files must be imported to the current folder
Import different file types together, for example, import text files, HTML files and image
files.
You cannot import multiple Interactive Reporting files (*.bqy, *.oce) or Production
Reporting files (*.sqr, *.spf)
ä To import multiple files:
1
From Explore, navigate to the folder in which you want the files to reside.
2
Select File, then Import, then File.
3
Click Multiple Files.
4
Select the files you want to import.
Browse for the first file. Click >> (right-facing arrows) to add the file to the list. To delete
files from the list, select the file and click << (left-facing arrows).
5
Optional: Enter a description, and click Finish to complete the import without specifying any Advanced
options.
6
Click Next.
7
Enter properties, See “General Properties” on page 135 and “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
8
Click Finish to import the artifact.
The artifacts are imported into the current folder.
Importing Files as Jobs
Import Production Reporting program files (*.sqr) to create Production Reporting jobs,
Interactive Reporting documents (*.bqy) to create Interactive Reporting jobs or generic files to
create generic jobs. Schedule, set options on and execute the job using the Schedule module, see
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 436.
ä To import files as jobs:
1
From Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the artifact.
2
Select File, then Import, then File as Job.
3
Browse to the artifact you want to import, and click Next.
4
Do one of the following to complete the Import wizard:
l
For Production Reporting files and generic jobs, see Chapter 16, “Using Production
Reporting and Generic Jobs.” This chapter guides you through the steps to complete
this wizard.
126 Importing Artifacts
l
5
For Interactive Reporting BQY files, see “Setting Data Source and Query Properties” on
page 462.
To complete step 2 (Job Input/Output) of the Import dialog do the following, for an Interactive Reporting
job:
l
l
l
For Query properties, see “Setting Data Source and Query Properties” on page 462.
For Job properties, see “Setting Interactive Reporting General Properties and Options”
on page 463 and “Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties” on page 460.
For Job defaults, see “Setting Job Defaults” on page 463.
6
Enter properties, see “General Properties” on page 135 and “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
Required properties are marked with a red asterisk.
7
Click Next.
8
Complete the final step in the Import wizard — Permissions, see “Setting Permissions and Pushing
Artifacts” on page 129.
9
Click Finish or Finish and Schedule.
Importing a URL
Perform these steps to import URLs.
ä To import URLs:
1
From Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the artifact.
2
Select File, then Import, then URL, enter the URL name.
3
Optional: Enter a description, and click Finish to complete the import without specifying any Advanced
options or Permissions.
4
Click Next, then see “General Properties” on page 135 and “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
Required properties are marked with a red asterisk.
5
Complete step 3, Permissions. To specify permissions for the artifact, see step 1.
6
Click Finish.
Using EPM Workspace URLs
Use these steps to open EPM Workspace URLs which point to a repository artifact.
l
Opening a URL
l
Opening a URL in a New Window
l
Updating a URL
Using EPM Workspace URLs 127
Opening a URL
Perform the following steps to open a URL.
ä To open a URL:
1
Select File, then Open, then URL.
The URL dialog is displayed.
2
Enter the URL name.
3
Select OK.
Opening a URL in a New Window
ä To open a URL in a new window:
1
Complete procedure from Opening a URL.
2
Select New Window.
3
Enter the URL.
4
Select OK.
Updating a URL
Perform the following steps to update the content of an existing URL displayed in the content
area.
ä To update a URL:
1
Complete procedure from Opening a URL.
2
Select Update URL.
The Update URL dialog is displayed.
3
Enter the URL.
4
Select OK.
Importing a Financial Reporting File
Use this procedure to import aFinancial Reporting file.
Note: Only one file at a time can be imported.
ä To import aFinancial Reporting file:
1
From Explore, navigate to the folder where you want to place the artifact.
128 Importing Artifacts
2
Select File, then Import, then Financial Reports.
3
Browse to the file you want to import.
4
Click Import.
5
Optional: If you import an artifact that uses a data source connection you are prompted to select it.
Importing Microsoft Reports
EPM Workspace users with a Content Publisher role can import Microsoft reports to the EPM
Workspace repository. Browse the Microsoft report server repository and import as a link a
Microsoft report to the EPM Workspace repository. The link is in the form of a URL object and
any user can launch a Microsoft report URL object as a tab in EPM Workspace. For details on
how to setup Microsoft Reports Integration with EPM Workspace, see the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
ä To import Microsoft reports:
1
Select a folder from the EPM Workspace repository.
2
Right-click and select Import then Microsoft Reports.
3
From the Import Microsoft Reports dialog, select a Microsoft Report.
4
Select Import. A URL object is created in the EPM Workspace repository.
Setting Permissions
Access permissions define your level of access - view, modify, full control. When you import
artifacts, you:
l
l
l
Specify who gets access and to what level
Have full control over the artifacts you import, and can change the permission level for all
roles, groups, and users
Efficiently grant permissions through roles or groups rather than to individual users
To modify permissions, use:
l
Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts
l
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents
Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts
Set artifact permissions when you import or select an artifact. Push artifacts to be accessible to
Favorites.
Rules for setting permissions and pushing artifacts:
Setting Permissions 129
l
To push artifacts, you need proper permissions and a role that enables you to push them.
Push any artifact, except multiple-cycle jobs and folders.
l
Make artifacts accessible in the repository by changing their permissions
l
Make artifacts accessible on Favorites by pushing them to Favorites
l
To apply permissions to artifacts within folders, you need proper permission and role.
ä To edit permissions for files and folders:
1
From Explore, right-click the file or folder whose permissions you want to modify.
Note: You can select multiple items in Explore and apply Edit Permissions. Permissions can
only be applied to items that a user has Full Control permission.
2
Select Edit Permissions.
3
To complete the Permissions dialog, see step 1 on page 132.
ä To apply permissions to artifacts in a folder:
1
Right-click on a folder in Explore.
2
Select Apply Permissions to Children.
3
To complete Apply Permissions to Children dialog, see Changing Permissions or Pushing Artifacts.
4
Set permissions for the children of the folder. The columns displayed for selected users, groups, and
roles in the Apply Permissions to Children dialog depend on the artifact type within the folder. Use the
description for each of the permissions as a guideline:
Table 36
Setting Permissions for Children of Folder
Permission
Description
Inherit
Not set to anything. Inherit defaults to No Access. See Example of Inherit Permission topic below.
No Access
Users cannot see the object.
View
View document but cannot modify.
Job Output Only
View and produce output in the folder. No additional Modify capabilities.
Modify
Make changes but not delete.
Full Control
Access the Apply Permissions to Children dialog (add/edit/delete permissions to other users/groups/roles).
Run
Ability to run a job.
Modify and Run
This is applicable only to jobs. You can modify the properties of the job and run the job. If you have modify
permission only, you can modify the properties of the job but not run the job.
View and Process
View documents and refresh data, cannot modify.
Note: these are adaptive states and are applicable only to Interactive Reporting artifacts.
130 Importing Artifacts
Permission
Description
Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots, and reports in the document, but cannot modify the queries or refresh the
data.
Note: these are adaptive sStates and are applicable only to Interactive Reporting artifacts.
Analyze and Process
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Cannot modify the query.
Query and Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing.
Data Model and
Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing. Can create and modify data models.
Note: these are adaptive states and are applicable only to Interactive Reporting artifacts.
5
Once you are done making your selections, select OK.
Note: Permissions are only applied to artifacts within a folder in which a user has Full
Control permission.
Example of Inherit Permission
The following is an example of a BQY file and permissions set in the Permissions dialog.
UserA:
l
Inherit for File Permission
l
View for Adaptive State
l
Inherit for Favorite
GroupA:
l
View for File
l
Process for Adaptive
l
Inherit for Favorite
RoleA:
l
Modify for File
l
Datamodel for Adaptive
l
Pushed for Favorite
Result of above scenario:
l
If UserA belongs to GroupA then UserA is able to View the File
l
If UserA has RoleA then UserA can Modify the File
l
If UserA does not belong to GroupA or RoleA then UserA has NoAccess to the file
Setting Permissions 131
Inherit basically means inherit from the role's or group's permissions and the same applies for
Favorites.
Changing Permissions or Pushing Artifacts
In the dialog, Apply Permissions to Children of the Selected Folder, you can choose to overwrite
or merge permissions, thus eliminating the need to redefine permissions from scratch.
Note: Permissions change for all files in folder when you click OK. However, permissions are
not saved for future use. If a new artifact is subsequently added to that folder, it does not
get this permission. However, you can go to individual artifacts in that folder and change
the permissions.
ä To change permissions or push artifacts:
1
To specify selected users, groups, and roles perform the following:
a. To populate the list with all users, groups or roles leave the text box blank, select Update
List.
b. To populate the list with specified users, groups or roles:
i.
To filter the list by name, select begin with, contain, or are in group and enter
letters.
ii.
To filter the list by user type, select tabs for Users, Groups, or Roles, then click
Update List.
Available Users, Groups, and Roles display artifacts based upon the selections you
made in the drop-down lists.
Note: If all of the artifacts are not listed, filter the list with criteria or contact your
administrator. Your administrator determines the maximum number of
artifacts to list. Wild cards are not supported and the filter is not case
sensitive.
2
Select a user, group, or role from Users, Groups, or Roles tab, then click
3
From Selected Users, Groups and Roles select a name from the Name column. From Access or Access
to file drop-down set permissions:
.
l
Inherit – Not set to anything. This permission defaults to No Access.
l
No Access - Cannot access the document.
l
View - Can only display the document.
l
Modify - Change, but not delete.
l
Full control - Display, change, and delete.
See “Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents” on page 133.
4
From the Favorite drop down, select Pushed to push the artifact to the users Favorites or Inherit (not
pushed) to view only if this is the only permission set.
132 Importing Artifacts
5
Repeat previous steps to set additional permissions for other users, groups, or roles.
Note: If all of the users/groups/roles in which you have access to are not listed, filter the list
with different criteria or contact your administrator. Your administrator determines
the maximum number of users/groups/roles to list.
6
Select one of the following:
a. To remove existing permissions and set new permissions, select Overwrite current
permissions.
b. To redefine some permissions, and add new permissions to the existing ones, select
Merge with the current permission. The changes are applied to folder child elements
recursively.
Note: In a merge, if a user already exists in Apply Permissions to Children for some
artifacts, and this user is granted new permissions, the new permissions are in
force.
7
To apply these permissions for an artifact, clickOK.
8
Click OK.
Note: To remove a role, group, or user from the selected list, click
after highlighting the
name to be removed.
Setting Permissions on Interactive Reporting Documents
These permissions apply to Interactive Reporting files and jobs:
l
l
Adaptive states specify what functionality is available to users when viewing an Interactive
Reporting document.
Only user who ran the job has access to the job output specifies you are the only user who
can access the job output.
Note: When importing an Interactive Reporting job, assign an adaptive state on the job
output to access it.
Table 37
Adaptive State
Description
Inherit
Not set to anything. This permission defaults to View Only if this is the only permission set.
View Only
View document, but cannot modify.
View and Process
View documents and refresh data, cannot modify.
Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots, and reports in the document, but cannot modify the queries or refresh
the data.
Setting Permissions 133
Adaptive State
Description
Analyze and Process
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Cannot modify the query.
Query and Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing.
Data model and Analyze
Create and modify charts, pivots and reports in the document and refresh data. Can build and limit queries
before processing. Can create and modify data models.
Creating Shortcuts
Create a shortcut to a file or document.
ä To create shortcuts:
1
From Explore, navigate to an artifact.
2
Right-click the artifact, click Create Shortcut.
3
Enter the name and folder.
4
See “General Properties” on page 135 and “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
Working with Properties
This section describes how to modify properties of repository artifacts. You specify properties
when importing and modifying artifacts. See “Importing Artifacts” on page 125 to learn how to
access properties pages while importing artifacts.
Properties for artifacts:
l
“General Properties” on page 135
l
“Advanced Properties” on page 136
l
“Output Properties” on page 137
l
“Setting Permissions” on page 129
l
“Working with Versions” on page 138
l
“Interactive Reporting Properties” on page 137
l
“Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties” on page 137
l
“HTML File Properties” on page 137
l
“URL Properties” on page 138
l
“Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files” on page 138
ä To access properties:
1
From Explore, select an artifact.
134 Importing Artifacts
2
Select File , then Properties.
General Properties
Most artifacts have these general properties: Table 38.
Table 38
General Properties
Definitions
File
The file name and path.
Name
The name you assign to the file. For example, if the file is c:\Jan03SR set the name to January 2003
Sales Report.Use letters, numbers, a space, and an underscore (_).
Note: For Production Reporting jobs, select Replace to replace this job with another. Replacing this file may
impact existing schedules dependent on this file. Owners of these schedules must be notified of these changes
so that they can modify the job parameters accordingly.
Description
The description used to generate search keywords. Limit the length to 250 characters.
Owner
The User Name of the person who imported the artifact. To change owner of an artifact, see “Changing Ownership
of Artifacts” on page 135.
Original File Name
(Read-only) The name of the file when it is imported or created.
Size
(Read-only) file size
SmartCut
(Read-only)
A SmartCut is a URL pointing to a file.
Shortcut To
Specify the folder and subfolders for shortcuts.
Also store file in
compressed (.zip)
format
Set this when you import to store the file in WinZip format. This saves disk space, but slows down viewing.
Changing Ownership of Artifacts
Users can change the owner of repository artifacts. Artifacts you can change ownership for
include, repository objects, folders (including sub-folders), Events, Job Parameters, and
Schedules. A user must have Full Control or Administrator role rights.
ä To change the owner of an artifact:
1
From Explore, select an artifact.
2
Select File, then Properties.
3
From the Properties dialog, select Change Owner.
4
Perform the following to complete the Change Owner dialog:
a. Select how you want to sort the name list by, User ID, First name, or Last name from
the first drop down menu.
Working with Properties 135
b. To filter by name, select begin with, contain, or are in group and then enter letters.
c. Select Update List.
d. Select OK.
5
Select OK.
Advanced Properties
Some artifacts have these advanced options: Table 39.
Table 39
Advanced Properties
Definitions
MIME Type
(Read Only) Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. Update this for jobs and documents only, MIME types
are MS Word file, HTML file, and Personal Page.
Security Tags Included
(Read only) Indicates whether the Production Reporting job is secure. Secure jobs are Production Reporting
only and always have HTML output.
Character Encoding
The character-encoding method, such as UTF-8. This encoding must be specified for HTML files so that EPM
Workspace can display the file correctly.
If the character encoding is not specified in this property or in the HTML file, EPM Workspace uses the
character encoding set by your administrator.
Hidden File
Hides files in Explore.
Example: Enable this option for image files needed by an HTML file, so the users select HTML files only.
Auto-delete file on this
date or Auto-delete
shortcut on this date
Enable to automatically delete this artifact .
from the repository when these conditions are met:
l
The expiration date passed.
l
Auto-delete is selected.
l
The system performs regular garbage collection (up to an hour after the expiration date).
l
For folders, set auto-delete to occur after all contents have been deleted from the folder.
If Exceptions are
generated, allow users to
add to their Exceptions
Dashboard
The Exceptions dashboard is displayed on a Personal Page.
Automatically generate
keywords
Generates search keywords based on words contained in the Name and Description. For Interactive Reporting
content, the section names are also used as keywords. The search function uses these keywords to find an
artifact.
Keywords
New keywords used to search for an artifact.
This field is not used for jobs. When a job exception occurs, subscribed users can be notified by E-mail or
with a Exceptions Dashboard indicator.
Creating keywords for artifacts is highly recommended and used for searching repository artifacts.
136 Importing Artifacts
Advanced Properties
Definitions
Auto Delete job outputs
after
Used to delete job output after a specified time interval. The job output is deleted when all of these conditions
are met:
l
The expiration date passed.
l
Auto-delete is checked.
l
The system performs its regular garbage collection (up to an hour after the expiration date).
Output Properties
Output properties option is displayed for Interactive Reporting and Production Reporting jobs.
A summary of the job outputs with the respective dates and output formats that the job outputs
are available in are displayed when this property is selected for one of these products. You can
also delete a selected output from the Output Summary.
Interactive Reporting Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, Interactive Reporting files and jobs
have unique properties. See “Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties” on page 460.
Production Reporting Properties and Generic Job Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, Production Reporting files and
Production Reporting jobs have unique properties. See “Job Properties” on page 476 and
“Generic Job Properties” on page 485.
Setting Permissions
Set rights for users to access files. See “Setting Permissions and Pushing Artifacts” on page 129.
HTML File Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, HTML files contain these unique
properties also:
Table 40
HTML File Properties
Descriptions
Character encoding
The method of character encoding.
Note: Use UTF–8 for non-Latin-1 languages or when using WebSphere or iPlanet native servlet
engines.
Make displayable as a file
content window
Contents of this artifact can be displayed on Personal Pages. (Default is enabled.)
Working with Properties 137
URL Properties
In addition to General Properties and Advanced Properties, URLs have these properties:
Table 41
URL Properties
Descriptions
URL (in the General Properties
group)
The URL starts with http:// or https://.
Make displayable as a file
content window
Contents of this artifact can be displayed on Personal Pages. (Default is enabled.)
Character encoding
The method of character encoding for the Web page.
Note: Use UTF–8 for non-Latin-1 languages or when using WebSphere or IPlanet native servlet engine.
Icon
The icon shown for the URL. To change the icon, click Change Icon.
Change Icon
Select to add a graphic file from your PC or from the repository. Set the width and height to smaller
than 24 pixels.
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files
These files are used by Interactive Reporting jobs and Interactive Reporting documents to
connect to databases. Separate Interactive Reporting Database Connection file must be specified
for each query within a file or job, except for queries that use Local Results. See “Selecting
Database-Connection File Options” on page 464.
Working with Versions
Repository artifacts have multiple versions, except for jobs, job output, Interactive Reporting
database connection files, shortcuts, Web Analysis artifacts and Financial Reporting artifacts.
Typical files are collections of versions, even if you have not imported multiple versions. When
a file is imported, the resulting artifact is a collection containing a single version. You can later
import additional versions.
Versions can be revisions of the same file or completely different files. If the file is considerably
different from the original file, you should import a new file with a unique name.
Note: To change imported versions for Interactive Reporting jobs or Interactive Reporting
database connection files, use Replace in General Properties. It is important to replace
the Interactive Reporting job or Interactive Reporting database connection file with a
similar file. If the Interactive Reporting job is considerably different from the original
Interactive Reporting job, import a new job. The system accepts files as replacements for
Interactive Reporting jobs or Interactive Reporting database connection files.
138 Importing Artifacts
Click an artifact’s name for the latest version. When you move or delete an artifact, versions are
included in the operation.
Versions have their own properties that are distinct from the properties of their collection
artifact.
This section describes how to manipulate versions:
l
Opening a Version
l
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions
l
Adding a Version
l
Listing Multiple Versions
l
Version Properties
l
Deleting Versions
Opening a Version
Open any artifact version, see “Opening a Version” on page 139.
Adding a Version
Add another file as a version to an artifact in the repository.
Note: All artifacts in the repository can have multiple versions, except for jobs, job output,
Interactive Reporting database connection files, shortcuts, Web Analysis artifacts and
Financial Reporting artifacts.
ä To add versions:
1
From Explore select an artifact.
2
Select File , then Properties.
The Properties dialog is displayed.
3
Select Versions, click Add New Version .
4
Click Browse and select a file to add as a new version.
5
Optional:Do one or more of these steps:
l
l
l
6
Enter a Description.
Enable Flag as an exception, then enter a message. If an exception occurs, the message
is displayed on the Exceptions dashboard.
Set the priority to High or Normal.
Click OK.
The version is added to the repository as the latest version.
Working with Versions 139
Viewing or Modifying Properties of Versions
Each version has its own properties.
ä To view or modify properties of versions:
1
From Explore, click the artifact whose version you want to edit.
2
Select File , then Properties.
3
Select Versions.
4
Select Modify.
The only changeable properties are Description, Flag as an Exception, and Message, see
“Version Properties” on page 140.
5
After modifying properties, click OK.
Version Properties
Table 42 The following table shows versions properties:
Table 42
Version Properties
Descriptions
Description
A description that identifies this version. Using preliminary figures as of 2/03 or First draft with Marketing’s
comments. The length is limited to 250 characters.
Creation date
(Read-only) Date the version was created.
Last modified
(Read-only) Date the version was changed. Changing versions includes replacing or modifying its properties.
Modified By
(Read-only) User, who made the last modification to the version.
Priority
Normal or High priority shows in Explore,
priority artifacts.
Note:
indicates high priority. Users can sort on priority, and search for high-
does not display for high-priority scheduled jobs.
This property is available if your administrator activated the priority feature on your system.
Size
(Read-only) The file size which is set automatically.
Flag as an
exception
An exceptions indicates a condition or result, such as a threshold being reached. Flag as an exception can be set
manually by a user.
If you set this option on the latest version of an artifact, put the artifact on your Exception Dashboard, its state is
displayed on the Exceptions Dashboard. See “Using Exceptions” on page 157.
Message
140 Importing Artifacts
Text associated with an exception for this version. When an exception is flagged on the version, this message prints,
or it may be visible from a users Exception Dashboard.
Listing Multiple Versions
From Explore, the latest artifact version is displayed in the content area.
ä To see all versions:
1
Select View , then Show Columns.
2
Click Versions, then click Save.
Deleting Versions
Delete one or more versions together.
ä To delete versions:
1
From Explore, navigate to the artifact whose version you want to delete.
2
Select File , then Properties.
The properties of the artifact are displayed.
3
Click Versions, then select a version.
4
Click Delete Selected.
5
Click OK.
Working with Versions 141
142 Importing Artifacts
6
Viewing and Organizing
Information
In This Chapter
Viewing.................................................................................................... 143
Using Different File Types ............................................................................... 143
Creating a New Book, Batch, Document, or Workspace Page ....................................... 144
Selecting a Data Source for a Document.............................................................. 144
Using Favorites ........................................................................................... 144
Using Subscriptions...................................................................................... 147
Using Personal Pages.................................................................................... 150
Workspace Pages ........................................................................................ 164
Viewing
To view, interact, and modify content within documents use Workspace Pages, Explore,
Applications, and Open Items. These can all be accessed from Navigate except for Explore which
you can select from the toolbar.
l
l
l
l
Workspace Pages – Enable users to create and edit a page aggregating content from various
sources, see also “Using Home Page” on page 63.
Explore - Navigate through the repository to locate files and folders.
Applications – Select Financial Management, Planning, Profitability and Cost Management,
Oracle Business Intelligence products, or Performance Scorecard for viewing or launching.
Open Items - Select the document name to view in the contents pane. Opened documents
display in this list. Use the View pane to interact and view a document. For example, use the
View pane to navigate through specific information for the active document. If the active
document is a Web Analysis document, the document panel displays options such as filters,
pages, and row sections in a Windows Explorer format.
Using Different File Types
For information on how to view and use each file type, see:
l
“Using Financial Reporting” on page 171
l
“Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books” on page 185
l
“Interactive Reporting” on page 207
Viewing 143
l
“Using Production Reporting Documents” on page 331
l
“Using Web Analysis” on page 335
Creating a New Book, Batch, Document, or Workspace
Page
The new document wizard creates the following items:
l
l
Web Analysis documents, see “Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 339
Interactive Reporting documents see “Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents”
on page 211
l
Books, see “Creating Books” on page 187
l
Batches, see “Designing Batches” on page 201
l
Workspace Pages, see “Workspace Pages” on page 164
Selecting a Data Source for a Document
When creating documents you need to specify the data source. This determines the document
type.
l
l
To create a Web Analysis document, specify a Web Analysis database connection. See
“Creating Web Analysis Documents” on page 339.
To create an Interactive Reporting document, based on an existing document, specify a
Interactive Reporting document. See “Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents”
on page 211.
Using Favorites
Users can set up their own Favorites and track items you access frequently to view them in the
future. Administrators and users can push items to a users Favorites.
You need the proper role to push items to Favorites. See the corresponding appendix in the
Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Security Administration Guide. If
you do not have the proper role to access Explore, you can also see your Favorites list by selecting
the Favorites menu.
You can do the following with Favorites:
l
“Adding Items to Your Favorites” on page 145
l
“Pushing Items to Favorites” on page 145
l
“Managing Favorites” on page 146
144 Viewing and Organizing Information
ä Access Favorites
1
Select Favorites.
2
Select an item from the list of Favorites.
Tip: You can also access your personal pages.
Adding Items to Your Favorites
Add items to your Favorites or push items to another users Favorite using the following:
l
You need view access permissions or higher.
l
Add any item to Favorites.
l
Add folders then use Favorites to access that folder; you cannot access items within the folder
directly.
ä Add items to Favorites:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item.
2
Right-click and select Add to Favorites.
ä Add folders to Favorites:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the folder.
2
Right-click and select Add to Favorites.
Pushing Items to Favorites
Push items to another users Favorites by specifying the user name, group, or role.
ä Push item to Favorites:
1
Select Explore, select an item.
2
File , thenProperties.
3
From Properties, select Permissions in left pane.
Note: You can also use your mouse and select Edit Permissions by right-clicking on the
artifact.
4
Populate Users, Groups, and Roles tab with the following:
a. To filter by name, select begin with, contain, or are in group and then enter letters.
You cannot use the are in group filter for roles.
b. To filter by user type, select roles, groups, or users, click Update List.
Using Favorites 145
The Users, Groups, and Roles tab display items based upon the selections you made in
the drop-down lists.
Note: If all of the users/groups/roles are not listed, filter the list with different criteria
or contact your administrator. Your administrator determines the maximum
number of users/groups/roles to list. Wild cards are not supported and the filter
is not case sensitive.
5
Select users from the Users, Groups and Roles tab, click,
6
From Selected Users, Groups and Roles
.
select Pushed from the Favorite drop-down menu to push the item to the users Favorites.
7
Select Push this item to selected Users, Groups, and Roles.
Note: If the Access to File option is set to No Access and there are no higher access rights
for this item to inherit, then the item is not pushed.
8
Repeat step 1 through step 7 to push other items to Favorites.
9
Click OK.
10 Optional: If you want permissions to apply to other content you import, make them your default
permissions by selecting:
a. For files, Make these the default permissions for all files I import.
b. For folders, Make these the default permissions for all folders I import.
Selecting this enables the system to automatically set the same permissions for files you
import. You can change the permissions for each file or reset your default permissions at
any time.
Note: To remove a role, group, or user from the selected list, click
after highlighting
the name to be removed.
Managing Favorites
ä Manage items in Favorites:
1
From EPM Workspace, select Favorites , then Manage Favorites.
2
To remove an item from your Favorites, click Remove next to the item you want to remove.
3
To display an item on your list of Favorites, click Show next to the item you want to show.
Note: Pushed items can be hidden in Favorites but not removed by the recipient. Pushed
items can only be completely removed by the user that performed the push.
4
Optional: To resize column widths, drag the mouse over a column border, when the pointer changes to
a double headed arrow, drag the borders to the right or left.
146 Viewing and Organizing Information
5
Click OK.
Using Subscriptions
Subscriptions enable you to perform the following:
l
l
Receive e-mail notifications and links to items every time the particular item is modified, a
specific job runs, an exception is generated or anything in a folder changes. Subscribe to any
item in the repository and you send it to one or more e-mail addresses. See “Creating a
Subscription” on page 147.
If you subscribe to a folder you are notified of any new items imported or created in that
folder or any modifications to items within its subfolders. See “Subscribing to Folders” on
page 149.
Note: You cannot subscribe to Personal Pages.
Creating a Subscription
Subscribe to items to be notified when it changes. Receive e-mail notifications that the item
changed or with the changed item attached.
Subscribe to be notified when exceptions occur as opposed to receiving notification when an
item changes. The item’s owner must enable the item or job to generate exceptions for you to
subscribe. Items and jobs generate exceptions when the following steps are setup:
l
l
l
Production Reporting jobs and generic jobs can be programmatically set up to generate
exceptions. See “Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs” on
page 492.
Interactive Reporting jobs can be programmatically set up to generate exceptions. See
“Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs” on page 460.
Manually set exceptions on items by setting the version property Flag as Exception;
indicating that the item generated an exception. See “Version Properties” on page 140. The
latest version of the item is used to determine if an exception is set.
ä Create subscriptions:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
On the Subscribe page, perform the following steps:
l
Select Subscribe and send e-mail notifications to.
l
In the text box, type one or more e-mail addresses for the recipient of the notification.
l
If you want to send the item as an attachment, select Attach file for “report name” to
email message (if possible).
Using Subscriptions 147
Tip: Your administrator determines the maximum size of attachments.
4
Optional: To subscribe to an item only when a programmatic exception occurs, select Exception Only.
This option is applicable to jobs only.
Note: If this option is not displayed, this item or job does not use exceptions.
ä Add subscriptions to your default personal page:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
Click the Personal Pages tab, perform the following:
Note: This option is not available for multiple-cycle Interactive Reporting jobs.
l
To add links to the subscription, click Add to My Bookmarks.
l
To add an image that links to the subscription, click Add as Image Bookmark.
You can use a preconfigured image or browse to an image in the repository.
m
m
m
4
To use a preconfigured icon, click Use pre-configured icon file.
To use a custom icon, click Use custom icon file and enter the path and file name
or use the Browse button.
To specify the image size, enter pixel values in the width and height text boxes. If
you do not enter values the entire image is used.
Click OK.
ä To add Interactive Reporting document sections to your default personal page:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item you want to subscribe to.
Note: The Interactive Reporting document must contain sections.
2
Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3
From Personal Pages tab, click Add Sections of Interactive Reporting document.
4
From Embed Section, select a section, click Add.
5
Repeat step 4 to add all desired sections.
6
Click OK.
Modifying or Removing Subscriptions
You can modify or remove subscriptions by managing a list of subscribed items.
148 Viewing and Organizing Information
ä Modify or remove subscriptions:
1
From EPM Workspace, select Favorites , then Show Subscribed Items.
2
Click a subscription, then click Open Subscriptions.
3
To remove the subscription, clear Subscribe and send e-mail notifications to.
4
To modify the subscription, use the steps described in “Subscribing to Folders” on page 149.
Note: If you remove a subscription, it is also removed from all of your Personal Page
Bookmark sections.
5
Click OK.
Subscribing to Folders
When you subscribe to folders, you are notified of items imported to that folder or updates to
items within the folder or its subfolders.
If you are interested in the entire contents of a folder or sub folder, you can subscribe to the
folder or sub folder.
ä Subscribe to folders:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the folder to which you want to subscribe.
2
Right-click the item, from the shortcut menu select Subscribe.
3
On Subscribe Settings, select Subscribe and send e-mail notifications to: to receive notification for
this folder and to change or enter your e-mail address.
4
Enter an e-mail address for one or more recipients of the subscription.
Note: You must enter the e-mail address, you cannot select from a list of recipients.
5
To receive notification when there are changes to the subfolders, select Notify on changes to sub-folders
of “Users”.
6
To receive notification only when items in the folder generate exceptions, select exception items.
7
To receive notification only when items in the folder are high priority items, select High Priority Items.
Note: This option is only available if the administrator has enabled priority ratings.
8
Click OK.
Receiving and Viewing Subscriptions
Using a subscription e-mail notification you can access items directly without browsing the
repository.
E-mail notification comes in two formats:
Using Subscriptions 149
l
l
E-mail with a link to the item or folder - Click the link; if you have access to that item, you
can open the document.
E-mail with the item attached - Follow the directions to either view the file where it is or
download the attachment to a file.
Using Personal Pages
Personal Pages are customizable pages enabling you to organize, view, and access EPM
Workspace items and other Web content on Web pages. Items on personal pages do not interact
with each other. If items change, it cannot propagate changes to items on the Personal Page. To
build interactive dashboards, see Hyperion Interactive Reporting Object Model and Dashboard
Development Services Developer’s Guide, Volume I: Dashboard Design Guide.
You can modify the content and layout of Personal Pages, create additional Personal Pages, copy
and customize Personal Pages, add links to repository items or to a Web site.
Content windows and file content windows are the components that make up a Personal
Page.. Personal Pages open in the maximize mode, automatically hiding the view pane. When
publishing personal pages, you can set access permissions during the personal page publish
phase. Bookmarks for Web Analysis, Production Reporting, Financial Reporting, and Interactive
Reporting jobs open as new tabs in EPM Workspace.
l
l
Content windows are collections of links to repository items or external sources, image
bookmarks, and Broadcast Messages.
File content windows display the contents of an item opposed to a link to the item. You can
display the contents of the following items:
m
Embedded Interactive Reporting document sections
m
HTML files
m
HTML job output
Add or remove content windows or file content windows. Content windows and file content
windows are optional except Broadcast Messages. You cannot remove Broadcast Messages, nor
delete a Personal Page that displays them, unless you have another Personal Page that displays
the Broadcast Messages.
Content on Personal Pages include:
l
Broadcast Messages - Link to special folders that the administrator populates. The contents
of this folder are displayed as one or more content windows and set up and managed by the
administrator.
Broadcast messages contains two sub-folders:
m
m
l
Personal Page Content - Published personal pages.
Sample Personal Page - Content on personal pages set up by the administrator and
content that you add to personal pages by subscribing to items.
My Bookmarks - Collection of links to Web pages or repository items.
150 Viewing and Organizing Information
l
l
l
l
Image bookmarks - Graphic links to web pages or repository items.
HTML file or job output displayed as a file content window - Contents of EPM Workspace
HTML items displayed on a Personal Page. URLs are also displayable.
Exceptions Dashboard - Add traffic light indicators for jobs enabled for exceptions, or items
flagged as exceptions. If the traffic light is red, the item was flagged as an exception or the
job generated an exception. If the traffic light is green, the job did not yet generate an
exception.
Displayable Interactive Reporting sections - Sections from Interactive Reporting
documents and Interactive Reporting job output to which you have access.
The following figure shows a variety of content windows and file content windows.
Figure 1
Note: If your administrator configured the use of heading bars, each content window’s title is
displayed in a colored heading on Personal Pages as shown.
A Personal Page includes:
1. Broadcast Messages Heading Bar - Format the Heading bar for each content window.
Using Personal Pages 151
2. Links - links to HTML pages or Web sites
3. Content Window - My Bookmarks that are set up using Subscriptions.
4. Exceptions Dashboard - Lists job exceptions and notification messages or items that are
flagged for exceptions.
5. File Content Window - Displays the contents of an HTML file.
Customizing Personal Page Content
You can specify information included and the appearance of your Personal Pages. Use the
following steps to customize your Personal Pages:
l
“Adding or Removing Personal Page Contents” on page 152
l
“Displaying HTML Content on Personal Pages” on page 152
l
“Embedding Interactive Reporting Document Sections in Personal Pages” on page 153
l
“Creating Bookmarks” on page 155
l
“Using Exceptions” on page 157
l
“Modifying the Layout of a Personal Page” on page 160
l
“Changing the Colors on a Personal Page” on page 161
Adding or Removing Personal Page Contents
ä To add or remove content (content windows) to a Personal Page:
1
Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select a personal page.
3
Select
.
The content of the selected personal page is displayed in the My Personal Page Content area.
4
Select the content you want to add from Select Content, select
.
The items listed in the select content area are controlled by your administrator. You can also
add content through the subscribe feature. See “Using Subscriptions” on page 147.
5
To remove items, select the content you want to remove from My Personal Page Content and select
Remove.
6
Select Save Settings or close the window to Cancel. Changes are automatically displayed in the personal
page you updated.
Displaying HTML Content on Personal Pages
Add HTML items as a file content window on a Personal Page, which displays the content of the
item as opposed to a link to the item.
152 Viewing and Organizing Information
Note: HTML job output from Production Reporting jobs and generic jobs must be enabled in
order to display the HTML job output as a file content window.
Displaying an HTML File on a Personal Page
ä Display HTML files on Personal Pages:
1
Select Explore, navigate the folders until you find the document you want to add to your Personal Page.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
From the Subscribe window, select the Personal Pages tab.
4
Select Display file/output as a File Content Window.
If this option is not available, this file/output cannot be displayed as a file content window.
5
Optional: To add the file content window to a personal page, click the desired personal page.
The HTML displays the embeddable content windows list.
Adding a File Content Window to Personal Pages
ä Add file content windows to Personal Page:s
1
Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
Tip: To define the location of the Broadcast Messages and content windows on your page,
select the personal page and right-click. Select Personalize Layout.
2
Select the Personal Page you want to add the file content window to and click Personalize Content.
3
From Select Content Window, click the desired file content window(s) and add it to the Content list for
your Personal Page.
4
Click Save Settings.
Removing a File Content Window from All Personal Pages
ä Remove file content windows from Personal Pages:
1
Select Explore and navigate to the original HTML document/output file.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
On Subscribe, clear Display file/output as a File Content Window.
4
Select OK.
Embedding Interactive Reporting Document Sections in Personal Pages
Embed sections of Interactive Reporting documents or Interactive Reporting job output into
Personal Pages.
Using Personal Pages 153
l
l
If the item is an Interactive Reporting job output, it must be HTML from a single-cycle job.
The most recent job output is displayed in the embedded section and it is not interactive.
Embedded Interactive Reporting sections are fully interactive, with options available from
the pop-up menu.
Specify whether to include the Interactive Reporting Main Menu bar or the Navigation bar as
part of the embedded section. Interactive Reporting document sections you can embed are:
l
l
l
Results - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
Tables - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
Pivot - Reduced vertically to fit in the container, with horizontal scroll bars. To view more
vertical regions, use the page navigation options available on the Main Menu bar.
l
Chart - Scaled proportionally to fit in the container.
l
Reports - Clipped to fit in the container.
l
Dashboard - Clipped to fit in the container.
Embedding an Interactive Reporting Section on a Personal Page
ä Embed Interactive Reporting sections on a Personal Page:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the Interactive Reporting document or job output file.
2
Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3
Click Personal Pages tab.
4
Select Add sections of Interactive Reporting Document.
5
Select the section you want to add from Embed Section.
6
Select the Personal Page that you want to update.
Note: A list is displayed if you have more than one Personal Page.
7
Click Add.
The section is displayed in the Embedded BQY Sections list box.
8
Specify the size you want each section to be on the Personal Page.
Select the desired section from Embedded BQY Sections and specify its height and width in
pixels in the respective field.
9
Click OK.
Editing Embedded Interactive Reporting Sections on a Personal Page
After embedding an Interactive Reporting section, you can edit its properties.
154 Viewing and Organizing Information
ä Edit the appearance of embedded sections:
1
Select Favorites , then My Personal Page.
2
From the personal page, select
3
Change the settings from the Edit Results Section window:
l
l
l
l
Replace embedded section - (Read only) Displays the section currently embedded.
With section - Select a section to replace the currently embedded section. The name of
currently embedded section is displayed by default.
Specify section size - Enter the size of the section in pixels.
Toolbar display - Select the Interactive Reporting Server toolbar to embed with the
section (the default is none).
m
m
m
4
.
Select Navigation Only, to have the first page, previous page, next page, and last
page toolbar buttons only.
Select Standard, to have all toolbar buttons except for the Interactive Reporting
Server help button.
Select None, to have no toolbar displayed.
Click Save Settings.
The edited embedded section is displayed on your Personal Page.
Removing Embedded Interactive Reporting Sections from a Personal Page
You can remove any embedded Interactive Reporting section from your Personal Page.
ä To remove embedded Interactive Reporting sections from Personal Pages, click X in the title
of the file content window containing the Interactive Reporting section you want to remove.
ä To remove an embedded Interactive Reporting section from all Personal Pages:
1
Select Explore, navigate the folders until you find the item containing the embedded sections you want
to remove from your Personal Page.
2
Right-click the item, click Subscribe.
3
On the Subscribe page, navigate to Add Sections of Interactive Reporting Document.
4
Select the section you want to remove from the list box and click Remove.
5
Click OK.
Creating Bookmarks
Include bookmarks on a Personal Page. A bookmark is a text link or image link to a item or to
a URL.
Using Personal Pages 155
Adding Bookmarks for a EPM Workspace Item from Explore
ä Add Bookmarks for items:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
On Personal Pages tab, select Add to My Bookmarks.
Note: The new bookmark is displayed on every Personal Page that includes the My
Bookmarks item.
4
Select OK.
5
Go to your Personal Page.
The Bookmark is displayed in the My Bookmarks list.
Note: When selecting a Web Analysis, Production Reporting, Financial Reporting, or
Interactive Reporting jobs bookmark from the My Bookmarks list of a personal page,
it opens as a new tab in EPM Workspace.
Adding Image Bookmarks for a EPM Workspace Item
Bookmarks are added for items you subscribe to, except folders.
ä Add image bookmarks for EPM Workspace items:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the original item.
2
Right-click the item, select Subscribe.
3
On Subscribe Settings, Add As Image Bookmark. Specify the following information:
a. Specify graphic files you want to use. Select either:
l
l
A pre-configured icon file from the drop-down list
A custom icon file (your administrator needs to add your custom graphic to the
EPM Workspace file system and give you the path to it). Using a graphic file from
your local file system does not work.
b. Enter the desired dimensions for displaying the image (in pixels).
4
Select OK.
Adding URL Bookmarks from Personal Pages
Bookmarks can also be added from within Personal Pages.
ä Adding bookmarks from Personal Pages:
1
Select Favorites , then My Personal Page.
2
Select a personal page from the list. Right-click and select Add bookmark URL.
156 Viewing and Organizing Information
3
From the Add URL Bookmark to My Bookmarks dialog, enter a bookmark name and URL for bookmark.
4
Select Save.
Note: The URL must begin with either http:// or https://.
Using Exceptions
Exceptions are conditions or results (such as a threshold being reached) requiring intervention.
Exceptions cause corresponding indicators on a subscribing users Exceptions Dashboard to
change, or a notification to be sent to users who have subscribed.
The exceptions dashboard is an optional content window used to monitor exceptions, it displays
on Personal Pages. Each indicator represents one exception-capable job or items manually
flagged as an exception.
Use exceptions with jobs or items:
l
Using monitored exceptions with jobs:
m
m
m
l
Programmatically enable monitored exceptions on jobs. The exception is set when
certain conditions or thresholds are met. Job exceptions are generated by Production
Reporting jobs, Interactive Reporting jobs, or generic jobs. See “Configuring
Exceptions” on page 158.
Subscribe to jobs and choose to be notified by e-mail when the exception occurs.
Place jobs on the Exceptions Dashboard and view its exception status. For each job you
add to the Exceptions Dashboard, a green traffic light icon is displayed. If the job
generates an exception, the traffic light changes to red. “Using the Exceptions
Dashboard” on page 158.
Using exceptions with items:
Note: An item must have version properties in order to use exceptions.
m
Manually set exception status for items. See “Configuring Exceptions” on page 158.
m
Subscribe to items and choose to be notified by e-mail when the exception occurs.
m
You can place items on the Exceptions Dashboard and view its exception status. For
each item you add to the Exceptions Dashboard, a red traffic light icon is displayed.
Items cannot be added to the exception dashboard unless the exception status is set. See
“Using the Exceptions Dashboard” on page 158.
You have only one Exceptions Dashboard, even if you put it on multiple Personal Pages. If you
modify the Exceptions Dashboard on one Personal Page, it changes on all of your Personal Pages
that include it.
Using Personal Pages 157
Configuring Exceptions
Configure exceptions for jobs and items with version properties. There are two ways to configure
exceptions:
l
l
Programmatically set-up a job to generate exceptions if certain conditions are met. When
you run the job if an exception occurs, the exception status of the job is set.
Manually set exceptions on an item by setting the property to Flag as an Exception.
ä Programmatically enable a job with monitored exceptions capability:
l
l
l
Design the Production Reporting job (*.sqr) or generic jobs to write exceptions to the
output.properties file. See “Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or
Generic Programs” on page 492.
Design the generic job, to write exceptions to the output.properties file. “Supporting
Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs” on page 492.
Design the Interactive Reporting job to write exceptions. See “Supporting Exceptions in
Interactive Reporting Programs” on page 460.
ä To set exception status for items manually, from Explore, set the property Flag as an
Exception for the latest version of the item. See “Version Properties” on page 140.
Using the Exceptions Dashboard
The exceptions dashboard shows a traffic light indicator for each job or item you place on it.
The traffic light indicator changes to indicate if an exception occurred (red) or did not occur
(green).
Note: Items have version properties to use exceptions and the exceptions dashboard.
ä Use Exceptions Dashboard with jobs:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the job whose exception you want to monitor, right-click the job, click
Properties.
2
From Advanced, select If exceptions are generated, allow users to add to their Exceptions
Dashboard, click OK.
3
Select Explore, navigate to the job, right-click the job, click Subscribe.
4
On Personal Pages tab, select Add to Exceptions Dashboard.
If this option is not on the Subscribe Settings page, the file cannot be monitored for
exceptions.
5
Click OK.
A traffic light is added to the exceptions dashboard. The traffic light indicator is green. If the job
is run and generates an exception, then the traffic light indicator changes to red.
158 Viewing and Organizing Information
ä Use Exceptions Dashboard with items:
1
Select Explore, navigate to the item that has an exception you want to monitor.
2
Right-click the item, click Properties.
3
From Advanced, select If exceptions are generated, allow users to add to their Exceptions
Dashboard.
4
From Versions, set the property Flag as an Exception for the latest version of the item and click OK.
5
Select Explore, navigate to the item.
6
Right-click the item, from the shortcut menu, select Subscribe.
7
On Subscribe Settings, select Add to Exceptions Dashboard.
If this option is not on the Subscribe Settings page, this file cannot be monitored for
exceptions.
8
Click OK.
A red traffic light is added to the exceptions dashboard, to indicate that an exception is set for
this item.
Adding the Exceptions Dashboard to a Personal Page
Add the Exceptions Dashboard to Personal Pages or just one.
ä Add Exceptions Dashboard to Personal Pages:
1
Go to the Personal Page to which you want to add an Exceptions Dashboard.
2
Click
3
Click Exceptions Dashboard and click
4
Click Save Settings.
.
.
Customizing the Exceptions Dashboard
Customize the display of the Exceptions Dashboard.
ä To customize Exceptions Dashboard:
1
Select Favorites, select a Personal Page.
2
On Exceptions Dashboard, select
3
To not show green lights, and have red lights displayed when an exception occurs, enable the Only
display links to artifacts that have exceptions.
.
Using Personal Pages 159
Note: This option is applicable for monitored exceptions used with jobs. Traffic lights
display when the exception status is set. You cannot show a green traffic light for
items.
4
When exceptions occur and you want to see its exception text explanatory message next to its red light,
select Display exception messages next to graphic indicators.
Note: There is a smartcut tag called getException() that displays exception messages on
a Interactive Reporting dashboard. For more information, see the Hyperion Interactive
Reporting Studio User’s Guide
5
Click Change Properties.
Modifying the Layout of a Personal Page
Use the Layout button to select different layout styles for Personal Pages or to rearrange content
windows.
Specifying Layout Style
The layout style of a Personal Page includes how many columns or sections the page has and
where they are displayed on the page.
ä Specify layout styles:
1
Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select a Personal Page, then select
3
Click Select Layout Style and select a layout style.
4
If you want to put content windows in a section across the top or bottom of the Personal Page, click
Show Header Section or Show Footer Section.
5
Click Save Settings.
.
Rearranging Content Windows
ä Move content windows:
1
Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select a Personal Page, then click Layout.
3
Select a content window you want to move.
4
If you want to move the selected content window up or down within the section (column, header or
footer) it is currently in, click a vertical arrow. If you want to move the selected content window to another
section, click a horizontal arrow.
5
Continue selecting and moving content windows until they are arranged as you want.
160 Viewing and Organizing Information
6
If you want to move the Broadcast Messages content windows, select Above all Content Windows or
Below all Content Windows in the Broadcast Messages section of the Content Layout page.
7
Click Save Settings.
Changing the Colors on a Personal Page
Select color schemes for Personal Pages, or individually set colors for page elements.
ä Change colors on Personal Pages:
1
Select Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select
3
Select a color scheme.
4
If you want to set colors individually, click Customize Colors for Custom. If not, go to step 7.
.
Each colorable Personal Page element displays an array of color samples above a My Own
__ Color option. Select any color in the array by selecting its radio button. Colors shown
next to the My Own __ Color entry box is the current color of the element.
5
Each element whose color you want to change, select the new color you want or enter a hexadecimal
color code (for example, #000000 is the hexadecimal color code for black) in the My Own __ Color
entry box.
6
Select Save Settings.
7
Select a color scheme option:
l
l
8
Change all my Personal Pages to use this Color Scheme - Applies the specified color
scheme to all your existing Personal Pages.
Use this as my default Color Scheme for all new Personal Pages - Applies the specified
color scheme to the current Personal Page and any future ones.
Select Save Settings.
Working With Personal Pages
Create multiple Personal Pages for different purposes, specify a default Personal Page if you have
more than one, and publish a Personal Page so that others can use it as their own.
l
“Creating a Personal Page” on page 161
l
“Copying a Personal Page” on page 162
l
“Deleting Personal Pages” on page 163
l
“Publishing and Replacing Personal Pages” on page 163
Creating a Personal Page
You can create multiple Personal Pages.
Using Personal Pages 161
ä To create a Personal Page:
1
Select File, then New, then Personal Page.
2
Use
to add the content windows you want (listed on the left side) to the Personal Page Content
list for your new Personal Page (on the right), click Next.
3
Select a layout style and click Next.
Note: Layout styles only show the Personal Page portion of the browser window; the View
pane also is displayed on the left. A Header section is a wide area that contains one
or more content windows. A Footer section is the same, but located at the bottom of
the page.
4
For Layout, arrange the various content windows where you want them on your Personal Page. Select a
content window and
to change a content window’s position in a section. When you are done, click Next.
then
5
to move the content window between sections. Select a content window and
On Edit Personal Page, enter a name and description for your Personal Page, select a color scheme,
click Finish or Finish & Publish.
Note: Selecting Finish opens the personal page just created for viewing. Finish & Publish
enables you to assign permissions during the publishing process of Personal Pages
prior to viewing.
You can further customize the colors at a later time, see “Changing the Colors on a Personal
Page” on page 161. On the My Personal Pages page, the new Personal Page is listed.
Also, from Favorites, select your Personal Page to view.
Copying a Personal Page
In addition to publishing new Personal Pages, you can also copy a published Personal Page to a
new Personal Page.
Note: You must have a published Personal Page prior to performing the following steps.
ä To copy published Personal Pages:
1
Select Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select
.
162 Viewing and Organizing Information
Note:
is not displayed if you exceeded the number of Personal Pages allowed by your
administrator. You must remove a Personal Page to enable
3
.
Select Copy Published Personal Page, select Next.
The Add Existing Personal Pages page is displayed.
4
Select the personal page(s) you want to copy from the list, select Finish.
Select
. The page(s) are displayed in Manage Personal Pages.
Deleting Personal Pages
ä Delete Personal Pages:
1
Select Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
Select the Personal Page you want to delete from My Personal Pages.
3
Right-click and select Remove Page.
Note: Select Restore Settings to restore the deleted Personal Page to the list.
4
Select Save Settings.
Publishing and Replacing Personal Pages
Publish new Personal Pages or replace published Personal Pages using the content of your
Personal Page. Publishing a Personal Page enables other users to copy it.
Note: To publish Personal Pages, you need access permissions to the Personal Page folder.
ä Publish or replace Personal Pages:
1
Select Favorites , then Manage Personal Pages.
2
On My Personal Pages, select the Personal Page you want to publish, right-click and select Publish.
3
To publish, enter a name and a description in the Publish New Personal Page section, select Publish.
The name and description defaults to what you have already assigned to this Personal Page.
The name and description should communicate what is distinctive about this page.
Note: When you Publish and run an Interactive Reporting or Production Reporting
job to generate the job output, the default naming convention for the job output
changes to list the job and job output together.
4
To replace: In Replace Personal Page, select the page to replace, click Replace.
You can replace a published Personal Page with one that has a different name. The contents
of the published page are replaced and the published page name remains the same.
Using Personal Pages 163
5
To set access permissions on the Personal Page you just published: select Edit Permissions.
The default access permissions when publishing Personal Pages are the same as basic
documents. To set access permissions, see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
Workspace Pages
Workspace Pages enable users to create, edit, and aggregate content from Oracle and non-Oracle
sources from EPM Workspace repository, into a single environment.
Oracle sources include:
l
Interactive Reporting— Sections within the document, Sections within the job, Sections
within the snapshot
l
Web Analysis Document
l
Production Reporting or SQR Document or Snapshot
l
Financial Reporting Document, Snapshot
l
Performance Scorecard Templates
l
Favorites
l
Alerts or Exceptions
l
Folder listing (no subfolder items)
Non-Oracle source files include:
l
URL
l
Text files
l
Image files
l
HTML files
l
Microsoft Office documents (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Project)
l
XML files
l
RTF files
l
PDF files
l
Image files—.jpg, .gif, .png
l
Shortcuts
There are two types of Workspace Pages, My Workspace Pages and Shared Workspace Pages.
My Workspace pages are customizable workspace pages created by a user that are marked
specially so that they can be easily accessed from one single place without having to navigate the
repository. You can create shortcuts to My Workspace Pages that may be stored in any folder.
Shared Workspace pages are stored in a system folder that authorized users can access from
Explore. Users that have access to this folder can move My Workspace pages manually within
Explore to promote them to the rest of the organization. A user needs Content Publisher role
to be able to save anything to the repository, including Workspace pages. There is also a Home
164 Viewing and Organizing Information
page Workspace page that is installed with EPM Workspace that you can point to using
Preferences as a default start page, for more information see “Using Home Page” on page 63.
Additional Workspace page features include:
l
Provide content aggregation
l
Provide interactivity directly within a workspace page
l
Easy self service creation with supplied templates
l
Ability to build a dashboard in very little time
l
For advanced users, free form layout mechanism
l
Navigate through EPM Workspace repository
Creating Workspace Pages
Templates are used as a starting point to create Workspace pages. Templates allow the user to
specify in advance the layout of the workspace page before adding content. A user can then drag
and drop content from the Content browser (left pane) to a layout area. The Content browser
contains the following sources to select from: EPM Workspace repository, Favorites, and
Applications repository. The Applications repository contains Performance Scorecard and nonReporting and Analysis artifacts. Users can only select one item at a time from the Content
browser.
The Find at the bottom of the Content browser allows users to perform a search in the chosen
source. Find searches EPM Workspace repository items based on matches to the name of the
object, it does not perform finds based on other attributes of the object. Find performs a search
of the entered string without having to force the user to enter wildcard characters. Results are
displayed in alphabetical ascending order within the Content browser. The results are also
displayed in the source drop down allowing users to switch between find results and repository
navigation.
ä To create a Workspace page:
1
Do one of the following:
l
Select File, then New, then Workspace Page.
a. Select a template from the Templates dialog. Selected template is highlighted.
b. Select OK. Workspace page is created with chosen template.
l
Select File, then New, then Document.
a. Select Create a Workspace Page and click Next.
b. Select one of the templates. Selected template is highlighted.
c. Click Finish. Workspace page is created with chosen template.
2
From the Content Browser, select a source for the location of the file you want to add to the layout area.
3
Select the file and drag and drop from Content Browser to a layout area. The title bar displays the title
of the document by default.
Workspace Pages 165
4
Optional: To resize a layout area, select the lower right corner with your mouse and drag to resize.
5
Optional: To move a layout area, select the title area with your mouse and drag to new position.
6
Optional: To add a URL, Favorites, or Alerts Exceptions in the content area of a Workspace page, select
Edit, then Add Content, then URL,Favorites, or Alerts Exceptions.
7
Optional: To add a folder listing, select the folder and drag and drop from Content Browser to the content
area of Workspace page.
8
To edit a layout area, select
167.
from the layout area toolbar. See “Editing Layout Area” on page
Note: The layout area toolbar must be enabled to use the icons in the toolbar. Select Edit,
then Show Portlet Toolbars to enable and disable.
9
Optional: Select
in the layout area toolbar to open the content as another tab within EPM Workspace.
10 Optional: Select
to delete the layout area.
11 Optional: Select
to maximize the content to consume the entire content area. Once maximized, you
can restore to it's original size and location by selecting
.
12 By default, a Workspage page is saved as My Workspace Page. This allows the Workspace page to be
available from the Navigate, then Workspace Pages, then My Workspace Pages menu and from the
File, then Open, then Workspace pages, then My Workspace Pages menu.
To save the Workspace page without having it available in the above menu locations, deselect
Save as My Workspace Page from the Save As dialog.
13 Optional: To save a Workspace page as a Shared Workspace page, from the Explore module, click and
drag the Workspace page file to the system folder where Shared Workspace pages are stored.
Note: You must be an authorized user that has access to the folder where Shared Workspace
pages are stored.
Layout Area
Layout area is used to designate an area on a Workspace page where content can be placed. Each
layout area is independent, and can be resized and overlap. Layout areas also have properties
that can be modified, see “Editing Layout Area” on page 167. Each layout area can be positioned
anywhere within the content area. Toolbars are used to perform functions such as editing the
properties, maximizing and restoring, deleting, and launching the layout area as another tab
within EPM Workspace. You can add layout areas to an existing Workspace page by dragging
and dropping repository content from the Content Browser into the Content area. Additional
content includes: URL, Favorites, and Alerts. URL is used to specify any URL as the source
location for the content. Users should not add URLs to untrusted sites for security purposes.
Favorites displays the user's favorites within EPM Workspace. This provides quick access to a
user's Favorite repository. Alerts content displays the alerts or exceptions that are generated by
Interactive Reporting and Production Reporting. Users can also add a folder to the content area
by dragging and dropping a folder from the Content Browser. Links to files contained within
166 Viewing and Organizing Information
the folder are displayed which when selected launches the file as a tab in EPM Workspace.
Subfolders are not listed.
Editing Layout Area
Users can edit the properties of a layout area in a Workspace page.
ä To edit layout area properties:
1
To rename a layout area, enter a name in the Title text box.
2
Source displays the path to the file in the layout area. Select the Select button to select another file or
folder to replace the existing content.
Note: You cannot change the source for Favorites or Alerts content.
3
Optional: Complete the following if you selected the Select button in the previous step.
a. From the Browse dialog, select a source for the file you are searching for.
b. Enter the filename in the Find textbox and select Find.
c. Select OK.
4
Enter values for size and position.
5
For Financial Reporting, Web Analysis, and Interactive Reporting products, you can select the Show
Portlet Toolbar option from Properties to display the content toolbar.
6
Optional: Deselect Show Scrollbars if you do not want to display scrollbars for layout area.
Note: Documents in a layout area that have their own scroll bars cannot be hidden for
example, a .PDF document.
Workspace Pages 167
168 Viewing and Organizing Information
Launching Applications
7
In This Chapter
Launching Oracle's Hyperion Applications............................................................. 169
Launching Oracle's Hyperion Applications
Applications from the Navigate menu can contain a list of Profitability and Cost Management,
Oracle Business Intelligence, Oracle Hyperion Performance Scorecard, Fusion Edition,
Planning, or Financial Management applications which you can open. Applications is displayed
if both of the following are true:
l
A user has rights
l
Applications have been installed and are available
The list of available applications is retrieved from Oracle's Hyperion® Shared Services. When
an application is selected, it launches in a new window, passing the single sign on token so you
are not prompted again for credentials.
The list of available applications are filtered by the user's provisioned status. For example, if the
currently logged on user was not provisioned for a project that included the Planning Real App,
it would not be listed. For additional information on using Planning applications, see Oracle
Hyperion Planning User’s Guide, for Financial Management applications, Oracle Hyperion
Financial Management User’s Guide, Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management,
Fusion Edition applications, see Oracle Hyperion Profitability and Cost Management User's
Guide, and for Oracle Business Intelligence application products, see the Oracle Business
Intelligence product guides.
ä To launch applications:
1
Select Navigate , then Applications.
A list of available applications for the products installed and for those you have rights to are
displayed.
Note: If instanced products are installed but the current user is not provisioned for any
application instances, the Navigate, then Applications menu displays a No
Applications disabled menu item followed by a Refresh menu item. None of these
three items appear if the user is provisioned for any application instances. The same
applies to the File, then Open, and then Applications menu.
Launching Oracle's Hyperion Applications 169
2
Select the application you want to open.
The application launches as a tab at the bottom of the EPM Workspace allowing easy
switching between screens.
Note: Preferences can be set when viewing certain applications from EPM Workspace. See
Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
170 Launching Applications
8
Using Financial Reporting
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................. 171
EPM Workspace Tasks................................................................................... 171
Interacting with Documents ............................................................................. 172
Enabling Viewing ......................................................................................... 173
Preview Preferences ..................................................................................... 173
Logging On to Database Connections.................................................................. 173
Viewing Snapshots....................................................................................... 182
Viewing Books ............................................................................................ 182
Viewing Snapshot Books ................................................................................ 183
Overview
EPM Workspace enables previewing of Financial Reporting documents, such as reports and
books, from the Explore module. You can preview reports and books in HTML or PDF format.
Note: Text automatically wraps within a grid's cell. When print previewing PDF reports, text
cells with long text are automatically merged into the next cell to the right, if that cell is
empty. When previewing HTML reports, text cells are not automatically merged unless
the Merge feature was applied at design time. The rows height automatically adjusts to
display all text.
Note: You must have file permissions to view reports or books. See the Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide .
EPM Workspace Tasks
Tasks, other than previewing, performed through EPM Workspace.
l
l
Customize report and book elements. For example, change the POV before or after running
the report or book.
Export reports, snapshot reports, XML (report-definition file), PDF, HTML, Word, Excel,
or PowerPoint.
Overview 171
Use Related Content to link to Financial Reporting reports and EPM Workspace URLs.
l
Subscribe to Financial Reporting documents to receive e-mail notifications when reports
are modified and add notifications to your favorites. See Chapter 6, “Viewing and Organizing
Information.”
l
Modify permissions to Financial Reporting documents. See Chapter 6, “Viewing and
Organizing Information.”
l
Organize the E-mail Recipient list.
l
Types of reports and books available from the Explore module:
l
Reports—Populated with data from data sources; users can customize by selecting members
l
Snapshots—Contain static data for a specific point in time; populated with data when saved.
Books—Contain sets of dynamic reports and, optionally, tables of contents. Reports are run
for all specified member combinations.
l
Snapshot books—Contain sets of snapshot reports and, optionally, tables of contents; can
be viewed for multiple POVs
l
Designers incorporate EPM Workspace features into reports and books to enable viewers to
perform tasks:
Table 43
EPM Workspace Features
Reports
Snapshots
Books
Snapshot Books
Prompt
Yes
No
Yes
No
User POV
Yes
No
No
No
XML, HTML, and PDF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page Axis
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Expansions
Yes
No
No
No
Related Content
Yes
No
No
No
Grid POV
Yes
No
No
No
Data Security1
Yes
No
Yes
No
E-mail Links
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1Data
source security is applied.
Interacting with Documents
For Financial Reporting, you use the Viewer to change the userPOV for reports and books.
172 Using Financial Reporting
Note: The Document panel is not displayed if you select to display the POV above the report
or book. See Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace”.
Enabling Viewing
EPM Workspace viewing prerequisites:
l
l
For PDF, Acrobat Reader must be installed.
For reports in PDF, a PDF writer (Acrobat Distiller, GNU Ghostscript, or AFPL Ghostscript)
must be installed with the print server. If a PDF viewer is not available, only report names
are listed.
ä To use Internet Explorer for viewing PDF reports in EPM Workspace:
1
Open Internet Explorer.
2
Select Tools , then Internet Options.
3
In Internet Options, select the General tab, and, in Temporary Internet Files, select Settings.
4
In Settings, Check for newer versions of stored pages, select Every visit to the page.
5
Click OK twice.
Preview Preferences
You can set how to view reports and books; PDF Preview or HTML Preview. See Chapter 2,
“Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
Logging On to Database Connections
You must be defined as a user, with a user name and password, in the data source that your
report is using. For example, if you want to view a report that uses Analytic Services as a data
source, you must log on to the database connection with a user account defined in Analytic
Services.
Logging on usually occurs automatically. However, if you are not registered in the database, you
are prompted to log on through the Database Connection Properties dialog box, which displays
the database connection name assigned by the report designer. Ask your administrator for a user
name and password. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items ”.
ä To log on to a database connection:
1
In Database Connection Properties, enter your user name and password.
2
Click OK.
Enabling Viewing 173
Changing Expired Passwords for Essbase Users
Essbase administrators can set conditions to control when Essbase users have to change their
passwords in Financial Reporting.
ä To change your expired Essbase password from EPM Workspace, when prompted:
1
Log on with your current user name and password.
2
Click Go.
3
in Change Analytic Services Password, enter your old password and new password.
4
In Confirm Password, reenter the new password.
5
Click OK.
Viewing Reports
If the report contains dimensions on the user POV, they are displayed above the report or book
or in the EPM Workspace document panel. Setting dimensions on the user POV enables
modification of the dimensions, which results in a modified POV and requires regeneration of
the report or book.
Note: In the repository, you can display the current user POV settings page before reports or
books are run. Current user POV settings can be edited after reports or books are run.
See Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
Reports viewed in PDF are generated using the user POV and output in PDF. Reports with
multiple page members are generated for all page members and displayed in Acrobat Reader in
EPM Workspace. HTML reports are generated using the user POV.
Viewing and customizing reports tasks:
l
“Printing Reports and Books” on page 175
l
“Changing User POV” on page 176
l
“Responding to Prompts” on page 177
l
“Using Expansions” on page 178
l
“Using Related Content” on page 179
l
“Selecting Members” on page 180
l
“Changing Members for Grid POVs” on page 182
ä To view a report:
1
Select Viewer , then Explore, then select a report or book that has prompts.
2
Select File , then Open , then Document.
174 Using Financial Reporting
Note: The file opens in PDF or HTML, as set Preferences. See Chapter 2, “Setting
Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
Tip: Select the report or book from the repository. Then, right-click the report, and select
Open in , then HTML Preview or Open in , then PDF Preview.
3
Optional: If the Current User POV Settings page is displayed, change the settings and click OK.
See “Changing User POV” on page 176.
If the page is displayed, User Point of View is selected in Preferences for Financial Reporting.
See Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM Workspace.”
4
After the report opens, in the View pane, click the database connection right arrow, and review POV
settings.
5
Select a dimension to invoke Member Selection, select another member, then click OK.
Report content changes to reflect the POV change. For information on Member Selection,
see “Selecting Members” on page 180.
6
Select View , then Preview User Point of View.
7
In Preview User Point of View, change one or more dimension selections by clicking Select.
8
In Member Selection, select another member, click OK.
The report is refreshed. See “Changing User POV” on page 176.
Printing Reports and Books
You can print any type of report or book. For dynamic reports and books, data is refreshed. For
snapshot reports and books data is not refreshed.
ä To print a report:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, open the report.
Respond to prompts and modify as needed.
2
Select File , and then Print .
Note: The output is fully formatted, in PDF, for end-user use.
ä To print a book:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, open the book.
Respond to prompts and modify, as needed.
2
Select File , then Open In , then Complete Book in PDF to create a PDF of the entire book, including
all reports.
Logging On to Database Connections 175
ä To print a report from a book:
1
From Table of Contents view, select a report in the book and select Show Report.
2
Select File , then Print.
Changing User POV
User POV, which specifies members for dimensions not defined on report grids, is available for
dynamic reports and books, as specified during design-time. You can change user POV members
before running reports and books and then run the reports and books to display new-member
data. You can also edit user POVs after running reports and books.
When you view a report or book in HTML, the user POV can be displayed in the Document
Panel of the View pane or above the report or book table of contents in the Content area.
Figure 2
Financial Reporting HTML Report
Each dimension or member is a link. When a link is selected, it displays a Member Selection
page from which you can select members for the dimension. The members for a dimension are
shown in Tree view, which is a hierarchal view of the members of the dimension. By default,
Tree view shows only the top-level member. You can expand a member to see its children.
Note: Financial Management dimensions often have more than one top-level node.
Member-search methods:
l
l
Expand data-member rows, and search visually. You can use the Expand all Rows button to
expand the rows.
Use the Find text box to search by member or alias and description. Search criteria can
include wildcards; for example, * and ?.
See “Selecting Members” on page 180.
ä To preview user POV settings prior to running a report or book:
1
Select File , then Preference , then Financial Reporting , then General. Select one of the following for
Location of Point of View. and a default location for the User Point of View when previewing a report;
In View Pane or Above Report/Book.
176 Using Financial Reporting
l
l
Select In View Pane to display the user POV selections in the Viewer. If you do not select
this option, the Viewer displays a Preview User Point of View option that, if selected,
displays the Preview User Point of View dialog box.
Select Above Report/Book to display the user POV above the report or book.
2
Click OK.
3
From the repository, select the report or book.
4
Select File , then Open In , then PDF Preview or File , then Open In , then HTML Preview, or save the
book as a snapshot book. The user POV is displayed in the location specified in Preferences.
5
Click a dimension to modify the POV in Member Selection.
See “Selecting Members” on page 180.
Responding to Prompts
Some reports are designed with prompts, which are displayed when you view the reports or
books containing the reports. You respond to prompts and provide requested information by
selecting members from prompt lists. You can edit prompts manually. If the prompts contain
alias names, you convert them to member names.
SAP BW Variable Support in Financial Reporting
SAP BW variables are treated similar to Financial Reporting Member Selection prompts with
some key differences: Variables are defined on the Cube, so no action is necessary to put them
into a report. When a Cube has one or more variables present and a report/book which references
that Cube is executed, the user is prompted to enter a response to any variables present in the
Cube. All variables which are marked “ready for input” are shown for any report/book which
references the Cube. The Respond to Prompt dialog box, is used to respond to Financial
Reporting member selection prompts, as well as Variable responses. There are some differences:
a Financial Reporting prompt always allows one or more members to be entered, whereas a
variable can be defined to require a single member, numerous members, or a interval or range
of members. Variables may be defined to not require a value. Variables can be set to take a
numeric value instead of a member name. The Respond to Prompts dialog shows prompts and/
or variables within the same dialog. For variables which take a single or numerous members, the
user interface behaves the same as a prompt (except that if the variable takes a single member
the member selection tree will only allow a single member to be picked). For variables which
take an interval or range of members, two member selection/numeric value fields are shown;
one for the “from” and one for the “to”. The member selection selector only allow a single
member to be selected for either of those member selection fields. For variables which take a
numeric value, the no member selection buttons are shown. The following describes the Respond
to Prompts columns when a report goes against a cube which is a variable:
l
l
l
Variable — shows the variable description
Type — shows the type of variable which can be: Required Leaf Member Variable, Required
Non-Leaf Member Variable, Required Numeric Variable, Optional Leaf Member Variable,
or Optional Non-Leaf Member Variable.
Selection — shows the description of the currently selected members with default values.
Logging On to Database Connections 177
l
Source — shows the report or grid which references the datasource which contains the
variable.
The Run button validates the prompt members and variable values. Errors display next to the
prompt/variable which has the error. The Reset button resets the prompt members and variable
values to the initial, default values.
When a report has a member selection prompt in the Report and goes against a Cube which has
an “interval” variable, the prompts are separately grouped to clarify the difference.
ä To respond to a prompt when previewing a report or book:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, navigate to a report or book that has prompts.
2
Select the report or book and select File , then Open In , then PDF Preview or File , then Open In , then
HTML Preview.
Note: The file opens in either PDF or HTML. This is set from the Preferences dialog box.
For more information, see Chapter 2, “Setting Preferences and Personalizing EPM
Workspace.”
3
Under the Selection column Respond to Prompts, perform an action:
l
Enter the member name in the text box for the respective prompt, if known. If the text
box is disabled, the prompt contains alias names. To edit the text box, select Edit
Member Names. If more than one member is provided for the prompt, members must
be separated by commas.
Note: Selecting Edit Member Names displays the member names in the text box, not
the alias names. Edit the member name associated with that alias.
l
. Select Members is displayed. The default member
Click Go to Member Selection,
is listed in the right panel - Selected area. See “Selecting Members” on page 180.
4
Click OK.
5
Optional: To undo any changes, click Reset in Respond to Prompts.
6
Click Run. The report or book is displayed.
Using Expansions
Expansions, available only in HTML reports, enable report viewers to see children of members
and their corresponding data. Rows and columns for which expansions are enabled are displayed
with right-facing triangles, which you click to view associated detail. After expansions are
executed, pages are positioned near the rows or columns selected for expansion. Expansions are
set up during design-time.
ä To use expansions, perform an action:
l
Click the right-facing triangle for a row or column to view the next level of detail.
178 Using Financial Reporting
You can click multiple times, to see multiple levels of detail.
l
Click the down-facing triangle for an expanded row or column to collapse its members.
Using Related Content
Related Content links to other Financial Reporting documents and to documents on other
Hyperion servers. Related Content, set up by report designers, is available in HTML or PDF, as
specified by the designers. You view Related Content links by clicking grid values, which are
underlined by default.
Members of the cell selected for Related Content are passed to the user POV and used in the
related content report. Thus, the context of the Related Content report is the cell selected in the
primary report. For example, if you select the Margin row, Boston column cell, Financial
Reporting sets the user POV for the Account dimension to Margin and for the Entity dimension
to Boston and then displays the Related Content report. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Related Content rules:
l
If only one action (HTML or PDF) is enabled for the object, actions are not listed on the
Related Content page.
l
The default action (HTML or PDF) is listed next to the object label.
l
Folders open in the Related Content area.
l
Object-level security is observed inside folders and when reports are requested to be viewed.
ä To use Related Content:
1
In a report, click a Related Content link.
The report opens if a single report is selected in the list of Related Content and only one
action is specified. If multiple reports are selected or multiple actions are specified, the
Related Content page is displayed in a separate browser window.
2
If Related Content is displayed, click a link.
Logging On to Database Connections 179
If the link you click is not a folder, the document or action combination clicked is displayed.
Selecting Members
For reports, member selection is used to retrieve data and to determine how many members are
displayed. You can also search for specific members.
Member selection tasks:
l
“Selecting Members for User POVs” on page 181
l
“Finding Members” on page 181
l
“Changing Page Members” on page 181
Table 44
Items from the Member Selection Web Page
Item
Description
Cancels changes made to the Member Selection dialog box
Find button
Used to select the type of search. A member can be searched for and displayed as the name of the member,
the description or name in the alias table, and the name of the member and description/alias from a particular
table. To search, click Find.
Find text box
Enter search criteria (not case sensitive)
Displays members that match the search criteria
Use Wildcards
Enables use of wildcards in the Find text box (selected by default)
m
? for one character
m
* for multiple characters
Note: If search criteria includes a space, enclose the search phrase in double quotation marks. For
example, *IC Offset* is "*IC Offset*". If the "*" wildcard is at the end only, for example, IC Offset*,
quotation marks are not required.
Rows Per Page
Specifies a number of rows per page to be displayed on the member list (default 20). If the number of
members exceeds the number of rows, use buttons on the Edit Member Selection header to scroll through
the rows:
- Next Page
- Previous Page
Displays one or more member properties
Expands all row members of the hierarchy down to the child level
Collapses all rows
180 Using Financial Reporting
Selecting Members for User POVs
You can use the Member Selection dialog box to select members for reports and books. Using
selected dimensions, you can locate members and run reports or books for them.
ä To select a member for the user POV:
1
Open a report or book that contains a user POV.
2
Click a dimension or member link. Member Selection is displayed.
3
Click the plus sign (+) to display children.
4
Select a member, then click OK.
The reports runs for the member. Note that report content reflects the POV change.
Finding Members
From the Member Selection page, for the user POV, you can find and select members.
ä To find a member:
1
From the Find list, select criteria.
The search-options list is based on the report data source.
2
In Find, enter complete or partial text. You can use partial text with * or ? wildcard symbols. Use
Wildcards is selected by default.
Tip: Use double quotation marks to search for members containing spaces.
3
Click Find to display search results.
4
Select a member, then click OK. The reports runs for the member.
Changing Page Members
You can change a page member only if, during report design, multiple members are assigned to
the page axis of a grid. You change a page member to see different report views—HTML reports
only. After you change a page member, the report is refreshed and populated with the new page
member.
ä To change a page member:
1
From EPM Workspace, open a report with page-axis members in a grid.
2
From Page, select a member. The report is run, and data is displayed for the selected member.
Note: For PDF, data for page members is displayed on different pages.
Logging On to Database Connections 181
Changing Members for Grid POVs
Grids on reports can have dimensions on the grid POV. You can use the default member for
each dimension or select a new member to run for a report.
ä To change a member on the grid POV:
1
Open an HTML report that displays a grid POV.
2
Click a dimension or member link.
3
in Member Selection, select a member, then click OK. The report runs for the selected member.
Viewing Snapshots
Snapshots are similar to reports, except that they contain data for a specific point in time and
thus do not retrieve data dynamically. Therefore, data-level security from the data source is not
respected.
You can view snapshots in HTML or PDF. However, the print server and a PDF writer must be
available to display both HTML and PDF links. If the print server is not available, snapshots are
available only as HTML links.
See Table 43 for a list of features available in snapshots.
ä To view a snapshot:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, select View , then Display Items of Type , then Hyperion , then
Snapshot Book or Snapshot Report.
2
Right-click the snapshot and perform an action:
l
To view the snapshot in HTML, and select Open In , then HTML Preview.
l
To view the snapshot in PDF, and select Open In , then PDF Preview.
Viewing Books
From EPM Workspace, you can view books in HTML or PDF. In PDF, you can view the entire
book or individual reports in the book. The print server must be available to display both HTML
and PDF links. If the print server is not available, books are available only as HTML links. When
you select a report name, the report is generated for all member combinations specified in the
book. You can add reports to books and modify members. To create and modify books, see
Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.” To select and
modify members, see “Selecting Members” on page 180.
You can preview user POVs before running books. When you view books, user POVs and tables
of contents are displayed. User POVs specify members for dimensions not defined on report
grids. You can change user POV members and then run books to display new-member data. See
“Changing User POV” on page 176.
You use tables of contents to locate reports that you want to view and to set options.
182 Using Financial Reporting
Note: The time required to generate and display books in EPM Workspace varies, depending
on book size. You can cancel books at any time.
For reports with multiple page members, you can change page members and refresh the reports
to show the updated data. Reports are viewed in Acrobat Reader within EPM Workspace.
ä To view a book:
1
From the list of files in EPM Workspace repository, select View , then Display Items of Type , then
Hyperion , then Book.
2
Right-click the book, then perform an action:
3
l
To view the book in HTML, and select Open In , then HTML Preview.
l
To view the book in PDF, select Open In , then PDF Preview.
Optional: If the Current User POV Settings page is displayed, change the settings, then click OK.
See “Changing User POV” on page 176.
If the page is displayed, User Point of View is selected in the Preferences dialog box for
Financial Reporting. See “Selecting Members” on page 180.
4
Optional: Modify the user POV, from the Book Table of Contents page, and run the report for the new
POV.
5
In Book Table of Contents, review the list of reports and locate the report with the preferred members.
6
Perform an action:
l
l
7
For HTML books, click File , then Open In , then HTML Preview.
For PDF books, click File, then Open In , then PDF Preview to view individual reports,
or click File , then Open In , then Complete Book in PDF to view the entire book.
Optional: Perform one or two actions:
l
From the book editor, add reports and re-run the book.
See Chapter 9, “Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.”
l
From the book editor or from the book POV, modify members.
See “Selecting Members” on page 180.
Viewing Snapshot Books
You can view snapshot books from EPM Workspace in HTML or PDF. When you view snapshot
books in PDF, you can view the entire snapshot book or individual snapshot reports. The print
server must be available to display both HTML and PDF links. If the print server is not available,
snapshot books are available only as HTML links.
When you view snapshot books, tables of contents are displayed. You use tables of contents to
locate snapshot reports that you want to view and to set options.
Viewing Snapshot Books 183
ä To view a snapshot book:
1
From the repository, select View , then Display Items of Type , then Hyperion , then Snapshot Book.
2
Right-click a snapshot book, then perform an action:
l
To view the snapshot book in HTML, then select Open In , then HTML Preview.
l
To view the snapshot book in PDF, select Open In , then PDF Preview.
3
Optional: From the Table of Contents page, modify the user POV and run the report for the new POV.
4
In Book Table of Contents, review the list of reports and locate the report with the preferred members.
5
Perform an action:
l
l
For HTML snapshot books, click File , then Open In , then HTML Preview.
For PDF snapshot books, click File , then Open In , then PDF Preview to view individual
snapshot reports, or click File , then Open In , then Complete Book in PDF to view the
entire snapshot book.
184 Using Financial Reporting
9
Designing Documents for
Financial Reporting Batches and
Books
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................. 185
About Designing Documents............................................................................ 185
Designing Documents ................................................................................... 187
Creating Books ........................................................................................... 187
Selecting Members ...................................................................................... 189
Saving Books and Snapshot Books .................................................................... 195
Opening Books or Snapshot Books .................................................................... 196
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books ................................................................ 196
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books................................................. 196
Changing the Book Setup ............................................................................... 198
Setting Table of Contents Text .......................................................................... 199
Printing PDF Files ........................................................................................ 199
Printing Text Files......................................................................................... 200
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books ................................................................. 201
Designing Batches ....................................................................................... 201
Defining Prompts for a Batch ........................................................................... 202
Opening Batches......................................................................................... 204
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books ..................................... 204
Overview
From EPM Workspace, batches can be created, maintained, and scheduled and books can be
created, maintained, and run. Also, advanced member selection provides capabilities such as
member functions; for example, Children, Descendants and lists which can be used when editing
books.
About Designing Documents
For Financial Reporting module, you can define and save batches using EPM Workspace new
document wizard and copy and delete batches in the repository. Deleting a batch requires file
permissions to the batch. By default, only the scheduling user is assigned access rights to
snapshots and snapshot books in the repository. If you have file permissions to a batch, you can
Overview 185
run every report in the batch when scheduled. The scheduling user can assign file permissions
to other users and groups at the time of scheduling. For more information, see “Assigning File
Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books” on page 204.
Scheduled batches have a scheduled batch POV (Point of View), which you can modify while
scheduling. You can also specify prompt information for the batch. The POV and prompt
information, provides values for the POV and prompts specified for each book and report
contained in the batch. You can schedule batches to be processed immediately or in the future.
For more information on the scheduled batch POV, see Chapter 14, “Scheduling Jobs and
Batches.”
Reports or snapshot reports created in Reporting Studio and other artifacts located in the
repository such as text and PDF files and Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel and Word files, can be
assembled into a book, enabling you to generate their output in one session from EPM
Workspace. For example, you can schedule a set of reports and other artifacts to run once a
month. You can configure books to generate several versions of a report and different member
selections. A book containing those reports can be run at once. The reports contained in the
book can be printed or viewed individually in entirety.
Two types of books can be defined and saved to the repository:
l
l
Books—Comprises of reports and snapshot reports and other artifacts such as text and PDF
files and Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel and Word files. When you run a book, the report data
is dynamically retrieved from the database; the snapshot data remains static.
Snapshot books—A book saved as a snapshot book. The data contained in the reports, as
well as a table of contents, is created when you save a book. Whenever a snapshot book is
viewed, data-level security does not apply; data-level security is applied when the snapshot
book is created and is based upon the data level security that is set for the user that saved
the snapshot book.
A book contains a book POV, which is a combination of all dimensions in the user POVs for
each report in the book. Dimensions that are not defined in a report, default to the user POV
member and the dimensions are displayed in the book POV of the Book Editor. You can also
select the user POV as a member on the book POV, allowing you to modify the parameters since
they are no longer stored in the book definition.
The member selected for a dimension in the book POV is used in each report referencing the
book POV for that dimension. The data sources in the POV match the data sources used by the
reports in the book.
Note: When a book is scheduled as part of a batch, the dimension referring to the user POV are
controlled by the scheduled batch POV.
Tasks that can be performed with books and snapshot books:
l
l
Use batches to group and process sets of books. See Chapter 14, “Scheduling Jobs and
Batches.”
E-mail links to the books or snapshot books. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing
Items .”
186 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
l
Change a book’s data source. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items .”
l
Delete books or snapshot books. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items .”
l
l
l
Import books and snapshot books from a file system outside of the repository. See Chapter 5,
“Importing Artifacts.”
Export books and snapshot books. See Chapter 5, “Importing Artifacts.”
Perform advanced member selection capabilities such as member functions for Children
and Descendants, and lists.
Designing Documents
From EPM Workspace, you can create a book or batch using the Select a Task wizard. For more
information on these topics, see the following:
l
“Creating Books” on page 187
l
“Designing Batches” on page 201
Creating Books
Creating books includes the following:
l
“Saving Books and Snapshot Books” on page 195
l
“Opening Books or Snapshot Books” on page 196
l
“Renaming Books and Snapshot Books” on page 196
l
“Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books” on page 196
Books are created, edited and saved in EPM Workspace. You must have administrator or
designer rights to create a book. A book can include reports, snapshot reports, and third party
documents (Adobe Portable Document Format files (PDF), text (.txt) files, and Microsoft Office
Excel, PowerPoint and Word files). Third party documents are listed in the table of contents
and can be launched in the same manner as Financial Reporting documents. They are also
included in a PDF file, when opening a Book as “Complete Book in a File”.
Note: All file types must reside in the repository in order to select them for a book.
Note: When you save a book as a snapshot book, expansions and related content are removed.
When adding a report to a book, the report may contain prompts for member selection. Prompts
are defined when the book is run. Also when adding a rerport to a book, dimensions from the
book POV can be set to multiple members. When the book is run, the report iterates over each
member. For example, if North, South, East, West, Actual, and Budget are selected, the book
contains six versions of this report. You can collate the printed output by member selection if
Designing Documents 187
the same member selections are used for all reports in the book. This enables, for example, all
the reports for East, Budget to be grouped.
You can copy report member selections between reports if they use the same data source. This
eliminates having to select shared members multiple times.
A table of contents is created for the book. You can collate the reports within the printed table
of contents by report or by member selection. For example, you can create the following two
books:
Book 1 Balance Sheet (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2) Cash Flows (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2)
Book 2 Balance Sheet (Actual, Budget), (Q1, Q2) Cash Flows (New York, Boston), (Q1, Q2)
If you collate reports in printed books by report, The first report for each set of member selections
is run, then the second report for each set of member selections is run. The following book is
generated:
Book1 Table of Contents
Balance Sheet
New York, Q1
New York, Q2
Boston, Q1
Boston, Q2
Cash Flows
New York, Q1
New York, Q2
Boston, Q1
Boston, Q2
If you collate reports in printed books by member selections, each report for the member
selection is run. The following book is created:
Book1 Table of Contents
Balance Sheet
New York, Q1
Cash Flows
New York, Q1
Balance Sheet
New York, Q2
Cash Flows
New York, Q2
Balance Sheet
Boston, Q1
Cash Flows
Boston, Q1
Balance Sheet
Boston, Q2
Cash Flows
Boston, Q2
ä To create a book:
1
Launch EPM Workspace.
2
Select File , then New , then Document. The 1. Select a Task wizard is displayed in the Content area.
188 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
3
Select Collect reports into a book. and click Next.
4
In Step 2: Select Files, select reports and other artifacts from folders, then click
.
Tip: Press the Shift key to select multiple consecutive reports. Press the Ctrl key to select
multiple non-consecutive reports.
5
Optional: To remove a report from the book, select the report, then click
from the book, click
. To remove all reports
.
Note: If you move, delete, or rename a report or other artifacts in the repository, they are
removed from the book the next time the book is opened. Those artifacts must be
added again if you wish to include them in the book.
Tip: To change the order of the selected reports, click
6
and
.
When completed, click Finish to open the Book Editor.
Note: To display dimensions in the table of contents, select the dimension name in the Book
Editor and select Edit , then Display Members in Table of Contents. The Table of
Contents column of the Book Editor indicates whether the member name is hidden
or displayed.
7
Optional: Add or change members selections for the book POV:
a. In the Name column, double-click the dimension to display Member Selection.
b. Select the members. See “Selecting Members” on page 189.
c. Click OK.
8
Optional: Copying report member selections from one report to another in the Book Editor:
Note: Member selections are only copied between reports having the same dimensions on
the User Point of View.
a. Highlight the report containing the members to copy.
b. Select Edit , then Copy Member Selection to, then select a report.
9
Select File , then Save to save the Book with a file name and description. See “Saving Books and
Snapshot Books” on page 195.
Selecting Members
When working with books in the Book Editor, you can modify and select members for the book
point of view. You can select members, create and save member lists, and select functions that
dynamically retrieve members from the database connection.
Selecting Members 189
The following figure shows the Member Selection dialog box for the product dimension. The
left panel shows the Members, Lists, and Functions tabs. For information on member lists and
functions, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide. You can add
additional column headings in the Members tab.
Figure 3
Member Selection Dialog Box
Note: Substitution variables have been placed in a directory.
ä To add column headings to the left panel of the Members tab display, select Show Properties,
, then select the column name.
ä To view a hierarchy other than the one that is displayed:
1
Click a hierarchical dimension in the Available area of the Members tab.
2
Click the Hierarchy drop-down list, then select the hierarchy.
3
Click OK.
Note: The properties below the Available area are displayed only if you are reporting on
Hyperion Financial Management Organization by Period for the Entity dimension.
Both the parent and the entities that belong to the parent are displayed.
When you run a report, the entity name is displayed; not the parent name.
Available Area
Member Selection has three navigational tabs; Members, Lists, and Functions. In the left panel,
you can show individual members, member lists, and functions that dynamically select members.
190 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Members Tab
The Members tab shows members that are associated with the selected dimension. By default,
the members for a dimension are shown in tree view, which is a hierarchal view of the members
of the specified dimension. You can also show the members in a flat list. By default, the tree view
shows only the top-level member. You can expand the top-level member to see its descendents.
Lists Tab
The Lists tab shows member lists used to perform a query or to select members for your report.
The type of lists are based on the database connection. Member lists can be:
System lists — Predefined in the database when you create user lists; you can include members,
member lists, and functions. System lists are available when using Essbase, Oracle Hyperion
Planning, Fusion Edition, or Financial Management as database connections.
User lists — Lists that are created by you. When you select print preview or Web preview, the
members in the user-defined list are displayed in the order that you specified during list creation.
User lists can be created when using Essbase as a database connection. See Oracle Hyperion
Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Dynamic lists — Predefined lists that are used with the DynamicMemberList function. Dynamic
lists are available only when using Financial Management as a database connection. See Oracle
Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Functions Tab
You can specify functions to use when selecting members for your report or adding members
to member lists. Functions enable you to retrieve members and related members from a database
connection. You can specify one or more functions and edit the function parameters. See Oracle
Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
Assigning Special Members
Use the Select Members dialog box to select the special members Prompt, Same As, Current
Point of View, and User Point of View.
l
l
l
l
Prompt — Acts like a variable that asks the user to select members. Prompts enable the
report writer to filter the dimension members from which the user can select when running
the report.
Same As — Creates a column or row member selection with the same member selection
setting as another column or row.
Current Point of View — Acts as a variable that employs the POV to specify the member of
a particular dimension when the report is run.
User Point of View — Can be selected as a member on the book POV. The parameters can
be modified by the end user.
Selecting Members 191
Prompt Details
Prompt Details allows you to limit the members that can be selected for a book. You can also
specify an alternate member label; a descriptions (for a Financial Management database
connection) or aliases (for Analytic Services or Planning database connections), or both member
names and descriptions or aliases. For example, if you want to only provide lines of products,
In Member Selection (the previous screen) you would select Prompt as a member of Product,
then in Prompt Details select specific lines of product. The user who runs the report selects from
those product lines.
ä To set up a report prompt for members:
1
Optional: To limit the prompt selection to specific default members, or a list of members, or both, take
an action:
l
If the member name is known, enter the member name in Default Member or click the
Default Member search button. If multiple member are provided for the prompt,
members must be separated by commas.
Note: If you leave Default Member blank, the Respond to Prompts dialog box does not
display a default member when a user runs the report. The user must specify a
member rather than accept a default.
l
2
From the Member Labels in Prompt Selection Dialog drop-down list, select the kinds of labels to be
displayed in the Respond to Prompts dialog box when the report is run:
l
l
3
If the list of members is known, click the Choices List button to select a list of members.
If multiple member lists are provided for the prompt, member lists must be separated
by commas.
If the database connection is Analytic Services or Planning, select Member Name,
Alias, or Member Name and Alias.
If the database connection is Financial Management or SAP BW, select Member
Name, Description, or Member Name and Description.
Click OK.
Selecting the User Point of View as a Member in the Book
Point of View
When a report is added to a book, the dimensions that are on the user POV in the report
definitions are applied to the book POV. Members on the book POV default to the user POV
in the Book Editor.
Tip: To filter the repository by books, select View, then Display Items of Type, then Hyperion,
then Book.
192 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
ä To select the user POV as a member in the book POV:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, right-click a book, then select Open In , then Editor. The Book Editor
is displayed.
2
In the book POV View pane, click a dimension for which you want to set up a user POV.
3
In Member Selection, select User Point of View for.
4
Click OK.
Assigning Members Using Functions
You can use functions and edit their parameters to select members dynamically. For information
on the use of, and editing function parameters, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio
User’s Guide.
Selecting Multiple Members Based on Criteria
You can select members based on criteria. You define criteria by creating expressions of
members, Boolean operations, and commands.
Boolean operators enable you to specify precise member combinations for the report, useful
with large volumes of data. Use the AND, OR, UNION, and NOT Boolean operators, combined
with expression commands, to refine your member selections.
ä To select multiple members based on criteria:
1
In Member Selection, click Show Advanced Options,
, located in the right panel Selected area.
Note: At least two members must be displayed in the Selected area before you can create
criteria.
2
Build expressions by using one or more of the following operators and symbols:
l
Select the Not Boolean operator to build the expression. Not is the inverse of the selected
condition.
l
Type a left parenthesis, ( ( ) , to add an opening character to the expression.
l
Type a right parenthesis, ( ) ), to add a closing character to the expression.
l
Click in the Operator column, then select:
m
And — When all conditions must be met.
m
Or — When one condition of several must be met.
m
Union — To combine the data.
Selecting Members 193
Note: You must use double parentheses if you are using three members. For
example, if you selected descendants of Market and you want to exclude East,
West, and South, your advanced member selection query should be as
follows: Descendants of Market AND NOT ( East AND NOT ( West AND
NOT SOUTH ))
3
Click OK.
Searching for Members
You can search for members to edit. You can search using a text string or property (that is, name
and description). You can use a blank space as a separator to perform simultaneous searches.
To search a string for an exact match, including blank spaces, enclose the string in quotation
marks.
If you are searching for a list or function, you must activate this function by using the Find Next
or Find Previous button.
Note: For Financial Management, when you search for an entity, you need to search on
parent.entity (for example. D62VIELO.D62475LO). When you search just the entity, you
need to precede the entity with a wildcard, (for example, *D62475LO).
Find options to locate members:
Table 45
Option
Description
Find
Enter the characters for the search, or select a saved search criteria string from the list. The search string can be a partial
search string, one word or multiple words.
Click to display the members matching the search criteria.
Use Wildcards
Enter the Find text with wildcard symbols (* and ?) to search for members. By default, Use Wildcards is displayed.
l
Use ? to represent a single character search.
l
Use * to represent a multiple character search.
Note: If the search criteria has a space in it, enclose the search phrase in quotes. For example, *IC Offset* should
be "*IC Offset*". If the location of the "*" wildcard is at the end only, for example IC Offset*, then you do not need
to enclose the phrase in quotes.
In the List or Functions tab, highlights the previous item matching the search criteria.
In the List or Functions tab, highlights the next item that matches the search criteria.
ä To search for members:
1
In Member Selection, enter text in the Find text box.
194 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Note: The wildcard option is enabled.
2
Perform an action:
l
If you are searching in the Members tab, click the Find button
l
If you are searching in the Lists or Functions tab, click Find Next,
Previous,
3
.
, or Find
.
Click OK.
Previewing Selected Members
You can preview the selected members. Members can include a list or function result from
evaluated member lists or functions, if applicable.
ä To preview members, in Member Selection, click Preview Selection,
, located in the right
panel.
Saving Books and Snapshot Books
You can save books to the repository as a compilation of reports, snapshot reports, or reports
and snapshot reports. An existing book can be replicated by saving it with the Save As command.
ä To save a book or snapshot book:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, right-click a book and select Open In , then Editor to open it in Book
Editor.
2
Select File, then Save or File , then Save As.
3
Select one of the following options from the Type drop-down list:
l
l
4
Book—Reports data will be dynamic when the book is run; snapshot report data will
be static, based on when the report was saved as a snapshot.
Snapshot Book —Reports data is saved and becomes static; snapshot reports data is
static, based on when the report was saved as a snapshot.
Enter a name and description, select a folder, then click Save.
Note: If you are saving as a snapshot book, the Respond to Prompts dialog box is displayed
if any prompts exist in the book or any report in the book and the Current User POV
Settings dialog box is displayed. See Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting.”
5
Navigate to the repository to establish file permissions for the book or snapshot book. See “Assigning
File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books” on page 204.
Saving Books and Snapshot Books 195
Opening Books or Snapshot Books
After you save a book, you can open it to maintain, print, or preview the book in HTML or PDF
format. When you preview a book, a table of contents is displayed with a list of reports in the
book. When you preview a snapshot book, the Table of Contents is displayed in PDF or HTML
format, depending on you preference setting. Snapshot books cannot be changed, but they can
be previewed, printed, and viewed from the repository. See “Previewing and Printing Books and
Snapshot Books” on page 196.
ä To open a book or snapshot book:
1
From EPM Workspace repository, navigate to a book or snapshot book and select File , then Open In.
2
Perform an action:
l
To view a printed version of the book, select PDF Preview.
l
To view the book in HTML format, select HTML Preview.
3
The Content area displays the Book Table of Contents, the tab at the bottom of the browser displays
the book name and View (for example, TestBook - View). The report, snapshot or member name is
displayed on every row for which it applies in the Book Table of Contents.
4
Select one of the reports or snapshots in the Book Table of Contents, then click Show Report. The report
or snapshot is displayed in the Content area in HTML or PDF format, with the Report Name and POV in
the tab description.
5
To close the book or snapshot book, select File , then Close.
Renaming Books and Snapshot Books
After saving a book or snapshot book or making a duplicate, you may want to rename the file.
ä To rename a book or snapshot book:
1
Select the book in Explore and select File , then Properties.
2
In Properties, select General.
3
Type another name and description into the Name and Description fields.
4
Click OK.
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books
You can preview books and snapshot books in PDF or HTML prior to printing. From the book
table of contents, you can select individual reports within a book to preview as PDF or HTML
or view the entire book with all of the reports in PDF.
You can also print an entire book or snapshot book or print individual reports in a book or a
snapshot book. When you print a book, the data is retrieved for the reports in the book and the
196 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
book is printed. When you print a snapshot book, the data has already been saved in the reports
when you save the book as a snapshot book.
Prior to running a book, you can preview the user Point of View and make any necessary changes.
This allows users to verify that the members on the user POV are appropriate before running
the report or book instead of after the output is displayed.
Features of a PDF File Generated from a Book
The following list highlights the features available in PDF files generated in a book.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Support for PDF and plain text files. When we refer to "external content" within books, we
can now include Excel, Word, PowerPoint, PDF and regular text files within books.
"Cell documents" that are extracted from a Financial ReportingReport
("CellDoc_Attach_Doc") can include PDF and plain text files.
Any cell documents associated with an Financial Reportingreport display as "sub-items" in
the book's table of contents.
PDF bookmarks are shown on the left part of Adobe Reader. With bookmarks, you can jump
to any of the book's chapters.
A table of contents with linked items. When you click on an item in the table of content,
you are presented with the first page of that item.
Continuous page numbers. Financial Reporting reports, snapshots Excel, Word,
PowerPoint, and pain text files show continuous page numbers.
Note: The user needs to select the "continuous page number" option in the book setup for
the continuous page numbers to be in effect. Also, it is not possible to implement
continuous page numbers for embedded PDF files.
l
l
Total page counts. Similar to continuous page numbers, Financial Reporting reports,
snapshots, Excel, Word, PowerPoint, and plain text files show a consistent total page count.
For example, suppose a report has 3 pages but the book's contents make 10 pages. If the
"<<PageCount()>>” text function is used in the report, it will show "10" instead of "3"
The way plain text files are printed can be customized by modifying
the "FR_TextTemplate.doc" Word file. See “Microsoft Word Template” on page 200
For more information on previewing and printing, see the following chapters:
l
Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting”
l
Chapter 3, “Exploring and Managing Items ”
l
“Printing PDF Files” on page 199
Note: Before you print a book, you should set the Book Setup options as described in the
following section.
Previewing and Printing Books and Snapshot Books 197
Changing the Book Setup
Book Setup options enable you to specify whether to include the printed table of contents, set
the page orientation, set the numbering of pages to consecutive, and include the table of contents
in the consecutive page numbering, collate the table of contents based on reports, collate the
table of contents based on the member selection, and select the member label you want used in
the table of contents for each data source.
Note: The table of contents can be set up to display the name, description, or custom text. See
“Setting Table of Contents Text” on page 199.
ä To change the book setup:
1
From Explore repository, right-click a book and select Open In , then Editor to open the Book Editor.
2
Select File , then Book Setup to display the Book Setup dialog box.
3
In the Page Setup section, select the following:
l
l
In Paper Size, select Letter, Legal, Ledger, A4 or A3.
To continue the page numbering from the previous report in the book, select
Consecutive Page Numbers. To begin each report in the book with page 1, deselect
Consecutive Page Numbers. To include the table of contents in the consecutive
numbering scheme, select Include Table of Contents.
Note: Page numbering must be specified in the header or footer of each report in the
book before you can print the page number.
l
4
In Collate Reports By, select an option for collating the printed table of contents:
m
Select Reports to collate based on the reports.
m
Select Member Selection to collate based on the member selection.
In the Table of Contents section of the dialog, select the following:
l
To include the book table of contents when printing, click Include Table of Contents
in Printed Output.
Note: For HTML or PDF preview, this option does not apply. The book preview always
includes the table of contents for the book.
l
l
5
Select Portrait or Landscape for the orientation of the Table of Contents.
In Member Labels in Table of Contents, select the member label to use in the table of
contents for the data source that you are currently using. The listed options depend on
the data source you are using.
Click OK.
198 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Setting Table of Contents Text
In the Book Editor, the table of contents column reflects the text selected for each entry. The
default text in the table of contents is the object name or , in the case of a member, the member
name. For example, if the object in the book is a report, the report name is shown. If the object
in the book is an external file (for example, a Microsoft Word document), the filename, as it
exists in the repository is shown. You can change the text that is shown to the object description
(as it exists in the repository), or to customized text.
ä To set the table of contents text for an object:
1
In Book Editor, right–click an object and select Table of Contents
2
Select a text display type to show in the table of contents:
l
l
l
Select Display Name to show the name of the object.
Select Display Description to show the description of the object, as it exists in the
repository.
Select Display Custom Text to add customized text. The Table of Contents dialog is
displayed. Type a meaningful description in the Custom Text field, and click OK.
ä To set the table of contents text for a member:
1
In Book Editor, right–click a member and select Table of Contents.
2
Select a text display type to show in the table of contents:
l
Select Show Member to show the member name.
l
Select Hide Member to hide the member name.
Printing PDF Files
In order to support PDF files for cell documents and third party content in books, Ghostscript
is required on the Financial Reporting print server. Ghostscript is required to incorporate PDF
files for PDF preview. The Financial Reporting print server searches for the supported
Ghostscript versions in the following order:
l
AFPL Ghostscript 8.5.4
l
AFPL Ghostscript 8.51
l
AFPL Ghostscript 8.14
l
GNU Ghostscript 7.06
Supported Distiller Servers
l
Acrobat Distiller Server version 6.0
l
Acrobat Distiller Server version 8.0
Setting Table of Contents Text 199
ä To override the search order:
1. Using regedit.exe, create the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AFPL Ghostscript\FRCustom
2. Create a new string value named GS_DLL.
The value for GS_DLL should be the full path to the preferred Ghostscript dll file which
should be named gsdll32.dll. For example: C:\Program Files\gs\gs8.14\bin
\gsdll32.dll.
Printing Text Files
The Microsoft Word application has been extended to print text (.txt) files.
Microsoft Word Template
A Microsoft Word template document, FR_TextTemplate.doc, is installed on the Financial
Reporting print server in the ${home.reports}/bin/ folder. When the template is found by
the Financial Reporting print server, the contents of the text file is inserted into the Word
template, after which the existing routine that prints Word documents is used to print text files.
When the print job has finished, the file is closed without saving, preserving the template for the
next text file.
Default template settings
By default, the Word template has:
l
the <<FR_content>> string as its only content in the body of the document.
l
text formatted to Courier New, 10pt font.
l
settings to print portrait with 1 inch margin.
l
footer set to print date and time and current page number.These settings are updated for all
text files printed through the Financial Reporting print server.
Customizing the template
Always make a backup of the template before customizing it. You can open the template through
Microsoft Word. Any changes to the template are applied the next time a text file is printed. The
Financial Reporting print server does not need to be restarted.
In the<<FR_content>> string, you can specify the font and paragraph settings for the inserted
text file content and should be included in the FR_TextTemplate.doc template.
When printing a text file, the Financial Reporting print server opens FR_TextTemplate.doc
and looks for the <<FR_content>> string. If found, the contents of the text file replaces the
string. If the string is not found the contents of the text file is inserted at the end of the Word
document and any pre-existing content in the template is shown before the data in the text file.
200 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Benefits of implementing the Microsoft Word templtate
l
Default formatting of the template can be customized.
l
Page setup of the template, such as print mode and page size, can be controlled.
l
Footers of the template, such as page numbers, can be customized.
l
Content of the template, such as inserting a standard confidentiality clause, can be added.
l
Images or backgrounds of the template, such as a company logo, can be added.
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books
You can export books and snapshot books from the repository. See Chapter 3, “Exploring and
Managing Items .”
Designing Batches
Using batches, you can process sets of reports and books simultaneously. Batch creation is
comprised of the name, the reports, books, snapshots, snapshot books, and prompts. The
prompt information is for the current batch you are running.
Saved batches can be modified, removed, or rescheduled. You can duplicate a batch to use some
or all of the same properties as the original batch.
ä To design a batch:
1
Launch EPM Workspace.
2
Select File , then New , then Document to display theSelect a Task wizard.
3
Select Batch Reports for Scheduling, then click Next.
4
In Select Files, use theType field to filter your selection by Financial Reporting report, Snapshot report,
Book or Snapshot book.
5
Select your report types and move them to the Selected Items panel by clicking
6
Optional: To remove a report type from Selected Items, select the report, then click,
all reports from Selected Items, select
.
. To remove
.
Note: If you move, delete, or rename a report in the repository, the report is removed from
the book the next time the book is opened. To include the report, add it to the book.
Tip: To change the order of the selected reports, use,
7
and,
.
Click Finish to open the Batch Editor.
Exporting Books and Snapshot Books 201
Tip: If you select a report type multiple times, you are prompted to enter a new name for
the duplicate report type. The renamed report type is listed in the Batch Editor with its
original name followed by the new name in parentheses. To discard the duplicate
report, click Cancel.
8
Respond to any prompts that are displayed. See “Defining Prompts for a Batch” on page 202.
9
Select File , then Save As.
10 Select a folder, enter a name and description, and click Save.
ä To duplicate and edit batch properties based on a scheduled batch:
1
From the View panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2
Select a Scheduled Batch select Edit , then Duplicate and Edit Properties.
3
In Schedule Batch, perform an action:
l
l
To duplicate properties for a new batch in the repository, search and select the batch
and click Next.
To duplicate properties for the selected scheduled batch, click Next.
4
Edit the properties of the batch as needed. For example, you can change the Start Time or Destination
settings.
5
Click Finish.
ä To modify a batch:
1
From the View panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2
Select Edit , then Properties.
3
In Schedule Batch, select a batch and click Next.
4
Make changes, and click Finish.
ä To delete a batch:
1
From the View panel, select Schedule, then select Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select a batch, then select Edit , then Delete.
3
Click Yes.
Defining Prompts for a Batch
Prompts are requests for members in the report or book. If reports or books in a batch have
prompts, the end user can select the members in the Batch Editor.
When users save the Batch, the Respond to Prompts dialog displays any/all prompts/variables
contained in the artifacts within the Batch.
202 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Identical Prompts and Variables
Since SAP BW variables are defined on a datasource and not in a Grid in a Report, the same
variable can be used for all Grids in a Report, Book or Batch containing Reports and/or Books,
whereas a prompt is explicitly defined on a row/column/page of a Grid. When users are prompted
for a member/value to be used for a variable, they can optionally select to use the same member/
value for all references to the datasource which contains the Variable. A response to prompts
can also be applied with a single response to all references or specified for each member/values
for each Grid, Report or Book.
When a variable exists and there is more then one reference to the data source, or when the same
prompt exists in more then one grid, the Respond to Prompts dialog box shows a drop-down
list where users choose whether they want to respond to prompts at the Grid, Report/Book or
Batch level. The selections shown in the dropdown list depend on whether the Respond to
Prompts dialog is shown while running a Report, or Book or from within the Batch editor. The
drop-down list only appears when a selection is needed. For example, if running a Report with
a single grid against a SAP data source with a variable, a drop-down selection is not needed to
be shown. Similarly, if a Report, Book or Batch contains only a single Prompt, or the Prompts
are different (different dimensions, default members, or choices list), the drop-down selection
will not appear.
When running a Report, the drop-down selections are:
l
Respond to Prompts at the Report Level (default)
l
Respond to Prompts at the Grid Level
When running a Book, the drop-down selections are:
l
Respond to Prompts at the Book Level (default)
l
Respond to prompts at the Report Level
l
Respond to prompts at the Grid Level
When editing a Batch, the drop-down selections is: Respond to Prompts at the Batch Level
(Default) Respond to Prompts at the Report/Book Level Respond to Prompts at the Grid Level
l
Respond to Prompts a the Batch Level (default)
l
Respond to Prompts at the Report/Book Level
l
Respond to Prompts at the Grid Level
The selections are only shown when necessary. The selection are not shown if there are multiple
references to a variable or prompt.
If the user wants, they can respond to a prompt once, and the same value will be used for both
responses, or they can select “Respond to Prompt at Grid Level” in the dropdown, press Apply
and enter different values for each prompt listed.
The Source column shows what artifact the prompt is on. When identical prompts are found
and only a single prompt response is presented, the Source column will show an asterisk (*) to
indicate that the prompt response will apply to all prompts of that type.
Defining Prompts for a Batch 203
The ability to select the level at which to respond to prompts is only available EPM Workspace.
In Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio, Fusion Edition, the Respond to Prompts dialog
box always show all member selection prompts and a single reference to each variable.
ä To define prompts:
1
Select File , then Open , then Document.
2
Select a batch. The dimensions that are set up with a prompt for the reports are displayed in the Member
Selection column Batch Editor.
3
Select a dimension, then select Edit , then Member Selection.
4
In Member Selection, select the member you want to use in the report when the batch runs. See
“Selecting Members” on page 189.
5
Click OK to return to Batch Editor.
6
Perform an action:
l
Optional. Schedule the batch. See “Designing Batches” on page 201.
l
Save the batch by selecting File , then Save, then File , then Close.
Opening Batches
You open a batch to edit it or to schedule it.
ä To open a batch:
1
Select File , then Open , then Document.
2
From the Type drop-down list, select Hyperion , then Financial Reporting Batch.
3
Navigate to the folder in which the batch resides.
4
Select the batch file and click Open.
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot
Books
To allow other users and groups to view snapshots and snapshot books in the repository that
you create when running a batch, you need to assign access rights to the users and groups.
ä To assign or remove access to snapshots:
1
Click Navigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
Select a batch, then select Edit , then Properties.
3
In Schedule Batch, click Next until the Destinations area of the Schedule Batch dialog is displayed.
4
Select Save As Snapshot in Repository.
5
Click File Permissions. For procedures, see step 1.
204 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
Note: If you remove all users, groups, and roles for a batch, then only an administrator can
see the snapshot output generated by the batch in the repository.
Assigning File Permissions to Snapshots and Snapshot Books 205
206 Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books
10
Interactive Reporting
In This Chapter
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in EPM Workspace ......................................... 207
Using the Toolbars ....................................................................................... 208
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents .................................................... 211
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File Sections ......................................... 216
Exporting Data............................................................................................ 221
Query Section ............................................................................................ 223
Results and Tables....................................................................................... 240
Chart Section ............................................................................................. 252
Pivot Section ............................................................................................. 275
Common Chart/Pivot Features ......................................................................... 282
OLAPQuery Section ...................................................................................... 284
CubeQuery Section ...................................................................................... 287
Dashboards............................................................................................... 326
Report Section ........................................................................................... 329
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in EPM
Workspace
EPM Workspace enables users to query relational databases and heterogeneous sources (for
example, users of SQL Server, Oracle, flat files, Production Reporting/Web Analysis module
content) and perform quick ad-hoc analysis by drilling down and pivoting on the data to see
patterns or exceptions. Many features help users to analyze their data to conduct sales and key
performance, financial, and forecasting analyses.
Three types of users can relational data source. “Developers” who have the database connectivity
software may use a full 32-bit application. “Power users” without this connectivity or when there
are more security concerns may be given access to query using a client connected to the database
through a server. Users can further given permission to create content completely from scratch,
using add-on software installed on their local machine and hosted by the web browser.
“Information consumer users” typically use a “thin client” approach; no software is loaded for
these users, who instead interact with a DHTML-based series of pages.
The topics in this section explain how use to an Interactive Reporting document (BQY) in EPM
Workspace for Information consumer users.
Using Interactive Reporting Documents in EPM Workspace 207
Using the Toolbars
Use the Standard and Interactive Reporting toolbars to navigate through theEPM Workspace
and work with common commands.
l
“Standard EPM Workspace Toolbar” on page 208
l
Standard Interactive Reporting Toolbar
l
Navigation Toolbar
l
Paging Toolbar
Standard EPM Workspace Toolbar
The Standard Toolbar is used for common EPM Workspace features:
Standard options include (from left to right):
1. Home displays the Start Page for EPM Workspace.
2. New Document displays the New Document Wizard, which enables you to create a
Interactive Reporting document (BQY) for online analysis, collect highly formatted reports
into a book, or batch highly formatted reports for scheduling.
3. Open Document launches the Open dialog box from which you can navigate to a file.
4. Explore lists the contents of the Repository, so that you can mange and control files and
folders.
5. New Folder launches the Create New Folder dialog
6. Copy enables users to copy a document or file from the content pane.
7. Cut enables uses to cut a document or file from the content pane.
8. Paste enables users to paste a document or file from the content pane.
9. Go Up A Level enables users to move one level up the folder hierarchy.
10. Refresh displays the latest changes to the EPM Workspace display.
11. Properties enables a user to select a document or folder and display and associated properties.
12. Logoff allows a user to log off without saving any information.
13. Help launches the HTML Help page in a new browser.
Standard Interactive Reporting Toolbar
The Standard Interactive Reporting toolbar is specific to those features used exclusively for
Interactive Reporting documents:
Interactive Reporting toolbar commands include (from left to right):
208 Interactive Reporting
1. Data Layout enables the data layout panes in the Content area.
2. Navigate Back displays the previous section.
3. Navigate Front displays the next section.
4. Dashboard Home displays the Dashboard Home section.
5. Page # displays the current page for the table reports. For all charts with the exception of
pie, scatter and bubble, the current view of data points on the x and y axes is shown.
6. Page Left moves one page in the left direction in the report sections. To move to the first
page in the left direction, select [Shift] + Click + left arrow. In the Chart section, this icon
enables you to move one view in the left direction.
7. Page Up moves one page in the up direction in the report sections. To move to the top view,
select [Shift] + Click + Up arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables you to move one
view up.
8. Page Down moves one page in the down direction in the report sections. To move to the
bottom page, select [Shift] + Click + Down arrow. In the Chart section, this icon enables
you to move one view down.
9. Page Right moves one page in the right direction in the report sections. To move to the first
view in the right direction, select [Shift] + Click + right arrow. In the Chart section, this icon
enables you to move one view right.
10. Refresh processes only the current section against the database server to dynamically retrieve
the most current data set, with the exception of the Dashboard and Report sections. When
the Refresh command is selected in the Dashboard and Report sections, all queries in the
Interactive Reporting document (BQY) are refreshed. Queries are refreshed in the order in
which they are displayed in the section catalog of the full client. For example, in a Interactive
Reporting document (BQY) with three queries, Query1, Query2, and Query3, the queries
are executed in that order when “Refresh All” is selected.
11. Export to PDF exports a section to Portable Document Format (PDF) and launches it inside
your browser if the PDF MIME type is set in your browser. The PDF format is created by
Adobe and can be viewed outside of your browser if you have Adobe Acrobat Reader
installed. Adobe Acrobat Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s web site at http://
www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep.html. If the PDF MIME type is not set in the
browser, the browser “Save As” dialog box is invoked.
12. Export to XLS exports a section to MS Excel and launches it inside your browser if the mime
type has been set to recognize the XLS file extension Thereafter, saving the file locally or
manipulating the file is all done by way of the MS Excel application. If the mime type is not
set to recognize the XLS file extension, you are prompted with a Save As Dialog and you
must specify a local destination to save the XLS file for future viewing of the data with the
MS Excel.
13. Export to XLS (*.mhtml) exports a section to Microsoft Office 2000 Web Archive (.mhtml
or mhtml). Also known as MS HTML, this archive type format is a standard for including
objects in the same file as the HTML code (for example .gif or.jpeg files). Objects are encoded
Using the Toolbars 209
using the MIME HTML Internet standard. You might use this file format if you plan to email the HTML as a single file.
14. Save preserves the file locally and launches theInteractive Reporting document (BQY) in the
Interactive Reporting Web Client so that you can view and save the Interactive Reporting
document (BQY) to your desktop for offline viewing. The Interactive Reporting document
(BQY) can only be viewed by the full desktop or web client. If Interactive Reporting Web
Client has not been installed, the browser is launched automatically.
15. Search enables users to find specific documents.
Navigation Toolbar
Section navigation controls on the toolbar are available to end users by using the Navigate Back,
Navigate Forward, and Dashboard Home.
If the standard Interactive Reporting toolbar has been enabled, the Navigation toolbar is
automatically disabled because it is a subset of the standard toolbar. However, the Navigation
and Paging toolbars may be visible and enabled at the same time if the standard toolbar is
disabled.
Paging Toolbar
Depending on how a report was designed, you may see an abbreviated version of the <product
Interactive Reporting toolbar referred to as the Paging toolbar. This version of Interactive
Reporting toolbar contains the paging controls: Page Left, Page Up, Page Down and Page Right.
If the standard Interactive Reporting toolbar has been enabled, the Paging toolbar is
automatically disabled because it is a subset of the standard toolbar. However, the Navigation
and Paging toolbars may be visible and enabled at the same time if the standard toolbar is
disabled.
Shortcut Menus
Use shortcut menus to perform operations on objects that you need to update and maintain.
Shortcut menus are context-sensitive menus that pop up.
For Windows users, shortcut menus are enabled by selecting an item and pressing [Shift] + [F10]
on the keyboard, or by right clicking the mouse. If the shortcut menu is enabled on the keyboard,
the menu opens at the upper, left most of the HTML frame.
If the shortcut menu is enabled by right clicking the mouse, the shortcut menu opens next to
the cursor pointer where you right-clicked the mouse button within the selected area or on the
item. Submenus derived from a shortcut menu are also available which group multiple and
related commands. Once you make a selection from a shortcut or submenu, the menu is closed.
The table below lists the keyboard shortcuts:
210 Interactive Reporting
Keyboard Shortcut
Description
Arrow Keys
Moves the cursor up, down, left and right on the shortcut menu.
[Enter]
Confirms and accepts an action associated with a shortcut menu item.
[Esc]
Closes a shortcut menu that is opening. You can also perform this action by selecting or deselecting an item or
pressing the [Tab] key.
Alert Dialog
An Alert dialog shows informational messages explaining why the alert opens. You are required
to acknowledge the alert before continuing since no other window can be active while it opens.
To dismiss the alert, click OK.
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents
This section describes how to work with an Interactive Reporting document (BQY):
l
l
Understanding Interactive Reporting Document Files
Interactive Reporting Database Connection File (OCE) Selection For Interactive Reporting
Document (BQYs)
l
Accessing Interactive Reporting Document Files
l
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
l
Refreshing Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
l
Dashboard Home
l
Saving Interactive Reporting Document Files
Understanding Interactive Reporting Document Files
An Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) is centered on data from queries (either relational
or OLAP) or from imported data. Any number of queries and Data Models can supply the data
in an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) . An Interactive Reporting document file (BQY)
can contain multiple queries with each query retrieving its data from a different database
including: relational databases, imported data files, local files and OLAP servers. The Data Model
aspects of the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) are not visible to the end-user, but the
ability to refresh data that come from these sources is. An end-user can duplicate an existing
query or create a query based on an existing Data Model.
Once a Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) has been created, it is saved toEPM
Workspace Repository located on the server.
When the user selects and retrieves a Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) from the Section
pane, the emphasis becomes one of viewing, refreshing, and analyzing of the Interactive
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents 211
Reporting document file (BQY) instead of the query, Data Model, data layout, and report
building of the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) .
Creating An Interactive Reporting Document File (BQY) From
Another Interactive Reporting Document File (BQY)
You can create an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) based on an existing Interactive
Reporting document file. In this case, the new Interactive Reporting document file inherits the
Interactive Reporting connection file (.oce) and sections associated with the original Interactive
Reporting document file.
Note: To create a Interactive Reporting document file that uses another Interactive Reporting
database connection file, or a new Interactive Reporting document file not associated with
an existing one, see Interactive Reporting Database Connection File (OCE) Selection For
Interactive Reporting Document (BQYs)
ä To create an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) based on an existing Interactive
Reporting document file (BQY):
1
Select File, then New Document.
Select a Task opens.
2
Select Create an Interactive Reporting Document .
Select Data Source opens.
3
In the Data Source field, enter the name and path of the data source (Interactive Reporting document
file (BQY), or click Browse to locate the file.
For more information about the Browse feature, see Selecting an Interactive Reporting Data
Source
4
In the Create As field, select either Web Client or HTML.
l
l
5
Web Client—Creates the Interactive Reporting document file in Interactive Reporting
Web Client using a connection file using a relational, CubeQuery, or OLAP Query data
source.
HTML—Creates the Interactive Reporting document file in EPM Workspace.
Click Finish.
A new Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) is created based on the selected Interactive
Reporting document.
212 Interactive Reporting
Interactive Reporting Database Connection File (OCE)
Selection For Interactive Reporting Document (BQYs)
An Interactive Reporting document files (BQY) can be created using an Interactive Reporting
database connection file (.oce) selected by the user. See table below for Interactive Reporting
database connection file (.oce) eligibility:
Interactive Reporting Database Connection File Type
Interactive Reporting Web Client
EPM Workspace
Relational
Yes
No
CubeQuery
Yes
Yes
OLAPQuery
Yes
No
ä To create an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) with an Interactive Reporting
database connection file (.oce):
1
Select File, then New Document.
Select a Task opens.
2
Select Create an Interactive Reporting Document, thenNext.
Select Data Source opens.
3
In the Data Source field, enter the name and path of the Interactive Reporting database connection
file (.oce), or click Browse to locate the file.
For more information about using the Browse feature, see Selecting an Interactive Reporting
Data Source .
4
In the Create As field, select either Web Client or HTML.
l
l
5
Web Client—Creates the Interactive Reporting document in Interactive Reporting Web
Client using a connection file using a relational, CubeQuery, or OLAP Query data
source.
HTML—Creates the Interactive Reporting document file in EPM Workspace. If you
select an Interactive Reporting database connection field .oce from a relational, or OLAP
Query data source, this option is not available.
Click Finish.
A new Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) is created based on the selected Interactive
Reporting database connection file.
Selecting an Interactive Reporting Data Source
Use the Select dialog box to choose an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) or Interactive
Reporting database connection file (.oce) on which to base a new Interactive Reporting
document file (BQY).
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents 213
ä To select an Interactive Reporting data source:
1
In the Look in field, select the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) or Interactive Reporting
database connection (.oce) from which to build a new Interactive Reporting document file (BQY)
The folders and files shown on this dialog have been published to the EPM Workspace
Repository.
The Name and Type fields display the file name and type (Interactive Reporting document
file or Interactive Reporting database connection file).
2
To specify additional parameters, select
.
The Open As and Version fields are displayed.
3
To create the Interactive Reporting document file in Interactive Reporting Web Client, select Interactive
Reporting Web Client. To create a new Interactive Reporting document file in EPM Workspace , enter
HTML.
The option(s) available in the Open As field depend on the Interactive Reporting database
connection file. Interactive Reporting document files (BQYs) can be created by selecting an
Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce). in Interactive Reporting Studio and
Interactive Reporting Web Client. In EPM Workspace, only an Interactive Reporting
database connection file (.oce) for an Essbase query can be used to create a new Interactive
Reporting document file. NoInteractive Reporting database connection file (.oce) associated
with a relational query can be used to create an Interactive Reporting document file in EPM
Workspace.
4
In the Version field, verify the version information.
5
Click OK.
Accessing Interactive Reporting Document Files
Use the following procedure to open and close an Interactive Reporting document file.
ä To open an Interactive Reporting document file
1
Specify the URL of the EPM Workspace in your web browser.
The login dialog box opens.
2
Enter your user name and password and select Login.
3
Open an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) .
An Interactive Reporting document can be opened:
l
l
l
from Explorer by navigating to an Interactive Reporting document file and double
clicking it
by selecting the Interactive Reporting document file and clicking Open on the shortcut
menu
selecting File, then Open.
214 Interactive Reporting
l
selecting Favorites and choosing the Interactive Reporting document (if it has been
added to Favorites)
The Interactive Reporting document file opens in EPM Workspace. If a Dashboard
section has been included in the Interactive Reporting document file, it opens in creation
date order. Typically, a Dashboard section is shown first. If no Dashboard section has
been included, the Interactive Reporting document file opens on the last saved section.
If the last saved section is a Query or Data Model, or fails for some other reason, the
Interactive Reporting document file attempts to open the next section from the Sections
pane, working from the top to the bottom of the Sections pane until a section can be
displayed.
ä To close an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) , select File, then Close.
If you have modified an Interactive Reporting document file, you are prompted to save any
changes.
Saving Interactive Reporting Document Files
To ensure that changes made to a Interactive Reporting document file are preserved after you
have performed an analysis on it, use the Save features. The Save features in EPM Workspace
enable you to save an Interactive Reporting document file to the EPM Workspace Repository
(importing). To save an Interactive Reporting document file locally (offline analysis), see
Exporting an Interactive Reporting Document File in Native File Format.
Saving an Interactive Reporting Document Files
When you modify an Interactive Reporting document (BQY) or an Interactive Reporting
document job, you can save the changed Interactive Reporting document to the EPM Workspace
Repository. The EPM Workspace Repository is an efficient way to manage Interactive Reporting
document file, and distribute Interactive Reporting document files over a wide network for enduser query and reporting.
Saving the Interactive Reporting document file to the EPM Workspace Repository can be made
either by saving it with changes to the original document (Save option), or by saving the
Interactive Reporting document file, as a new document (Save As). If you do not have permission
to overwrite an Interactive Reporting document file, use the Save As feature.
Using the Save Command
Use the Save command to save the changes to the Interactive Reporting document file that you
have permission to write to.
Interacting with Interactive Reporting Documents 215
ä To save an Interactive Reporting document file to the EPM Workspace Repository, select
File, then Save.
Optional: You can also click
.
Using the Save As Command
Use the Save As command to save the changes you have made to the Interactive Reporting
document file when you do not have permission to overwrite the Interactive Reporting
document file, or you simply want to save and rename it with your changes.
ä To save as to the EPM Workspace Repository:
1
Select File, then Save As.
The Save As dialog box opens.
2
Type the name of the Interactive Reporting document file in the Name field.
3
Type a description of the Interactive Reporting document file in the Description field.
4
Click
.
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File
Sections
Interactive Reporting documents are files created and used to retrieve information from a
database, analyze the information, and build reports. Since <product Interactive Reporting
document files are integrated query, analysis, and reporting tools, these documents have multiple
sections, each of which governs one part of the query and reporting refresh. You create sections
progressively as you query a database, retrieve results, and then generate reports.
Interactive Reporting document files are divided into multiple sections, each of which governs
one step of the reporting procedure. Interactive Reporting document file sections are created
progressively when a database is queried, results are retrieved, and reports are generated.
Each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations. You can move
back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your result data. You
can also position sections side-by-side in a Dashboard section.
The end-user does not need to have a strong technical understanding of databases. Data Model
sections are not available, and these sections are not visible in the Sections pane. Each section
occupies an independent window in the browser and shows discrete views of data. For example,
the Pivot section resembles a spreadsheet or crosstab report that lets you perform drill down
analysis of different data relationships. The Chart section graphically depicts summaries, trends,
and relationships in your data.
216 Interactive Reporting
When an Interactive Reporting document file is opened, the default home page is the Dashboard
section. If the Dashboard Home section cannot be displayed, then the Interactive Reporting
document file opens on the last saved section. If the last saved section is a Query or Data Model
(which are not listed in the Section Navigation drop-down menu), or fails for some other reason,
then the Interactive Reporting document file attempts to open the next section from the Sections
pane, working from the top to the bottom of the Sections pane until a section can be displayed.
For more information on using Interactive Reporting document file sections, see:
l
Sections Pane
l
Selecting Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
l
Adding Sections
l
Moving Between Sections
l
Duplicating Sections
l
Renaming Sections
l
Deleting Sections
l
Refreshing Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
l
Printing Sections
l
Dashboard Home
Sections Pane
The Sections pane shows the sections available in the current Interactive Reporting document
file:
l
l
l
l
l
Dashboard—Upon opening an Interactive Reporting document file, a customized
Dashboard section can appear as the Interactive Reporting document file front-end. Each
button selection, item selection, or navigation sequence can invoke a script. Behind the
scenes, Interactive Reporting refreshes the Dashboard script commands that can perform
actions such as retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects, navigate to different sections,
and specify report parameters
Report—Displays high-quality and professionally designed reports. These reports can span
anywhere from a complex critical operational report to a results set, a Chart, and a Pivot
table. Use the reports to help you evaluate your business, expand communications, and assist
in the decision-making process
Query—Foundation of the Interactive Reporting document, the Query section enables you
to connect to a relational database and download a prebuilt query or data model.
Results—Retrieves data to your document and displays it in the Results sections as columns
in a table
Pivot—Interactive table that quickly summarizes, or cross-tabulates, large amounts of data.
You can rotate its rows and columns to see different summaries of the source data, or display
the details for areas of interest.
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File Sections 217
l
l
l
l
Chart—Fully interactive, two- or three-dimensional view of your data that provides
powerful ways to visually analyze your data
Table—Single-dimension report that displays your data in columns. Tables are often used
as building blocks in other sections
OLAPQuery—Query section specifically designed for connecting to multidimensional
databases
CubeQuery—Query section exclusively designed for connecting to and querying Essbase
9.x or greater database
By default, an Interactive Reporting document file has at least one Query section and one Results
section. Each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations.
You can move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your
result data.
Selecting Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
Sections associated with the Interactive Reporting document file are shown in the Sections pane.
ä To select a section, click the desired section from the Sections pane.
ä To scroll up and down through a section, use the scroll bar on the right side of the browser.
Adding Sections
A new section is added based on an existing query and results set.
ä To insert a new section in an Interactive Reporting document file, select Actions, then
Insert, and then (New Section).
For example, to insert a new Chart, select Actions, then Insert, then Chart.
Interactive Reporting inserts the new section and adds a new section label to the Sections pane.
The section label is based on the type of section added. A sequence number is added to the section
label if a section with the same name already exists.
Moving Between Sections
Although each section occupies an independent window and performs distinct operations, you
can move back and forth between sections at any time to rebuild your query or alter your results
data. You can also position sections side-by-side in multiple windows.
You can easily navigate between sections to work on queries, results, and reports.
218 Interactive Reporting
ä To move between sections, select the desired section from the Sections pane.
If necessary, use the up and down scrollbar to vertically through the Sections pane.
Duplicating Sections
A section that has been duplicated retains all of the content and formatting of the original section.
In addition a new section is added to the Sections pane. The new section label is based on the
original section label, but a sequence number is appended to the label. For example, if you
duplicate a section named SalesChart three times, the Sections pane shows: SalesChart,
SalesChart2, SalesChart3, and SalesChart4.
ä To duplicate a section, select the section to duplicate in the Sections pane and select
Duplicate on the shortcut menu.
You can also duplicate a section by selecting a section from the Sections pane and choosing Edit,
then Section, then Duplicate.
Renaming Sections
The first section that you create is given the default section name, for example, Query or Results.
When you insert new sections of the same type as those that already exist, they are numbered
sequentially, for example, Query2, Results2, and so on. To assign sections different or unique
names based on your application, use the Rename command.
ä To rename a section:
1
In the Sections pane, select the section name to rename.
2
Select Rename on the shortcut menu.
You can also select the section to be renamed and choose Edit, then Edit, then Rename.
The Input Section Name dialog box opens.
3
Type the new name for the section and click OK.
Deleting Sections
You can delete a section, but do so with care. Some sections are dependent on other sections.
Deleting one section could also delete one or more sections that you did not want to delete. Note
that you cannot restore a deleted section.
ä To delete a section:
1
In the Sections pane, select the section to be deleted.
2
Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
You can also select the section and choose Edit, then Section, then Delete.
Working with Interactive Reporting Document File Sections 219
The Confirm Deletion dialog box opens.
3
Click OK.
Dashboard Home
Upon opening a document, a customized Dashboard section can be displayed as the Interactive
Reporting document file front-end. Each button selection, item selection, or navigation
sequence can invoke a script. Behind the scenes, Interactive Reporting refreshes the Dashboard
script commands that can perform actions such as retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects,
navigate to different sections, and specify report parameters.
ä To display Dashboard Home, click
.
Refreshing Interactive Reporting Document File Sections
You refresh a section to retrieve the most current data set from the database to Interactive
Reporting document file. The Refresh command can be used in any of the query reporting
sections. Once the data set has been refreshed in one section, all sections attached to the
Interactive Reporting document file are refreshed as well.
By default, the Refresh Current command (refreshes the current object) in all sections except
Dashboard and the Report section. In some cases more than one query may be refreshed, if for
example, a report references results sets from multiple queries.
In the Dashboard and Report sections, the Refresh All command to refresh all queries in the
Interactive Reporting document file is used. Although queries are not visible in to the end-user,
they are executed in the order in which they display in the section catalog in the full client version.
For ikkiexample, in an Interactive Reporting document file with three queries, Query1, Query2,
and Query3, the queries are executed in that order when the Refresh All command is selected.
If a variable filter has been set for the query by the designer of the <product Interactive Reporting
document file, the filter selections must be resolved before the query is refreshed. At that time
the user is prompted to select or enter filter values and complete the constraint.
ä To refresh a section, click
.
Printing Sections
When you print a section, it is printed to a PDF file and launched inside your browser if the PDF
MIME type is set in your browser. The PDF file can be viewed online, or printed if you need a
hard copy of a report.
The PDF format is created by Adobe and can be viewed outside of your browser if you have
Adobe Acrobat Reader installed. Adobe Acrobat Reader can be downloaded from Adobe’s web
site at http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep.html. If the PDF MIME type is not set
in the browser, the browser “Save As” dialog box is invoked.
220 Interactive Reporting
Note: A Query section cannot be printed.
ä To export an Interactive Reporting document file to PDF, select File, then Print, and then
PDF.
Optional: You can also print a section by clicking
.
Tip: Printing a section and Exporting a Section as a PDF are equivalent features.
Exporting Data
Interactive Reporting document files can be exported in several formats, including:
l
Exporting a Section as a .PDF
l
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS)
l
Exporting an Interactive Reporting Document File in Native File Format
Exporting a Section as a .PDF
Exporting a section to Portable Document Format (.PDF) allows you to preserve the layout and
format of the original section and transfer it across multiple platforms (such as Windows, UNIX
and the Macintosh). It also enables you to save, print and distribute the file easily and effectively.
To display and print a PDF file you must have Adobe® Acrobat® Reader™ installed. Acrobat
Reader is a self-contained application that can behave as an Internet Browser plug-in or as a
stand-alone application.
Acrobat Reader enables you to view, print and share a PDF file, but does not enable you to create
or modify it. The Acrobat Reader is free and can be downloaded from Adobe’s web site.
When the Acrobat Reader has been installed, you might have to configure your browser to use
it. For example you may need to associate Acrobat Reader as the application to read PDF files,
or have the PDF display in a separate window instead of the same window. You open a PDF file
by double clicking the PDF in the Explore module.
To save a PDF to your desktop for offline viewing, click the Acrobat Reader Save as Copy icon
on the Acrobat Reader toolbar. You are prompted to specify the directory in which to save the
file.
To print a PDF, click the Acrobat Reader Print icon. You are prompted to specify print
parameters and to print the report.
If the Acrobat Reader has not been installed, the File download dialog opens. You can save the
file to disk and open it from a location that you specify.
Exporting Data 221
ä To export an Interactive Reporting document file to PDF, click the
.
Optional: You can also print an Interactive Reporting document file to PDF by selecting File,
then Print via PDF.
Exporting a Section to MS Excel (.XLS)
You can export a section to Microsoft Excel and launch it inside your browser if the mime type
has been set to recognize the XLS file extension. From this point, you can save the file locally
and work with the data directly in the Microsoft Excel application. If the mime type is not set to
recognize the XLS file extension, you are prompted with a Save As Dialog and must specify a
local destination to save the XLS file for future viewing of the data with the Microsoft Excel.
Note: If you need to export a section to MS Excel in Web Archive format, you much use EXCEL
2002( Office XP) or EXCEL 2003.
ä To export an Interactive Reporting document file to Excel (XLS):
1
Click Export to XLS.
If the mime type has been set to recognize the section, it is launched automatically in
Microsoft Excel.
If the XLS file extension in not recognized, the Save As dialog box opens. Complete Step 2.
2
If desired, enter a new name for the section in the File Name field.
3
Select Microsoft Excel Workbook (.XLS) in the Save as Type field.
4
Select Save.
Exporting an Interactive Reporting Document File in Native
File Format
When an Interactive Reporting document file is exported in native file format, the EPM
Workspace checks if the Interactive Reporting Web Client has been installed and if so, launches
the Interactive Reporting document file in a browser. The Interactive Reporting Web Client is
a special application file placed in a web browser’s plug-in directory. Plug-ins add seamless
functionality to a web browser, enabling the browser to open a plug-in’s particular file type as
if it were an HTML file.
Any changes made to the Interactive Reporting document file are not replicated to the original
Interactive Reporting document file selected from the document list in the EPM Workspace
Repository (which resides on the server and can only be changed by importing the Interactive
Reporting document file again).
222 Interactive Reporting
ä To export a file in native file format, select File, then Export, and then Native File Format.
If the Interactive Reporting Web Client has been installed, make any desired changes and save
the document to the EPM Workspace Repository. If you do not have permission to overwrite
the Interactive Reporting document file, use the Save To Repository As command to rename
the Interactive Reporting document file and save it to the repository.
If the Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive Reporting Web Client has not been installed, the File
Download dialog box opens. You can either open the Interactive Reporting document file from
its current location, or you can export the file to disk and open it from an alternate location.
Query Section
The Query section is the foundation of any Interactive Reporting document file. An Interactive
Reporting document file can contain multiple Query sections that can access a wide range of
data sources (relational databases, OLAP servers, imported data sets, and local joins). Each Query
section has its own Results section and can be associated with the same database or different
databases (that is, the connection file or data model used is defined independently in each query).
This section includes the following topics:
l
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files (OCEs)
l
Data Model
l
Topics and Topic Items
l
Query Restrictions
l
Working with Queries
l
Working with Items on the Request Pane
l
Adding a Computed Item in Query
l
Computed Items and Data Functions
l
Data Functions
l
Applying A Query Filter
l
Applying Query Sorts
l
Refreshing a Query
Interactive Reporting Database Connection Files (OCEs)
Whenever you use Interactive Reporting to query a relational database and retrieve information,
the Interactive Reporting database connection file and data model are used to interact
transparently with the database. The Interactive Reporting database connection file and data
models are not visible to the end user in the EPM Workspace.
The Interactive Reporting connection file encapsulates and stores connection information used
to connect Hyperion applications to a database. Interactive Reporting database connection files
specify the database API(ODBC, SQL*Net, etc.,), database software, the network address of the
Query Section 223
database server, and your database user name. An end-user can specify the Interactive Reporting
database connection file and database password and logon. It is required for an Interactive
Reporting document file (BQY) to reference live information from the database.
Selecting an Interactive Reporting Database Connection File (.OCE)
ä To select an existing Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce)
1
Navigate to the folder in which to place the file.
2
Select File, then Import, and then File.
The first Import dialog box opens.
3
Click Browse, navigate to the folder where the desired Interactive Reporting connection file is located,
select the file and click Open.
The name of the selected Interactive Reporting connection file populates the File field on
the Import dialog box.
4
Click Next.
The second Import dialog box opens.
5
Specify any user name, password, and metadata information and click Finish.
For more information on these settings, see “Setting Processing and Metadata Options.”
Data Model
You use a data model to interact with a database to create queries that specify which data to fetch
from the database.
Data models make the database more accessible because they display database tables graphically
as topics. They also:
l
l
Substitute descriptive names for arcane database table and column names. Create custom
views of the data.
Add computed fields for performing calculations on the retrieved data.
Data Models are not visible in EPM Workspace. If a master copy of a data model has been
associated with a query, you can link a query to it. See Inserting a New Query.
Topics and Topic Items
Topics are a visual representation of tables in a database. They are logical groupings of related
information about a particular facet of your business, such as Customer or Sales. A list of topics
is shown in the Catalog list
A topic item is an individual items in a topic or metatopic.
224 Interactive Reporting
You build queries by adding topics from the Catalog list to the Request pane. You can also drag
and drop any topic item to the Request pane. When you refresh a query, data for all the topic
items present on the Request pane are returned.
Query Restrictions
These Query features are either unavailable or restricted in scope in EPM Workspace
l
l
l
l
l
The Query Log and Custom SQL options are not available.
A subquery is indented in the Section pane, but it is displayed as a regular query in EPM
Workspace. A subquery cannot be added in EPM Workspace.
If an Interactive Reporting document file contains a union query, the first query is displayed.
The Request and Filter panes in the Data Layout for the union query are read-only. In
addition, there is no Union Controller line. A new Union Query section cannot be created
in EPM Workspace.
Local Results can be displayed, but a new local result table cannot be created in tEPM
Workspace.
Derived queries can be displayed, but a new derivable query cannot be created in EPM
Workspace.
Inserting a New Query
Use the Insert New Query dialog box to select the master data model for a relational query.
Additionally if the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) contains a query associated with
an Essbase data source, you can select the Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce) .
Note: If the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) contains only a relational query and no
master data model, the Insert New Query dialog box is not available. In the case where a
Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) contains a relational query linked to a master
data model, and an Interactive Reporting database connection file (oce) associated with
a CubeQuery, all options on the Insert New Query dialog box are available. Note that
master data models are not available for a multidimensional Interactive Reporting
database connection file (.oce).
ä To insert a new query with a master data model:
1
Select Actions, then Insert, and then Query.
The Insert New Query dialog box is displayed.
2
Check Master Datamodel and select the master data model to link to the query.
The master data model is a prebuilt, custom view of a database. The benefit of data models
is that any changes to the master data model gets propagated to all dependent queries that
are based on the master data model.
3
Click OK.
Query Section 225
ä To select the Interactive Reporting database connection file (oce) associated with Essbase:
1
Check Existing Essbase Connection and select the database connection file (.oce).
2
Click OK.
Working with Queries
All Query sections in the Interactive Reporting document file are displayed in the Section pane.
For each Query section, you can build a query by adding topics to the Request pane. You can
also apply filters to the data, or specify columns by which to sort the data that is returned from
the database.
Building Queries
You build queries by selecting the data you want to retrieve from a visual representation of the
database. Once you have selected the items to include in the query and refresh it, a results set is
generated.
EPM Workspace offers three query methods for building queries:
l
l
l
Duplicate and modify an existing Query section, which has been provided to you in the
Section pane
Link to a predefined data model, known as a Master Data Model (if the appropriate adaptive
states have been granted)
Select an Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce) used to query an Essbase
database
ä To build a query by linking to a Master Data Model:
1
Select Actions, then Insert, and then Query.
The Insert Query dialog box is displayed.
2
iSelect a master data model and click OK.
The Request, Filter and Sort panes are displayed.
3
In the Catalog list, expand the Tables by clicking +.
A list of topics is displayed.
4
Expand a topic to view topic items by clicking +.
5
Drag a topic item to the Request pane.
Optional: You can also select the topic item in the Catalog list and click Add to Request on
the shortcut menu.
Tip: You can also select a topic item and select Add Selected Items in the Catalog list or select
Actions then Add to Request.
226 Interactive Reporting
Optional: To add an entire a topic to the Request pane, select the topic and drag it to the
Request pane.
6
To apply a sort, drag a topic item from the Request pane to the Sort pane.
For more information, seeApplying Query Sorts.
7
To apply a filter (limit), drag a topic item to the Filters pane.
For more information, see Applying A Query Filter.
8
Select
.
If you add more items than the Request pane can display, resize the browser.
ä To duplicate a Query section, select the query to duplicate in the Sections list, and choose
Duplicate on the shortcut menu.
EPM Workspace duplicates the section and adds a new section label to the Sections pane. The
new section label is based on the original section label, but a sequence number is appended to
the label. For example, if you duplicate a section named SalesChart three times, the Sections
pane shows: SalesChart, SalesChart2, SalesChart3, and SalesChart4.
Working with Items on the Request Pane
As you build your query, you can add and remove item to and from the Request pane. This
allows you to change the way in which the query refreshes and displays.
l
Adding Request Items
l
Removing Request Items
Adding Request Items
Queries are built by adding topic items from the Catalog list to the Request pane.
ä To add a topic item to the Request pane, select the topic item in the Catalog list and choose
Add to Request on the shortcut menu.
Removing Request Items
You can remove items in the Request pane to exclude the data from your query or results set.
ä To remove an item from the Request pane, choose the desired item and select Delete on the
shortcut menu.
Dependent sections that use the item are not affected by the removal of an item until the query
is refreshed.
Query Section 227
Note: Remove items with caution as a computed item or report may draw data from the item
that you delete.
Picture (BLOB Image) Support
Pictures can be queried from a relational database if they are image data collected as a BLOB
data type and stored as a binary unit in the database management system with ODBC
connections. BLOB image files available to include: .JPEG, .BMP, .GIF, and .PNG image formats.
Pictures can be dragged and dropped from a query table to the request line, displayed as strings
in columns in the Results and Table sections, or shown graphically in the bands of the Report
section. Dashboard developers can select images from results sets, not just static images from
the file system.
The following restrictions apply to BLOB images in Interactive Reporting:
l
The ODBC connection must use a server-defined join
l
It is not possible to determine the data type of an image in advance
See also:
l
“Adding Pictures in Query” on page 228
l
“Working with Pictures in Results and Tables” on page 228
l
“Working with Pictures in Reports” on page 229
Adding Pictures in Query
In the Query section, once BLOB images are retrieved as pictures, they are treated like any other
table topic item. They can be dragged and dropped from the table directly to the request line.
Only pictures in tables that have a primary key defined are included in a query. Pictures cannot
be sorted in the Query section. If you add a non-BLOB image to the request line, a broken link
to the image is displayed in the report section.
Working with Pictures in Results and Tables
A column is displayed in the Results and Table sections for every picture with a BLOB data type
on the request line. Descriptive text is displayed instead of the image in each cell in the format
<<Picture:unique id>>. The unique id is tooltip text if any has been specified, otherwise, the
unique id is the primary key value.
Adding Pictures in Computed Items
A picture function is available in Computed Items so that you can associate an image with a
computed column. In the Results and Table section, the picture is shown as descriptive text
instead of the image in each cell in the format <<Picture:unique id>>. The unique id is tooltip
text if any has been specified, otherwise the unique id is the Resource name. In the Reports
section, the computed item containing the picture can be shown graphically, For example you
228 Interactive Reporting
could use an “if else” statement to show an image if a certain set of conditions are met, and
another criteria if the condition is not met:
:if (Amount_Sales >= 10000) {Picture ("C:\\graphics\\smile.gif" )}
else{Picture("C:\
\graphics\\crying.gif" )}
Working with Pictures in Reports
The Report section can include pictures obtained from the database (BLOB data types) by using
an embedded object (Results and Tables) or it can use static images from the Resource Manager.
Pictures can be dragged from the Catalog and dropped into the report layout components: report
table report body report group header report page header of footer. You cannot drag a picture
into a Table Facts column. Once a picture has been added to the report, all images are sized to
fit the bounding rectangle defined in the report, and pictures can be resized as needed. Pictures
are sorted by the their underlying textual unique id (i.e. the text displayed in a table/result
section), which is particularly useful when they are added to the report group headers (via
outliner).
Adding a Computed Item in Query
In the Query section, a computed item is a set of instructions to the database server. EPM
Workspace uses the computing power of the database server to perform calculations as it
retrieves data from the database.
For this reason, the Query section allows you to use computed items in a way that is not possible
in the other sections. Instead of creating a new data item, the new values simply replace the
original values in the data item as they are retrieved from the database.
Additionally, you can compute items using any topic item in the data model and any scalar
functions provided by your RDBMS.
Note: You are unable to add computed items through shortcut menu in EPM Workspace. At
least one Results or Table column must be present to enable the right-click (shortcut)
menu which contains the option to add or modify a computed item. When no columns
are present, select the menu option Actions, and then Add Computed Item to create a
computed item.
ä To create a computed item in the Query section:
1
Select an item in the Request pane and choose Actions, and then Computed Item.
The Computed Item dialog box is displayed.
Optional: You can also select a request item and choose Add Computed Item on the shortcut
menu. At least one Results or Table column must be present to enable the shortcut menu
which contains the option to add or modify a computed item. When no columns are present,
you must select the Add Computed Item from the Actions menu.
2
Enter a name for the computed item in the Name field.
Query Section 229
The default name is Computed, which is numbered sequentially if there is more than one
computed item. If you assign a name to a computed item that is identical to an existing scalar
function name, EPM Workspace numbers the name starting with the number 2.
3
Select the data type of the computed item to build from the Data Type list box.
See also “Adjusting Data Types” on page 230.
4
Enter the definition of the computed item in the Definition text box.
l
l
See “Operators” on page 231.
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select items to place in the
equation. See also “Reference” on page 234.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the
Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace
spaces in item names with underscores (‘_’).
5
When the equation is complete, click OK.
In the Query section, the computed item is displayed on the Request pane with its new name.
When the query is refreshed, the computed item is listed in the Results Data Layout pane,
and it is displayed as a column in the results set.
Adjusting Data Types
Since computed items are new data items, confirm or change the data type of the item to preserve
the precision of a mixed-data type computations, or to change the way a data item is handled
(for example, interpreting number as strings). This ensures the correct handling of data in server
computations.
Attention to data types is most important when computing items in the Query section. Here the
computation is performed on the database server, and the computed item may be handled with
an unanticipated data type.
Local calculations (Results or Pivot) are handled internally, and adjustment between 16- and
32-bit integers can be handled safely using the automatic or number data type specification.
Since computed items are new data items, confirm or change the data type of the item to preserve
the precision of a mixed-data type computations, or to change the way a data item is handled
(for example, interpreting number as strings). This ensures the correct handling of data in server
computations.
Local calculations (Results or Pivot) are handled internally, and adjustment between 16- and
32-bit integers can be handled safely using the automatic or number data type specification.
Table 46
Data Type Specifications
Data Type
Specification
Automatic
A data type is determined automatically given the data type of the reference items and the computations performed
BLOB
Binary large object which is truncated at 64,000 bytes. Blob data types can include image formats such as: jpeg, bmp,
gif, and png.
230 Interactive Reporting
Data Type
Specification
Byte
Variable data type of length determined by a single byte of computer storage. Bytes can store numeric values from 0
to 255, or a single text character
Date
Calendar date in server default format (typically mm/dd/yy)
Integer (16–bit)
Retains a 16-bit value (2 bytes). A 16-bit integer stores integer values from 0 to 16,777,216, and signed integers
between +8,388,608 and –8,388,608
Integer (32–bit)
Retains a 32-bit value (4 bytes). A 32-bit integer has a range of 0 to 4,294,967,296 if unsigned. If signed, -2,147,
483,648 to 2,147,483,647.
Long Text
Character data (long text) exceeding 255 bytes (use the string data type for text strings up to 255 characters). The
maximum long text retrieved is 4000; characters anything greater than that is silently truncated
Packed Real
Real numbers packed for use with EDA middleware. The results in Interactive Reporting are the same as real numbers
Real
Decimal numbers up to 5 positions right of the decimal
String
Text strings to a maximum length of 256 characters
Time
Time in format set by user preference
TimeStamp
Date/time combination in format set by user preference
Operators
You can add operators in the Computed Item dialog box to add arithmetic or logical operators
to a computation in the Definition text box. Operators are added at the insertion point. You can
use any of the following types of operators:
l
Arithmetic Operators
l
Comparison Operators
l
Statements
l
Logical Operators
The following guidelines are applicable when using operators:
l
l
l
l
Type the word null (no quotes) into the Expression text box to represent null values.
Enclose all text string constant values and date constant values entered in expressions in
single quotes. (Numbers can be entered without quotes.)
To join items with a space or other character, reference or type items and strings into the
Expression text box and join them with the + operator (for example, City + ‘,’ +
State). To join without additional characters, use the Concat function.
In division operations, the divisor may not be null or equal to zero. If a data item serves as
the divisor in an expression (for example, 5000/Units_Sold) and includes null or zero values,
first create a computed item using if/else logic to remove null and zero values, and then
compute the item containing the division operation.
Query Section 231
Two date items can be subtracted, but not added. The Add Month function adds an integer
value to a date.
l
You cannot nest functions inside the Sum, Cume, Chr, and Breaksum functions.
l
Arithmetic Operators
Arithmetic operators take numerical values (either logical or variables) as their operands and
return a single numerical value.
Table 47
Arithmetic Operators
Operator
Name
Used at the:
+
Add
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
-
Subtract
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
*
Multiply
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
/
Divide
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
(
Begin suboperations
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
)
End suboperations
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections
++
Increment
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the Query section
--
Decrement
Server level and the local metatopic level for all sections except the Query section
Mod (%)
Modulus
Local metatopic level only
The modulus operator returns the
remainder of dividing var1 by var2.
For example, 5% 4 returns 1.
Tip: If a computed item is displayed on a Request pane, and the definition of item uses
subtraction, such as "Mytable.Column1-5", a SQL error can occur. The exact error depends
on the database, but the most common error indicates an undefined name was used.
Because databases allow hyphenated names, Interactive Reporting attempts to deal with
such names intuitively. Thus, an item definition like "Mytable.Column1-5" is interpreted
as a name. In order to ensure it is treated as subtraction, include a space on either side of
the hyphen/subtraction operator. For example, entering the computed item definition as
Mytable.Column1 - 5" ensures that the correct SQL is generated.
Comparison Operators
A comparison operator compares its operands and returns a logical value based on whether the
comparison is true. The operands can be numerical or string values. When used on string values,
the comparisons are based on the standard lexicographical ordering.
232 Interactive Reporting
Note: The comparison operators in the following table are only available at the local metatopic
level. For the examples in the table var1 has been assigned the value 3, and var2 has been
assigned the value 4.
Table 48
Comparison Operators (Local Metatopic Level)
Operator
Return “true” if the:
==
Operands are equal
For example, 3 == var1
!=
Operands are not equal
For example, var1!= 4
<
Left operand is less than the right operand
For example, var1 < var2
<=
Left operand is less than or equal to the right operand
For example, var <= var2, var2 <= 5
>
Left operand is greater than the right operand
For example, var2 > var1
>=
Left operand is greater than or equal to the right operand
For example, var2 >= var1, var1 >= 3
Statements
Executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. If the condition is false, another set
of statements can be executed.
Table 49
If...else statement
Statement
Description
if…else
if executes a set of statements if a specified condition is true. The specified condition may be another statement and can
include other nested if statements. Braces, {}, must enclose multiple statements. If the condition is false, another set of
statements can be executed if the optional else statement has been included in the script.
A sample if … else statement looks likes this:
if (condition) {
statements1
}
else {
statements2
}
Query Section 233
Logical Operators
Logical operators take Boolean (logical) values as operands and return a Boolean value.
Table 50
Logical Operators
Operator
Description
AND (&&)
Connects two conditional expressions and retrieves records only if each expression is true.
Computed items are not retrieved if any condition belonging to a conditional expression is false. The AND logical operator is
usually nested within another conditional expression, for example, expressions which use if and else statements. For example:
if ((OS == ‘Windows’) && (Item type == ‘Modem’)) {‘Windows’} else {‘other’}
OR (||)
Specifies a combination of expressions and retrieves records that include at least one of the expressions. For example, if one
of the words is Washington or Oregon, every record with the expression “Washington” and every record with the word “Oregon”
is included.
Typically the OR (||) is nested within other conditional expressions, for example, expressions which use if and else logical
operators. For example if you want to assign Washington and Oregon to the "Northwestern Region" and all other states to
"Other Regions", enter:
if ((State = = ‘Washington’)|| (State == ‘Oregon’)) {‘Northwestern Region’} else {‘Other Regions’}
NOT (!)
Computes and shows items more accurately stated in a negative way. In effect, all records are retrieved except those that
fulfill the conditional expression.
You enter the conditional expression with the NOT (!) logical operator preceding the conditional expression. The conditional
expression can be a simple value or nested within other conditional expressions, for example, expressions using AND and
OR.
A combined condition expression that uses NOT is true if the conditional expression following NOT is false. A combined
conditional expression is false if the conditional expression following NOT is true.
For example, suppose you are looking to list all states that are not in the Northwestern region. In this case, enter the conditional
expression:
if ( ! (State = = 'Northwestern Region')) {‘Other Regions’}
Reference
Use the Reference dialog box to select the topics and topic item from which to build the computed
item definition.
The Reference dialog box is split between topics in the left pane and topic items in the right pane.
The topics displayed in the left pane are derived from the topics in the Request pane. The items
displayed in the right pane are the values which make up each topic. Before you can select a topic
to use in a computed item expression, you must select it and a topic item.
Computed Items and Data Functions
Computed items and data functions are fundamentally different, and the functions available in
the Computed Item dialog box do not calculate data in the same way as data functions.
l
Computed items calculate a fresh value for each original value, based on the computation
(for example, Revenue calculated from Price and Units Sold). The new values are part of a
234 Interactive Reporting
new data item or replace the original values. Computed items never reduce the original
number of records.
l
Data functions, by contrast, summarize groups of database records and replace the original
values with new summary data. Because data functions summarize values, the number of
records are frequently reduced.
Data Functions
Data functions compute aggregate values, including averages, maximums, counts and other
statistics. These functions summarize groupings of data. You can use data functions to aggregate
and compute data from the server before it reaches the Results section, or compute different
statistics for aggregated Results totals and report items.
The effects of data functions are most dramatic in the Query section. For example, Dollars is an
item of sales transaction records for your stores in London and Madrid. You can apply a data
function to this item, consolidate the data, and calculate sum totals, average sale values, number
counts of individual sales records, or minimum sale values with respect to each city, once the
data is retrieved to Results.
ä To apply a data function, select the item or column, and chooseData Function on the shortcut
menu.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions , then Data Function, and
select the (function).
Table 51
Data Functions
Function
Returns
Availability
None
Unaggregated values as stored in the database. This is the default in Query.
Query
Sum
Sum of underlying values. This is the default in Results and report sections.
All
Average
Average of underlying values
All
Non-Null Average
Average of underlying values; null values excluded
Pivot, Chart, Report
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
All
Maximum
Highest of underlying values
All
Count
Number of underlying values
All
CountDistinct
Number of distinct values in a column. This function is not supported by all database servers
Query
Null Count
Number of nulls among underlying values
Pivot, Chart, Report
Non-Null Count
Number of underlying values; null values excluded
Pivot Chart, Report
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation of values. This function is not supported by all database servers.
Query
Variance
Variance of values. This function is available through Oracle servers only.
Query
Query Section 235
Function
Returns
Availability
Weight
Use for computing weighted items in Pivot reports.
Query
% of Column
Sum of all underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface column
Pivot
% of Row
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface row
Pivot
% of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report
Pivot, Chart
% of Category
Group total percentage of the selected value
Report
Increase
Calculates the increase between the previous two rows or columns
Pivot
%Increase
Calculates the percentage increase between the previous two rows or columns
Pivot
Title
Column names
Report
Null values are empty values for which no data has been specified; null values are not equal to
zero.
Applying A Query Filter
When building a query, you usually do not want to see information associated with every
product. Instead you want to see information that relates only to a specific product or product
line. Similarly, you may not want to see this information for every year the product has been
available, but only for recent periods.
When you set a filter in the Query section, data is returned from the database only if it meets
the specified conditions. For example, suppose you only want to see your most important
customers who spend more than $400,000 per year, or who buy gardening products in the
Midwest. By applying a filter you are instructing the database to “give me only the data which
satisfies the following conditions” (sales > $400,000; or, state is in Midwest Region and Product
Line = Garden).
In another example, a filter placed on Item Type (which includes an “=” (equal) operator and
value “Keyboard”) returns only records associated with keyboard sales. Records associated with
all other products are excluded from the results set. The data set could be expanded to include
modem sales records by adding the value “Modem” to the filter expression.
Similarly, the filter “> 5000” applied to the Amount Sold item filters out all sales transactions
less than or equal to $5,000. Alternately, the expression “between 5000, 10000” exclude
transactions above $10,000 and eliminates any below or equal to 5,000.
Another advantage of Query filters is that you can apply a filter to any Topic item, even if the
item is not on the Request pane. For example, if you request State, Year, and Units Sold, you
can filter any of these items.
You can also place a filter on the Operating System if it appears in one of the topics in the Contents
pane. For example, if you filter the Operating System to the UNIX only, the server retrieves only
sales information related to the UNIX operating system. You do not need to place the Operating
System on the Request pane.
236 Interactive Reporting
Note: If a query contains an aggregate filter, it is added to the Data Layout. However, this
aggregate filter line is read only and a new aggregate filter cannot be created.
ä To set a query filter:
1
Select a topic item in the Catalog list and select Add to Filter on the shortcut menu.
Optional: You can also drag one or more topics from the Catalog list and drop them into
the Filter pane.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
2
Define a pool of the potential filter values by selecting one of the following options:
l
“Show Values” on page 245 —Supplies database values associated with the item.
l
“Custom Values” on page 246 —Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
l
3
“Custom SQL” on page 247— Supplies an empty text box for entering a Structured
Query Language (SQL) clause to be included in the query statement.
If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Null to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example a field in which no data
has been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
4
Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
If you select NOT, the results of the equation are reversed.
5
Select a comparison operator to use for filtering values.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and specify a value of 10,000, values greater
than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 232.
6
Select the values to apply as a filter.
7
Select Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Variable Filters
A variable filter is a preset filter that is associated with the Interactive Reporting document file
by the designer and resolved only when the query is refreshed. At that time, you are prompted
to select or enter filter values and complete the constraint. A variable filter prompt is displayed
only if one has been set in the underlying Interactive Reporting document file.
Variable filters work particularly well with custom lists. If a custom list has been created, you
can respond to the prompt by simply selecting a value from the custom list. For example, you
may have an Interactive Reporting document file you use monthly to monitor inventory levels.
Query Section 237
Each time you use the Interactive Reporting document file, you run it separately for each product
line you carry. You can accelerate the process by making the filter variable on the product line
item, and create a custom values list. Each time you refresh theInteractive Reporting document
file, you can select a new product line without redefining filters.
You can select from three types of filters from which to apply a variable constraint, including:
l
“Show Values” on page 245 – Supplies database values associated with the item.
l
“Custom Values” on page 246 – Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
l
“Custom SQL” on page 247 – Supplies an empty text box for entering a Structured Query
Language (SQL) clause to be included in the query statement.
If you do not need to select specific variable filters for the query, choose “Set” to accept the
predefined filters and refresh the query. If you want to modify or add other values, complete
steps 2 and 3 below.
ä To specify a variable filter.
1
Click Refresh on the Interactive Reporting toolbar.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
2
If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Nulls to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example, a field in which no data
has been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
3
Select the NOT check box to negates the operator it precedes.
Selecting NOT reverses the results of the equation.
4
Select a comparison operator to use for filtering value.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 232.
5
Select the values to apply as a filter.
6
Select Set.
The filter is applied in the results set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
To see the result of setting the variable filer, select the Refresh command after the variable
has been set.
238 Interactive Reporting
Applying Query Sorts
Sorting simplifies the process of data analysis. After data is sorted, the answers to questions are
often readily at your fingertips because sorting ranks data to reveal trends and margins. If you
apply simple sort conditions in the Query section, the database server sorts the data while
refreshing the query before it is retrieved to your document file.
Typically, you can place an ascending or descending order on a sort condition that you place on
a column.
ä To apply a sort to the query, drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them
into the Sort pane.
Optional: A sort can also be applied by selecting an item and choosing Actions then Add to
Sort.
When the query is refreshed, the request item is sorted in the results set.
ä To sort in ascending order:
1
Drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them into the Sort Pane.
2
Select Sort Ascending on the shortcut menu.
ä To sort in descending order:
1
Drag one or more items in the Request pane and drop them into the Sort pane.
2
Select Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
ä To delete a sort, select the sort value to remove from Sort pane and choose Delete on the
shortcut menu.
Deleting a sort returns the data to its original display.
Refreshing a Query
After you build your query and apply filters computations, sorts, and any other adjustments to
further refine your request, refresh it to get the results of your query. Refreshing your query may
take a few moments if your query is complex or if the data in linked report sections needs to be
refreshed.
When you refresh your query, the data is retrieved to the Results section in tabular form. You
can refresh your query at any time and in any section to refresh the data. You can also return to
the Query section from any other section at any time to alter the query and refresh it.
ä To refresh a query, click
.
Optional: You can also select View, and then Refresh
Query Section 239
Results and Tables
When you refresh a query or import data, the Interactive Reporting retrieves data to your browser
and displays it in the Results section. Although the query may have accessed several different
database tables, the results set is displayed as a single table. Each requested item is displayed as
a column in the table and each database record is a row.
Use the Results section to:
l
l
Verify that your query returned the correct information.
Refine and extend the data set by applying filter conditions or create new computed or
grouped items.
l
Sort or use text and column formatting features to enhance the appearance of data results.
l
Add summary totals or subtotals and compute them with data functions.
l
Print or export the retrieved data to other applications.
All reports, including tables, pivots, charts, are based on the data that is retrieved to the Results
section.
Interactive Reporting provides several ways for you to view the results of a database query for
better analysis:
l
Adding a Table
l
Working with Columns and Rows
l
Sorting Results/Table Items
l
Number Formatting
l
Applying a Results and Table Filter
l
Results and Tables
l
Show Values
l
Results and Table Totals
l
Adding Computed Items in Results and Tables
l
Paging Through Results Data
Adding a Table
ä To create a table based on data in the Results section:
1
Select Action, then Insert, and then Table.
2
Drag Results items from the Catalog list to the Table Data Layout.
The table columns are populated automatically.
240 Interactive Reporting
Working with Columns and Rows
Columns and rows can formatted to your specific needs:
l
Adding a Column
l
Deleting a Column
l
AutoSizing ColumnS
l
Deleting a Row
Adding a Column
If you have removed a column from the results set, you can easily add it back. However, any
data values derived from the re-added column are not automatically update an existing column
either in the results/table section or another section, which draws from the results set.
ä To add a column:
1
Select any column.
2
Select Add Column on the shortcut menu.
Deleting a Column
You may need to delete a column in order to view the data set in a new way or maybe you want
to concentrate on selected columns of interest. This option is available for all columns. Note
that column deletion should be approached with caution since other sections draw data values
from the results set.
ä To remove a column, choose the column and select Delete Column on the shortcut menu.
The column is deleted. If you need to add the column back to the Results section, select Add
Column on the shortcut menu.
AutoSizing ColumnS
By default,Interactive Reporting truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of
data values. With the auto-size column width feature, you can automatically size any column to
fit the text of the largest value in the column.
ä To autosize a column:
1
Select a column.
2
Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Results and Tables 241
Deleting a Row
You can delete a row if it is a grand total or break. Note that the grand total is shown in the last
row on the last page of the table.
ä To delete a row:
1
Select a row.
2
Select Delete Row on the shortcut menu.
Sorting Results/Table Items
Data in the Results section is sorted in the order returned by the database. You can change the
order in which a column is sorted either in ascending or descending order.
ä To sort a column:
1
Select the column you want to sort on.
Selecting multiple columns invokes a “nested sort.”
2
Select Sort on the shortcut menu.
The Sort submenu is displayed.
3
Select either the Ascending or Descending sort item.
ä To delete the current sort order:
1
Select any column in the Results or Table section.
2
Select Sort on the shortcut menu.
The Sort submenu is displayed.
3
Select Delete All.
Number Formatting
You can change the way numbers, currency values, and dates are displayed throughout or create
new custom formats.
242 Interactive Reporting
ä To apply number formatting, select the format from the Format drop down list box.
Table 52
Formatting Categories
Option
Description
Category
Select a category for which you want to display number formats. When you select a category, the formats for that category are
displayed in the Format field. To create a custom format, select Custom and enter the desired format in the Format field. Enter
symbols, decimals, commas, and so on to indicate how to display the format. For example, enter 'MM/DD/YY' to display the
date as `01/01/99', or enter $$#.###.00 to show two dollar signs before the number and a decimal to mark the thousands'
place. When you create a custom format, it appears as a category on the machine on which it was created. If an item already
has a custom format applied to it, the custom format is in read-only mode.
Format
Displays the format for the selected category. If you are creating a custom category, you can enter the desired format directly
in the edit field.
The following table lists available numeric categories.
Table 53
Numeric Categories
Option
Description
Number
Sets the default format for real or integer values.
Currency
Applies currency formatting to the selected number object(s).
Percentage
Applied percentage formatting to the selected numeric object.
The following table lists the available formatting options and definitions along with examples
for the above categories.
Table 54
Formatting Options and Descriptions
Option
Description
Example
0
Integer placeholder or zero value. If a number has an integer value in this
position relative to the decimal point, the inter is displayed. Otherwise a zero
is displayed.
Apply 0 to show 123.
#
Integer placeholder. If a number has an integer value in this position relative
to the decimal point, the integer is displayed. Otherwise, nothing is displayed.
Apply #,##0 to show 1,234.
()
Formats with parenthesis options display negative values in parentheses.
Otherwise, negative values are displayed with a minus sign.
Apply (#,###0) to show (1,234).
;
A semicolon operates as a separator between two number formats. The
semicolon separates a positive integer and a negative integer.
Apply #, ##0;(#,##0) to show 1, 234 or apply
(1, 234) for a negative number.
$%
Adds the respective character to numeric values in the same position relative
to the decimal point.
Apply $#,##0.00 to show $1,234.56.
m d yy
Displays month, day, and year in respective positions for date-coded
information.
Apply mm dd yy to show 05 07 99
-/
Adds the respective character to date-coded values in the same position
relative to variables.
Apply mm/dd/yy to show 06/23/99
Apply 0.00 to show 123.45.
Apply 0% to show 3%.
Results and Tables 243
Applying a Results and Table Filter
Because local filters only hide data from the display, they are a good way to filter the data set to
reflect temporary and hypothetical situations. You can always remove the filter to return data
to the display and make it available for reporting.
Applying filters to your results/table sets allows you to narrow your request. That way you can
work with relevant data, saving time and conserving database and server resources.
You can add, modify and remove filters to columns in the Tables/Results section. The column
to which the filter is applied must exist in the table, and a filter cannot be placed on a hidden
column.
See also:
l
Show Values
l
Custom Values
l
Custom SQL
l
Modifying Filters
l
Deleting Filters
ä To add a results/table filter.
1
Select a column on which to apply the filter.
2
Select Filter on the shortcut menu.
The Filter submenu is displayed.
3
Select Apply/Modify on the Filter submenu.
The Filter dialog box is displayed.
4
5
Define a pool of the potential filter values by selecting one of the following options:
l
“Show Values” on page 245 —Supplies database values associated with the item.
l
“Custom Values” on page 246 —Supplies an empty text box for entering custom values.
If you are working with the Show Values or Custom Values options, select Include Nulls to include data
where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example, a field in which no data
has been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
If you are working with the Custom SQL option, skip the remaining steps, enter your Custom
SQL and click Set.
6
Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
Selecting NOT reverses the results of the equation.
7
Select a comparison operator to use for filtering values.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 232.
244 Interactive Reporting
8
Select the values to apply as a filter.
9
Select Set.
The filter is applied in the results set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Show Values
The Show Values feature provides a list of values derived from the content of the Results or Table
section. Because Show Values retrieve every unique value available, it is best not to use this feature
when the data item is large, consists mostly of unique values, or does not change frequently (for
example, telephone numbers). In this situation, custom values are recommended when you want
to avoid extra calls to the database.
The value list that initially displays was saved with the imported Interactive Reporting document
file, and it is not the latest value list from the database.
To show the latest value list, select View, then Refresh.
ä To specify a database filter value:
1
Select the Show Values tab.
2
Select Include Nulls to allow nulls to pass the filter and display in the data set.
3
Expand the Operator drop down and select a comparison operator for the filter expression.
Check Not to reverse an operator condition.
For example, if you specify the > Greater Than and then specify a value of 10,000, then values
greater than 10,000 are returned. Values which pass the comparison test are included. Valid
operators include:
Table 55
List of Comparison Operators
Operator
Retrieves Records Where the Filtered Item:
Equal (=)
Equals the specified value(s).
Not Equal (<>)
Does not equal the specified value(s).
Less Than (<)
Less than the specified value(s).
Less or Equal (<=)
Equal to or less than the specified value(s)
Greater Than (>);
Is greater than the specified value(s).
Greater or Equal (>=);
Is equal to or greater than the specified value(s)
Begins With
Begins with the specified value(s) up to and including the end value.
Contains
Contains the specified value(s) regardless of location.
Ends With
Ends with the specified value(s).
Results and Tables 245
Operator
Retrieves Records Where the Filtered Item:
Like (with wildcards)
Retrieves records where a text string is displayed and reflects the placement of the specified value(s).
For example, a Name Like %ZE_ retrieves records for all employees whose names have the letters Ze
followed by a single character at the end
4
Is Null
Has no value; for example a field in which no data has been entered.
Between
Retrieves records where the value of the filtered item lies between (and does not equal) the specified
values.
Not (with operator)
Negates the operator it precedes, reversing the results of the equation
Highlight the values to include as filters from the Values list.
To select an individual value, highlight it in the Values pane.
To select multiple and contiguous values in the Values pane, hold the [Shift] and scroll down
to or up to the items.
To select multiple, but non-contiguous values in the Values pane, hold the [Ctrl] key and
highlight the items.
5
Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Custom Values
A Custom Values list can be used to set a filter and are created by or supplied to you. One reason
to use custom lists with a distributed Interactive Reporting document file is that many data items
change very rarely. For example, a Gender item has three consistent values (male, female, and
unknown). A Product line item has many more items, but may only change every year or so.
Under these circumstances, it makes sense for you to select from a custom values list.
The initial custom values shown in the values pane originate and are saved with the Interactive
Reporting document file.
ä To apply a custom value as a filter:
1
Select Include Nulls to include data where the data item has no value.
Retrieves records where the filtered item has no value; for example a field in which no data
has been entered. A null value is not equal to zero.
2
Select a comparison operator to use for filtering value.
Select the NOT check box to negate the operator it precedes.
For example, if you select the > Greater Than operator and specify a value of 10,000, values
greater than 10,000 are returned.
For a list of valid comparison operators, see “Comparison Operators” on page 232.
3
In the Values field, enter the values to which you want to set as a filter.
4
To add the value, select +(the addition sign).
246 Interactive Reporting
To remove a value from the Values panel, highlight the item in the Values pane and click
the - (subtraction sign).
5
Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Custom SQL
If you are familiar SQL, select the Custom SQL feature and type a SQL where clause to be included
in the query statement.
ä To add a custom SQL statement:
1
Select the Custom SQL tab.
2
Type your SQL where clause containing the expression to use for the filter in the Values pane.
3
Click Set.
To suspend a filter temporarily without deleting it, click Ignore.
Modifying Filters
Once a filter exists for data in your query or results, you can later add or modify filter conditions.
ä To modify a filter:
1
Select the column to which the filter has been applied.
2
Select Filter on the shortcut menu.
The Filter submenu is displayed.
3
Select Apply/Modify on the Filter submenu.
The Filter window is displayed.
4
Select the filter value and click Set.
The following table provides a quick reference to the Modify Filter option:
Command
Description
Set
Applies the filter value.
Ignore Filter
Ignores a filter without deleting it.
Cancel
Cancels any filter applied in the current sessions.
Deleting Filters
Deleting filters adds the original values that were filtered back into the data set.
Results and Tables 247
ä To delete a filter, select the columns that has the filter value to be deleted and select Actions,
then Filter, then Delete on the shortcut menu.
Results and Table Totals
Totals and subtotals can help to consolidate a large results set. If you need individual data records
and plan to print the Results and Table section as a quick report, add totals and subtotals to
break your report into manageable sections.
See also:
l
Calculating a Grand Total for a Column
l
Calculating a Break Total for a Column
Calculating a Grand Total for a Column
You can calculate a grand total for any numeric data column and specify the original total value
with a new type of function. For example, by default the totals for a column are sums of the
values in those columns. But you can change the totals to averages instead of sums. These Results/
Table section functions include:
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Count
Number of underlying values.
ä To apply a grand total to a column:
1
Select the column and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
248 Interactive Reporting
2
Select a total function.
The grand total is displayed in a new row at the bottom of the last page in the selected column.
ä To remove all grand totals:
1
Select a column to which a grand total was applied and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2
Select Delete All.
ä To remove a selected grand total:
1
Select the row to which a grand total was applied and choose Grand Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2
Select Delete.
Calculating a Break Total for a Column
You can add subtotals to the same column by choosing another column of non-numeric data
to serve as a “break column.” The break column is used as a reference point to determine where
to break the data in the target column. The data in the subtotal column is subtotaled for each
distinct range of identical values in the break column.
Once a break total is placed on one column, the break total is applied to all numeric columns.
Like the total functions you can use when adding a grand total, a break total can also consist of
different functions. These functions include:
Data Function
Description
Sum
Sum of all underlying values
Average
Average of all underlying values
Maximum
Highest of underlying values
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Count
Number of underlying values
ä To apply a break total:
1
Select the column and choose Break Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available break total functions is displayed.
2
Select a total function.
The default total function is “Sum”.
Break totals are displayed in the target column along with the break total function name.
Results and Tables 249
ä To delete all break totals:
1
Select the column to which the break total was applied.
2
Select Break Total on the shortcut menu.
3
Select Delete All.
ä To remove a selected break total:
1
Select the row to which a break total was applied and choose Break Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu showing all available total functions is displayed.
2
Select Delete.
Adding Computed Items in Results and Tables
In the Results and reporting sections, computations are performed in the Interactive Reporting
document file. The computations involve only the data in your results set or on the surface of a
reporting section.
In these sections you can only create new computed items: you cannot modify original data
items retrieved directly from the database.
Computed items in the Results and reporting sections differ in two respects:
l
l
l
In the Results and Table sections, reference items are limited to the items that is displayed
on the Request line.
In the remaining reporting sections (excluding the Report Designer section), items in any
data layout are available in the Reference dialog box. Computations in these sections work
on the aggregated cell values that make up the core of the report. To perform computations
on data before it is aggregated, compute the new item in the Results section.
In the Report Designer section, the break totals of a table can be calculated.
ä To add a computed item in the Results and Table sections:
1
Select an item in the Request pane and choose Actions, and then Add Computed Item(s).
The Computed Item dialog box is displayed.
At least one Results or Table column must be present to enable the shortcut menu which
contains the option to add or modify a computed item. When no columns are present, you
must select the Add Computed Item from the Actions menu.
2
Enter a name for the computed item in the Name field.
The default name is Computed, which is numbered sequentially if there is more than one.
If you assign a name to a computed item that is identical to an existing scalar function name,
Interactive Reporting numbers the name starting with the number 2.
3
Select the data type of the computed item from the Data Type list box.
For information about data types, see “Adjusting Data Types” on page 230.
4
Enter the definition of the computed item in the Definition text box.
250 Interactive Reporting
l
l
You can type operators to insert arithmetic and logical operators at the insertion point.
See also “Operators” on page 231.
Click Reference to display the Reference dialog box, and select items to place in the
equation. See also “Reference” on page 234.
You can also type any portion of the equation or the entire equation directly into the
Definition text box using JavaScript. The names are case sensitive, and you must replace
spaces in item names with underscores (‘_’).
5
When the equation is complete, click OK.
Adjusting Data Types
Since computed items are new data items, confirm or change the data type of the item to preserve
the precision of a mixed-data type computations, or to change the way a data item is handled
(for example, interpreting number as strings). This ensures the correct handling of data in server
computations.
Attention to data types is most important when computing items in the Query section. Here the
computation is performed on the database server, and the computed item may be handled with
an unanticipated data type.
Local calculations (Results or Pivot) are handled internally, and adjustment between 16- and
32-bit integers can be handled safely using the automatic or number data type specification.
Table 56
Data Types in Results and Tables
Data Type
Specification
Automatic
A data type is determined automatically given the data type of the reference items and the computations performed
Number
Numeric data type.
String
Text strings to a maximum length of 256 characters
Date
Calendar date in server default format (typically mm/dd/yy)
Picture
Picture (Blob) data types for image formats such as: jpeg, bmp, gif, and png.
Paging Through Results Data
By default Interactive Reporting shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a
page in a browser. For paging behavior when data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal
rows shown on the page, see below.
Table 57
Results and Table Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Up
Moves one page up. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up arrow.
Results and Tables 251
Paging Option
Description
Page Down
Moves one page down. To move to the first page in the down direction, select [Shift] + Click + Down arrow.
Chart Section
Charts are fully interactive, three-dimensional views of data. A chart is a graphical representation
of a Pivot section. With a varied selection of chart types, and an arsenal of tools like grouping,
drill-down and drill to detail, the Chart section is built to support simultaneous graphic reporting
and ad-hoc analysis. You can add, move, cluster, focus and drill down into chart objects to gain
customized views of the data.
l
Understanding Chart Dimensions
l
Legends
l
Chart Types
l
Two-dimensional Chart Types
l
Multidimensional Chart Types
l
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
Understanding Chart Dimensions
A Chart can be referenced at three points: height, width and depth (x, y and z in Cartesian space).
To understand the differences among charts, you have to distinguish between dimensions in
space and dimensions of data. The two dimensions are distinct.
Data can either be represented in two or in three dimensional space. In two dimensions, data is
represented along the x and y axis. In three dimensions, data is projected back along the z axis.
Two dimensions of data must be represented in two dimensional space. At least three dimensions
of data are necessary to use the third spatial dimension.
But three or more dimensions of data can be represented in two dimensional space. For example,
cluster and stack represent data categories in the bar chart of two spatial dimensions (x and y
axes only).
252 Interactive Reporting
Chart Data Layout Categories
The Chart Section opens with an initial plot area for the chart. Because you manage chart
construction and manipulation is with the Chart data layout plotting, viewing and reviewing
are easy and intuitive.
You construct a chart by dragging items from the Catalog pane to a data layout pane. At least
one items must populate the data layout to plot a usable chart.
The data layout consists of the following items:
Table 58
Chart Data Layout
Data Layout
Pane
X Axis
Slice
Stack
Cluster
Depth
Description
The X- Axis is used for those items to place on the x axis, which is a straight line on the chart. It is used as a qualitative
data label for categorizing information. To place items on the x axis, use the X-Axis pane.
The Stack Cluster or Depth pane represents the third dimension of data, that is, the z axis that projects out toward you or
a location in space. This axis can either be qualitative or quantitative.
For a Stack pane, each dimension of data of the charts is represented by only one bar. This bar consists of as many
components as the data file has data rows, with the data from each row stacked onto the previous row. For example, a
single bar can represent the amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for other
years. You can stack the bar charts vertically or horizontally. By stacking items and assigning a different color to each item,
you can display trends among comparable or related items, or emphasize visually a sum of several indicators.
For a Cluster pane, data extended in the third dimension is shown as clusters displayed in the foreground. This category
creates a vertical column (and only a vertical column) for each data value. If the chart is showing multiple data series, the
values are grouped based upon the category value. For example, use clustered bars to compare stores of different types.
Alternatively, cluster bars can be used to compare two different values items, such as Amount of Sales and Units Sold.
For the Depth, data extends the length of the chart along the z axis.
Chart Section 253
Data Layout
Pane
Fact
Fact (Stack)
Fact (Depth)
Description
The Facts pane indicates height in the coordinate system. It is used as a quantitative label as a way of categorizing
information on the y axis.
For the Fact (Stack) pane, each dimension of numeric data is represented by only one bar. and shows the grouping along
the y axis. This bar consists of as many components as the data file has numeric rows, with the numeric data from each
row stacked onto the previous row. For example, a single bar can represent the amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one
year on top of a bar representing sales for other years. You can stack the bar charts vertically or horizontally. By stacking
items and assigning a different color to each item, you can display trends among comparable or related items, or emphasize
visually a sum of several indicators.
For the Fact (Depth) pane, numeric data extends the length of the chart along the z-axis.
Legends
A chart legend can be set on the x, y or z axis enabling you to shift your focus to data listed on
a particular axis. This is a great way to view values on the selected axis without having to view
another chart report.
The following three examples shows how to set the legend on different axes to alter the
appearance and data shown by the same chart.
In the first example, the legend has been set on the x axis:
In the second example, the legend has been set on the y axis:
In the third example, the legend has been set on the z axis:
254 Interactive Reporting
ä To set the chart legend:
1
Select the axis on which to set the legend.
2
Select Set Legend on from the shortcut menu.
The Axes drop-down list box is displayed.
3
Select either the x, y or z axis.
Changing Chart Properties
You can change the properties of a chart to view it in different perspectives:
l
Chart Types
l
Two-dimensional Chart Types
Chart Types
Chart types are defined by how they represent data graphically and how they plot values and
labels along the x, y or z axes. There are thirteen chart types, each of which may be switched from
a two-dimensional to a three-dimensional view (with the exception of the pie chart). Chart types
include:
l
Pie Charts
l
Stacked Bar Charts
l
Clustered Bar Charts
l
Pie Charts
l
Bar Charts
l
Scatter Charts
l
Bubble Charts
l
Area Charts
l
Line Charts
l
Time Aware Axis
Chart Section 255
l
Ribbon Charts
l
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
ä To change a chart type:
1
Select an item on the chart.
2
Select Change Chart Type on the shortcut menu.
3
Select another chart type from the submenu.
Two-dimensional Chart Types
Pie and bar charts (of the non-stacked variety) lend themselves to representing two dimensions
of data. For example, imagine charting the amount of sales by product type. In pie charts, the
two dimensions are represented by slices of a pie. In bar charts, the data is represented by bars
along the x and y axes. Two-dimensional chart types include pie and bar charts.
l
Pie Charts
l
Scatter Charts
l
Bubble Charts
l
Bar Charts
Pie Charts
Pieces (slices) of the pie are drawn to depict the relative value of a measurable item category to
the whole. Pie charts represent additional dimensions of data by further subdividing the pie.
Showing Negative and Positive Values
Pie slices can show both positive values and negative values.
256 Interactive Reporting
ä To toggle the display of negative values, select a slice of the pie and select Show Negative
Values on the shortcut menu,
Showing Pie Percent
Pie slice values can be expressed as a percentage.
ä To toggle the display of each pie slice value as a percentage, select a slice of the pie and choose
Show Pie Percentages on the shortcut menu.
Bar Charts
Bar charts are the most common type of business chart and are especially useful for comparative
analysis when you want to focus on comparing values and place less emphasis on time. Use a
bar chart to illustrate comparisons among individual items.
In a vertical bar chart, items in the y axis form the chart bars. Items in the x axis and z axis itemize
the bars.
In a horizontal bar chart, items in the y axis form the chart bars, and items in the x and z axes
itemize the bars.
Chart Section 257
Showing Bar Values
ä To toggle the display of values, select a bar and choose Show Bar Values on the shortcut
menu.
Scatter Charts
A scatter chart is useful for emphasizing scientific or statistical similarities rather than differences
in your analysis. Scatter charts illustrate the relationship between pairs of numerical or
quantitative values, which are combined into individual data points along the horizontal (y axis)
and a vertical (x axis) axis. Data points are plotted in uneven intervals.
A scatter chart represents non-aggregated sources, that is, it retrieves data from the underlying
Table/Reports section and does not reflect rolled up values (all other chart types retrieve their
data from an aggregated source, and there is a one-to one correspondence between Charts and
Pivots). For this reason, the Pivot This Chart feature is not available for a scatter chart.
Scatter charts can only contain a pair of fact or numeric values which are placed in the Y Axis
and X Axis in the data layout. If you add only one fact item to the data layout, no scatter chart
is rendered. In addition, label values cannot be added to the Y Axis or X Axis of the data layout.
The following feature limitations apply to scatter charts:
l
Data functions are not available to scatter charts because this type of chart relies on nonaggregated data.
l
The sort feature cannot be used for scatter chart items.
l
The Pivot To Chart feature is not available.
l
Drilling cannot be performed on a scatter chart.
l
The focus feature cannot be used on scatter chart items.
l
The Hide feature hides the whole data series in a scatter chart, and an individual item cannot
be hidden.
Bubble Charts
Bubble charts are typically used to show three dimensions of data in a two dimensional chart.
This type of chart often lends itself to the display of financial data because specific values can be
visually represented in your chart by different bubble sizes. It is similar to scatter chart allowing
you to plot data as a collection of bubbles. Bubble charts plot three values:
l
a value set on the x-axis
l
a value set on the y-axis
l
a value that defines the size or width dimension of a bubble in proportion to the amount of
data
Multiple data values can be plotted in the bubble chart.
258 Interactive Reporting
Bubbles with zero size can rendered using some small bubble size to prevent them from
disappearing. Also there is an option can be provided to hide zero-size values if necessary.
Bubbles with negative values can also be displayed. These type of values are derived from their
real absolute value, and the real negative value is depicted in the data label (although based on
the positive value). You can optionally select not to show negative values.
The following feature limitations apply to bubble charts:
l
Data functions are not available to bubble charts because this type of chart relies on nonaggregated data.
l
The sort feature cannot be used for bubble chart items.
l
The Pivot To Chart feature is not available.
l
Drilling cannot be performed on a bubble chart.
l
The focus feature cannot be used on bubble chart items.
l
The Hide feature hides the whole data series in a bubble chart, and an individual item cannot
be hidden.
ä To create a bubble chart:
1
In the Section pane, select the chart in which to generate the bubble chart.
2
Drag a fact value from the Catalog pane to the Y Axis of the data layout.
3
Drag a fact value from the Catalog pane to the X Axis of the data layout.
4
Drag a fact value from the Catalog pane to the Size pane of the data layout.
ä To show the real value of a data point, use the tool tip and hover over the data point.
ä To show grid lines on the scatter chart, click the plot area of the chart and select Show X Axis
Grid Lines or Show Y Axis Grid lines.
Multidimensional Chart Types
Frequently you may want to view data represented in more than two dimensions. For example,
you may want to see how the sales of product types break down by years or quarter. There are
numerous ways to chart three or more dimensions of data. You can project data into the third
dimension of space. You can also represent the data in two spatial dimensions.
l
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
l
Clustered Bar Charts
l
Stacked Bar Charts
l
Area Charts
l
Stacked Area Charts
l
Line Charts
l
Time Aware Axis
Chart Section 259
l
Ribbon Charts
l
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
Viewing Three-dimensional Bar Charts
You can add more information to your bar chart by adding an additional item or items to the z
axis of the chart. Using multidimensional charts, you can show various relationships between
three or more items in easy-to-understand bar chart formats.
Clustered Bar Charts
Cluster bar charts can be used to juxtapose categories in one label item category. For example,
use clustered bars to compare stores of different types. clustered bars can also be used to compare
two different value items, such as Amount of Sales and Unit sold.
You can change your chart perspective so that the z axis data extended in the third dimension
is shown as clusters displayed in the foreground. This charting type is useful when z axis bars
are hard to distinguish in standard bar formats.
Cluster charts can be used to juxtapose categories in one label item. For example, use clustered
bars to compare stores of different types. Alternatively, cluster bars can also be used to compare
two different value items, such as Amount of Sales and Unit Sold.
Clustered bar charts are only displayed in a vertical format.
Stacked Bar Charts
One way to represent the third dimension of data is through stacking. In this way, a single bar
on the chart can show data for more than one category of data. For example, a single bar can
represent amount of sales for CD-ROM drives in one year on top of a bar representing sales for
other years. Stacked bar charts can stack vertically or horizontally.
The following is an example of a vertical stacked bar chart.
260 Interactive Reporting
The following is an example of a horizontal stacked bar chart.
Area Charts
Area charts are essentially bar charts with discontinuous breaks removed along the horizontal
axis. Data is not broken into discrete bars, but is displayed in a continuous ebb and flow as
defined against the y axis. Consequently, area charts are particularly useful for emphasizing the
magnitude of change over time. In addition, area charts can be used for the same purpose as bar
charts.
Because area charts do not break data along the horizontal axis, they are most useful for charting
three dimensions of data. The z axis should be used to either project data into a third-spatial
dimension, or to track two categories of data in a stacked area chart.
In the area chart, items on the y axis determine the height of the line, and items on the x axis
itemize the line sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the z pane.
Chart Section 261
Stacked Area Charts
Stacked area charts are essentially bar charts with the discontinuous breaks removed along the
horizontal axis, and categories of data are “stacked” on top of each other. Data therefore is not
broken into discrete bars, but is displayed in continuous ebb and flow as defined against the y
axis. A stacked area chart is an excellent way to display data that shows the relationship of parts
to the whole. Consequently, stacked area charts can be particularly useful for illustrating changes
that are plotted over a period of time.
Line Charts
Line charts show trends in data at equal intervals and are effective for comparing highs and lows
in a continuum. Items on the y axis determine the height of the line, and items in the X-Categories
itemize the line sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the Z-Category.
Line charts have one advantage over bar charts. They do not enable one set of data to obstruct
the representation of another. Since lines are thin compared to bars, the data displayed in the
front does not block out the data behind.
As a result, data that is not easily represented in bar or area charts work well in line charts. Many
more dimensions of data can be superimposed without impairing the effectiveness of the chart.
262 Interactive Reporting
Time Aware Axis
The Time Aware Axis feature allows you to show dates in chronological order plotted at specific
intervals within minimum and maximum bounds. To do this, the Time Aware Axis feature turns
a discrete X-Axis into a continuous time interval. The distance between adjacent axis items is
proportional to their time value difference (a non Time Aware Axis shows all items using the
same difference between them). The Time Aware feature only implements an alternative
visualization of source data and does not affect the way how the data is aggregated and computed
items are calculated. That is, the data processing in chart section which includes dividing data
into categories and calculating fact data does not depend on whether the Time Aware feature is
activated. In particular, the behavior of the “Chart This Pivot”, “Pivot This Chart” and “Add
Computed Item” actions do not change.
The Line Charts is the main application area of this feature; however it is available in almost all
existing chart types. Scatter/Bubble charts do not include this option because they are already
“time aware” (essentially, value aware) by nature. Both have two fact axes which are continuous
by definition.
The Time Aware axis can only be used under specific conditions:
l
l
l
The X axis should have a date/time category to display, which becomes a dedicated Time
Scale category.
Only one category should be on the X-Axis. If you add multiple categories, even if they are
ate/time categories, the feature is rendered inactive.
The Time Aware axis is not available for pie, scatter and bubble charts.
The Time Aware Axis is considered active if the conditions in the list above are met, and the
Time Aware option on the Label Axis dialog is not explicitly disabled. You can turn on or off
the feature. If you turn off the feature, the X axis remains discrete as in previous versions. By
default the feature is turned off for Interactive Reporting document files older than Release 9.3.
Charts created in Release 9.3 and later have the feature enabled.
Chart Section 263
Note: Since the Time Aware Axis assumes that all axis labels are in ascending order, the sort
order option is disabled.
ä To create a Time Aware axis:
1
Check the Time Aware option on the Label Axis tab of General properties.
2
Drag a date/time item from the Catalog pane to the X pane in the data layout.
3
Drag a value item from the Catalog pane to the Facts pane in the data layout.
Ribbon Charts
A ribbon chart is very similar to a line chart, but with a few visual differences. In ribbon chart,
values in the y axis determine the height of the line, and values in the x axis itemize the line
sections. You can create multiple lines by adding items to the z axis.
Bar-Line (Combination) Charts
Bar-Line charts (also known as Combination charts) combine some of the strengths of bar charts
with the advantages of line charts. Solid bars can be used for the most important data against
which other dimensions are represented in lines. In this way, emphasis is give to a portion of
data based on its importance. A combination chart is especially useful for comparing two
numeric values, such as amount and units of sales.
264 Interactive Reporting
Note: A combination chart is most effective when the y axis contains only two value items. It
represents one value as bars and the other value as a line. When more than two values are
present, the chart alternates between bars and lines in depicting the values (1st, 3rd, 5th
items are bars; 2nd, 4th, 6th items are lines).
Working with Charted Data
Interactive Reporting provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your chart data for
better analysis. Review the following topics for information on:
l
Adding Chart Items
l
Removing Chart Items
l
Focusing and Hiding Charted Data
l
Grouping and Ungrouping Chart Labels
l
Reference and Trend Lines
Adding a Chart
ä To create a Chart based on the Results section data:
1
Select Actions, then Insert, and then Chart.
2
Drag Results items from the Catalog List to the Chart data layout.
The table columns are populated automatically.
3
Select a Chart type on the shortcut menu.
Adding Chart Items
Interactive charts consist of two layout elements: graphical elements (for example, Chart bars
or pie slices) and axis labels. When you add items to a chart, they become values or dimensions
in your report.
Chart Section 265
ä To add a chart item:
1
Select a Chart item and choose Add item on the shortcut menu.
The x axis, y axis and z axis submenus are displayed. The z axis submenu does not display
for a pie chart.
2
Select a data label from the x axis submenu.
3
Select a fact item from the y axis submenu.
4
Select a data label item from the x axis (or Z-Cluster for a clustered chart, or Z-Stack for a stacked chart)
submenu to add a third dimension to the chart.
Removing Chart Items
Removing a plotted items in the Chart sometimes helps to simplify a chart display. However,
you do need at least one fact item in order to display a chart accurately.
ä To remove a chart item:
1
Select the item to be removed in the Chart from the data layout.
2
Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to reflect the new configuration of items in the chart.
Refreshing Chart Values Manually
If a Chart section has been designed so that chart values can be refreshed manually, you can
request an immediate refresh to the current section.
ä To refresh chart values manually, click anywhere on the chart and select Refresh Chart on
the shortcut menu.
Focusing and Hiding Charted Data
A straightforward way to refresh your view of a chart is to single out items for closer focus or to
hide some of the charted elements. This allows you to concentrate on particular items of interest.
Focusing redraws the chart report to show only the item you have chosen. This feature is only
available for items on the x axis or z axis.
The Show All command updates the chart to include all items removed by focusing. Note that
this command is available only when a Chart item has been focused.
Generally, you should only hide items on the x or z axis. Hiding the y axis causes the entire fact
to be hidden.
The Show Hidden Items command restores any hidden item.
ä To focus on a chart item:
1
Select one or more item on which to focus.
266 Interactive Reporting
The selected items are displayed with a dotted outline.
2
Select Focus on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to display only the chart item selected.
ä To show all items in a chart, select a chart item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut
menu.
ä To hide charted data:
1
In the Chart, select the objects to hide.
The selected item(s) are displayed with a dotted outline.
2
Select Hide Item on the shortcut menu.
The chart is redrawn to hide the item.
ä To show hidden items, select a chart item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut menu.
Grouping and Ungrouping Chart Labels
You can merge Chart axis labels using the Group feature. When combined, the data associated
with labels is aggregated, creating a new summary label category. With grouping, only your view
of the data is changed. You can easily ungroup grouped categories and return to your original
label values.
For example, your chart report is structured with data item Units (sold) dimensioned by Year
and Quarter. You can group the first and second quarters together to summarize activity for the
first half of the year. The data is aggregated in a new label.
This feature is available only for items on the x axis or z axis.
ä To toggle the group axis labels feature:
1
Select the individual labels to be grouped.
(You can group contiguous or discontiguous labels, but the labels must be part of the same
dimension item or axis.)
2
Select (Un)Group Items on the shortcut menu.
The selected labels, and their associated data values or chart objects, are combined. The
resulting label is displayed with an asterisk (*) to indicate a grouping.
To ungroup items, reselect the grouped items and choose (Un)Group Items on the shortcut
menu.
Reference and Trend Lines
Use the Reference, and Trend line tools to visually reveal trends in your data set, and to make
reasonable predictions about future values. These tools include:
Chart Section 267
l
l
Reference Line—A horizontal or vertical line drawn in the diagram to indicate a user defined
computed value.
Trend line—A line connecting two or more data points representing a linear regression
model of data. Generally, the trend line slants because it reflects the movement of a value's
increase or decrease over time.
Reference Lines
A Reference Line is a horizontal or vertical line drawn in the chart diagram to indicate a computed
value. It is typically used to illustrate or compare a fixed value within a category of values. It can
include an assigned statistical function (average, minimum or maximum). There can be several
reference lines created for the same fact column having different statistical functions associated
with each one. When the statistical function of a reference line is calculated, not only the data
from current page, but also the data from all pages of a multi-page chart (or zoomed chart) are
included. The category items that are hidden as a result of applying ‘Hide Items’ or ‘Focus on
Item’ or ‘Drill Anywhere’ are not included.
Reference lines can be drawn on the top of visible graphic elements of a diagram (for example,
bars or lines). By default the lines are drawn on the top. Reference lines can be shown wit ha text
label, and reference line information in the legend. By default a reference line has a text label
associated with it showing auto-generated text. This line. is set automatically and cannot be
adjusted by a user.
This example shows a fact based reference line associated with an Amount Sales fact column
assigned to the Average function.
2D and 3D Reference Lines
Reference lines should be used primarily with two dimensional perspective, but are supported
with a three dimensional (3D) perspective. If they are used with a 3–D perspective, several parallel
lines are drawn along the Z-axis together with graphical data.
268 Interactive Reporting
Reference Lines and Chart Types
The Stacked Bar, Stacked Area charts both allow axis-based and fact-based Reference lines. A
single fact-bound Reference Line is drawn for summed stacked items.
A Pie chart cannot have any type of reference line.
The fact based reference line is always associated with a fact column. When the column is
removed from the Chart data layout, the corresponding reference line is also removed. When
the fact column is hidden or focused, the reference line is also hidden, or focused.
If the chart type is switched to another chart type, the Reference Lines is hidden. Switching back
to the original chart type restores the lines.
Adding and Modifying Reference Lines
ä To add a reference line, select a chart item that represents a data fact and on the shortcut
menu, select Add Reference Line.
ä To modify a reference line:
1
Double-click the reference line.
The Reference Properties dialog box is displayed.
2
Select the Reference Line tab.
3
Select Fixed to assign an axis based reference line, or a fact item from the Fact drop-down.
4
To assign a statistical function to a fact based reference line, select a function from the Function dropdown list.
5
Enable Show in legend to show the reference line in the legend.
6
Enable Show label to show the reference line label.
For more information about general reference lines, see Reference Line General
Properties .
7
Select the Label Format tab to select any label properties.
For more information about reference line label formats, see Reference Line Label Format
Properties .
8
Select OK.
Trend Lines
Trend lines are used to track trends in a data series graphically. Interactive Reporting supports
trend lines modeled after linear regression analysis. Generally the trend line is represented as a
slanted line that crosses the diagram. For example, the trend line can demonstrate an increase
or decrease of values over time. It may be accompanied with the calculated goodness of fit (Rsquared) value.
Chart Section 269
Trend lines can be layered on top of the chart graphics (or Z axis for 3 D charts), or positioned
to the background. When data is processed to create the trend line, facts from all pages of the
chart are included. Chart items hidden or focused explicitly by the user are not included.
Trend lines are always fact based, and only one trend line can be associated with a single fact
column. In Scatter and Bubble charts, the trend line is bound to the data series.
2D and 3D Trend Lines
Trend lines should be used primarily with two dimensional perspective, but are supported with
a three dimensional (3D) perspective. If they are used with a 3–D perspective, several parallel
lines are drawn along the Z-axis together with graphical data.
Trend Lines and Chart Types
Trend lines can be added to most chart type including stacked charts (Bar and Area). The value
of each stack is included when the trend equation is calculated. When the separate stackables of
a full bar belong to different facts, then a single trend for all facts is drawn. The sum of separate
facts (either positive or negative) is included when calculating the trend line equation.
Trend lines are most effect in Scatter, Bubble and Time Aware charts.
A trend line with a single category on the X axis is preferable. In cases where there are multiple
categories on the X axis, it might be difficult to analyze the trend if the categories are unrelated.
Pie charts cannot have trend lines.
Adding a Trend Line
ä To add a trend line, select a chart item that represents a data fact and on the shortcut menu,
select Add Trend Line.
Trend Line General Properties
Use the Trend Line Properties dialog box to select general trend line properties.
270 Interactive Reporting
Table 59
Trend Line General Properties
Property
Description
Fact
Select the fact item on which to assign the trend line. Multiple trend lines cannot be assigned to a single fact item.
Show in legend
Enable to show assigned text of the trend line and short line segment representing the actual color of the line in the
legend.
Show label
Enable to show the label text on the diagram.
Bring to front
Positions the reference line in front of the chart item.
Send to back
Positions the reference line in back of the chart item.
Trend Line Label Format PropertiesUse the Trend Line Label Format dialog box to set up the
line label and legend text.
Table 60
Trend Line Label Format Properties
Property
Description
(Text Format for
Plot Area or
Legend)
Format text for the plot area (line label) or legend text from the drop-down. If the “Use the same format in plot area
and legend” field is enabled, this option is disabled.
(Custom Format)
Specify a custom format for the plot area or legend. A custom format can combine constant text and generated strings
to show the trend line name, the equation type, or a coefficient of determination (R-squared).
Trend line formats default formats that can be customized include:
l
Trend{([FC])}—Trend(<Fact name>)
l
[ET]—Equation Type (Linear only)
l
{R squared=[RS]}—Coefficient of determination (how good the fitness is), for example, R-squared=0.7349
.
Use the same
format in plot
area and legend.
Enable to use same format for the plot area and legend. When this option is enabled, you cannot select separate
formats for the plot area and legend.
Auto format
The following Default, Equation type and R-squared fields can be enabled to reset the label text to auto-generated
text on the line. Each field adds predefined tags to the text format. If no auto-format is enabled you can enter a custom
format in the edit box.
Default
Shows the default text: “Trend(<Fact name>)”
Equation Type
Shows the equation name in auto-generated text, for example: linear.
Note: As of Release 11.1.1 only the linear equation type is available.
R-squared
Shows coefficient of determination (how good the fitness is, or how good the trend line conforms to the data) in a
value range from 0–1, for example R-squared=0.7349.
Chart Section 271
Reference Line General Properties
Table 61
Reference Line Properties
Property
Description
Fixed
Enable to assign a fixed value to the reference line (axis based).
(edit box)
Specify the fixed value amount to use for the reference line. The amount must be numeric. It remains constant on the
reference line, and does not depend on another item in the Fact pane of the data layout.
Fact
Select the fact based column for the reference line from the drop-down. Available columns are based on the columns
in the data set.
Function
Select the function to apply to the fact based column. Available functions are:
l
Average
l
Maximum
l
Minimum
Show in legend
Enable to show assigned text of the reference line and short line segment representing the actual color of the line in the
legend.
Show label
Enable to show the label text on the diagram.
Bring to front
Positions the reference line in front of the chart item.
Send to back
Positions the reference line in back of the chart item.
Reference Line Label Format Properties
Use the Reference Line Label Format dialog box to define line label (plot area) and legend text
properties.
Table 62
Reference Line Label Format Properties
Property
Description
(Text Format
for Plot Area
or Legend)
Formats text for the plot area or legend from the drop-down.
If the “Use the same format in plot area and legend field” is enabled, this option is disabled.
272 Interactive Reporting
Property
Description
(Custom
Format)
Specify a custom format for the plot area or legend.
A custom format can combine constant text and generated strings for a statistical function or the value of the reference
line.
Constant text accepts the following tags:
l
[FC]—fact name
l
[VL]—value of reference line.
For example, the custom format: “Expected sales = [VL]” could return the results in the label or legend: “Expected sales
= $26300000”. If the text for a tag cannot be generated (for example, the format is for an [FN] tag on an axis based
reference line), the tag resolves in an empty string, and it is removed.
A custom format can include complex tags combining arbitrary text with one or more simple (and even complex) tags. A
complex tag is bounded by curly braces ({}), for example, “{Sales [FN] = }[VL]”. If at least one of the tags inside the
complex tag cannot be resolved, all complex tags result in an empty string.
A fact based reference line using the format above might be resolved in a“Sales Average = $126000” string, and for an
axis based reference line it could be resolved in a “$126000” string.
The special delimiter tag, [DL] is available. This tag inserts a space in the resulting string if both the left and right tags are
successfully resolved.
The complex tag, {; [DL] }inserts custom text as a delimiter. For example, the format “{[FN]([FC])}{ = [DL]}[VL]” may result
in one of the following strings depending on conditions:
l
Average(Sales)
l
Average(sales) = $126000
Auto format
The following Default, Function and Value fields can be enabled to reset the label text to auto-generated text on the line.
Each field adds predefined tags to the text format. If no auto-format is enabled you can enter a custom format in the edit
box.
Default
Show the default text: “<Function name>(<Fact name>) = <Value>”
Function
Shows the statistical function in auto-generated text, for example: Average.
Value
Shows the value of the reference line, for example: Value = 0.7348.
Working with Chart Facts
Data functions in the Chart section are particularly useful if you want your report to display
different types of values. Data functions summarize groups of database records and replace the
original values with new summary data.
For example, in the Pivot section, you can show either the total sale, average sale, or the maximum
sale of each product by quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same underlying values.
They differ only in the data function that is applied.
The following table shows the Chart Functions:
Chart Section 273
Table 63
Chart Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
Count
Number of underlying values.
Count Distinct
Number of distinct values in a column.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
Perc of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report.
NonNullCount
Number of underlying values; null values are excluded.
ä To apply a data function:
1
Select a bar or row of facts (such as Amount).
2
Select Data Function on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut menu of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions, then Data
Function, and select the (function).
3
Select the function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
Paging Through the Chart
By defaultInteractive Reporting shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a
page in a browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the
page. To view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 64
Chart Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
Tooltip shows the current page.
Page Left
Moves one view in the left direction. To move to the first view in the left direction, select [Shift] + Click + left arrow.
Page Up
Moves one view up in the Chart sections. To move to the top view, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Down
Moves one view in the down direction. To move to the first view in the down direction, select [Shift] + Click + Down arrow.
Page Right
Moves one view in the left direction. To move to the first view in the right direction, select [Shift] + Click + right arrow.
274 Interactive Reporting
Pivot Section
Pivot tables are analytical tools that resemble spreadsheets or crosstab reports. Data can be sliced
and diced for ad-hoc, interactive and multidimensional analysis. You can pivot your data at any
time to change the way you view it, or you may drill down, or drill to detail to see how it all adds
up or summarizes. Pivot tables also allow you to add, move, focus on and group dimensions to
gain customized views of the data.
l
Pivot Table Components
l
Working with Pivot Data
l
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
l
Working with Row and Column Labels
l
Analyzing Pivot Data
l
Working with Pivot Facts
l
Paging Through Pivot Data
Pivot Table Components
A pivot table is composed of three components:
l
l
l
Facts—Numeric values broken up in the body of the pivot table. Facts may also be referred
to as data values.
Data Labels—Column and row headings on the top and sides of the Pivot and define the
categories by which the numeric values are organized
Dimensions—Full row or column of labels
Working with Pivot Data
Interactive Reporting provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your pivot data for
better analysis:
l
Adding a Pivot Section
l
Adding Pivot Items
l
Deleting Pivot Items
l
Auto-Sizing a Column
l
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
l
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
l
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
Pivot Section 275
Adding a Pivot Section
ä To create a table based on the Results section data:
1
Select Actionst, then Insert, and then Pivot.
2
Drag items from the Catalog list to the Pivot data layout.
If the data layout is not displayed, select View, then Data Layout.
Interactive Reporting populates the cells, rows and columns automatically.
Adding Pivot Items
You can add items from the results set to view and analyze different scenarios in your Pivot.
ä To add a pivot item:
1
From the Catalog list, select any item and click Add Items on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut showing Row, Column or Facts is displayed.
2
Select the value you want to add.
Deleting Pivot Items
ä To delete a pivot item:
1
Select the item to be removed from the Facts, Rows or Columns data layout.
2
Select Delete on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to reflect the new configuration of items.
Refreshing Pivot Values Manually
If a Pivot section has been designed so that pivot values can be refreshed manually, you can
request an immediate refresh to the current section.
ä To refresh pivot values manually, click anywhere on the pivot and select Refresh Pivot on
the shortcut menu.
Auto-Sizing a Column
By default, Interactive Reporting truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of
data values. With the Auto-Size Column Width feature, you can automatically size any column
to fit the text of the largest value in the column.
ä To autosize a column:
1
Select the column.
276 Interactive Reporting
2
Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Focusing and Hiding Pivoted Data
A straightforward way to refresh your view of a pivot table is to single out items for closer focus
or to hide some of the pivot elements. This allows you to concentrate on particular items of
interest.
Focusing redraws the pivot table to show only the item you have chosen to focus on.
The Show All Items command updates the pivot table to include all items removed by focusing.
This command is available only when a pivot dimension label has been focused.
Hiding columns is a good way to temporarily suspend the display of a column.
ä To toggle the focus on a pivot item:
1
Select one or more dimension labels (either side or top).
2
Choose Focus on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to display only the chart object selected.
ä To show all items, select a dimensional label and choose Show All on the shortcut menu.
ä To hide pivoted data:
1
Select an item.
2
Select Hide Items on the shortcut menu.
The Pivot is redrawn to hide the selected object.
ä To restore a selected hidden item, select a pivot item and choose Show Hidden on the shortcut
menu.
Working with Row and Column Labels
Row and column labels can be grouped and reoriented:
l
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
l
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
Grouping and Ungrouping Pivot Labels
You can merge pivot labels using the Group feature. When combined, the data labels are
aggregated, creating a new summary label category. With grouping, only your view of the data
is changed. You can easily ungroup grouped categories and redisplay original label values.
Pivot Section 277
For example, your pivot table is structured with data item Units (sold) dimensioned by Year
and Quarter. You can group the first and second quarters together to summarize activity for the
first half of the year. The data is aggregated in a new label.
ä To toggle the group dimensional label feature:
1
Select the individual labels to be grouped.
(You can group contiguous or discontiguous labels, but the labels must be part of the same
dimension item or axis.)
2
Select (Un)Group Items on the shortcut menu.
The selected labels, and their associated data values or chart objects, are combined. The
resulting label is displayed with an asterisk (*) to indicate a grouping.
To ungroup items, reselect the grouped items and choose (Un)Group Items on the shortcut
menu.
Swinging Pivot Dimensions
The swing feature allows you to re-orient the axes of a pivot table and view your data in new
ways. When you “swing” a dimension, you can move it up, down or to the opposite axis. This
feature is a powerful tool that makes pivot table reporting more powerful than a common
spreadsheet.
Note: You can swing pivot dimensions by moving items within and between data layout panes,
ä To swing a dimensional label:
1
Select a dimensional label and choose Swing on the shortcut menu.
2
Select a direction.
Valid swing positions are:
l
Vertical
l
Horizontal
l
Up
l
Down
l
Left
l
Right
l
Before
l
After
If you select the “before” swing positions, you must choose the dimension label before
which you wish to place the selected label. This behavior applies to the “after” selection
as well.
278 Interactive Reporting
Working with Pivot Facts
Core numeric data that you slice and dice dimensionally in your analysis are called facts. Facts
can be summed to create totals.
You can calculate totals for both columns and rows in a Pivot report. If you layered dimension
items along the top or side labels of your report, you can calculate the totals for any level in the
hierarchy. When you select an inner dimension for totaling, subtotals are created for each of the
categories in the outer dimensions. Totals in the Pivot section include:
l
Total Function
l
Cumulative Totals
l
Surface Values
Total Function
You can quickly add totals to your pivot table data. The new total value is created as an additional
column. Total functions can be applied to:
l
Underlying values from the original results sections
l
Surface values displayed in the Pivot
Depending on which set of values you apply the total function, different results are yielded.
Consider a simple pivot table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of
underlying values (20 = 8 +12 and 30 = 10 + 20). An average of the underlying value yields the
result of 12.5 = (8 + 12 + 10 + 20) /4). An average of the surface values yields the results 25 =
(20 +30) / 2).
ä To add totals to a Pivot:
1
Click a row or column label handle to select it.
Selecting the outermost label creates a total; selecting an inner label creates a subtotal.
2
Select Add Total on the shortcut menu.
A submenu of data functions is displayed.
3
Select a data function.
Cumulative Totals
By adding cumulative running totals to a pivot table, you can break totals by dimension to restart
at each dimensional grouping in the report.
ä To add a cumulative calculation:
1
Select a fact item in the data grid of the Pivot.
2
Select Add Cume on the shortcut menu.
The Add Cume shortcut menu is displayed.
Pivot Section 279
3
Select a scope from the Add Cume shortcut menu.
A new data values item named “Cume of X” is displayed across each row of the report. The
new cume item maintains a cumulative running sum of the original data values item.
Note: Cumulative totals are most effective when all dimensions are located on a row or
column of the report, and data label column heads are placed orthogonally.
ä To modify a cumulative calculation:
1
Select a column in which a cume has already been place in the pivot table’s data grid.
2
Select Modify Cume on the shortcut menu.
The Modify Cume submenu is displayed.
3
Select a scope from the Modify Cume shortcut menu.
Surface Values
You can use underlying or surface values when working with totals in Pivot sections. Underlying
values refer to values from the original results section. Surface values refers to values in the actual
report section. The two approaches yield different results, and produce values that may be
displayed incongruous with the values in the report.
To understand this difference between underlying and surface values, consider a simple pivot
table with two values of 20 and 30. Each of these is already a total of underlying values (20 = 8
+12 and 30 = 10 + 20). An average of the underlying value yields the result of 12.5 = (8 + 12 +
10 + 20) /4). An average of the surface values yields the results 25 = (20 +30) / 2). By default,
the surface value feature is not active.
ä To activate surface values, select a pivot item and Surface Values on the shortcut menu.
Analyzing Pivot Data
Data functions in the Pivot section are particularly useful if you want your report to display
different types of values. Data functions summarize groups of database records and replace the
original values with new summary data.
For example, in the Pivot section, you can show either the total sale, average sale, or the maximum
sale of each product by quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same underlying values.
They differ only in the data function that is applied.
Table 65
Pivot Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all underlying values.
Average
Average of all underlying values.
280 Interactive Reporting
Data Function
Returns the:
Count
Number of underlying values.
Count Distinct
Number of distinct values in a column.
Null Count
Number of nulls among underlying values.
Non-Null Count
Number of underlying values; null values are excluded.
Maximum
Highest of underlying values.
Minimum
Lowest of underlying values
% of Row
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface row.
% of Column
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of their respective surface column.
% of Grand
Sum of underlying values as a percentage of all surface values in the report.
ä To apply a data function:
1
Select a row or column of facts (such as Amount).
2
Select Data Function on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut menu of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions, then Data
Function, and select the (function).
3
Select a function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
Paging Through Pivot Data
By default, Interactive Reporting shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a
page in a browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the
page. To view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 66
Pivot Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Left
Moves one page in the up direction. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Up
Moves one page in the down direction. To move to the first page in the down direction, select [Shift] + Click + Down
arrow.
Page Down
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the right direction, select [Shift] + Click + right arrow.
Page Right
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the left direction, select [Shift] + Click + left arrow.
Pivot Section 281
Common Chart/Pivot Features
Interactive Reporting document file management features allow you to easily tailor the look of
reports. The features shown below are common in the Chart and Pivot sections:
l
Sorting Charts/Pivots
l
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots
l
DrillDown into Dimensional Data
Sorting Charts/Pivots
In the Chart and Pivot sections, data is sorted alphabetically. You can override this default and
sort dimensional data with reference to other data, rather than alphabetically.
For example, if a chart lists each type of item your company sells and the total amount sold of
each, initially the item types are alphabetically ordered. But this data becomes more meaningful
when you instead sort the item types with reference to the total sales revenue produced by each.
This approach allows you to rank each product type from highest to lowest total sales.
When you want to apply a sort criteria there are three components used to define the sort
condition:
l
l
Sort Items—Item sorted in ascending or descending order. In the Chart section, sort items
refers to the chart axes. In the Pivot section, sort items refers to the pivot dimensions.
Referential Items—Numeric data item included in the Chart or Pivot section, and also the
keyword “labels.” These selections provide two ways to sort the selected Chart or Pivot item.
m
m
l
Sorting by labels—Dimensional data items are sorted alphabetically by name when the
chart section is created: this is equivalent to sorting by “labels.” When selected, the
“labels” keyword indicates that the item chosen from the submenu are sorted by label
or name rather than by reference to corresponding numeric data values in the report.
Sorting by values—Sorting by a numeric data item orders each value of the target item
specified by its corresponding numeric value in the second list. Sorting by values
produces an entirely different sort order. For example, your chart may list each state in
which your company has made sales revenue and the total cost-of-sales for each. The
data items are initially listed in alphabetical order, that is, sorted by “labels.” When you
sort instead by cost-of-sales, the states are ranked in order by each corresponding costof-sales figure.
Functions—Aggregate statistical functions available when you sort by values. The functions
generally duplicate the data functions available in the chart section.
When you sort by values, dimensional data is sorted by the corresponding numeric values of the
referenced item. (For example, sorting states by the sum total of the cost of good sold in each
state).
ä To specify a sort:
1
Select an item to sort in the Chart or Pivot sections.
282 Interactive Reporting
2
Click either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
3
Select Label to sort the item alphabetically, or select the numeric value item as a sort reference.
4
If you selected a numeric value, choose an aggregate function on the shortcut menu.
Drill Anywhere into Charts/Pivots
The Drill Anywhere feature allows you to drill into and add items in the Chart and Pivot sections
that are resident in the Results section, but have not been included in the Chart and Pivot you
are viewing. Drill anywhere items are broken out as a new label item(s) automatically. The
advantage of this feature is that it instantly allows you to add items to the data set to reflect
temporary and hypothetical situations.
The extent to which you can drill into your data depends on how the original query was built,
since Drill Anywhere retrieves data from the Results section.
ä To drill anywhere into a Chart:
1
Select a pivot dimension or chart item for analysis.
2
Select Drill Anywhere on the shortcut menu.
A shortcut of drill anywhere items displays.
3
Select an item on which to drill down.
The report is redisplayed, breaking out the additional data as a new label item.
Note: If no options are available in the Drill Anywhere drop down list, all available items
have been referenced in the chart.
DrillDown into Dimensional Data
The DrillDown feature enables you to use a predefined drill-down path to go directly to the next
item in a hierarchy when working with dimensional analysis. For example, you may need to find
out if a particular product sells better in different regions of the country. Using a drill-down
path, all you have to do is follow the drilldown path to discover which state or even city is a more
appropriate market for your product.
ä To drill down into a Pivot or Chart label:
1
Select any label for drill-down analysis.
Because the drill-down into feature is not context sensitive, access the drill-down from any
label shown.
2
Click Drilldown into on the shortcut menu.
All available drill-down paths are displayed. Each drill-down path shows the topic which is
being drilled into, and the label from which it was drilled.
3
Click the drill-down label.
Common Chart/Pivot Features 283
After you specify the drill down label, the label is added to the data layout and breaks out
the additional data according to the label selected for drill-down.
ä To drill up from data:
1
Click the label that has been drilled downed.
2
On the Pivot or Chart menu, select Drill Up.
The report is redisplayed, reversing the drill-down and displaying the original item.
OLAPQuery Section
The OLAPQuery section is designed for viewing and analyzing queries based on
multidimensional databases (MDD). This section includes the following topics:
l
Working with OLAP Data
l
OLAP Data Functions
Working with OLAP Data
Interactive Reporting provides several ways for you to dynamically manage your OLAP data for
better viewing analysis:
l
OLAP Terminology
l
Auto-Sizing a Column
l
Sorting OLAP Dimensions
l
Drilling into OLAP
l
Drilling up
OLAP Terminology
Cube—Data in OLAP databases is stored in cubes. Cubes are made up of dimensions and
measures. A cube may have many dimensions.
Dimensions—In an OLAP database cube categories of information are called dimensions. Some
dimensions could be Location, Products, Stores, and Time.
MDX—MDX (Multi Dimensional eXpressions) is the language used to give instructions to OLE
DB for OLAP- compliant databases. When an OLAP query section is built, <product Interactive
Reporting is translating those into MDX instructions. When the query is refreshed, MDX is sent
to the database server. The data the server returns to the Interactive Reporting document file is
the collection of records that answers the query.
Measures—Measures are the numeric values in an OLAP database cube that are available for
analysis. The measures could be margin, cost of goods sold, unit sales, budget amount, and so
on.
284 Interactive Reporting
Members—In a OLAP database cube, members are the content values for a dimension. In the
location dimension, they could be San Francisco, Japan, Paris, 35 Main Street, Tokyo, USA,
France, Rome, and so on. These are all values for location.
Multidimensional—Multidimensional databases create cubes of aggregated data that anticipate
how users think about business models. These cubes also deliver this information efficiently and
quickly. Cubes consist of dimensions and measures. Dimensions are categories of information.
For example, locations, stores and products are typical dimensions. Measures are the content
values in a database that are available for analysis.
Auto-Sizing a Column
By default Interactive Reporting truncates columns evenly and without regard to the length of
data values. With the Auto-Size Column Width feature, you can automatically size any column
to fit the text of the largest value in the column.
ä To auto-size a column:
1
Select the column.
2
Select Auto-Size Column Width on the shortcut menu.
Sorting OLAP Dimensions
In the OLAP section, data can be sorted in ascending or descending order.
ä To specify a sort:
1
Select an item to sort in the OLAP sections.
2
Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending on the shortcut menu.
3
Select Label to sort the item alphabetically, or select the numeric value item as a sort reference.
4
If you select a numeric value, choose an aggregate function on the Function shortcut menu.
Drilling into OLAP
The Drill Down feature retrieves data from the MDD cube following the hierarchy down to the
granular level. When you find a specific item to learn more about, such as a product line, you
can drill down into the item label. You can drill down on more than one item and additionally
drill down on all items at the same time.
For a member drill down, any row or column label can be drilled into so that you can view the
structure of the hierarchies for any particular dimension. Every time you select a specific label
in a dimension row or column, you show only the data for that label value. When you select the
dimension tab for a level, you show all the members of that dimension level.
For a measure drill down, you can show how different measures consolidate together. A drill
down on a measure is done on a progressive basis, one level at a time on a 1 to n path (sequential
rather than nested). For example, if Profit is the parent of Tax and Pre-Tax Profit, and Revenue
OLAPQuery Section 285
and Expenses are children of Pre-Tax Profit, then the Tax and Pre-Tax columns are drilled down
first and you must select the Pre-Tax label to display the Revenue and Expense columns.
Note: You cannot set filters while in a drilled-down state on a dimension.
ä To drill down on a label:
1
Select a label.
2
Click Drill Down on the shortcut menu.
You can select a label and choose Action, then Drill Down.
Note: Essbase only: For a measure drill down, you can show how different measures
consolidate together. A drill down on a measure is done on a progressive basis, one
level at a time on a 1 to n path (sequential rather than nested). For example, if Profit
is the parent of Tax and Pre-Tax Profit, and Revenue and Expenses are children of
Pre-Tax Profit, then the Tax and Pre-Tax columns are drilled down first and you must
double-click the Pre-Tax label to display the Revenue and Expense columns.
Drilling up
If you used the drill-down feature, you return to your original view of the data by drilling up
one level at a time. To drill up, you simply select the level to drill up.
ä To drill up on a label:
1
Select the label that has been drilled down.
2
Select Drill Up on the shortcut menu.
Optional: You can also select a label and choose Action, then Drill Down.
OLAP Data Functions
Column or row totals added to your OLAPQuery are aggregates (literally, totals of totals), and
can be recalculated using data functions. When applied to totals, data functions apply to the
calculation to “surface” values.
When applied to surface values, data functions recalculate the values in the visible cells or
“surface” of the OLAPQuery. For example, you can show the total sale, average sale, and
maximum sale of each product by Quarter. Each of these dimensions is based on the same value.
They only differ in the data function that is applied.
Table 67
OLAP Data Functions
Data Function
Returns the:
Sum
Sum of all values.
286 Interactive Reporting
Data Function
Returns the:
Average
Average of all values.
Count
Number of values.
Maximum
Highest of values.
Minimum
Lowest of values
% of Row
Surface values as a percentage of their respective row item.
% of Column
Surface values as a percentage of their respective column item.
% of Grand
Surface values as a percentage of all like values in the report.
ä To apply a data function:
1
Select a row or column of facts (such as Amount) On the shortcut menu.
2
Select Data Function.
A list of available data functions is displayed.
Optional: You can also select the item or column and choose Actions, then Data
Function.
3
Select the function.
Each column is recalculated according to the data function applied to the underlying value.
CubeQuery Section
The CubeQuery section is the Interactive Reporting interface with Essbase 7.x , and 9.x databases.
It provides access to the cube in which multidimensional data can be analyzed and complex
calculations can be applied before and after the query is processed. The data set from this section
can be shown with relational data side-by-side in a dashboard report, or the data can be
downloaded to a results set and joined to relational sources.
About Essbase
Analytic Services is a multidimensional database application that enables you to analyze multiple
aspects of your business continually in comparison to one another. The Essbase database has
the following characteristics:
l
Works with multidimensional data and roll-up hierarchies in dimensions.
l
Retrieves information from other systems.
l
Handles some level of summarized data, not transaction.
l
Adaptable to multiple reporting and analysis environments.
CubeQuery Section 287
Additionally the Essbase database uniquely blends an innovative technical design with an open,
client-server architecture. Essbase can be used for a broad range of online analytical processing
(OLAP) applications, including:
l
Budgeting
l
Forecasting and seasonal planning
l
Financial consolidations and reporting
l
Customer and product profitability analysis
l
Price, volume and mix analysis
l
Executive information systems
About Multidimensional Database
The Essbase multidimensional database stores and organizes data. It is optimized to handle
applications that contain large amounts of numeric data and that are consolidation-intensive
or computation-intensive. The database organizes data in a way that reflects how users want to
view the data.
Definition of Multidimensional
A multidimensional database is an extended form of a two-dimensional data array, such as a
spreadsheet, generalized to encompass many dimensions. Dimensions are composed of values
called members, which are arranged in a hierarchical structure. A dimension is a perspective or
view of a specific dataset. A system that supports simultaneous, alternate views of datasets is
multidimensional. Dimensions are categories such as time, accounts, product lines, markets and
so on. Each dimension contains additional categories that have various relationships one to
another. Members are the names of the elements within a dimension. A dimension can contain
an unlimited number of members.
Number
Description
1
Dimension
2
Member
288 Interactive Reporting
Dimensions and Members
Dimensions and members describe the metadata structure of the database, which is also known
as the Essbase outline. The Essbase outline determines how data is stored inEssbase. Following
are typical examples of dimensions and their members:
l
Time—Hours, Days, Months, Quarters, Years
l
Measures—Profit, Inventory, Ratios
l
Product—Individual products of the company
l
Market—North, South, Central
l
Scenario—Actual, Budget, Variance, Variance %
Non-aggregate Dimensions
Some dimensions are aggregates of their members. For example, 24 hours make a day, 7 days
compose a week, 52 weeks make a year, and so on. In these cases, the Time dimension represents
the sum of its components. However, some dimensional hierarchies are not the sums of their
components. For example, the Measures dimension commonly comprises business measures
such as Sales, Profit, and Cost of Goods Sold. When the dimension label cannot represent the
sum of contents, a protocol replaces the dimension label with a member set. Essbase uses the
first child in the dimension outline as the implied share instead of non-aggregate dimension
labels.
Familial Relationships
To simplify the concept of hierarchical order, Essbase uses familial relationships.
l
l
Parent—Direct ancestor of an element in a hierarchy; for example, Quarters are the parent
of Months.
Child—Direct descendant of any element in a hierarchy; for example, Months are children
of Quarters.
l
Descendants—Elements of greater detail; for example, Days are descendants of Weeks.
l
Ancestors—Elements of more generality; for example, Weeks are ancestors to Days.
l
Siblings—Members with the same parent
CubeQuery Section 289
Number
Description
1
Ancestor
2
Parent
3
Child
4
Descendent
5
Siblings (not marked)
Generations and Levels
Hierarchical structure also can be described in terms of generations and levels. Dimension
members on the same layer of the dimensional hierarchy are referred to collectively as
generations or levels. The relationships are defined as follows:
l
l
l
Generations—Counted down from the highest ancestor. The root member, or dimension
name, is Generation 1. In the following figure, Market is Generation 1
Levels—Counted from bottom to top: Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, and so on. In the following
figure, states are at Level 0
Leaf nodes—Lowest points in a hierarchy
290 Interactive Reporting
Number
Description
1
Ancestor
2
Parent
3
Child
4
Descendent
Attributes
n addition to dimension member names, locations, and relationships, Essbase stores
characteristics, called attributes, about members. For example, the Product dimension indicates
that in Women's Apparel, Shirts and Blouses, there is a cotton T-shirt; an attribute indicates that
the cotton T-shirt is red, cyan, lime, or pink. Essbase does not store data for attribute dimensions
as part of the multidimensional database but instead dynamically calculates it upon request.
Attribute dimensions are displayed in dimension hierarchies, in the same manner as other
dimensions, despite their data being stored differently.
Catalog List
The Catalog List displays one or all dimensions in a tree model. The tree can be expanded to
display additional members, but generations are not included in the hierarchy. For cubes with
many members in a dimension, paging facilitates navigation. The number of members that can
be displayed in the Catalog and Member Selection is defined in the Number of members to
display option in Query Options. The default is 50.
CubeQuery Section 291
ä To display the Catalog in single-dimension mode, select a dimension from the Dimension
Selection.
To expand the tree to display additional members in the dimension hierarchy, next to the
dimension, click + .
ä To display the Catalog in all dimension, click
.
OLAPQuery and CubeQuery Data Layout Differences
OLAPQuery is the pre release 9.3 section used to query a multidimensional database. The data
layout tool in OLAPQuery and CubeQuery have these differences:
OLAPQuery Data Layout
CubeQuery Data Layout
Slicer
Filters
Side
Rows
Top
Columns
Filters from multiple members may be selected and applied from a
single hierarchy.
One filter member can be selected per dimension. Filters for multiple
members within the same dimension are not supported.
Measures are treated as distinct dimensions and can be placed only
in the Facts pane of the data layout.
Measures can be placed in the Row, Column, and Filter panes of
the data layout.
Member selection in the data layout is unavailable.
Member selections in the Row, Column and Filter panes of the data
layout can be edited in the Member Selection dialog box.
Shortcut menu enables access to the Filter dialog box and Remove
option.
Shortcut menu enables access to Remove option, Member
Selection dialog box, Variable option and Filter option
Building a CubeQuery
Before you can build a CubeQuery section, you need a published Interactive Reporting database
connection file (.oce), and an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY).
ä To import a published Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce):
1
In Explore, select File, then Import File.
The Choose File Import dialog box is displayed.
2
Select Browse, navigate to the folder where the Interactive Reporting database connection file is located,
and click Open.
The File field is populated with the Interactive Reporting database connection file name.
3
Click Next.
The OCE Properties Import dialog box is displayed.
292 Interactive Reporting
4
Specify a user name and password, and any appropriate data source access settings.
5
Click Finish.
ä To import an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY):
1
Select File, then Import.
The Choose File Import dialog box is displayed.
2
Click Browse, navigate to the folder where the Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) is located, and
click Open.
The File field is populated with the Interactive Reporting document file name.
3
Click Next.
The Interactive Reporting Properties Import dialog box is displayed.
4
Specify a connection option in the Apply Option to All Queries field
5
Select an Interactive Reporting database connection file (.oce) to associate with the Interactive
Reporting document file in the Query/DataModel Connection drop-down, and specify an user name and
password.
6
Click Finish.
ä To create a new CubeQuery section based on a previously published Interactive Reporting
document file (BQY):
1
In Explore, select an Interactive Reporting document file (BQY) that contains a CubeQuery section.
2
Enter your name in the Host Name field and password in the Host Password field and click OK.
3
Select Actions, then Insert, and then Query.
The Insert Query dialog box opens.
4
Check Existing Essbase Connection to select the current Interactive Reporting database connection
file (.oce), or select another from the drop-down and click OK.
A new Interactive Reporting document file is created.
5
To populate the Catalog List, select Actions, then Retrieve Dimensions.
The Catalog List shows the dimensions available to add to the query.
6
If prompted, enter your database user name and password in the DB User Name and DB Password
fields and click OK.
7
From the Catalog List, select a dimension.
To toggle the Catalog List between single and all dimension modes, click
8
.
In the Catalog List, select a member dimension and select Query, then Add to Rows or Query , then
Add to Columns.
Note: Members from the same dimension cannot be split across columns, rows and filters.
CubeQuery Section 293
9
In the Catalog List, select a measure dimension and select Query, then Add to Rowsor Query, then Add
to Columns.
10 To filter a member, select a member in the Catalog List and select Query, then Add to Filters.
11 Click Process.
Note: If missing values are not displayed, it is possible that the Suppress Missing and
Suppress Zero options are enabled. These options are enabled by default and can be
disabled in the Query Options
DB Logon
Use the DB Logon dialog box to specify the database name and password used to logon to the
Essbase database.
ä To specify the database logon, enter the database user name in the DB User Name field, and
database password in the DB Password and click OK.
Your database administrator retains a list of all valid logon names and passwords.
Searching Members
Member search is available for member names, aliases or both in one or more dimensions from
the Catalog List. If the Catalog List shows members in single dimension mode, the Search is
performed on a selected dimension. If all dimensions are displayed, Search is performed on all
dimensions.
ä To search members from the Catalog List:
1
Select to search by name, alias, or both.
2
Enter the text on which to search.
If you use wildcards in searches, only trailing wildcards are accepted (for example, Cola*),
and not leading wildcards (for example, *-10).
The ?? (placement position) is a valid search criteria. The ? substitutes one occurrence of a
character; and can be placed anywhere in the string.
3
Click
.
The search results are displayed in the Catalog List, and they can be added to the data layout.
ä To close Search, select
The Search results are cleared.
294 Interactive Reporting
.
Member Selection
An Essbase database may contain hundreds or even thousands of members. Use the Member
Selection Browse and Search tabs to refine query member criteria for a selected dimension. The
Member Selection dialog box includes dynamic selection functions such as children,
descendants, bottom, siblings, or subsets (UDA, Attribute Dimensions, Level and Generation).
The Available pane lists the member hierarchy for the selected dimension. An additional node
for substitution variables lists substitution variables for all dimensions; however, if they are
selected from another dimension, an error appears when adding the substitution variables to
the Selected pane.
The Selected pane lists all member selections. Selections can be a single member or a dynamic
selection function (for example, children).
Icon
Dynamic Function
Description
Member
Currently selected member
Children
Children of the selected member (one level below)
Descendants
Descendants of the selected member
Bottom
Descendants of the selected member on the lowest level of
the hierarchy (Level 0)
Siblings
Members on the same level with the same parent as the
selected member
Same Level
Dimension members on the same level as the selected
member
Same Generation
Dimension members on the same generation as the selected
member
Browsing Members
Use the Member Selection Browse tab to navigate through and select individual members to
include in the query.
ä To browse and select members:
1
In the data layout, on the shortcut menu, select a dimension member and select Edit.
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
2
Select Browse.
3
Select a member and click + to the left of the member name to expand it.
4
To include an individual member in the query, select the member in the Available pane and click
.
The member is added to the Selected pane.
CubeQuery Section 295
5
6
To include a dynamic function, on the shortcut menu, select the member in the Available pane and
select the function from the submenu:
l
Member
l
Children
l
Descendants
l
Bottom
l
Siblings
l
Same Level
l
Same Generation
l
Disable or Enable (selected members only)
Click OK.
ä To change the member function in the Selected pane:
1
Select the member to modify.
Use Shift + click to select multiple and consecutive items. Use Ctrl + click to select multiple,
but nonconsecutive items.
2
To include or exclude a member (for example, “Member+Children” versus “Children”), select the check
box next to the member name.
3
Click OK.
ä To clear an item used in the query without removing it from the Selected pane:
1
Select the item and choose Disable from the shortcut menu.
2
Click OK.
ä To remove a member or member element:
1
Select the member in the Selected pane and click
.
Use Shift + click to select multiple and consecutive items. Use Ctrl + click to select multiple,
but nonconsecutive items.
The member is moved from the Selected pane.
2
Click OK.
ä To remove all members and member elements, select
.
The Selected pane is depopulated.
ä To toggle between including or excluding a member:
1
Select a member in the Selected pane.
2
Select Disable to exclude a member, or Enable to include a member.
296 Interactive Reporting
Substitution Variables
Substitution variables define global variables that represent Essbase-specific values. For example,
CurMonth can be a substitution variable for displaying the latest time period. Rather than
constantly updating queries when a value changes, you change only the value for the substitution
variable on the server. Essbase creates substitution variables, but you can specify a substitution
variable when selecting members.
ä To add a substitution variable:
1
Select a member in the data layout and select Edit on the shortcut menu.
The Member Selection dialog box is displayed.
2
Select Browse.
3
In the Available pane click + to expand the Substitution Variable node.
4
To include a substitution variable, select the member in the Available pane and click
5
To include a dynamic function on a substitution variable, on the shortcut menu, select the member in
the Available pane and select the desired function from the sub-menu:
6
l
Member
l
Children
l
Descendants
l
Bottom
l
Siblings
l
Same Level
l
Same Generation
l
Select Next/Previous
l
Subsets
.
Click OK.
Variables
A variable is a constraint placed on the query when the query is processed.
ä To use all selected members as a variable (the user is prompted for the values when the query
is processed:
1
In the data layout, select a dimension member and select Edit on the shortcut menu.
2
Select Use as variable.
3
Click OK.
CubeQuery Section 297
Searching Members
ä To search for members:
1
In the data layout, right click a dimension and select Edit.
2
Select Search.
3
From the Member Type, select the type of member to search:
l
Name—Member Name
l
Alias—Alternate Names for database members
l
Both—Member Name and Alias Name
Note: To search on alias names, enable the Use Alias Tables option and select an alias table
in Query Options.
4
Enter the text string or numeric value to search (a member name or pattern).
Trailing asterisks and wildcard strings are acceptable. Examples of value text strings: Ja*, M?
n, and M??n. Examples of invalid text strings: *-10 and J*n.
5
To locate all member within the selected dimension that matches the text string or numeric value, click
.
The results of the search populate the Available pane.
6
Optional: To add a member to the Selected pane, click
7
Click OK.
.
Filter Member Selection
All data object intersections are relative to filter member selections, which focus intersections
and data values, and, consequently, analysis. Filter-axis dimensions are by default represented
by the highest aggregate member defined in the data source. To focus analysis on members other
than the highest aggregate, you can select one filter member per dimension. Filter member
selections do not rearrange dimensions or reorganize pages but focus analysis on intersections.
Use Filter Selection tabs to navigate through, search, or select the members to use in a filter
definition.
Browsing Filter Members
Use the Filter Selection Browse tab to navigate through and select individual members to use as
a filter.
ä To browse and select members:
1
In the Filter pane of the data layout, select a dimension member and select Edit on the shortcut menu.
The Filter Selection dialog box opens.
298 Interactive Reporting
2
Select Browse.
3
Select a member and click + to the left of the member name to expand it.
4
To include a member as a filter in the query, in the Available pane, select the member and click
.
The member is added to the Selected pane.
5
To include a member as a dynamic function, in the Available pane, select the member and select
Member on the shortcut menu.
6
Click OK.
Searching Filter Members
Use the Search tab of Filter Selection dialog to search for members within selected dimensions.
Note: Only the member names and aliases are displayed and not the fully qualified name (for
example, [West].[Salem]) in the Member Selection, Catalog or query results.
ä To search for members:
1
In the Filter pane of the data layout, right click a member and select Edit.
2
Select Search
3
From the Member Type, select the type of filter member to search:
4
l
Name—Member Name
l
Alias—Alternate Names for database members
l
Both—Member Name and Alias Name
Type the text string or numeric value to search in the text box.
Trailing asterisks and wildcard strings are acceptable. Examples of value text strings: Ja*, M?
n, and M??n. Examples of invalid text strings: *-10 and J*n.
5
Click
value.
to locate all members within the selected dimension that match the text string or numeric
Hovering the mouse over an item in the Location column shows a tooltip with the member's
full location path.
The results of the search populate the Available pane.
6
Optional: To add a member to the Selected pane, click
7
Click OK.
.
Note: To add a different member as a filter, first remove the selected member.
CubeQuery Section 299
Note: A Search by Alias name searches the currently selected Alias Table in Query Options
when the Use Aliases option is enabled.
Navigating CubeQuery
For navigating and maintaining data in the CubeQuery section, see:
l
Keep Only
l
Remove Only
l
Suppressing Missing and Zero Values
l
Drilling
l
Drilling to Shared Members
Keep Only
Focuses one member by allowing you to clear all other dimension member selections except the
selected member from the results set. Non-kept members are not available on the Member
Selection dialog box.
ä To keep specific set members:
1
Select one member or a range of members.
Use Ctrl + click to keep nonadjacent cells.
2
Select a dimension label and select Keep Only on the shortcut menu.
Only the selected members are shown.
Remove Only
Clears a dimension member to remove it from the query result set. At least one member must
be retained to use this feature. Removed members are not included in the results set, but display
on Member Selection dialog box as excluded from the query (flagged with a - or minus sign).
To add a member again to the query, the exclusion must be removed from the Selected pane.
ä To remove a selected member:
1
Select one member or a range of members.
Use Ctrl + click to remove nonadjacent cells.
2
Select a dimension label and select Remove Only on the shortcut menu.
The member is removed from the report and the query. To add the member to the query
again, add it from the Catalog to the data layout, or select it on the Member Selection dialog
box.
300 Interactive Reporting
Suppressing Missing and Zero Values
Suppressing missing and zero values in rows and columns prevents irrelevant information from
being returned, reduces network traffic, and increases query speed. Query options box enables
you to customize how CubeQuery handles missing and zero values, including the text label
displayed for these values by default.
ä To suppress missing values in rows, select a row and select Suppress, then Missing rows on
the shortcut menu.
By default missing values are blank.
ä To suppress missing values in columns, select a column and select Suppress, then Missing
columns on the shortcut menu.
ä To suppress zero values in rows, select a row and select Suppress, then Zero rows on the
shortcut menu.
By default zero values are shown as 0 (zero).
ä To suppress zero values in columns, select a column and select Suppress, then Zero
columns on the shortcut menu.
Drilling
Drilling increases or decreases the display of report detail for dimensions with large amounts of
level data. It can consist of drilling down (in many forms) or drilling up. Drilling down retrieves
more detailed data within a dimension. You can drill down into more detailed data until the
lowest level of a dimension as defined in the database outline is reached.
A before and after drill down example is shown below:
Before drilling:
After drilling:
In this example, for Oct, you can drill down to Audio and Visual. Drilling up is the opposite of
drilling down, where you move up the hierarchy within a dimension to less detailed data. Query
CubeQuery Section 301
Options enables you to customize the behavior of the drill level. Shortcut menus also control
the drill levels.
Note: You cannot drill down on a Date Time Series member.
ä To drill down to more detail:
1
Select the member.
2
Double-click the member to drill down using the default Drill Level as defined in Query Options.
Tip: You can also select a member, and select Drill. then Down to drill down using the default
drill level defined in Query Options on the shortcut menu.
Additional drill down options include:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Down—Drills down to more dimension detail using the default drill level defined in
Query Options.
Up—Drills up to less dimension detail.
Next—Drills down to the children. This is the default Drill Level. For example, a drill
on Year retrieves Qtr1, Qtr2, Qtr3, and Qtr4.
Bottom—Drills down to the lowest level of members in a dimension. For example, a
drill on Year retrieves Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, and Dec.
All Descendants—Retrieves data for all descendants. For example, a drill on Year
retrieves all quarterly and monthly members.
Siblings—Retrieves data for siblings. For example, a drill on Jan retrieves Jan, Feb, and
Mar.
Same Level—Retrieves data for all members at the same level. For example, a drill on
Sales might retrieve values for COGS, Marketing, Payroll, Misc, Opening Inventory,
Additions, Ending Inventory, Margin %, and Profit %.
Same Generation—Retrieves data for all members of the same generation as the selected
member or members. For example, a drill on Sales retrieves COGS, Marketing, Payroll,
and Misc.
Sample Drill Through To Relational
The sample below shows the drill through feature applied to a CubeQuery with multiple
dimensions in the rows.
The initial CubeQuery section includes:
Rows
Jan, Feb, March
100 (children)
302 Interactive Reporting
200 (children)
Columns
East (children)
100 (children)
200 (children)
Filters
Sales
The relational section includes:
CubeQuery Section 303
The initial results of the relational query are:
The following topic mappings are defined for the drill through:
Table 68
Mapping of Relational topics to OLAP Dimensions for Drill Through
Relational
OLAP
Details.State
Market
Details.Product
Product
Details.Month
Year
When the context of New York is 100-10, and Jan. is passed in the CubeQuery, these results are
displayed in the relational query:
304 Interactive Reporting
Drilling to Shared Members
You can drill down or drill up on a member that has a shared member defined in the Essbase
outline. Essbase determines which members are eligible — the base member or the shared
member, and returns drilled or stored members based on the drill path.
This is an Essbase outline:
Product
100
150 (stored member)
100-10
100-20
Brand1
150 (shared member)
The stored member 150 has children; the shared member 150 does not. Drilling up and down
on 150 gives different results:
l
l
Drilling down on 150 returns nothing if it is interpreted as the shared member; or, returns
100-10 and 100-20 if it is interpreted as the regular member.
Drilling up on 150 returns Brand1 if it is interpreted as the shared member; or returns 100
if it is interpreted as the regular member.
The proximity of the shared member to the regular member gives different results when drilling
down. When drilling up on a member that has a shared member, Analytic Server looks at the
members to determine which one is being queried. For example, drilling up on 100-20 sometimes
returns Diet and returns 100. depending on whether Diet or 100 is closest to the member 100-20.
If 100-20 is alone, then Essbase determines that this is the regular member. If Diet is closer, then
100-20 may be interpreted as the shared member.
Drill Through
The Drill Through feature enables users to drill from a data cell or meta data label in a CubeQuery
section to an existing relational query section within the same Interactive Reporting document
CubeQuery Section 305
file. In CubeQuery, drill through “blue indicators” may have been enabled to indicate data cells
and metadata labels where drill can be executed. The indicators are displayed for the top/left cell
or member label because all data cells and all member labels in a dimension can be drilled on.
Drill Through has these characteristics:
l
Essbase dimensions are mapped to the target relational fields, so that the member context
in the Essbase query can be passed to the relational query as a filter. Drill through to fact
items is not available because facts are defined in the relational query section only.
l
Drill Through be accomplished at any level of Essbase members in the hierarchy.
l
You can drill a to new or existing Results section.
ä To execute a drill through:
1
Select a single cell or member label and select Actions, then Drill through.
A Drill through can only be performed on one label or cell at a time. If multiple metadata
labels and/or cells are selected, the option to drill through is not be available .
The Drill to Results dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is only displayed if the option “Existing Results” was selected when the Drill
Through option was defined. You are prompted to enter a user name and password to the
relational query.
By default there are new results, and the dialog box is not shown.
2
Select the target Results section and click OK.
Using Swing
Use the Swing feature to swap dimensions between rows and columns from the query. This
feature enables you to view your data in new ways, and easily compare the new data to data in
the originating table. You swing dimensions by dragging the dimension headers (either column
or row) from one position to another using the swing handles. By default swing handles are
transparent. They only appear when you select a dimension header. When the swing handle
appears, it is shown in white with a light grey handle. Once the selection is off, the handle is
transparent again.
ä To swing a dimension column:
1
Select a dimension column header (number 1 below) by clicking on the border to the left of the header.
The swing handle (number 2 below) is displayed to the right of the rows. In this example
the Scenario dimension header is selected.
306 Interactive Reporting
2
Select the swing handle and drag it to the new position (left/bottom or right/top).
In the example, the handle has been swung downward and to the left of the Product
dimension:
As a result, the Scenario dimension is positioned to the left of the Product dimension:
CubeQuery Section 307
ä To swing a row dimension:
1
Select an entire dimension row header.
The swing handle is displayed at the bottom of the query:
308 Interactive Reporting
2
Select and drag the swing handle to the new position (left/right or right/top).
In this example the handle is swing to the right and upward of the query:
CubeQuery Section 309
The result of the swing is:
Note that the Product dimension is positioned under the Year dimension.
Downloading to Results
The Download Database Totals feature creates only one column per dimension, and includes
all members, and the corresponding data, in the Results set. In addition, a column with each
dimension’s parent members is also included in the results. By default this option is disabled.
Once this option is enabled, any existing Results set is deleted. If this option is enabled through
Tools, then Options, then Program Options, then OLAP, the option is enabled also in a newly
created CubeQuery section.
Note: If you use the Download to Results feature, only separate columns in the Results set are
created for every generation in every dimension. In addition, only the lowest level member
values are imported, with any ancestors for each member (included in the original query)
appearing in additional columns.
310 Interactive Reporting
In the following example:
l
l
All Product members, in the query, are listed in only one column and not separated into
multiple columns based on Generation. In addition the data values for the upper level
Product members are also included in the results.
Each dimension has an additional column that displays parent members for each member
in the query.
m
m
m
The Year dimension members Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. have their parent member (Year)
displayed in the “Year Parent” column.
The Scenario dimension members Actual and Budget have their parent member
(Scenario) displayed in the “Scenario Parent” column.
The Product dimension members have their respective parent members displayed in the
“Product Parent” column.
ä To download the query to results, select Actions, then Download to Results.
The behavior of the Download to Results feature varies for different components in CubeQuery:
l
Shared MembersSeparate Columns for Metadata Labels
l
Measure Behavior in Columns and Rows
l
Ragged Hierarchies
l
Shared MembersShared Members
CubeQuery Section 311
Shared MembersSeparate Columns for Metadata Labels
Separate columns for metadata labels are displayed for each Essbase generation in the hierarchy.
Table 69
CubeQuery Requested Items (Profit Member Applied In the Filter)
Product
Qtr1
Qtr2
Qtr3
Qtr4
Cola
5096
5892
6583
5206
Diet Cola
1359
1534
1528
1287
593
446
400
544
7048
7872
8511
7037
Old Fashioned
1697
1734
1883
1887
Diet Root Beer
2963
3079
3149
2834
Sarsaparilla
1153
1231
1159
1093
Birch Beer
908
986
814
1384
6721
7030
7005
7198
Caffeine Free Cola
Cola
Root Beer
Table 70
Results Set
Category
Product SKU
Year
Profit
Colas
Cola
Qtr1
5096
Colas
Diet Cola
Qtr1
1359
Colas
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr1
593
Root Beer
Old Fashioned
Qtr1
1697
Root Beer
Diet Root Beer
Qtr1
2963
Root Beer
Sarsaparilla
Qtr1
1153
Root Beer
Birch Beer
Qtr1
908
If only one generation of the hierarchy is in the query, additional columns do not show the parent
members in the Results section as shown below:
Table 71
CubeQuery Requested Items (Profit Member is in the Columns)
Qtr1
Qtr2
Qtr3
Qtr4
Profit
Profit
Profit
Profit
Cola
5096
5892
6583
5206
Diet Cola
1359
1534
1528
1287
312 Interactive Reporting
Qtr1
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr2
Qtr3
Qtr4
593
446
400
544
Old Fashioned
1697
1734
1883
1887
Diet Root Beer
2963
3079
3149
2834
Sarsaparilla
1153
1231
1159
1093
Birch Beer
908
986
814
1384
Dark Cream
2544
3231
3355
3065
Table 72
Results Set
Product SKU
Quarter
Profit
Cola
Qtr1
5096
Cola
Qtr2
5892
Cola
Qtr3
6583
Cola
Qtr4
5206
Diet Cola
Qtr1
1359
Diet Cola
Qtr2
1534
Diet Cola
Qtr3
1528
Diet Cola
Qtr4
1287
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr1
593
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr2
446
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr3
400
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr4
544
Measure Behavior in Columns and Rows
In the CubeQuery section, the measure dimension is handled like any other dimension (it can
be placed in rows or columns), but a separate results set column is created for each Measure
member, whether it is in a row, column, or filter.
Table 73
Measures in CubeQuery
Qtr1
Sales
Cola
Diet Cola
Qtr2
14585
16048
7276
7957
CubeQuery Section 313
Qtr1
COGS
Table 74
Qtr2
Cola
5681
6136
Diet Cola
3496
3871
Caffeine Free Cola
1493
1606
Measures in Results Set
Product SKU
Quarter
Sales
COGS
Cola
Qtr1
14585
5681
Diet Cola
Qtr1
7276
3496
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr1
3187
1493
If no Measures are in the row, column or filter, all data values appear in a Value column.
Table 75
Values Column in Results Set
Product SKU
Quarter
Value
Cola
Qtr1
14585
Diet Cola
Qtr1
7276
Caffeine Free Cola
Qtr1
3187
Ragged Hierarchies
Typically in Essbase, an individual hierarchy has the same number of members above it as any
other member at the same level. In a ragged hierarchy, the logical parent member for one member
is not in the level directly above the member. When downloading to results a query that has a
ragged member selection, and where some parent members are not expanded to details, a
warning message is displayed: "Note that if the source query results are not fully expanded and/
or symmetric, invalid flattened results might be returned." This message is necessary to show
“parent context” or shared member parents need to exist in the query in order to determine that
they are shared for the results set.
In the following example Qtr2 does not have children in the query. Because only the lowest level
members are included in the query, the results set includes: Jan, Feb, Mar, and Qtr2. For the
“month” value for Qtr2, the label is blank.
Table 76
Ragged Hierarchy in CubeQuery Section
Product
Jan
8024
Feb
8346
314 Interactive Reporting
Product
Mar
8333
Qtr1
24703
Qtr2
27107
Table 77
Ragged Hierarchy in Results Set
Quarter
Month
Gen1,Product
Value
Qtr1
Jan
Product
8024
Qtr1
Feb
Product
8346
Qtr1
Mar
Product
8333
Qtr2
(blank)
Product
27107
If a child member does not have a parent member in the original query, the parent or any other
ancestor is included in the Results set:
Table 78
Ragged Hierarchy in CubeQuery Section
Product
Jan
8024
Feb
8346
Mar
8333
Qtr1
Dec
Table 79
24703
8780
Ragged Hierarchy in Results Set
Quarter
Month
Gen1,Product
Value
Qtr1
Jan
Product
8024
Qtr1
Feb
Product
8346
Qtr1
Mar
Product
8333
Qtr4
Dec
Product
8780
Shared Members
Shared member data can be included in a query, or their totals can be excluded. Each shared
member column in the Results set corresponds to an Essbase Generation/Field in the Results set
and query. For Shared Members, the parent context must exist in the query. In other words, if
CubeQuery Section 315
the parent of a shared member is not in the query, the Download to Results feature does not
recognize that it is a shared member and determines the parent . That is, the parents of a shared
member must exist in the query in order to determine that they are shared for the results set.
For example, in the Sample Basic Product dimension, for the second instance of “100-20” (shared
member) to be properly accounted for in the Download to Results, its parent “Diet” must be
included in the query such as “Diet (Children)”.
Note: Shared members are in bold below.
Table 80
Shared Members in CubeQuery Section
Qtr1
100–10
5096
100–20
1359
100–30
593
100
7048
200–10
1697
200–20
2963
200–30
1153
200–40
908
200
6721
300–10
2544
300–20
690
300–30
2695
300
5929
400–10
2838
400–20
2283
400–30
–116
400
5005
100–20
1359
200–20
2963
300–30
2695
Diet
7017
316 Interactive Reporting
Qtr1
Product
Table 81
24703
Shared Members in Results Set
Product SKU, Shared
Gen1, Product
Category
Product SKU
Quarter
Value
Product
100
100–10
Qtr1
5096
Product
100
100–20
Qtr1
1359
Product
100
100–30
Qtr1
593
Product
200
200–10
Qtr1
1697
Product
200
200–20
Qtr1
2963
Product
200
200–30
Qtr1
1153
Product
200
200–40
Qtr1
908
Product
300
300–10
Qtr1
2544
Product
300
300–20
Qtr1
690
Product
300
300–30
Qtr1
2695
Product
400
400–10
Qtr1
2838
Product
400
400–20
Qtr1
2283
Product
400
400–30
Qtr1
–116
100–20
Product
Diet
100–20
Qtr1
1359
200–20
Product
Diet
200–20
Qtr1
2963
300–30
Product
Diet
300–30
Qtr1
2695
If multiple generation dimensions have shared members, one “shared” indication per dimension
is created:
Note: Shared members are in bold below.
Table 82
Multiple Dimensions with Shared Members in CubeQuery Section
Qtr1
Actual
100
100–10
5096
100–20
1359
7048
CubeQuery Section 317
Qtr1
100–20
1359
Diet
Budget
7017
100–10
6510
100–20
2240
100
9790
100–20
2240
100
9790
100–20
2240
Diet
Actual
8910
100–10
5096
100–20
1359
100
7048
100–20
1359
Diet
Table 83
7017
Multiple Dimensions with Shared Members in Results set
Scenario, Gen2, Shared
Scenario, Gen2
Category
Product SKU
Quarter
Value
Actual
100
100–10
Qtr1
5096
Actual
100
100–20
Qtr1
1359
Diet
100–20
Qtr1
1359
Budget
100
100–10
Qtr1
6510
Budget
100
100–20
Qtr1
2240
Diet
100–20
Qtr1
2240
Actual
Budget
Product SKU, Shared
100–20
100–20
Actual
Actual
100
100–10
Qtr1
5096
Actual
Actual
100
100–20
Qtr1
1359
Actual
Actual
Diet
100–20
Qtr1
1359
100–20
If a dimension contains shared members at multiple generations, a column is added to the Results
set for each CubeQuery generation and Results set column:
Note: Shared members are in bold below.
318 Interactive Reporting
Table 84
Shared Members At Multiple Generation Level in the CubeQuery Section
Qtr1
100–10
5096
100–20
1359
100–30
593
100
7048
...
400–10
2838
400–20
2283
400–30
–116
400
5005
100–20
1359
200–20
2963
300–30
2695
Diet
7017
400
5005
Product
Table 85
24703
Shared Members at Multiple Generation Level in the Results Set
Category, Shared
Product SKU, Shared
Gen1, Product
Category
Product SKU
Quarter
Value
Product
100
100–10
Qtr1
5096
Product
100
100–20
Qtr1
1359
Product
100
100–30
Qtr1
593
Product
400
400–10
Qtr1
2838
Product
400
400–20
Qtr1
2283
Product
400
400–30
Qtr1
–116
100–20
Product
Diet
100–20
Qtr1
1359
200–20
Product
Diet
200–20
Qtr1
2963
300–30
Product
Diet
300–30
Qtr1
2695
...
CubeQuery Section 319
Category, Shared
Product SKU, Shared
400
Gen1, Product
Category
Product
400
Product SKU
Quarter
Qtr1
Download Database Totals
The Download Database Totals feature creates only one column per dimension, and includes
all members, and the corresponding data, in the Results set. In addition, a column with each
dimension’s parent members is also included in the results. By default this option is disabled.
Once this option is enabled, any existing Results set is deleted. If this option is enabled through
Tools, then Options, then Program Options, then OLAP, the option is enabled also in a newly
created CubeQuery section.
Note: If you use the Download to Results feature, only separate columns in the Results set are
created for every generation in every dimension. In addition, only the lowest level member
values are imported, with any ancestors for each member (included in the original query)
appearing in additional columns.
In the following example:
l
l
All Product members in the query, are listed in only one column and not separated into
multiple columns based on Generation. In addition, the data values for the upper level
Product members are also included in the results.
Each dimension has an additional column that displays parent members for each member
in the query.
m
m
m
The Year dimension members Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. have their parent member (Year)
displayed in the “Year Parent” column.
The Scenario dimension members Actual and Budget have their parent member
(Scenario) displayed in the “Scenario Parent” column.
The Product dimension members have their respective parent members displayed in the
“Product Parent” column.
320 Interactive Reporting
Value
5005
Note: If you open anInteractive Reporting version 11.1.1 document that contains data in Results
downloaded from a CubeQuery with version 9.3.1, the existing Results data is not visible.
Furthermore, using the “download to results” feature with an Interactive Reporting
document created with Interactive Reporting version 11.1.1, the result set will not be the
same as it was with version 11.1.1.
ä To enable download database totals:
1
Select Query, then Query Options.
The Query Options dialog box is displayed.
2
Select the Global tab.
3
Enable Download Database Totals and click OK.
Relational Aggregation
When selecting Download Database Totals, aggregations are disabled for all the sections
dependent on the Results with database totals. This feature protects users from performing
aggregations, where the results maybe double counted. Enabling the option Allow Relational
Aggregation allows usage of aggregation in the following sections:
l
Break/Grand Totals in Results section
l
Data Functions, Totals, Cume in Pivot
l
Data Functions in Chart
l
Data Functions, Break Totals, Show Column Totals in Report.
CubeQuery Section 321
ä To set relational aggregation:
1
Select Query Options, then Global.
2
Enable Allow Relational Aggregation and click OK.
Formatting CubeQuery Items
Common formatting options are available for CubeQuery items on the Format and shortcut
menus including:
l
l
l
Auto-size Width—By default columns and rows are distributed evenly and without regard
to the length of data values, which may be truncated. With the auto-size width feature, you
can automatically size any column or rows horizontally to fit the text of the largest value in
the column.
Auto-size Height—By default columns and rows are distributed evenly and without regard
to the length of data values, which may be truncated. With the auto-size height feature, you
can automatically size any column or rows vertically to fit the text of the largest value in the
column.
Number Format—Options for changing the way numbers, currency values, and dates are
displayed throughout or create new custom formats. See Number Formatting
.
ä To auto-size the width of a row or column, select the row or column label and choose AutoSize Width.
ä To auto-size the height of a row or column, select the row or column label and choose AutoSize Height.
Query Options
Use the Query Options to define global and local display behavior and drill options. The Query
Options dialog box comprises the Global, Display, and Drill tabs.
ä To display query options, select Actions, then Query Options.
Global Options
Use the Global tab to set global display behavior in the CubeQuery section.
Design Options
Description
Auto-Refresh Query
Queries the database automatically when an item is added to or removed from the data layout, or when the
Suppress and Replace options in Query Options are changed. If Auto-Refresh is disabled, you must click Process
to query the database whenever you make a change in the data layout.
322 Interactive Reporting
Catalog Display Options
Description
Number of members to
display
Sets the maximum number of members to display in the Catalog List and Member Selection. The number
can be:
l
unlimited
l
5
l
10
l
20
l
50
l
100
l
250
l
500
The default number of members is 50. In both the Catalog List and Member Selection, the “more…” node
expands to the next set of members.
Results Options
Description
Download Database
Totals
Download Database Totals creates only one column per dimension, and includes all members, and the
corresponding data, in the results set. In addition, a column with each dimension’s parent members is included.
By default this option is disabled.
Allow Relational
Aggregation
Enables relational aggregation in the following sections:
l
Break/Grand Totals in Results section
l
Data Functions, Totals, Cume in Pivot
l
Data Functions in Chart
l
Data Functions, Break Totals, Show Column Totals in Report.
When the Download Database Totals option (see above) is enabled, aggregations are disabled for all the sections
dependent on the Results sets with database totals. This option protects users from performing aggregations,
where the results may be counted twice. By default this option is disabled.
Include Consolidation
Information
Enabling this option includes consolidation type/unary operator information of all members from the Data Layout
when Download To Results is executed. Disabling the option excludes the consolidation type/unary operator
information for each member. By default this option is disabled for newly inserted CubeQuery sections.
Display Options
Use the Display tab to set row and column suppression criteria, alias information, replacement
values, and label indentation.
Suppress
Description
#Missing Rows
Suppress the return of data rows that contain only missing values. If one value is in the row, the row is not suppressed.
By default, this option is enabled.
Zero Rows
Suppress the return of data rows that contain only zeros. By default this option is disabled.
Shared Members
Suppress the return of members tagged as shared. By default, this option is disabled.
#Missing Columns
Suppress the return of data columns that contain only missing data. By default this option is enabled.
CubeQuery Section 323
Suppress
Description
Zero Columns
Suppress the return of data columns that contain only zeros. By default this option is disabled.
Aliases
Description
Use Aliases
Display aliases when performing database retrievals rather than database member names. Aliases are alternate
names for database members. You can retrieve data that uses the database name, which is often a stock number
or product code, or an alias, which can be more descriptive.
When this setting is updated, this message is displayed: “The OLAP Tree will be updated automatically with new
Alias information and the OLAP Query will be re-processed.”
Select an Alias
Table
Specify the alias table to use for alias names. Each database can contain one or more alias tables.
Replacement
Description
#Missing Label
Specify a label for missing values. For example, you might enter:
#Missing
By default, the replacement value for a missing label is blank.
#NoAccessLabel
Specify a label for values from the Essbase cube to which a user does not have security access. For example, you
might enter:
NoAccess
Zero Label
Table 86
Specify a label for zero values. By default the replacement value for a zero label is blank.
Label Indendation
Option
Description
Indent Each
Generation By
Select the number of characters by which each generation in the hierarchy is indented. For example, you can change the
following indentation from 1 to 3. This option can take options from 0 to 25.
indentation at 1:
100–10
100–20
100–30
indentation at 3:
100–10
100–20
100–30
100
Drill Options
Use the Drill tab to define the next level of data displayed when you drill down in a CubeQuery.
324 Interactive Reporting
Additionally, the Member Retention option group contains items that enable you to customize
drilling retention characteristics.
Drill
Level
Description
(Drill
Level
dropdown)
Defines the next level of data displayed when you drill down from the Query menu, or when you double click a member. Any
drill down selection made from the shortcut menu overrides the selection made here. For example, if you select Bottom Level,
data for the lowest level of members in a dimension is retrieved. A drill-down on Year retrieves: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, Ma, Ju,
Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, and Dec.
Valid drill down levels are:
l
Next Level
l
Bottom Level
l
All Descendants
l
Sibling
l
Same Level
l
Same Generation
Member Retention
Description
Include Selection
Retains the selected member along with the other members retrieved as a result of a drill down. For example,
if you drill down on Qtr1, the data for Jan, Feb, and Mar, as well as Qtr1, is retrieved. When this option is
disabled, the data for only for Jan, Feb, and Mar, is retrieved: Qtrl is eliminated. By default this option is
enabled.
Within Selected Group
Applies (drilling) to only the group of members in which the selection is made. By default this setting is
disabled. It is meaningful only when the report contains two or more dimensions of data down a report as
rows or across a report as columns. This type of report is considered asymmetric, which is characterized
by groups of nested members that differ by at least one member.
Remove Unselected Groups
Removes all dimension groups that are not in the selected group.
Launching Smart View from CubeQuery
A CubeQuery section can be exported to Oracle® Hyperion® for Office. is a centralized interface
which enables simultaneous use of multiple Oracle Hyperion products, and improves
integration with Microsoft Office. You can export a CubeQuery section to Microsoft Excel as
query-ready HTML. When you export content as query-ready HTML, the current page of the
current CubeQuery section is converted to HTML and Hyperion-specific formatting is removed.
This enables you to re-query the data source independent of the Web application.For more
information about exporting a CubeQuery with , see Oracle® Hyperion For Office, Fusion
Edition, Release 11.1.1.
Note: You cannot export content as query-ready HTML to a Firefox browser.
CubeQuery Section 325
ä To launch Smart View from a CubeQuery section, select Actions, then Launch Smart View.
For more information about using CubeQuery inSmart View, see Oracle® Hyperion Oracle
Hyperion Smart View for Office, Fusion Edition For Office, Fusion Edition, Release 11.1.1.
Dashboards
The Dashboard section is a streamlined, push button approach to querying a database.
Dashboards are ideal for users who do not have the time to build a query or design a report
section. Up to the minute thumbnail views of data allow you to explore what is behind trends
and indicators.
On opening the file, you have a customized dashboard, which may show Gauges, Live Charts
embedded reports and navigational buttons and boxes that allow you to retrieve data, and
populate controls.
Each button selection, item selection, or navigation sequence can invoke a script created by a
Designer. Behind the scene, Interactive Reporting refreshes the Dashboard script commands
that allow you to retrieve data, populate controls, hide objects, navigate to different sections,
and specify report parameters.
Embedded Section Objects
Results, Pivot, Chart, Table, OLAP, and CubeQuery sections can be embedded in any Interactive
Reporting documents and viewed in EPM Workspace. Data is updated in EPM Workspace as it
is updated in the original sections.
The limitations to Interactive Reporting document files embedded in a dashboard through an
embedded browser or hyperlink control include:
l
Online help is available through a toolbar or a dialog box.
l
Number formatting options are not available.
l
The Reference sub dialog box of the Computed Item dialog box is not available.
Embedded sections are added to the EPM Workspace in three modes:
l
l
l
View-only—Can view static reports (The reports are displayed as thumbnails in the
dashboard section—as currently defined in the native-report section. Users cannot interact
with the reports.
Hyperlink—Can navigate to original sections by clicking thumbnails.
Active-Embedded section objects in active mode enables users to interact with reports.
Selecting a live report activates it in-place for object specific functions such as drill down,
pivoting, and other analysis.
326 Interactive Reporting
View-Only Embedded Section Objects
Embedded section objects in view-only mode are designed to be static objects— that is, users
cannot interact with the report beyond viewing its content. Only actions performed on the parent
section of the embedded section object update it. Scroll bar behavior for view only objects depend
on the scroll bar settings defined for the object:
l
l
vertical and horizontal scroll bars always appear, and adjacent to but outside the defined
object’s container boundary and do not obstruct the object
vertical and horizontal scroll bars only appear when the object has focus (when the user
selects the object). The scroll bars continue to show until the user selects another object, or
tool bar.
Active Embedded Section Objects
Active embedded section objects allow you to select the embedded section object and perform
selected tasks as you might with other object in the non-dashboard sections. This interaction is
provided on the shortcut menus or the object, or by selecting embedded section object and
clicking Shift+F10. Actions performed on the active embedded section object update the parent
section, as do actions made by the parent section to the embedded section object.
Available options depend on the object and which tasks have been associated with it by the
designer: The following list shows the default shortcut menu options for each embedded section
object.
Embedded Results Section Object shortcut menu options:
l
Sort Ascending
l
Sort Descending
l
Auto-size Column
Embedded Pivot Section Object shortcut menu options:
l
Drill Anywhere (with sub-menu listing available columns from parent Results/Table)
l
Drill Up
l
Focus on Items
l
Hide Items
l
Show Hidden Items
l
Show All Items
l
Auto-Size Column Width
l
Swing
m
Horizontal
m
Vertical
m
Up
m
Down
Dashboards 327
m
Left
m
Right
m
m
Before (submenu is also launched listing all top and side labels, listing them in a topdown, left-right order)
After (submenu is also launched listing all top and side labels, listing them in a topdown, left-right order)
l
Sort Ascending
l
Sort Descending
l
Refresh Pivot
Embedded Chart Section Object shortcut menu options:
l
Drill Anywhere
l
Drill Up
l
Focus on Items
l
Hide Items
l
Show Hidden Items
l
Show All Items
l
(Un)Group
l
Show Negative Values
l
Show Label
l
Add Trend Line
l
Sort
l
l
m
Ascending
m
Descending
Zoom
m
Zoom In
m
Zoom out
m
Return to original
Refresh Chart
Embedded OLAPQuery/CubeQuery Section objects (the list of available speed menu options is
context sensitive and depends on what component of the report is selected, for example label,
measure, handle. It also depends on the state when the component selection is made. For example
if items have been hidden, if additional levels are available for drill down, and so on).
l
Keep Only
l
Remove Only
l
Drill
328 Interactive Reporting
l
l
m
Down
m
Up
m
Next
m
Bottom
m
All Descendants
m
Siblings
m
Same Level
m
Same Generation
Drill
m
Down
m
Up
m
Next
m
Bottom
m
All Descendants
m
Siblings
m
Same Level
m
Same Generation
Suppress
m
Missing rows
m
Missing Columns
m
Zero rows
m
Zero columns
l
Drill-Through
l
Column Width
l
Row height
Scroll bar behavior for view only objects depend on the scroll bar settings defined for the object:
l
l
vertical and horizontal scroll bars always appear, and adjacent to but outside the defined
object’s container boundary and do not obstruct the object
vertical and horizontal scroll bars only appear when the object has focus (when the user
selects the object). The scroll bars continue to show until the user selects another object, or
the tool bar.
Report Section
The Report section allows you to view high-quality and professionally designed reports. These
reports can span anywhere from a complex critical operational report to a results sets, a chart,
Report Section 329
and a pivot table. Use the reports in this section to help you evaluate your business, expand
communications, and assist in the decision-making process.
The reports found here are dynamic and provide you with an almost unfiltered framework from
which to view and analyze data. You can resort and apply data functions, which allow you to
display different types of values.
Paging Through the Report
By default Interactive Reporting shows a fixed number of rows in a table when a user views a
page in a browser. Often data extends beyond the vertical and horizontal rows shown on the
page. To view your paging options, see the table below.
Table 87
Report Paging Options
Paging Option
Description
Current Page
The tooltip shows the current page in the report.
Page Left
Moves one page in the left direction. To move to the first page in the left direction, select [Shift] + Click + left arrow.
Page Up
Moves one page up. To move to the top page, select [Shift] + Click + Up.
Page Down
Moves one view in the down direction. To move to the first page in the down direction, select [Shift] + Click + Down
arrow.
Page Right
Moves one page in the right direction. To move to the first page in the right direction, select [Shift] + Click + right arrow.
330 Interactive Reporting
11
Using Production Reporting
Documents
In This Chapter
Viewing a Production Reporting Document............................................................ 331
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports ................................................................ 332
Viewing a Production Reporting Document
ä To view a Production Reporting document in EPM Workspace:
1
Run an Production Reporting job in EPM Workspace.
2
Double-click the job output and view the available output formats.
Depending on the output formats selected when you ran the job, see “Output Options” on
page 483, you can select from some or all of the following output formats:
3
l
Comma Separated Value file (CSV)
l
HP Printer file (PCL)
l
HTML file (HTML)
l
Interactive Reporting Data file (BQD)
l
Line Printer file (LP)
l
Listing file (LIS)
l
Microsoft Excel file (XLS)
l
Microsoft Word File (DOC)
l
Portable Document Format file (PDF)
l
PostScript file (PS)
l
PowerPoint file (PPT)
l
SQR Production Reporting Document (SPF)
l
Production Reporting Log file (LOG)
l
Production Reporting Output file (XML)
Select the desired output format and click Open.
Viewing a Production Reporting Document 331
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports
When you view a Production Reporting document in an HTML format, you can navigate from
page to page, move to a specific page, or browse with a table of contents.
Using the Navigation Bar
The navigation bar provides options for navigating to different pages within the HTML report
and for viewing the report in multiple output formats.
Exporting Report Information from the Navigation Bar
The navigation bar displays icons for viewing an HTML report in different file formats. The
icons that appear on the navigation bar are defined in the Navigation Bar tab in the SQR
Production Reporting Studio preferences. (See the Hyperion SQR Production Reporting Studio
User’s Guide for more information.) Table 88 describes the export options on the navigation
bar.
Table 88
Icon
Export Options on the Navigation Bar
Message
Description
Display Table of Contents
Displays the Table of Contents frame.
Display PDF file
Displays the report in a Portable Document Format (PDF) and launches it in a new browser
window.
Download the Data in CSV (commadelimited) format
Downloads the report data in a Comma Separated Value format (CSV) and displays it in a
new browser window.
Download the Data in BQD format
Downloads the report data in a Brio Query Data format (BQD) format and displays it in a
new browser window.
Display XML file
Displays the report in an XML format and launches it in a new browser window.
Note: The HTML navigation bar only displays a subset of all the available output formats. See
“Viewing a Production Reporting Document” on page 331.
Using the Navigation Bar to Move Among Pages
You can navigate among the pages of a multi-page HTML report by using the paging options
on the navigation bar. Table 89 describes the navigation options on the navigation bar.
Table 89
Icon
Navigation Options on the Navigation Bar
Message
Description
Go to First Page
Displays the first page of the report in the current browser window.
332 Using Production Reporting Documents
Icon
Message
Description
Go to Previous Page
Displays the previous page of the report in the browser window.
Go to Page
Type the page number you want to go to.
Go to Next Page
Displays the next page of the report in the browser window.
Go to Last Page
Displays the last page of the report in the browser window.
Navigating with the Table of Contents
The table of contents offers standard functionality for navigating through a document.
Figure 4 shows an HTML report with the table of contents displayed.
Figure 4
Table of Contents Displayed for an HTML Report
Viewing Functionality for HTML Reports 333
334 Using Production Reporting Documents
12
Using Web Analysis
In This Chapter
Presentations............................................................................................. 336
Opening Presentations .................................................................................. 337
Closing Presentations.................................................................................... 338
Web Analysis Documents ............................................................................... 339
Creating Web Analysis Documents ..................................................................... 339
Creating Documents from Documents ................................................................. 342
Modifying Queries........................................................................................ 343
Selecting Members ...................................................................................... 344
Advanced Member Selection ........................................................................... 345
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics ................................................................. 349
Navigating Data Objects and Sources ................................................................. 358
Changing Display Types ................................................................................. 364
Pinboards ................................................................................................. 366
SQL Spreadsheets ....................................................................................... 366
Freeform Grids............................................................................................ 367
Resizing the Display ..................................................................................... 367
Managing Analysis Tools ................................................................................ 367
Show/Hide Only.......................................................................................... 369
Traffic Lighting ............................................................................................ 372
Sorting .................................................................................................... 374
Restrict Data.............................................................................................. 375
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom............................................................................... 377
Editing Data Formatting Definitions .................................................................... 379
Spreadsheet Options .................................................................................... 379
Sizing Columns ........................................................................................... 381
Formatting Documents .................................................................................. 382
Calculations .............................................................................................. 400
Print as PDF from EPM Workspace ..................................................................... 410
Print via PDF.............................................................................................. 411
Database Connections .................................................................................. 411
Analytic Services Database Connections .............................................................. 413
Financial Management .................................................................................. 415
SAP BW ................................................................................................... 419
335
Relational Access ........................................................................................ 421
Custom Web Analysis Documents...................................................................... 423
Linking Components by Query .......................................................................... 424
Linking Dimensions ...................................................................................... 425
Edit Data Mode .......................................................................................... 425
Editing Data Values ...................................................................................... 426
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel..................................................... 426
Tips for Edit Data Mode ................................................................................. 426
Presentations
Presentations, playlists of Web Analysis documents, enable documents to be grouped, organized,
ordered, distributed, and reviewed. Presentations are lists of pointers that reference repository
documents, not documents copied into sets.
Presentation properties govern display and content; file properties control identification, access,
and security.
Presentation Access and File Permissions
Because file permission and presentation access operate independently, presentations may be
distributed to users who cannot access the documents within them.
Documents for which users do not have list file permission are not listed; documents for which
users do not have read file permission cannot be opened.
File permissions that withhold document access prevent all access, directly or through
presentations. Presentation permissions that withhold access do not prevent direct document
access.
User and Group Permissions
Users can access presentations assigned to them or the groups to which they belong.
Both presentations and the documents within them must be assigned to groups. Otherwise,
group members can access the presentations but not the documents within them (unless granted
individual access).
To mitigate the risk of conflicting permissions, store presentations and their documents in the
same folder. Whenever possible, distribute documents and presentations to groups. It is easier
to set permissions for all files in a folder and all users in a group than to manage permissions for
individual files and users.
Document and Folder References
You can add two kinds of references to presentations:
336 Using Web Analysis
l
l
Document–When you add documents directly to a presentation, a reference to a unique
document identifier is created in the presentation. Wherever the document is moved, the
presentation can locate and present the document.
Folders–When you add folders to a presentation, the folder reference is directly added to
Presentation Content, but documents in the folder are dynamically referenced. Documents
added or removed from the folder are automatically added or removed from presentations
referencing that folder.
Note: You cannot dynamically include descendant folders, or presentations in target
presentations. When adding a folder to a presentation, only documents immediately
in the selected folder are dynamically added to the target presentation.
Benefits and Considerations
Folder references simplify presentation maintenance because Web Analysis synchronizes
presentation playlists with referenced folder content. You can also change folder content without
editing its presentation. You must limit write access to the folder to prevent other users from
inadvertently adding content to a folder, and subsequently your presentation.
While document references are less flexible and require more maintenance, presentation content
is fixed.
Reference Reconciliation
When presentations are opened, Web Analysis first attempts to reconcile document references,
and then folder references.
If files are copied and the original file deleted, Web Analysis cannot locate the unique file
identifier. In this case, Web Analysis searches for files of the correct name at the same location.
When a reference cannot be found by means of identifier or location, the reference displays as
red in the Presentation Wizard.
Opening Presentations
Options for opening presentations:
l
l
l
Select File, then Open, then Document or the open toolbar button, and select a presentation
file from the Open dialog box.
Right click the document and Select Open As
m
Click HTML to open the document in an HTML editor.
m
Click Web Analysis Studio to open the document in Web Analysis Studio.
Use the view pane Tools menu or Explore toolbar button to access the Explore module, and
navigate to and select a presentation from a repository location.
Opening Presentations 337
ä To open a presentation, using the Open dialog box:
1
Perform an action:
l
Select File , then Open , then Document.
l
Select the open button.
The Open dialog box displays. It lists current folder content, as specified by Look in.
l
Right click the document and Select Open As
m
Click HTML to open the document in an HTML editor.
m
Click Web Analysis Studio to open the document in Web Analysis Studio.
2
Optional: From Type, select All Files or Hyperion , then Presentation.
3
Navigate to the presentation:
l
l
From Look In, select a location from the drop down list.
Click the Go Up A Level button to display the contents of the parent folder in the
selection frame.
As you navigate, the selection frame lists the files and folders indicated by the Files of
Type list.
4
Select the presentation.
5
Click OK.
If the first presentation document uses a database connection requiring log on, the Database
Login dialog box is displayed.
6
If prompted by the Database Login dialog, enter a valid user name and password, select Save User ID
and Password, and click OK.
The selected presentation (and any other selections) display as content tabs below the
content area. The first presentation document is opened and displayed as the current
document.
Notes on Opening Presentations
l
l
In the Open dialog box, you can select documents, presentations, or both. Multiple files are
opened in the order that the Selection frame lists them. The order of documents inside the
presentation is observed in the context of the other files being opened.
If multiple presentations contain multiple instances of a document, only the first instance
is opened. It may seem that the document did not open or that documents opened in the
wrong order. Only one instance of a document can be opened (and modified) at a time.
Closing Presentations
Unchanged files close. Changed repository files prompt for changes to be saved. Files not
previously saved to the repository trigger the Save As dialog box.
338 Using Web Analysis
ä To close all opened documents, select File , then Close All.
Web Analysis Documents
Web Analysis documents display in data objects the data values returned from data sources. A
document can have multiple data objects, and data objects have a display type:
l
Spreadsheet
l
Chart
l
Pinboard
l
SQL spreadsheet
l
Freeform grid
You can review all display types, but you can create spreadsheets and charts only by using the
new document wizard.
To create a document you are required to specify:
l
Data source—provides data values
l
Data object—displays these values
l
Query—gets data values from the data source and returns them to the data object.
Properties customize each of these elements.
The database connection wizard specifies the type of data source, logon credentials, database
applications, dimension formatting and drill-through properties.
Each data object can be set to a display types that features specific formatting options.
Queries can be explicit, requesting information on particular dimension members, or dynamic,
requesting information about any dimension member that satisfies a set of criteria.
You have two document creation options:
l
Use the new document wizard
l
Modify Web Analysis documents and save them under new names or to new locations
Creating Web Analysis Documents
A wizard guides you through creating Web Analysis spreadsheets and charts. The wizard requires
a database connection. You must know where this database connection is located, and have
permission to use it.
ä To create a document, using the new document wizard:
1
Select File , then New , then Document, or select the toolbar New Document button.
Web Analysis Documents 339
Depending on the modules installed, you may be prompted to indicate the kind of document
you want to create.
2
Optional: To create a Web Analysis document, select Create a Web Analysis document, and click
Next.
If you are not prompted, proceed to the next step.
The content area displays Select a Data Source. Because the repository stores document
definitions and not document data, you must identify a data source and the parameters for
connecting to it.
3
Perform one:
l
l
4
In the text area, enter the path, including the file name, from the root directory (/) to a
database connection.
Click Browse, select a database-connection file from the Open dialog box, and click
OK.
Optional: Select Use my active POV, to populate the query from a predefined point of view definition,
and click Next.
Performing this step enables you to load members from predefined point of view definitions
and to insert dimensions and members with one click. You can define many point of view
definitions, but Use my active POV applies only the definition set in user preferences as the
current point of view.
5
Optional: Select Automatically select one dimension, to populate and display a simple spreadsheet,
and click Finish.
Performing this step skips the remaining steps, and uses the highest aggregate members of
the time and measures dimensions to populate spreadsheet row and column axes (the
quickest method to use the new document wizard to display a spreadsheet).
Selecting Automatically select one dimension and Use my active POV and clicking Finish,
skips the remaining steps and displays a simple spreadsheet using the current point of view
definition.
6
Optional: Select Use Cube Navigator instead of Wizard and click Next to view the Select Layout dialog
box.
l
Select a layout and click OK
The Cube Navigator dialog box is displayed.
l
7
Select the appropriate dimensions and members and click OK to render the report.
Click Next.
In Select Row Dimension, you must select the dimensions to be used on the Rows axis. You
are required to have at least one row axis dimension and one column axis dimension.
8
To move a dimension name from Filters to Rows, select the name, and click the right arrow.
The dimension name is displayed in the Rows frame. If no point of view definition was
previously applied, the highest aggregate member of the dimension is used. If a point of view
definition was applied, its members are used.
340 Using Web Analysis
9
Optional: To select members, in Rows, double-click a dimension name.
The Dimension Browser dialog box displays. The dimension is presented as a node tree in
the Browse frame. You select members from the Browse frame and move them to the
Selections frame, using the following methods:
l
l
To expand or contract the hierarchy, click the plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) nodes, or
double-click the dimension name.
To select members, right-click the dimension name, and select Select Member.
Member names are displayed in the Selections list.
l
l
To select members dynamically, right-click a member name, and select an advanced
member selection method.
Set the label mode for each dimension to the default label, an ID label, or the alias table
description set in database connection properties.
For descriptions of Dimension Browser dialog box options, see “Selecting Members”
on page 344.
10 After indicating row-axis dimensions and selecting members, click Next.
11 Using the methods used to define the row axis, move a dimension name from Filters to Columns.
12 Optional: To select members, double-click a dimension name in Columns.
13 Using Dimension Browser methods, select members, set options, and click OK.
14 Click Next.
In Step 5, you select page-axis dimensions. Although document intersections are relative to
member selections, you can organize row and column intersections by page members.
15 Optional: Using the methods used to define row and column axes, move a dimension name from
Filters to Pages.
16 Optional: Using Dimension Browser methods, select page members.
17 Click Next.
In Step 6, you select filter-axis members.
All dimensions participate in all spreadsheet intersections, regardless of the axes to which
dimensions are assigned. Intersection arrangement is defined by row, column, and page
axes. Data values displayed at intersections are determined by member selections.
All data-object intersections are relative to filter member selections, which focus
intersections, data values, and, consequently, data-object analysis.
Filter-axis dimensions are by default represented by the highest aggregate member defined
in the data source outline. If a point of view definition was applied, its member selections
are used. If you select Filter members, all intersections are relative to the selections.
18 Optional: To display the Dimension Browser for Filter axis dimensions, double-click a dimension name.
19 Optional: Using Dimension Browser methods, select Filter axis members, and click OK.
20 Click Next.
21 Optional: Select a layout option:
Creating Web Analysis Documents 341
Chart— displays the result set as a chart data object.
Spreadsheet— displays the result set as a spreadsheet data object.
Vertical Combination— displays the result set as both a chart data object and a spreadsheet
data object stacked vertically.
Horizontal Combination— displays the result set as both a chart data object and a
spreadsheet data object arranged side-by-side.
You can change the display type of Vertical and Horizontal Combination layouts; for
example, you can convert the spreadsheet to another chart type. The objects, however, are
linked and maintain a coordinated context.
22 Click Finish to submit the query to the data source.
The data source is queried. The result set returned displays as a data object (or objects) on
a Web Analysis document.
Creating Documents from Documents
When you save documents with new names or to new locations, you use data sources, data
objects, and queries defined in existing documents, leveraging documents to save time and effort.
You can modify documents before you save them to new names or locations.
ä To create a document from a document:
1
Perform one:
l
Select File , then Open , then Document.
l
Select the open button.
The Open dialog box displays. A selection frame lists contents of the current folder,
specified by Look in.
l
Right click the document and Select Open As
m
Click HTML to open the document in an HTML editor.
m
Click Web Analysis Studio to open the document in Web Analysis Studio.
2
Optional: From Type, select All Files or Hyperion , then Web Analysis Document.
3
Navigate to the document to be copied.
4
Select the document, and click Open.
If the document uses a database connection requiring log on, the Database Login dialog box
displays.
5
If prompted by the Database Login dialog, enter a valid user name and password, select Save User ID
and Password, and click OK.
The selected document displays.
6
Modify the document.
7
Perform one:
342 Using Web Analysis
l
Select File , then Save As.
l
Click the toolbar Save As button.
The Save As dialog box displays. A selection frame lists the contents of the current folder,
as specified by Look in.
8
Navigate to the folder into which to save your modified document.
9
Optional: After you navigate to the location to save the file, enter a new filename in Name.
10 Click Save.
The modified document is saved to the specified location with the specified name.
Modifying Queries
Data Layout is a query editing interface. Data Layout displays dimensions returned by the
database connection, arranged on four axes:
l
Rows
l
Columns
l
Pages
l
Filters
Database connections return three types of dimensions.
Table 90
Icon
Dimension Type
Dimension Type
Standard
Attribute
Attribute Calculations
All queries must have at least one dimension assigned to the row axis and one dimension assigned
to the column axis; multiple dimensions can be nested on one axis. You can organize row and
column dimensions by assigning dimensions to the page axis. Dimensions not assigned to rows,
columns, and pages are in the filter axis.
All dimensions, regardless of the axes to which they are assigned, participate in all intersections
displayed by a data object. You use Data Layout to arrange dimensions, to specify level of detail,
and to set query options.
Note: All data objects start as spreadsheets. Charts and pinboards are organized by the four axes,
despite using different metaphors to display data.
Modifying Queries 343
ä To redefine the query and dimension layout of the current data object of the current
document, click the toolbar Data Layout button.
ä To move a dimension between axes, drag the dimension to the other axis.
ä To select members, double-click the dimension name.
Dimension Browser is displayed. See “Selecting Members” on page 344.
Modifying Filter Dimensions
All data-object intersections are relative to filter member selections, which focus intersections
and data values, and consequently, analysis.
Filter-axis dimensions are by default represented by the highest aggregate member defined in
the data source outline. To focus analysis on members other than the highest aggregate, you can
select filter members.
Filter member selections do not rearrange dimensions or reorganize pages, but focus analysis
on specific intersections.
Selecting Members
Dimension Browser, an interface for selecting members and refining database queries, is used
with the new document wizard, Cube Navigator dialog box, Information panel, or on its own.
The Dimension Browser presents dimensions as a node tree in the Browse frame. You must
select dimension members from this Browse frame and move them to the Selections frame.
Members can be selected individually, by familial relationships, by data-source-specific option,
or from predefined selection lists.
ä To access Dimension Browser:
l
Right-click a member label on a data object, and select Browse.
l
In the view pane Information panel, select a dimension name.
l
Click the Data Layout button, and double-click a dimension name.
l
In the new document wizard, double-click a dimension name.
ä To expand or collapse hierarchies in Dimension Browser, click the plus sign (+) or minus
sign (-) nodes, or double-click a dimension name.
ä To select a member, right-click the member, and select Select Member.
The member name is displayed in the Selections list. You cannot select the database connection
name at the top of the node tree.
344 Using Web Analysis
ä To select a member dynamically in Dimension Browser, right-click the member, and select
an advanced member selection method from the list.
See “Advanced Member Selection” on page 345.
ä To remove a member from the Selections list, perform an action:
l
l
Right-click the member in the Browse or Selections list, and deselect the selected selection
method.
Select the member in the Selections list, and click Remove.
ä To remove all members from the Selection list, click Remove All.
ä To preview members returned by advanced member selection, before you quit Dimension
Browser, click Preview.
ä To set dimension label mode, select a Dimension Labels option.
l
Use Default
l
Descriptions—the current alias table
l
IDs— the unique ID label
l
Both— ID label and description (used in Financial Management)
The label displayed by description is drawn from the alias table specified by the active user’s
database preferences. You can set an alias table for each Active Preferences user ID or group ID.
Users can specify label mode in specific dimensions, using Dimension Browser.
Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections by using the Dimension
Browser right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial
relationship and data-source-specific options.
Table 91
Icon
Dimension Browser Right-Click Menu
Command
Description
Select Member
Selects the currently member
Also Select Children
Selects the current member and its children
Also Select Descendants
Selects the current member and its descendants
Select Parent
Selects the parent of the current member
Also Select Ancestors
Selects the current member and its ancestors
Advanced Member Selection 345
Icon
Command
Description
Also Select Siblings
Selects the current member and members on its level and of its parent.
Select Dim Bottom
Selects lowest-level members
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor
Also Select Level
Selects the current member and all members on its level
Also Select Generation
Selects the current member and all members of its generation
Also Select Previous
Displays the Previous Selection dialog box, typically used to select previous members at the current
level
Also Select Subset
Displays the Subset dialog box, used to select an Analytic Services member subset.
No Icon
Substitution Variables
Displays the Substitution Variables dialog box, used to set a substitution variable as the dimension
selection
No Icon
User Defined Fields
When Financial Management is used as a data source, displays the User Defined Fields dialog box,
in which you can specify one of three pre-defined attribute values, select members featuring the
specified attribute values, and compose compound selection statements with AND and OR
No Icon
Dynamic Time Series
Displays the Analytic Services Dynamic Time Series menu (for example: History To Date, Quarter To
Date)
No Icon
Search
Displays the Search dialog box, in which you use search criteria to locate members of large
dimensions (adds found members to the Selection list)
No Icon
Find In Tree
Locates members in large dimensions; expands the dimension hierarchy but does not add found
members to the Selection list
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source
Different data sources support different member selection methods.
346 Using Web Analysis
Table 92
Advanced Member Selection by Data Source
Data Source
Advanced Member Selection Methods
Analytic Services
l
Also Select Children
l
Also Select Descendants
l
Select Parent
l
Also Select Ancestors
l
Also Select Siblings
l
Select Dim Bottom
l
Select Dim Top
l
Also Select Level
l
Also Select Generation
l
Also Select Previous
l
Select Subset
l
Substitution Variables
l
Dynamic Time Series
l
Search
l
Find in Tree
l
All Members
l
Select Dim Top
l
Select Dim Bottom
l
Also Select Descendants
l
Select Parent
l
Also Select Ancestors
l
Also Select Children
l
Also Select Siblings
l
Also Select Level
l
Select At Level
l
Also Select Previous
l
Also Select Next
l
Dynamic Time Series
l
Select Top/Bottom
l
Filter on Member Properties
l
Find in Tree
SAP BW
Advanced Member Selection 347
Data Source
Advanced Member Selection Methods
Financial Management
l
All Members
l
Select Dim Top
l
Select Dim Bottom
l
Also Select Descendants
l
Member List
l
Also Select Children
l
User Defined Field
l
Search
l
Find in Tree
l
Also Select Children
l
Also Select Descendants
l
Select Parent
l
Also Select Ancestors
l
Also Select Siblings
l
Select Dim Bottom
l
Select Dim Top
l
Also Select Generation
l
Find in Tree
JDBC Relational Data Sources
Consider relational-hierarchy implications in advanced member selections on relational data
sources. When highest ancestors are selected, default members, rather than aggregations, may
be used. For example, the relational hierarchy may equate Also Select Children and Also Select
Descendants.
Searching for Members
Analytic Services and Financial Management users can locate members in large dimensions by
using search criteria. Searches can be conducted inside Dimension Browser (during query
creation) or from the data-object right-click menu (during document analysis).
ä To search for Analytic Services or Financial Management members in Dimension Browser:
1
Right-click a member.
2
Select Search.
3
Enter search criteria in the text boxes.
Table 93
Member Search Criteria
Search Criteria
Control
Member
Mode
348 Using Web Analysis
Description
Searches by text string
ID
Searches by member name
Search Criteria
Control
Description
Description
Searches by member alias
Both
Searches by ID and description (Financial Management data sources only)
Find In Tree
If Expand Tree is selected, adds found members to the Selections list and expands the Browse node
tree to display the members in the hierarchy (only the first search-criteria instance is selected)
If Expand Tree is not selected, adds found members to the Selections list
Range
Searches the entire dimension or down the hierarchy from the right-clicked member
Option
4
Whole
Searches for the whole member name or alias
Substring
Searches for the first, last, or middle part of the member name, in the order entered in the member
text box
Beginning
Searches for the start of the member string
Ending
Searches for the end of the member string.
Click OK.
ä To search for Analytic Services members in a Web Analysis data object:
1
Right-click a member, and select Search from the right-click menu.
2
Enter search criteria in the text boxes, and click OK.
Note: Search performance is directly related to size and complexity of the dimension
hierarchy.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics
SAP BW users can locate characteristics in large dimension hierarchies by using search criteria.
The searches can be conducted only inside Dimension Browser during composition of a query.
ä To locate SAP BW members in Dimension Browser:
1
Right-click a member.
2
Select Search.
3
Enter search criteria in the text boxes.
Table 94
SAP BW Search Criteria
Search Criteria
Control
Description
Mode
ID
Searches by member technical name
Description
Searches by member alias
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics 349
Search Criteria
Control
Search Criteria
Description
Searches using an operand:
l
Equal To
l
>=
l
<=
l
>
l
<
l
Between
l
Contains Pattern
Searches by text string.
Execute
Runs the search function
Filtered Members
Displays the search result set
Add
Moves the selected member from the Filtered Members list to the Selected Members list.
Remove
Moves the selected member from the Selected Members list to the Filtered Members list
Selected Members
Displays members of the search result set
Add All
Moves all filtered members to the Selected Members list
Remove All
Moves all selected members to the Filtered Members list
OK
4
Adds the Search Selected Members list to the Dimension Browser Selections list
Click Execute to run the search function using the criteria specified in the Mode and Search Criteria
group boxes.
The search result set is displayed in the Filtered Members box.
5
Select members from the Filtered Members list, and click Add to add them to the Selected
Members list.
Only Selected Members list members are added are added to the Dimension Browser
Selections list when you click OK.
6
Click OK.
Locating Members
In large or complex dimension hierarchies, you can locate known members to select other
members, rather than composing search strings for unknown members.
ä To find a known member in the dimension hierarchy:
1
In Dimension Browser, from Selections, right-click a member.
2
Select Find In Tree.
350 Using Web Analysis
In the Browse frame, the dimension hierarchy is expanded, and the first instance of the
selected member is highlighted. You can now select members based on their relationship to
the selected member.
Selecting Members Using Analytic Services Subsets
Analytic Services users can define rules that select dimension member subsets by criterion. These
rules are composed of the following items:
l
UDA — user-defined attributes
l
Generation — generation within the dimension hierarchy
l
Level — level within the dimensional hierarchy
l
Expression — pattern of wildcard characters
l
Attribute dimensions — database-defined attributes
l
Conditional logic — advanced subset member selection criteria
You can search all selected member descendants using a maximum of 50 subset conditions.
Subset criteria are saved by document in the repository. Because the filter panel cannot
accommodate lengthy selection lists, subset member selections made in Filters are summarized
with a description.
ä To define a member subset selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2
Select Select Subset.
The Subset dialog box displays. At the top, it indicates dimension members against which
the rule is applied. Use the Individual Selection Rule control to compose a rule by selecting
components from drop down lists.
3
Select a type: UDA, Generation, Level, Expression, or Attribute.
4
Select an operand: is (=) or is not (not equal).
5
From the last list, select a value.
6
Click Add.
You must add the rule to Total Subset Definition for it to be used. You can define compound
and conditional rules by adding multiple rules to the definition and using the Advanced
button to connect them.
Table 95
Option
Advanced Subset Options
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to Total Subset Definition
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Validate
Parenthetical syntax of Total Subset Definition verified
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics 351
Option
Submenu
Description
Remove
Rule deleted from Total Subset Definition
Remove All
All rules deleted from Total Subset Definition
Connect
Move
Parenthesis
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are added to the definition.
)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in Total Subset Definition
Move Down
Rule moved down in Total Subset Definition
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
Remove All ()
All parentheses deleted from Total Subset Definition
Substitution Variable
Substitution Variable dialog box presented, enabling you to select a predefined substitution
variable for the rule value
7
Optional: To compose a compound subset definition, repeat steps 3 through 6.
8
Click OK.
Wildcard Characters
Supported wildcard characters include the question mark (?) and the asterisk (*), which can be
used only once in an expression and only at the end of a text string.
Expressions
Subset queries defined by expressions are not dependent upon label mode, returning all strings
satisfying the expressions regardless of the alias table. Users must determine whether value
sources are ID, description, or from alias tables and refine queries as needed.
UDAs
Web Analysis enables Analytic Services users to create user-defined attributes (UDAs), words
or phrases associated with and defining characteristics of members, for member subsets.
Selecting Financial Management User-Defined Fields
Financial Management users can select members with specified attribute criteria. User-defined
fields define compound selection rules for attributes of a specified value.
352 Using Web Analysis
ä To define a user-defined field selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2
Select User Defined Field.
The User Defined Field Selection dialog box is displayed. The controls at the top prompt
you to compose a rule.
3
Select a field: UserDefined1, UserDefined2, or UserDefined3.
The equal sign is the sole operand for the rule.
4
Enter a value.
5
Click Add.
To be used, the individual rule must be added to the Selection Criteria. Define compound
and conditional rules by adding multiple rules to the frame, and using Advanced options to
connect them.
Table 96
Advanced User-Defined Field Options
Option
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to Selection Criteria
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Remove
Rule deleted from Selection Criteria
Remove All
All rules deleted from Selection Criteria
Connect
Move
Parenthesis
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are added to the definition.)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in Selection Criteria
Move Down
Rule moved down in Selection Criteria
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
6
Optional: To compose compound subset definitions, repeat steps 3 through 5.
7
Click OK.
Filtering by SAP BW Member Properties
SAP uses the term member properties to refer to member attributes. You can select SAP BW
members and filter them by their member properties. You select the members and then define
filtering definitions on the selections.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics 353
ä To select SAP BW members by their member properties:
1
In Dimension Browser, select a member.
The member is displayed in the Selection frame.
2
Right-click the member, and select Filter on Member Properties.
The Member Properties dialog box is displayed. The controls at the top prompt you to
compose a rule.
3
From the list, select a member property.
4
Select an operand.
5
In the text area, enter a value for the member property.
6
Click Add.
You must add the rule to the filter definition for it to be used. You can use multiple rules to
create compound definitions.
Table 97
Advanced Filter on Member Properties Options
Option
Submenu
Description
Add
Rule added to the filter definition
Update
Rule replaced by another rule
Remove
Rule deleted from the filter definition
Remove All
All rules deleted from the filter definition
Parenthesis
Connect
Move
Add (
Open parenthesis inserted at beginning
Add )
Close parenthesis inserted at end
Remove (
Open parenthesis deleted
Remove )
Close parenthesis deleted
And
AND inserted at end (AND is used by default when multiple rules are added to the definition.)
Or
OR inserted at end
Move Up
Rule moved up in the filter definition
Move Down
Rule moved down in the filter definition
7
Optional: To compose compound definitions, repeat steps 3 through 6.
8
Click OK.
Using SAP BW Select Top/Bottom
SAP BW enables you to limit the size of and rank query result sets. You select members and then
define filtering definitions on the selections.
354 Using Web Analysis
ä To limit and rank SAP BW members as part of the query:
1
In Dimension Browser, select a member.
The member is displayed in the Selection frame.
2
Right-click the member, and select Select Top/Bottom.
The Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
3
Select Top or Bottom.
You cannot select both, as you can with Analytic Services.
4
From Using Function, select Percent, Sum, or Count.
You can determine rank by only one method.
5
In the text area, enter a value for the selected method.
For Percent, use a value between one and one hundred. For Sum, enter a threshold. All
member values summed up to and including the threshold are returned. For Count, provide
an integer, to indicate how many top or bottom members to return.
6
In Order By, select a dimension.
Because all dimensions participate in all intersections, you must identify the intersection by
which the selected dimension is ranked.
7
Optional: Click Selection.
Dimension Browser for the Order By dimension is displayed. You can select a member of
the Order By dimension by which to rank the selected dimension.
8
Click OK.
Selecting Financial Management Member Lists
Member lists are predefined variables, used for frequently changing information, created using
Financial Management, and identified by variable names.
ä To use a Financial Management member list in a Dimension Browser member selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2
Select Member List.
3
From Choose Member List, select a member list.
4
Click OK.
Selecting Substitution Variables
Substitution variables are predefined variables, used for frequently changing information,
created using Analytic Services, and identified by variable names.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics 355
Substitution variables simplify document maintenance, enabling fluctuating values to be
adjusted centrally (in Analytic Services) and to be referenced dynamically (by Web Analysis
documents).
ä To use a substitution variable in a Dimension Browser member selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, right-click a member.
2
Select Substitution Variable.
3
Select a substitution variable.
4
Click OK.
Multiple Substitution Variables
Multiple substitution variables can be used using Subset Member Selections.
Syntax Tips
Substitution variables have specific rules and syntax requirements:
l
For substituted values, use dimension or member names.
l
Do not use ampersands (&) as the first character of member names.
Analysis Tools and Substitution Variables
When member selections defined by substitution variables are used in analysis tool definitions,
the variables are resolved to their current values, ensuring accurate aggregations, comparisons,
and calculations, regardless of the substitution-variable definition.
Selecting Personal Variables
Personal variables, containers for ad hoc collections of otherwise unrelated members, enable
users to define and name complex member selections. To leverage personal variables, you must
be presented with relevant dimensions and database connections.
Defining personal variables does not include them in queries. You select personal variables from
Dimension Browser when you define queries.
ä To use a personal variable in a query, select the personal variable definition from the
Dimension Browser Browse panel.
Applying Point of View (POV)
POV database preferences enable users to insert dimensions and members into the documents
of others. Definitions must be defined and activated for specific database connections.
356 Using Web Analysis
When a POV is activated, the Use Point of View check box in the new document wizard is
enabled. Documents created when Use Point of View is selected use the active POV.
EPM Workspace users cannot create or activate POV definitions. But, they can select database
connections with activated POV definitions and apply the definitions to documents that they
are creating. EPM Workspace users cannot apply POV definitions to documents.
POV definitions consist of axes and member selections. Entire definitions are used when
documents are created with activated POVs.
If all POV member selections are custom filters, you may not see changes in your document.
You can check Point of View, of the view pane Information tab, to see which POV, if any, is
applied.
ä Using POV definitions is a three-part process:
1
Use Web Analysis Studio to create a POV definition.
2
Use Web Analysis Studio to activate the definition.
3
Set a document (existing or newly created) to use the definition.
ä To apply an activated POV definition to a new document:
1
Perform an action:
l
Select File , then New Document.
l
Click the new button.
The steps for creating documents are displayed.
2
Click Browse.
3
From the Open dialog box, select the file of the database connection that uses the activated POV
definition that you want to use, and click OK.
Defining Dynamic Time Series Selections
You can select Dynamic Time Series (DTS) definitions, created in Analytic Services, for query
selection statements. To define time periods, users select DTS definitions and time members.
Time Substitution Variables
You can select DTS substitution variables.
Substitution variables are predefined placeholders, used for frequently changing information,
identified by variable names, and having temporary values that define data type. When
substitution variables are used, temporary values are replaced by current values. Substitution
variables are stored at the database level in Analytic Services.
ä To define a DTS selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, right-click a time member.
Searching for SAP BW Characteristics 357
2
Select Dynamic Time Series.
The Dynamic Time Series dialog box is displayed, listing DTS definitions as option buttons
and substitution variables in a list.
3
Select a DTS definition option.
4
Perform an action:
l
l
5
Select the Substitution Variables tab, and then select a substitution variable.
Select the Members tab, and then select a member to represent the date in the X-to-date
definition.
Click OK.
Defining Previous Member Selections
Selecting Also Select Previous from the Dimension Browser right-click menu displays the Also
Select Previous dialog box, used to select previous members at one dimension level.
ä To define a previous member selection:
1
In Dimension Browser, in Browse, right-click a member.
2
Select Also Select Previous.
The Also Select Previous dialog box is displayed.
3
Specify how many previous members to retrieve.
4
Click OK.
Dimension Browser is displayed. The member that you right-clicked is displayed in the
Selections list with the Also Select Previous icon.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources
Web Analysis documents can contain a variety of data objects:
l
Spreadsheets
l
Charts
l
Pinboards
l
SQL spreadsheets
l
Freeform grids
Despite their diversity, data objects are not static. You can rearrange, expand, change, and
concentrate dimension intersections. These methods, called navigation methods, enable travel
through dimensional hierarchies.
Navigation methods are specific to data object and data source.
358 Using Web Analysis
Table 98
Supported Data Sources
Type
Data Source
OLAP
Analytic Services
IBM DB2 OLAP Server
SAP BW
Hyperion
Financial Management
Planning
Relational
IBM DB2 Enterprise Server Edition
Microsoft SQL Server
Oracle
Teradata
Other JDBC RDBMS
OLAP data sources support the navigation methods described in this chapter. Other Hyperion
data sources and relational data sources support fewer navigation methods.
Navigation Methods
EPM Workspace uses various navigation methods:
Table 99
Navigation Methods
Navigation
Description
Method
Move
Relocates dimensions on data-layout axes
Position dimensions on or between axes, using the Data Layout dialog
box, Information panel, or new document wizard
Paging
Maintains dimensions on their row and
column axes, while changing their
intersections on the page axis
Click or scroll the Page Control panel. See “Paging” on page 360.
Keep Only
Retains one member of the selected
dimension, while deselecting all other
members
Right-click a member and select Keep Only. See “Keep Only” on page
361
Remove Only
Deselects the selected member, removing it
from the query result set
Right-click a member, and select Remove Only. See “Remove Only”
on page 361.
Drilling
Increases or decreases dimension detail by
displaying or not displaying members in the
hierarchy
Double-click members. You can customize drilling behavior. See
“Drilling” on page 361.
Drill-Linking
Navigates to other documents or executables
Click a linked cell and pass the cell and the dimension context to
another data object or document
Custom Controls
Define Web Analysis navigation
Use a custom document component to change the query. While Web
Analysis users can use custom document components, you can only
create these components in the Web Analysis Studio.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources 359
Navigation method specifics:
l
Drilling—Navigates to related members
l
Linking (called drill-linking ) — Passes selected members to other documents
l
Linked reporting objects (LROs) — Open executables to display cell-notes, Windows
executables, or Web page URLs.
Repositioning Dimensions
You can rearrange intersections by repositioning dimensions on or between axes.
ä To reposition a dimension, using the Data Layout dialog box, click the data layout button,
and drag the dimension from its current positions to another position on the current axis
or to another axis.
Note: Document creators use Properties to lock the ability to swap and move dimensions.
ä To reposition a dimension, using the view pane Information panel:
1
Select View , then View Pane.
2
Click the information panel button to make Information the current tab.
3
Scroll to the Filter, Page, Row, and Column trees to review placement of the current data object.
4
Drag the dimension from one axis tree to another axis tree.
Note: You must have at least one row and one column dimension. If repositioning leaves a
row or column axis empty, use Data Layout to rearrange the dimension layout.
Paging
Paging maintains dimensions on row and column axes, while changing their intersections on
the Page axis.
You can jump or scroll through pages of intersections by using the Page Control panel.
ä To display the Page Control panel, select View , then Pages.
The Page Control panel displays in the content area above the relevant data object, organizing
Page axis intersections so that each page is relevant to one Page member.
ä To navigate the Page dimension, perform an action:
l
Click < and > to move up and down in the page series.
l
From the list box, select a page member by name.
360 Using Web Analysis
Pages
Think of the Page axis as the Z-axis of a three-dimensional graph. Visualize a stack of
spreadsheets. You navigate the stack to compare values among pages. The spreadsheets represent
Page axis dimensions, and the pages represent Page axis members or member combinations.
Multiple-Page and Single-Page List Boxes
When you work with page dimension combinations, the Page Control panel can display
multiple-page list boxes, which display all possible page combinations, whether or not data exists.
Single-page list boxes omit page combinations that do not contain data. Oracle recommends
using single-page list boxes when working with sparse dimensions.
ä To separate or combine Page dimensions into multiple-page list boxes, click Toggle
Multipage.
Keep Only
Keep Only deselects all but one member of the selected dimension.
ä To deselect all but one member of a dimension, right-click the member, and select Keep
Only.
Remove Only
Remove Only deselects a member, removing it from the query result set.
ä To remove one member from the query result set, right-click a member, and select Remove
Only.
Drilling
Drilling increases or decreases data-object detail by changing the member display. Because
drilling is customizable, the term drilling refers to almost any hierarchical navigation prompted
by clicking a dimension label.
Three types of drilling options:
l
l
l
Drilling options specify the result set.
Expand on Drill specifies whether the result set replaces or augments the currently displayed
members.
The Selected Member data-display option specifies whether the drilled member is included
in the result set.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources 361
Web Analysis users must use the data-object, right-click menu to set drill options. Expand on
Drill and Selected Member options are set by user preferences in Web Analysis Studio.
Drilling Options
Web Analysis Studio features these default drilling behaviors:
l
Drill Down includes a member's children in the display.
l
Drill Up includes a member's parent in the display.
l
Drill to Top includes the highest ancestor in the display.
You can customize drilling by setting drilling options. Drilling options are set for the current
document through the data object shortcut menu (Drill > Drill Options). Drilling options can
also be set for all subsequently created documents through Drilling preferences.
This table describes Web Analysis Studio drilling options:
Table 100
Drilling options
Drilling Option
Description
Drill to Next Level
Includes the children of the drilled member in the display.
Drill to Descendants
Includes all descendants of the drilled member in the display.
Drill to Dim Bottom
Includes the lowest level descendants of the drilled member in the display.
Drill to Siblings
Includes members at one level who share a parent with the drilled member.
Drill to Same Level
Includes all members on the drilled member's level.
Note: Hyperion defines levels as hierarchical layers counted up from the lowest descendant (Level 0). Other
data sources define levels differently. Asymmetric hierarchies may also yield unexpected results.
Drill to Same Generation
Includes all members on the drilled member's generation.
Note: Hyperion defines generations as hierarchical layers counted down from the highest ancestor (Generation
0). Other data sources define generations differently.
Drilling options are data-source specific. Drilling options that are not supported by the data
source default to Drill to Next Level.
Expand on Drill
The Expand on Drill drilling option sets the drilling return set to augment or replace currently
displayed dimension members. You can set Expand on Drill for the current document through
the data object shortcut menu (Drill , then Drill Options). Expand on Drill can also be set for
all subsequently created documents through Drilling preferences.
When Expand on Drill is selected the drilling return set is added to currently displayed dimension
members. When Expand on drill is disabled the drilling return set replaces currently displayed
dimension members.
362 Using Web Analysis
Selected Member Data Display Option
The Selected Member data display option specifies that the query result set should include the
member from which advanced member selections are defined.
For example: If you specify Also Select Children on the Year dimension member and Selected
Member is enabled, Year and all of its children are returned by the query. When Selected Member
is disabled, only the children of year are returned.
This Selected Member functionality also impacts the drilling result set, by including or excluding
the drilled member in the drilling result set.
Additionally, you can enable the Selected Member First data display option, to ensure that the
drilled member is listed above the drilling result set.
Drilling Variations
These data display and drilling option combinations result in drilling return sets that differ. If
you are aware of this dynamic you are better prepared to receive the intended drilling return set.
Table 101
Drilling Variations
Drilling Variation
Description
Drilling down with Expand Drilling enabled and Data Display ,
then Selected Members disabled
Augments current member selections with the drilled return set and
removes the drilled member
Drilling down with Expand Drilling enabled and Data Display ,
then Selected Members enabled
Augments current member selections with the drilled return set and
includes the drilled member.
Drilling down with Expand Drilling disabled and Data Display ,
then Selected Members disabled
Replaces the current member selections with the drilled return set and
removes the drilled member.
Drilling down with Expand Drilling disabled and Data Display ,
then Selected Members enabled
Replaces the current member selections with the drilled return set and
includes the drilled member.
Default Drilling Behavior
Default drilling behavior for Web Analysis documents:
l
Drill Down displays children.
l
Drill Up displays parents.
l
Drill to Top displays the highest ancestor.
Drilling options are data-source specific. If, in user preferences, you set drilling options that are
not supported by the current data source, drilling defaults to Drill to Next Level.
Drill-Linking
Drill-linking enables you to navigate to other documents by clicking cells with preplaced links.
Navigating Data Objects and Sources 363
Drill-linking differs from both drilling and linked reporting objects. Drilling navigates the
dimensional hierarchy. Drill-linking passes the current member selection to other documents
and executables. Linked reporting objects are linked to cell notes, file attachments, and URLs.
Changing Display Types
Documents display data values returned from data sources in data objects. Web Analysis
documents can have multiple data objects, and each data object can have a different display type:
l
Spreadsheet
l
Chart
l
Pinboard
l
SQL spreadsheet
l
Freeform grid
Each display type has numerous prerequisites. Because SQL spreadsheets and freeform grids can
be created only in Web Analysis Studio, you cannot change them.
Pinboards require traffic lighting definitions, so you can change spreadsheets or charts to
pinboards, only if the pinboard definition is defined.
ä To change the display type of the current document, select Format , then Display Type then,
select a display type or chart type.
Note: Web Analysis Studio users can lock the display type to prevent subsequent users from
altering a document.
Data Display Options
Each display type has data display options specifying document behavior. For suppression—
suppresses rows with missing data, rows with zeroes, and in the case of Analytic Services, rows
with shared members. Suppression can be set from the Cube Navigator dialog box, Data Display
shortcut menu or OLAP Server preferences.
Table 102
Data Display Options of Data Object Shortcut Menu
Data Display Option
Submenu
Description
Selected Member
Displays the explicit member selection made in the query. This member selection can be previewed in the
Information panel, or Dimension Browser. Selected Member provides a method for displaying this information
in data objects.
Selected Member First
When Selected Member is active, enables you to position the explicit member selection made in the query
definition first (from left to right, or top to bottom).
364 Using Web Analysis
Data Display Option
Submenu
Description
Suppress
Omits data, as specified, from the query result set:
Default Label Mode
Dimension-Specific
Label Mode
Dimension Header
Sorting
l
Missing Rows
l
Missing Columns
l
Shared Members
l
Zero Rows
Toggles between label modes:
l
Descriptions
l
IDs
l
Both (Financial Management option)
Toggles between label mode options:
l
Use Default
l
Descriptions
l
IDs
l
Both (Financial Management option)
Orders the selected dimension per the order option:
l
Default
l
Ascending
l
Descending
l
Level (OLAP specific)
l
Generation (OLAP specific)
l
Selection Order (Relational specific)
The Default option is the order in which dimension members are naturally ordered by data source outlines.
Using this option may offer improved performance.
Show Linked Reporting
Object Indicators
Shows or hides small cell triangles indicating the presence of Linked Reporting Objects. Triangles persist for
related content.
Saving Selections to the User POV
User POV enables users to select members in Filters, Pages, Rows, and Columns (Data layout
and/or member selection controls) and applies them to multiple reports.
Note the report needs the following to utilize the User POV:
l
“Use User POV” is enabled in the Data Layout dialog in the Web Analysis Studio.
l
A dimension member selection needs to include “User POV” as a selection.
This is exposed through the current POV functionality, where UserPOV is the name of another
POV that is created and utilized in reports. The UserPOV exist for all database connections and
can be set at user level only.
Changing Display Types 365
To set a UserPOV, right click a spreadsheet and select Save Selection to save the dimension
member selections to the UserPOV.
Pinboards
Pinboards are custom, graphic representations of multiple dimensions. Pinboard dimensions
are represented by graphics, pin icons on graphics, and color (or state).
Pinboards Prerequisites
Because pins change image or color dynamically, based on traffic-lighting cues, you must create
the spreadsheet and apply traffic lighting before creating the pinboard in Web Analysis Studio.
Pinboard Series
A pinboard series enables drilling from one pinboard to another. You create the first pinboard
and then use the Web Analysis Studio Pinboard Designer right-click menu to generate
subsequent pinboards, each of which uses the children of the preceding pinboard. The pinboard
that represents the dimension bottom is the last in the series.
Pins
You can use the default pins provided by Web Analysis Studio or use Pin Designer to create pins.
Pins change their image or color, based on traffic lighting.
Figure 5
Default Pin, Image Pin, and Color Pin
Traffic-Lighting Control Panel
If multiple traffic-lighting definitions are defined on a document, the pinboard display type
displays a traffic-lighting control panel, which enables you to scroll through the traffic-lighting
definitions.
SQL Spreadsheets
SQL spreadsheet data objects enable users to query relational data sources and display the
returned data values on custom documents:
l
SQL spreadsheets can be created only on custom documents.
l
You must understand how to compose SQL queries to create SQL spreadsheets.
366 Using Web Analysis
l
You must be able to connect to a relational data source using supported JDBC drivers.
Alternatives for accessing relational data:
l
l
l
l
In Web Analysis Studio, you can create a relational database connection to be used by
spreadsheets, charts, and pinboards.
You can use freeform grids, which leverage custom document database connections, to
combine data values from multiple data sources in one data object.
In Web Analysis Studio, you can create a relational drill-through connection from an OLAP
database connection to a relational data source.
You use the Related Content dialog box to leverage pre-defined Analytic Integration Services
drill-through reports.
Freeform Grids
Freeform grids present OLAP, relational, and manually entered data on a data object, enabling
you to leverage multiple data sources in integrated, dynamic calculations.
Freeform grids are comprised of rows and columns; page dimensions are not visually
represented. You can use OLAP database connections with members assigned to the page axis,
but you cannot navigate through page dimensions unless you create additional subscription
controls. In short, only the first page of a multidimensional cube is displayed.
Resizing the Display
You can resize large Web Analysis documents in the content area:
l
Auto-Resize— attempts to fit the current data object into the current content area
l
Custom Resize — fits the current data object to a manually specified pixel area
ä To auto-resize the current data object, select Format , then Auto-Resize.
ä To size the current data object to a specified size, select Format , then Custom Resize, and,
when the Custom Resize dialog box is displayed, enter the preferred number of horizontal
and vertical pixels.
Managing Analysis Tools
You can leverage tools, advanced-analytical-formatting and data-source-specific, from the EPM
Workspace. Analysis tools expedite comparisons, visually organize data, and promote structures
and conclusions.
Analysis tools are data-source-specific; not all tools are available in all data objects.
Freeform Grids 367
Analysis tools are centrally organized and applied by Analysis Tools Manager, accessed using
the data-object, right-click menu. Analysis Tools Manager features an Ordered By panel, which
shows the number and order of tool definitions activated on the current data object.
You can create analysis tools, using the data-object, right-click menu.
Table 103
Analysis Tools
Tool
Description
Traffic Lighting
Displays the Traffic Lighting dialog box, used to color-code member values based on fixed limits or value
comparison
Traffic Lighting visually associates member values, whether or not they are sorted or ranked.
Sorting
Displays the Sorting dialog box, used to order the query result set
Retrieve Only Top/
Bottom
Displays the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box, used to limit and rank the query result set
Restrict Data
Displays the Restrict Data dialog box, used to restrict the query result set based on criteria
Calculations
Displays the Calculations dialog box, used to create calculated rows and columns
Show/Hide Only
Displays the Show/Hide dialog box, used to filter data by color, value, and member
Data Formatting
Displays the Data Formatting dialog box, used to format data values based on member or value criteria
Related Content Definitions
Related Content definitions can be managed from the Related Content dialog box and Analysis
Tools Manager. Edits, including remove and remove all, made in the Related Content dialog
box change definition content but do not impact definition existence. In Analysis Tools Manager,
you can activate, deactivate, reorder, and remove, but not edit, definitions.
Order of Definitions
The order in which Analysis Tools definitions are applied affects data object behavior. Users can
edit application order by moving Analysis Tools definitions up and down in the Ordered By
panel.
Default Analysis Tools Definitions
Analysis Tools Manager displays default formatting, measures formatting, and spreadsheet
option definitions at the top of the Ordered by list panel. Definitions originating from user
preferences, database connection properties, and data object properties are applied before
Analysis Tools definitions and can be edited, but not removed or disabled.
368 Using Web Analysis
Activating and Deactivating Analysis Tools Definitions
You can activate and deactivate Analysis Tools definitions without removing them from Analysis
Tools Manager; thus, you can use many different Analysis Tools combinations.
ä To deactivate an Analysis Tools definition, in the Ordered By panel, select the appropriate
Active check box.
Show/Hide Only
You use the Show/Hide Only analysis tool to include or exclude members in or from data objects.
Using member name, traffic lighting color, or data value criteria, you enabled focused, valuebased analysis.
The Information panel displays the Show/Hide Only definitions that restrict or display currentdocument information.
Asymmetrical Analysis
Asymmetric documents feature nested dimensions that differ (by at least one member) across
an axis. You can hide rows, columns, and chart objects and thus enable asymmetrical analysis.
Multiple Show/Hide Only Definitions
Multiple Show/Hide Only definitions are applied in order, enabling simultaneous control by
member, color, and values.
Differences in Show/Hide Only Definitions
Different types of Show/Hide Only definitions operate differently:
l
l
l
l
Calculations displays or hides all calculated members.
Members displays or hides specified members of the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
Values displays or hides members on the axis opposite the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
Colors displays or hides members on the axis opposite the dimension right-clicked in the
document.
Show/Hide Only definitions are created in the Show/Hide Only dialog box.
Show/Hide Only 369
Show/Hide Only Dialog Box
Table 104
Control
Description
Select Method
Show—Displays items that satisfy definition criteria
Hide—Hides items that satisfy definition criteria
Where
Calculations
Shows or hides all calculated members
Member
Bases definitions on specified, current-axis members
Any Values
Tests whether any opposite-axis member contains values that satisfy current-axis criteria
All Values
Tests whether all opposite-axis members contain values that satisfy current-axis criteria
Any Colors
Tests whether any opposite-axis member contains colors that satisfy current-axis criteria
All Colors
Tests whether all opposite-axis members contain colors that satisfy current-axis criteria
Set Condition
Operator menu
Enables selection of a criteria operator: Greater than (>), Greater Than or Equal To (>=), Equal to (=), Less Than or Equal
To (<=), or Less Than (<), Not Equal To (<>)
Value Text box
Enables users to enter values for conditions
Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, used to set condition color
Members
Lists members and attributes to which the current definition applies
Advanced
Aggregates or separates member combinations
Apply
Applies new definitions to documents
Creating Show/Hide Only Definitions
ä To create a Show/Hide Only definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Show/Hide Only.
The Show/Hide Only dialog box is displayed.
2
From Select Method, select Show or Hide.
3
Define a Show/Hide Only definition option:
l
l
l
To show or hide calculated members, in Where, select Calculations.
To show or hide specific members, in Where, select Members, and, from Members,
select members.
To show or hide members, if any member satisfies the specified condition.
a. In Where, select Any Values.
b. From Members, select members.
370 Using Web Analysis
c. Use the operator list and the value text area to define the condition. To show or hide
members, if all members satisfy the specified condition:
d. In Where, select All Values.
e. From Members, select members.
f.
Use the operator list and the value text area to define the condition.
g. To show or hide members, if any member satisfies the specified traffic-lighting color
condition:
i.
In Where, select Any Colors.
ii.
From Members, select members.
iii.
From the operator list, select Equal To (=) or Not Equal To (<>).
iv.
From Color, select an option. To show or hide members, if all members satisfy the
specified traffic-lighting color condition:
h. In Where, select All Colors.
i.
From Members, select members.
j.
From the operator list, select Equal To (=) or Not Equal To (<>).
k. From Color, select an option.
Note: Show/Hide Only Members is applied to the named member, and Show/Hide
Only Values and Show/Hide Only Colors are applied to the opposite axis, using
the values in the selected axis.
Color options are enabled only for data objects that feature active traffic-lighting
definitions. An Advanced check box enables you to specify conditions for member
combinations. The Apply button enables you to apply the current definition to the
current data object, without exiting the dialog box. You may have to drag the dialog box
title bar to see the data object.
4
Click OK.
The definition is added to Analysis Tools Manager.
5
Click Close.
Editing Show/Hide Only Definitions
ä To edit a Show/Hide Only definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Right-click a Show/Hide Only definition, and select Edit.
The Show/Hide Only dialog box is displayed.
Show/Hide Only 371
3
Make selections and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
Traffic Lighting
The Traffic Lighting analysis tool color-codes data cells. You can base color-coding on twomember comparisons or single-member fixed limits. Colors graphically associate member
values, whether or not they are sorted or ranked. Traffic Lighting definitions are created in the
Traffic Lighting dialog box and maintained as the document is pivoted and changed.
The Information panel displays the Traffic Lighting definitions that color-code the current data
object.
Table 105
Traffic Lighting Dialog Box
Control
Description
Create Criteria
Apply Traffic Lighting To
Specifies the dimension to which traffic lighting is applied
Comparing It To
Specifies the dimension to which the preceding dimension is compared
Assign Limits
Specifies the interval, set point, and color parameters that compose the traffic lighting definition
% Differences
Indicates that color-coding is based on the percent difference between compared members. If not enabled,
color-coding is based on value difference.
Enable Financial Intelligence
Enables Hyperion data sources to treat expenses and liabilities as negative values. Works with % Differences
to reflect variance and variance percent calculations for the Traffic Lighting dialog box.
Advanced
Aggregates or separates member combinations
Apply
Applies the definition to the document
Financial Intelligence Variations
% Differences and Enable Financial Intelligence cooperate to provide four calculations for the
Traffic Lighting dialog box:
l
l
l
l
Neither selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using a subtraction calculation.
Only % Differences selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using a percent
difference calculation.
Enable Financial Intelligence selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using an
advanced variance calculation that recognizes specific expense and liability members as
negative values.
Both selected—Traffic Lighting compares members, using an advanced variance percent
calculation that recognizes specific expense and liability members as negative values.
372 Using Web Analysis
Assign Limits Box
In the Assign Limits box, you indicate the number, color, and criteria for color-coding traffic
lighting ranges.
Table 106
Assign Limits Box
Control
Description
Add to End
Inserts set points within ranges
Remove Last
Removes the last traffic lighting range and set point
Set Color button
Opens the Select Color dialog box, used to set range colors
Note: Setting traffic lighting colors to the colors used by Spreadsheet Options may obscure
member color-coding.
Creating Traffic Lighting Definitions
ä To create a traffic lighting definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Traffic Light.
The Traffic Lighting dialog box is displayed.
2
From Apply To, select the member to which traffic lighting is to be applied.
3
From Comparing It To, select the member to which the previously selected member is to be compared.
l
l
Compare to a fixed limit by, in Assign Limits, deselecting % Differences or, from
Comparing It To, selecting Fixed Value.
Select Advanced twice, first to separate members into combinations and second to select
from aggregated members.
Assign Limits contains three default set points and colors. Set points divide values into
ranges identified by color.
4
For each set point, indicate a set point operand.
The first list prompts you to specify whether the setpoint value is in the range; you choose
greater than (>) or greater than and equal to (>=).
5
In the text box, enter a setpoint value, to specify the threshold that separates ranges.
The second list prompts you to specify the setpoint value; you enter positive or negative
decimal values.
6
Optional: To change the range color, click Color, and select a color square.
The Color button displays a color-square palette. Selecting a square assigns it to the current
traffic lighting range and displays the hexadecimal value of the color in the neighboring textentry field.
7
Optional: To change color opacity, enter a value in the last text-entry box for each range.
Traffic Lighting 373
You can specify a percentage from zero (transparent) to one hundred. Transparency is
sometimes used to reveal background graphics.
8
Optional: To add a set point, click Add to End, and repeat steps 4 through 7.
9
Click OK.
Editing Traffic Lighting Definitions
ä To edit a Traffic Lighting definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Right-click a Traffic Lighting definition, and select Edit.
The Traffic Lighting dialog box is displayed.
3
Make selections, and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
Sorting
The Sorting analysis tool orders dimensions of the query result set in ascending or descending
alphanumeric order. Sorting definitions, which are created in the Sorting dialog box and
displayed in the Information panel, are dynamic—applied as documents are drilled, pivoted,
and changed.
You can use client-side and server-based sorting definitions:
l
l
Client-side sorting—provided by Sorting and executed on local computers
Server-based sorting—provided by Retrieve Only Top/Bottom and executed on Analytic
Server; performed prior to returning the OLAP query result set to the client, thus minimizing
the result set and network traffic
Multiple sorting definitions are applied in the order presented by Analysis Tools Manager.
Sorting definitions applied to axes with equal values may be rearranged by sorting definitions
applied to axes with diverse values. The document display is the result of the cumulative
application of all active sorting, client-side and server-side, but it may seem that only the last
sorting definition was applied.
Table 107
Sorting Dialog Box
Control
Description
Sort On
Specifies the member to which the sorting definition is applied
Order
Ascending
Selects ascending alphanumeric order
374 Using Web Analysis
Control
Description
Descending
Selects descending alphanumeric order
Apply
Apply the definition to the document
Creating Sorting Definitions
ä To create a sorting definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Sort.
The Sorting dialog box is displayed.
2
From Members, select the member to which sorting is to be applied.
3
Select Ascending or Descending.
4
Click OK.
Editing Sorting Definitions
ä To edit a sorting definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Analysis Tools Manager.
The Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Right-click a sorting definition, and select Edit.
The Sorting dialog box is displayed.
3
Make selections and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
Restrict Data
The Restrict Data analysis tool narrows the return set by requiring data values to be relevant to
rules and operands. Data can be restricted by two-column comparison or single-column fixed
limits.
The Information panel displays Analytic Services Restrict Data definitions for the current
document.
Because Restrict Data is executed by Analytic Services, the network server is protected from
transmitting and the client is protected from processing large result sets.
Users can apply Restrict Data to result sets of processed queries (using the Analysis Tools rightclick menu) and of unsubmitted queries. The last step of the new document wizard enables users
to create Restrict Data definitions.
Restrict Data 375
Table 108
Restrict Data Dialog Box
Control
Description
Select Column
Displays the Select Column dialog box, used to select a column from the current document
Operator menu
Specifies an operator: Greater than (>), Greater Than or Equal To (>=), Equal to (=), Less Than or Equal To (<=), Less
Than (<), Not Equal To (<>)
Operand menu
Specifies one of three operands:
Value Text box
l
A value Of—restricts data to a value or range of values
l
The Data Value of Column—displays a secondary Select Column button, used to compare two columns
l
A Missing Value—restricts missing values
Specifies values for Restrict Data conditions
Note: It is advised to use one member per dimension in filters when restrict data or retrieve top/
bottom is applied. If multiple members are selected per dimension, the application
aggregates results. Because restrict data and retrieve top/bottom are parts of Analytic
Services queries, aggregation occurs after queries are returned and may result in
unexpected result sets.
Creating Restrict Data Definitions
ä To create a Restrict Data definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Restrict Data.
The Restrict Data dialog box is displayed.
2
From Select Column, select a column on which to restrict data.
3
From Operator, select an operator.
4
From Operand, select an operand: A Value Of, The Data Value of Column, or A Missing Value.
5
Depending on the selected operand, perform an action:
6
l
A Value Of — For Value, enter a data value.
l
The Data Value of Column — From the relevant list, select a column.
l
A Missing Value — Do nothing.
Click Add.
Four buttons are available: Add, Update, Remove, and Remove All.
Restriction criteria is listed in the Restriction Definition frame. You can use the Advanced
button to create compound definitions.
376 Using Web Analysis
Table 109
Advanced Options
Option
Submenu
Description
Add
Add the rule to Total Subset Definition
Update
Replace the selected rule with the current rule
Validate
Verify the parenthetical syntax of Total Subset Definition
Remove
Remove the rule from Total Subset Definition
Remove All
Remove all rules from Total Subset Definition
Connect
Move
And
Insert AND at the end of the rule. AND is used by default when multiple rules are added.
Or
Insert OR at the end of the rule
Move Up
Move the rule up in Total Subset Definition
Move Down
Move the rule down in Total Subset Definition
7
Optional: To compose a compound rule, select an advanced connect option, and repeat steps 2 through
7.
8
Click OK.
Editing Restrict Data Definitions
ä To edit a Restrict Data definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Right-click a Restrict Data definition, and select Edit.
The Restrict Data dialog box is displayed.
3
Make selections and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom analysis tool, central to top/bottom analysis, leverages Analytic
Services server-based sorting and ranking to control the size and order of OLAP query result
sets. Thus, the network server is protected from transmitting and the client is protected from
processing large result sets.
You can apply Retrieve Only Top/Bottom to result sets of processed queries (using the Analysis
Tools right-click menu) and to result sets of unsubmitted queries. Prior to sending queries, click
the Data Layout Options button and select Retrieve Only Top/Bottom. During query creation,
use the last step of the new document wizard.
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom 377
The Information panel displays all Analytic Services Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definitions for
the current document.
Server-Based Sorting
Server-based sorting is provided by Retrieve Only Top/Bottom and executed on Analytic Server.
Server-based sorting is performed by the server prior to returning the OLAP query result set to
the client, thus minimizing the result set and network traffic.
Multiple, Filter-Axis Members
Multiple, filter-member selections impact Retrieve Only Top/Bottom.
Multiple filter-axis members are aggregated before they are to sent queries. Because client-based
aggregation does not exist in data source servers, queries are processed using server data values.
The discrepancy between client aggregations and server-based sorting and ranking results in
irregular result sets.
Note: Users are strongly advised to use one member per dimension in filters when using Retrieve
Only Top/Bottom and Restrict Data.
Table 110
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Dialog Box
Control
Description
Select Column
Specifies the columns to which the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition is to be applied
Show
Limits the result set to the specified criteria
Top
Selects the highest data value, as indicated by the number in the relevant box
Bottom
Selects lowest data value, as indicated by the number in the relevant box
Sorting
Ascending
Displays the result set in ascending alphanumeric order
Descending
Displays the result set in descending alphanumeric order
Clear
Deletes all Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definitions
Creating Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions
ä To create a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Retrieve Only Top/Bottom.
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
378 Using Web Analysis
2
From Column, select the column to which the Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition.
3
Limit the result set by selecting Top or Bottom and, in the relevant box, indicating the number of
members.
4
Sort the result set by selecting Ascending or Descending.
5
Optional: To remove all selections from the current definition and start over, click Clear.
6
Click OK.
Editing Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Definitions
ä To edit a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools , then Analysis Tools Manager.
Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Right-click a Retrieve Only Top/Bottom definition, and select Edit.
The Retrieve Only Top/Bottom dialog box is displayed.
3
Make selections and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
5
Click Close.
Editing Data Formatting Definitions
ä To edit a data formatting definition:
1
Right-click a member, and select Analysis Tools, then Analysis Tools Manager. Analysis Tools Manager
is displayed.
2
Right-click a formatting definition, and select theEditbutton.
The Formatting dialog box is displayed.
3
Make selections and define parameters.
4
Click OK.
Spreadsheet Options
All spreadsheet formatting options are set using the Spreadsheet Options dialog box, accessed
from the spreadsheet data object shortcut menu. You can set these options for all spreadsheets
subsequently created using Spreadsheet preferences.
Spreadsheet Option
Description
Display
Editing Data Formatting Definitions 379
Spreadsheet Option
Description
Gridlines
Sets the spreadsheet to display table gridlines.
Transparent
Makes the cell background transparent to display a spreadsheet background image.
Row Banding
Sets spreadsheet rows to display alternating banding.
Column Banding
Sets spreadsheet columns to display alternating banding.
Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the background color.
Background Image
Opens the Select Background Image dialog box.
Row Band Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the color of row banding.
Column Band Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the color of column banding.
Headers
Custom Row Height
Sets a fixed height for spreadsheet rows in point size (from 20-200).
Row Titles
Displays column headers for nested rows.
Row Header Alignment
Aligns row headers left, center, or right or indents them based on generation.
Indent Amount
Indicates the number of pixels to indent row headers for each level from the top of the dimension
hierarchy.
Row Group Alignment drop-down
list
Aligns rows as a group center, top, or bottom in a cell.
Header Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box, enabling the selection of header fonts and font formatting.
Header Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, where you can set the header background color.
Sample Header
Displays the current header formatting.
Column Header Alignment
Justifies column headers; Center (default), Left or Right.
Data
Align Text
Sets the alignment of textual data values: left, center, and right.
Align Values
Sets the alignment of numeric data values: left, center, and right.
Cell Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box enabling the selection of data value fonts and font formatting.
Note: Font sizes are limited to a maximum of 100 points.
Cell Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box where you can set the cell background color; does not override
banding.
Sample Cell
Displays the current data values formatting.
380 Using Web Analysis
Sizing Columns
Columns can be individually sized, uniformly sized, or reset to their default column width.
The Freeze Headers formatting option must be enabled in the preferences or the Spreadsheet
Options dialog box before you can size columns.
Sizing Individual Columns
ä To size a column:
l
Right-click a column header and select Column Sizing > Custom Width from the shortcut
menu. When the Column Width dialog box is displayed, enter the desired column width in
pixels. The default is 75 pixels.
Sizing All Columns to a Common Width
ä To size all columns uniformly:
1
To size one column:
l
l
2
Position your mouse over the border between two column headers. When the cursor
changes to the double-arrow cursor, drag the column border to adjust the column width.
Right-click a column header and select Column Sizing, then Set Column Width from
the shortcut menu. When the Column Width dialog box is displayed, enter the desired
column width in pixels.
When you are satisfied the selected column size, right-click that column and select Column Sizing, then
Set All Columns To This Width.
The remaining columns are automatically resized to the selected column's width.
Autosizing Column Width
ä To size all column widths so that headers display without truncation, select Column Sizing
> Autosize from the header shortcut menu.
Note: You must save the document before closing it to preserve the column widths.
Sizing Columns 381
Formatting Documents
Formatting Options
Documents display data values returned from the data source in a data object. Multiple data
objects can occupy a document, and each data object's display type can differ:
l
Spreadsheet
l
Chart
l
Pinboard
l
SQL Spreadsheet
l
Freeform grid
Each display type has formatting options. This chapter describes the formatting options for
spreadsheets and charts, as only these two objects can be modified through EPM Workspace.
Other Kinds of Formatting
l
l
l
Display Type — Converts spreadsheet data objects to charts or pinboards.
Data Display options — Sets document behavior through the data object shortcut menu
(or preferences, for subsequently created documents).
Formatting options — Formats dimension headers and cell ranges. You can restrict
formatting by member selection or cell value. Formatting options include currency
formatting and positive and negative numeric formatting. See “Formatting Dialog Box” on
page 386. Formatting options include:
m
Measures formatting (Available in Oracle's Hyperion® Web Analysis Studio only)
m
Default formatting preferences
m
Ad hoc formatting
m
Data formatting analysis tool
m
Cell Formatting
See “Formatting Data” on page 389.
The scope of formatting depends on its source. To review all formatting definitions applied to
a document, you must consult preferences, the Analysis Tools Manager, the Information Panel,
and various document, data object, dimension and cell property settings.
Formatting Order of Precedence
Formatting is applied an order of precedence:
382 Using Web Analysis
1. Measures formatting — Applied globally to dimensions on database connections. Settings
are saved with the database connection.
2. Default formatting preferences — Applied globally to column and row headers, and data
values. Settings are saved in preference files.
3. Formatting — Applied ad hoc from the data object shortcut menu on dimension members.
It is stored with the document definition and applied as a preliminary Analysis Tool
definition. See “Formatting Dialog Box” on page 386.
4. Data formatting analysis tool — Applied after Data Formatting Analysis Tool definitions
are created and applied. It is stored with the document and applied from the Analysis Tools
Manager.
5. Cell formatting — Applied ad hoc to cell ranges, and is stored with the document. See
“Formatting Data” on page 389.
Preferences and formatting options:
There are some identical formatting options and preferences. Preferences are global settings
applied to documents. Preferences, however, can be overridden by database connection
formatting and document-based formatting.
The formatting order of precedence can be changed for Database Connection Measures
formatting, User Preferences, and Analysis Tools formatting. For example, Analysis Tools
formatting can be set to override all Database Connection and User Preferences formatting for
a specific report.
Order of formatting precedence:
1. Formatting options saved with documents
2. Formatting options saved with the database connection
3. Formatting options specified by the User Preferences dialog box
Data Display Options
Each display type has data display options specifying document behavior:
l
l
l
Label mode—Essbase and Financial Management enable administrators to define multiple
alias tables. Web Analysis Studio enables you to specify which alias table to use. Alias table
selection is saved as a database connection property. See “Setting the Label Mode” on page
385.
Dimension header sort — Order column and row headers in a query result set using
Dimension Header Sort definitions. Dimension Header Sort options are determined by the
data source. See “Sorting Dimension Headers” on page 386.
Suppression — Suppresses rows with missing data, rows with zeroes, and in the case of
Essbase, rows with shared members. Suppression can be set from the Data Layout dialog
box, Data Display shortcut menu or OLAP Server preferences.
Formatting Documents 383
Data Display Option
Description
Selected Member
Displays the explicit member selection made in the query. This member selection can be previewed in the
Information panel, or Dimension Browser. Selected Member provides a method for displaying this information
in data objects.
Selected Member
First
When Selected Member is active, enables you to position the explicit member selection made in the query
definition first (from left to right, or top to bottom).
Default Label Mode
Toggles between label modes:
Dimension-Specific
Label Mode
m
Descriptions
m
IDs
m
Both (Financial Management option)
Toggles between label mode options:
m
Use Default
m
Descriptions
m
IDs
m
Both (Financial Management option)
Display Entity
Currency
When using Financial Management data sources with defined Entity dimension currency information, you
can enable the Display Entity Currency option to append Entity dimension members with currency value. This
can be set before querying using Data Layout options, after querying using the Data Display shortcut menu,
and for all subsequently created documents using OLAP Server preferences.
Dimension Header
Sort
Orders the selected dimension per the order option:
m
Default
m
Ascending
m
Descending
m
Level (OLAP specific)
m
Generation (OLAP specific)
m
Selection Order (Relational specific)
The Default option is the order in which dimension members are naturally ordered by data source outlines.
Using this option may offer improved performance.
For a complete description, See “Sorting Dimension Headers” on page 386.
Show Linked
Reporting Object
Indicators
Shows or hides small cell triangles indicating the presence of Linked Reporting Objects. Triangles persist for
related content.
Suppress
Omits data, as specified, from the query result set:
384 Using Web Analysis
m
Missing Rows
m
Missing Columns
m
Shared Members
m
Zero Rows
Setting the Label Mode
Alias tables are database tables storing alternate description labels for dimension members.
Essbase and Financial Management enable administrators to define multiple alias tables. Web
Analysis Studio enables you to specify which alias table to use. The alias table selection is saved
as a database connection property.
You can specify to display the member ID or its description label from the alias table.
l
l
The ID number is a column of unique values distinguishing members from all other
members.
Description displays the alias table description. Web Analysis Studio uses the Description
label when no label mode is specified.
Oracle Hyperion Financial Management, Fusion Edition users have an additional label mode
option. They can select the Both option to display the ID label and description.
You can set the default label mode before querying using Data Layout options or the last step in
the document creation wizard, and after querying using the data object shortcut menu. You can
specify which description label to use in dimensions, using Dimension Browser and the data
object shortcut menu.
The Description label comes from the alias table setting, saved per database connection and per
active user as a database user preference.
ä To set the default label mode for the current database connection:
1
Right-click dimension header.
2
Right-click and select Data Display.
3
Select Default Label Mode from the drop-down list.
4
Select IDs or Descriptions.
ä To set the label mode for a dimension:
1
Right-click a dimension header.
2
Right-click and select Data Display.
3
Select the dimension-specific Label Mode from the drop-down list.
4
Select Use Default, IDs or Descriptions.
Default label mode coordinates the label mode of the selected dimension with all other
dimensions displaying the default label mode. Default label mode can be set for all dimensions
in a query through Data Layout, and per dimension by Dimension Browser or the Data Display
shortcut menu.
Formatting Documents 385
Sorting Dimension Headers
You can order column and row headers in a query result set using Dimension Header Sort
definitions. Dimension Header Sort options are determined by the data source.
For Example, Essbase enables you to order columns and rows in default, ascending, descending,
level or generation order. The default order is the natural order in which dimension members
are returned, based on the data source outline.
ä To indicate a Dimension Header Sort definition:
1
Right-click a dimension member header and select Data Display, then Dimension Header Sort.
The Dimension Header Sort submenu is displayed.
2
Select Default, Ascending, Descending, Level or Generation.
Relational Dimension Header Sort
You can order the result set returned by relational SQL queries in Ascending, Descending,
Selection Order or Default order. Default returns members based on the data source outline.
Selection Order is the member selection order in Dimension Browser.
Unlike OLAP servers, relational cubes are compiled by Web Analysis Studio, and the label mode,
alias tables, and selection order are manually coordinated. Sort by alias may perform
comparatively slow, as the default query result set is sorted by ID. Sorting by alias requires a
complete client-side re-sort.
The source of the relational dimension header sort impacts performance. Defining a relational
dimension header sort using Data Layout, prompts Web Analysis Studio to sort all dimensions
as part of the current query result set.
Alternatively, sorting a relational dimension using the data object shortcut menu (Data Display
> Dimension Header Sort) requires you to select dimension headers.
Lastly, you can apply dimension header sort definitions to relational generations defined in the
Generation Editor. These definitions only impact the Dimension Browser sort order. Using the
Order By Mode drop-down list, you can also specify orders by ID or Alias.
Formatting Dialog Box
The Formatting dialog box indicates the members to which these formats are applied:
l
Header font properties by member.
l
Data value format and font properties by member.
l
Edit the dimension members selected for formatting.
l
Restore default formatting preferences.
386 Using Web Analysis
Control
Description
Selections
Lists dimensions and members in the query. The dimensions that appear are based on the context of where
the Formatting dialog box was invoked. For example, if Formatting is invoked from the rows, all row
dimension and members are displayed. If Formatting is invoked from a cell, all dimensions and members
in the query are listed.
Advanced
Shows the Dimension panel that enables you to select or deselect dimensions and apply formatting to
specific dimension combinations. This mainly applies when there are two or more dimensions in the
columns or rows.
Dynamic References
Provides selection of row or column references instead of selecting members from a report. Formatting is
applied regardless of the member selection.
Apply to entire grid
Applies formatting defined to the entire spreadsheet query. When selected, the Selections section is grayed
and a Formatting “All Members” item is added to the Analysis Tools Manager.
Header Font tab
Allows formatting of member labels fonts in the row and column headers.
Data Font tab
Allows formatting of data cells fonts. Conditional font or number formatting can be applied to specific data
values that meet the defined criteria.
Data Format tab
Provides formatting to specific data values such as currency/prefix/suffix, as well as other numeric
formatting. Conditional font or number formatting can be applied to specific data values that meet the
defined criteria.
Conditional Formatting
Enables conditional formatting of dimension member selections based on the criteria defined in the
operand drop-down list and value text box.
Conditional Formatting
— Operand drop-down
list
Specifies the conditional formatting operand: >, >=, =, <=, <, or <>.
Conditional Formatting
— Value Text box
Specifies the conditional formatting value.
Restore Defaults
Restores the settings specified by the Default Formatting preferences.
Formatting Behavior
The behavior for the members that are selected prior to opening the Formatting dialog:
l
l
l
l
l
When you right-click a column or row header and select Formatting, the context is
completed automatically for the row or column member selections. This context can be
edited and different member selections can be made.
When you right-click a cell and select Cell Formatting, the context is completed for the cell
intersection of members. This context cannot be edited.
When you right-click a column or row header and select Analysis Tools > Format, the
Formatting dialog is opened without completed context.
If the number of members in a dimension on a report exceeds 25, the dimension parent
node is collapsed. You can click the node to expand it.
If there is more than one dimension in the rows or columns, you can select from one
dimension only or multiple dimensions.
Formatting Documents 387
Using Dynamic References
Instead of selecting members from a report, you can use Dynamic References to select a row or
column reference. Formatting is applied regardless of the member selection. Also:
l
If a member is drilled on, its formatting will “carry with it”.
l
If a swap or pivot is performed, the formatting will “carry” where possible.
Topics that discuss formatting:
l
“Creating Formatting Definitions” on page 388
l
“Formatting Data” on page 389
Creating Formatting Definitions
ä To create formatting definitions:
1
Right-click a column or row dimension header.
2
Select Formatting.
The Formatting dialog box is displayed.
3
Optional. To display the Dimensions panel, click Advanced.
4
To select a dimension, click its check box.
If you select one dimension from the Dimensions panel, the corresponding dimension
members are displayed in the Combinations panel.
If you select multiple dimensions from the Dimensions panel, the Combinations panel
displays dimension member aggregations.
5
To specify dimension members, click the check boxes in the Combinations panel.
6
To specify a formatting definition, perform an action:
l
l
l
To specify header cell font properties for the dimension member selection, click the
Header Font tab.
To specify data cell font properties for the dimension member selection, click the Data
Font tab.
To specify leading and trailing text and numeric formatting, click the Data Format tab.
See “Formatting Data” on page 389.
Note: The Data Font and Data Format tabs provide conditional formatting where you
can refine formatting definitions. Select Conditional Formatting, then select an
operand and specify a value.
7
Click OK to accept the formatting definition properties for the dimension member selection.
The formatting definition is listed in Analysis Tools Manager for future reference, and the
definition is applied to the document.
388 Using Web Analysis
Formatting Data
You define format definitions in the Data Format tab:
Formatting Options
Description
Conditional Formatting
Enables conditional formatting of dimension member selections based on the criteria defined in the
operand drop-down list and value text box.
Replace Missing With
Enables you to replace missing data with zeros or text that you specify.
Leading and Trailing
Formatting
Currency Symbol
Inserts currency formatting symbols into the Positive Prefix and Negative Prefix text boxes.
Positive Prefix
Specifies the character to precede positive numeric values.
Positive Suffix
Specifies the character to follow positive numeric values.
Negative Prefix
Specifies the character to precede negative numeric values. Caution: The minus sign (-) is the default
prefix. Deleting the default prefix without replacing it displays negative values as positive.
Negative Suffix
Specifies the character to follow negative numeric values.
Numeric Formatting
Grouped Thousands
Displays numeric digits as grouped by thousands.
Minimum Decimals
Indicates the minimum number of decimal places displayed.
Maximum Decimals
Indicates the maximum number of decimal places displayed.
Scale
Enables abbreviated values by tens, hundreds, thousands, ten-thousands, hundred-thousands,
millions, and billions.
Use Negative Color
Indicates that negative numbers are signified by a selected color.
Select Negative Color
Enables you to select the color representing negative values.
Date Formatting
Select a date format.
Samples
Update Samples
Updates the samples panel based on the most recent formatting selections.
Cell Formatting
The Cell Formatting dialog box enables you to format cell ranges ad hoc.
l
Format data value font properties for cell ranges.
l
Set text and numeric formatting for cell ranges.
l
Restore default formatting preferences.
To define cell formatting, right-click a spreadsheet cell and select Cell Formatting:
Formatting Documents 389
Controls
Description
Selections
Displays the cell dimension member selection statement.
Data Font tab
Enables you to select font properties for the cell.
Data Format tab
Enables you to specify text and numeric formatting.
Restore Defaults
Restores the settings specified by the Default Formatting preferences.
Sizing Columns
Columns can be individually sized, uniformly sized, or reset to their default column width.
The Freeze Headers formatting option must be enabled in the preferences or the Spreadsheet
Options dialog box before you can size columns.
Sizing Individual Columns
ä To size a column:
l
Right-click a column header and select Column Sizing > Custom Width from the shortcut
menu. When the Column Width dialog box is displayed, enter the desired column width in
pixels. The default is 75 pixels.
Sizing All Columns to a Common Width
ä To size all columns uniformly:
1
To size one column:
l
l
2
Position your mouse over the border between two column headers. When the cursor
changes to the double-arrow cursor, drag the column border to adjust the column width.
Right-click a column header and select Column Sizing, then Set Column Width from
the shortcut menu. When the Column Width dialog box is displayed, enter the desired
column width in pixels.
When you are satisfied the selected column size, right-click that column and select Column Sizing, then
Set All Columns To This Width.
The remaining columns are automatically resized to the selected column's width.
Autosizing Column Width
ä To size all column widths so that headers display without truncation, select Column Sizing
> Autosize from the header shortcut menu.
Note: You must save the document before closing it to preserve the column widths.
390 Using Web Analysis
Changing and Locking Display Types
ä To change the current display type, select the Display menu, and select a display type or
chart type from the submenu.
ä To prevent others from changing the current display type:
1
Right-click the current content tab and select Properties.
The File Properties dialog box is displayed.
2
Select the Advanced tab.
3
In Document Usage, select Change Display Type.
4
Click OK.
Spreadsheet Options
All spreadsheet formatting options are set using the Spreadsheet Options dialog box, accessed
from the spreadsheet data object shortcut menu. You can set these options for all spreadsheets
subsequently created using Spreadsheet preferences.
Spreadsheet Option
Description
Display
Gridlines
Sets the spreadsheet to display table gridlines.
Transparent
Makes the cell background transparent to display a spreadsheet background image.
Row Banding
Sets spreadsheet rows to display alternating banding.
Column Banding
Sets spreadsheet columns to display alternating banding.
Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the background color.
Background Image
Opens the Select Background Image dialog box.
Row Band Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the color of row banding.
Column Band Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, to set the color of column banding.
Headers
Custom Row Height
Sets a fixed height for spreadsheet rows in point size (from 20-200).
Freeze Headers
Holds column dimension headers in place as cells scroll independently. Note: Freeze Headers must be
enabled for Column Sizing.
Row Titles
Displays column headers for nested rows.
Row Header Alignment
Aligns row headers left, center, or right or indents them based on generation.
Formatting Documents 391
Spreadsheet Option
Description
Indent Amount
Indicates the number of pixels to indent row headers for each level from the top of the dimension
hierarchy.
Row Group Alignment dropdown list
Aligns rows as a group center, top, or bottom in a cell.
Header Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box, enabling the selection of header fonts and font formatting.
Header Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box, where you can set the header background color.
Sample Header
Displays the current header formatting.
Column Header Alignment
Justifies column headers; Center (default), Left or Right.
Data
Align Text
Sets the alignment of textual data values: left, center, and right.
Align Values
Sets the alignment of numeric data values: left, center, and right.
Cell Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box enabling the selection of data value fonts and font formatting.
Note: Font sizes are limited to a maximum of 100 points.
Cell Background Color
Opens the Select Color dialog box where you can set the cell background color; does not override
banding.
Sample Cell
Displays the current data values formatting.
Charts and Chart Types
Charts are graphic representations of spreadsheet data. Their visual nature expedites quick
analysis, color coding, and cues that aid comparisons.
Charts, depending on the chart type, can display one to four dimensions. Pie charts only display
one dimension; quadrant charts offer more complex displays.
Charts can be rendered using a variety of chart types:
Chart Type
Compares
Bar
Similar elements, represented as vertical bars.
Line
Items over time.
Spline
Displays the document as a spline chart.
Pie
Contributions.
Area
Items over time.
Curve Area
Items over time, represented as a curved area.
Horizontal Bar
Similar elements.
392 Using Web Analysis
Chart Type
Compares
Marks
Items over time.
Pareto
Trends in data.
Box
Displays the document as a box plot chart.
Quadrant
Two members from one dimension over time.
Bubble
Displays the document as a Bubble chart.
Only the first 50 dimension members can be accommodated on chart axes.
Quadrant Charts
In Quadrant charts, at least one dimension must be placed on the column axis and at least two
dimensions must be placed on the rows axes. Other dimension-axes arrangements result in error
messages.
Bubble Charts
Bubble charts require three dimensions. Only one dimension can be placed on the column axis.
One or two dimensions can be placed on the row axis. There must be two columns in the
dimension positioned on the columns axis. These columns may be the result of selecting two
dimension members, or of including a calculated column with a dimension member. The values
in the first two columns provide the X and Y values required to plot the chart.
A third column provides the Z value used to determine the bubble size. If no third column is
available, a constant of 100 is used to determine the bubble size.
Chart Properties
Use the data object shortcut menu to access Chart Properties, described in these topics:
l
l
l
l
“General Chart Properties” on page 394— options for effects, object borders, chart
backgrounds, and legends.
“Titles Chart Properties” on page 394— options for chart titles.
“Axes Chart Properties” on page 395— options for axes, number formatting, gridlines,
scale, and labels.
“Series Effects Chart Properties” on page 396— options for chart behavior and border
formatting.
l
“Series Chart Properties” on page 396— options for chart object properties.
l
“Pie Chart Properties” on page 397— options for pie charts.
l
“Bubble Chart Properties” on page 398— options for bubble charts.
Formatting Documents 393
General Chart Properties
Control
Description
Layout
Chart Type
Enables you to set the Chart Type: Bar, Line, Spline, Pie, Area, Curve Area, Horizontal Bar, Marks, Pareto, Multi,
Box, Quadrant, and Bubble.
Stacked
Enables you to arrange chart objects: Side-by-Side, Stacked, and Stacked 100%.
Left Plot Area Margin
Enables you to specify a left margin for the plot area.
Right Plot Area Margin
Enables you to specify a right margin for the plot area.
Effects
3D
Represents chart objects in three-dimensional space.
Anti-alias Fonts
Enables and disables the use of anti-alias fonts. Although anti-alias fonts are clearer, they sometimes differ from
the original font style.
Cluster (Z-axis)
Arranges chart objects along the Z axis in three-dimensional space.
Show Z-axis Labels
Displays labels along the Z axis (front to back). This feature is only available when the chart is clustered, and for
Bar, Horizontal Bar, Pareto and Multichart chart types. Long Z-axis labels may be cut off by chart margins.
Background
Background Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box where you can set the chart background color.
Plot Area Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box where you can set the plotter background color.
Legend
Show Legend
Displays a chart legend.
Position
Locates the Legend to the Top, Left, Bottom, or Right of the chart.
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box to set the legend background color.
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box to select font and their formatting.
Titles Chart Properties
Control
Description
Header Title
Sets the text string for the header title.
Footer Title
Sets the text string for the footer title.
Left Title
Sets the text string for the left title.
Right Title
Sets the text string for the right title.
394 Using Web Analysis
Control
Description
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box to select font and their formatting.
Axes Chart Properties
Control
Description
Axis
Indicates the current axis:
Show Axis
l
X-axis - Sets the Axes tab to display x-axis parameters.
l
Y-axis - Sets the Axes tab to display y-axis parameters.
l
Secondary Y-axis - Set the Axes tab to display secondary y-axis parameters. See also Series Tab, Assign to
Secondary Y-axis.
Displays the current axis.
Scale
Auto-calculate
Enables the current axis to be calculated automatically based on data values.
Start at Minimum
Value
Indicates whether to start numeric labels with the minimum value.
Minimum
Sets the minimum value on the current axis.
Maximum
Sets the maximum value on the current axis.
Step
Sets the number of increments to scale on the current axis.
Scale
Enables you to indicate the multiple by which to scale the current axis: None, Tens, Hundreds, Thousands, Ten
Thousands, Hundred Thousands, Millions, or Billions.
Gridlines
Show Gridlines
Displays gridlines on the current axis.
Style
Represents gridlines using one style: Solid Line, Dash, Dot, and Dash Dot.
Weight
Sets the width of gridlines in pixels (from 1-8).
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box where you can select a gridline color.
Number Format
Decimal Places:
Enables you to sets the number of decimal places used to represent data values (0-10).
Format:
Enables you to sets the numeric format for data values: Numeric, Currency, Percent.
Currency Symbol:
Inserts currency formatting symbols.
Labels
Stagger
Alternates labels on two lines to accommodate larger labels.
Formatting Documents 395
Control
Description
Angle
Enables you to indicates the angle at which labels extend from the current axis: 0-360 degrees.
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box to select fonts and their formatting.
Series Effects Chart Properties
Series Effects chart properties impact all chart object series in general. Series chart properties are
applied only to specific series.
Control
Description
Charting
Number of Groups
Displayed
Specifies the number of chart object groups to display.
Chart All Dimensions
Delineates nested dimensions for chart type requirements and displays each combination set as a series.
Chart type requirements differ for dimension member position and number. When dimension members exceed
a requirement, surplus dimensions are relocated to the page axis so that the designated chart type can be
displayed. Enabling Chart All Dimensions prompts Oracle's Hyperion® Web Analysis Studio to delineate nested
dimensions and display each combination set as a series.
Borders
Show Borders
Represents chart objects with a border or outline.
Style
Represents the chart object border using one style: Solid Line, Dash, Dot, and Dash Dot.
Width
Sets the width of chart object border in pixels (from 1-8).
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box where you can set the border color.
Series Chart Properties
Control
Description
Series
Indicates the current dimension member chart object series.
Style
Show Series
Displays the current series.
Type
Sets the chart type for the series when multiple chart types are enabled: Bar, Line, Area, Spline and Curve
Area.
Shape
Sets the series chart object to one shape: Bar, Cylinder, Diamond Bar, or Triangle Bar.
Color
Displays the Fill Properties dialog box where you can set chart object color, pattern fill, or gradient.
Assign to Secondary Y-axis
Displays the current series on the secondary y-axis.
396 Using Web Analysis
Control
Description
Markers
Style
Sets the series to one marker: None, Square, Circle, Triangle-Up, Diamond, Cross, Triangle-Down, or Multiple
Chart Type.
Size
Sets the size of the series marker in pixels (1-20).
Point Values
Show Values
Displays data values with the series.
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box where you can select font and their formatting.
Angle:
Indicates the angle at which value labels extend from the current series: 0-360 degrees.
Lines
Style
Represents the chart object border using one style: Solid Line, Dash, Dot, and Dash Dot.
Width
Sets the width of chart object border in pixels (from 0-8).
Apply selections to all.
Sets all series to the parameters of the current series.
Line Widths of Zero (0)
Line charts accommodate a line width of zero, enabling a line chart to appear as a marks chart.
This applies only to two-dimensional line, quadrant, multichart, spline, area, and curve area
chart types.
Pie Chart Properties
Control
Description
Values
Values
Indicates the current pie slice.
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box to set color, pattern fill or gradient scale for the current slice.
Labels
Show Values
Displays data values with pie slices.
Position
Indicates where to display labels: Inside Slices or Outside Slices.
Font
Displays the Font Properties dialog box where you can select font and their formatting.
Show Multiple Pies
Sets Page Dimensions to be displayed as multiple pie charts in one document.
Formatting Documents 397
Bubble Chart Properties
Bubble charts require three dimensions. Only one dimension can be placed on the column axis.
Up to two dimensions can be placed on the row axis. There must be two columns in the
dimension positioned on the columns axis. These columns may be the result of selecting two
dimension members, or the result of including a calculated column with a dimension member.
The values in the first two columns provide the X and Y values required to plot the chart.
A third column provides the Z value used to determine the bubble size. If no third column is
available, a constant of 100 is used to determine the bubble size.
Control
Description
Effects
Marker Style:
Sets the bubble chart to be displayed using these options: none, square, circle, Triangle Up, Diamond, Cross,
Triangle Down, or Multi.
Maximum Size:
Sets the maximum bubble object size in points.
Show Points
Displays plot points.
Point Color
Sets the color of the center point.
Values
X-member Values:
Indicates the dimension member used to plot x-axis values.
Y-member Values:
Indicates the dimension member used to plot y-axis values.
Z values:
Constant
Sets the constant used to plot the size of bubble chart objects when no third column is available, so that
object sizes match.
Z-member Values:
Indicates the third column used to plot the size of bubble chart objects.
Scaling
Minimum Scaling:
Sets the minimum bubble size when the bubble object size has reached the Maximum Size limit.
Maximum Scaling:
Sets the maximum bubble size when the bubble object size has reached the Maximum Size limit.
Scale On:
Sets the bubble chart to determine scale using area or diameter.
Borders
Show Borders
Displays or hides the bubble borders.
Use Traffic Lights for Colors
Sets the bubble object border to use colors specified in the traffic lighting definition; only one dimension,
with a traffic lighting definition, can be positioned on the rows axis
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box.
Border Width:
Sets the border width in pixels.
398 Using Web Analysis
Selecting Color
The Select Color dialog box enables you to set object, font, and component colors.
Control
Description
Swatches Tab
Recent
Displays recently selected colors.
RGB Float Over Values
Displays the Red-Green-Blue color values when mouse is floated over a color.
HSB Tab
Hue
Sets the percentage of hue in the current color.
Saturation
Sets the percentage of saturation in the current color.
Brilliance
Sets the percentage of brilliance in the current color.
Red
Displays the red value of the current color.
Green
Displays the green value of the current color.
Blue
Displays the blue value of the current color.
RGB Tab
Red
Displays the red value of the current color.
Green
Displays the green value of the current color.
Blue
Displays the blue value of the current color.
Preview
Displays the application of the current color.
Font Properties
The Font Properties dialog box enables font selection and formatting.
Control
Description
Font
Sets the font family.
Size
Sets the font point size. Note: Fonts are limited to 100 points in size.
Font Style
Bold
Displays the bold font.
Italic
Displays the italic font.
Color
Displays the Select Color dialog box, to enable font color selection.
Sample Text
Displays the current font selection.
Formatting Documents 399
Calculations
You can create members as the products of calculations (client-side calculated members) and
edit, delete, and analyze calculations.
Calculation-definition order in Analysis Tools Manager prescribes the order in which compound
calculations are executed. To change the order, select definitions and click the up and down
arrow.
The “Creating Calculations” on page 405 procedure describes Calculation analysis tool options
in context.
Average
l
Function Performed: Sum of arguments divided by number of arguments
l
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0 and included in the number of arguments
Example: If Actual is 100 and Budget is 200, the average of Actual and Budget is 150.
Cumulative
l
Function Performed: A running total
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, Cumulative values are 100, 300,
600.
Difference from Average
l
Function Performed: Difference between the average value and the occurrence of an
argument
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, the average is 200, and Difference
from Average values are -100, 0, 100.
Divide
l
Function Performed: Arithmetic division
400 Using Web Analysis
l
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculation
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Linear Regression
l
Function Performed: Straight-line linear regression. Looks at all occurrences of the specified
argument and uses a linear regression algorithm to calculate a straight line through the
occurrences
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0 in the calculation
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If the Actual
values for the time periods are 100, 300, 600, the linear regression values are 83, 333, 58. Notice
that there is a constant difference between values (250). All points in the sequence are adjusted.
A chart of the numbers produces a straight line that intersects the original data points.
Maximum
l
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the name of the member or existing
calculation with the maximum value
l
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Maximum values are West, East,
East.
Maximum Value
l
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the value of the member or existing
calculation with the maximum value
l
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
l
Options: Whether missing values should be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Maximum Value values are 200,
300, 600.
Minimum
l
l
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the name of the member or existing
calculation with the minimum value
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
Calculations 401
l
Options: Whether missing values should be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Minimum values are East, West,
West.
Minimum Value
l
Function Performed: Given two or more arguments, the value of the member or existing
calculation with the minimum value.
l
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
l
Options: Whether missing values are be set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with East and West as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If
East values are 100, 300, 600 and West values are 200, 200, 300, Minimum Value values are 100,
200, 300.
Multiply
l
l
l
Function Performed: Arithmetic multiplication
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Percent
l
l
l
Function Performed: Percentage calculation
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual and Budget as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows.
If Actual values are 100, 300, 600 and Budget values are 200, 200, 400, Percentage values (Actual
% Budget) are 50, 150, 150.
Percent Difference from Average
l
Function Performed: The Difference from Average result displayed as a percentage of the
average
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
402 Using Web Analysis
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Colas, Root Beer, and Cream
Soda as rows. If Actual values for the products are 100, 200, 300, the average is 200, and the
Difference from Average (%) column values are -50, 0, 50.
Percent of Difference
l
l
l
Function Performed: Percentage difference calculation
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual and Budget as columns and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows.
If Actual values are 100, 300, 600 and Budget values are 200, 200, 400, Percentage difference
values (Actual % diff Budget), calculated as ((Actual -Budget) / Budget) * 100, are -50, 50, 50.
Percent of Member
l
l
l
l
Function Performed: A member argument as a percentage of another member argument.
The second argument is defined by a member intersected on an opposite axis.
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Procedure: Select a Percent of Member calculation from the Function list, select a member
argument, and select a member from the opposite axis, using the Opposite Member list.
Percent of Total
l
Function Performed: Percentage of total
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: None
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column and Jan, Feb, Mar as rows. If Actual
values are 100, 300, 600, Percentage of Total values are 10, 30, and 60.
Rank Ascending and Rank Descending
l
Function Performed: Ranking
l
Number of Arguments: One member or existing calculation
l
Options: Ascending or descending (the default). If ascending, the smallest value is ranked
as 1. If descending, the largest value is ranked as 1.
Calculations 403
Example: Consider a spreadsheet with Actual as a column, Jan, Feb, Mar as rows, and Actual
values of 100, 300, 600. If descending is selected, Rank values are 3, 2, 1. If ascending is selected,
Rank values are 1, 2, 3.
Subtract
l
l
l
Function Performed: Arithmetic subtraction
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Sum
l
l
l
Function Performed: Arithmetic addition
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Trend
l
Function Performed: Trend based on straight-line linear regression; that is, the slope of the
straight line that a linear-regression calculation plots between original, data-series points
l
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations
l
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Variance
l
l
l
Function Performed: Arithmetic subtraction that uses Financial Intelligence account
metadata to interpret Financial Management expense and liability items as negative values
Number of Arguments: Two or more members or existing calculations or one member or
existing calculation and a constant.
Options: Whether missing values are set to 0
Variance Percent
l
l
l
Function Performed: Percentage difference calculation that uses Financial Intelligence
account metadata to interpret Financial Management expense and liability items as negative
values
Number of Arguments: Two members or existing calculations or one member or existing
calculation and a constant.
Options: A constant as an argument (if you want to work with one rather than two existing
members or calculations) and whether missing values are set to 0
404 Using Web Analysis
Complex Calculations
Oracle recommends dividing complex calculations into components and combining the
components into a compound calculation.
Example: To set up a calculation for (A + B) / (C x 2), where A, B, and C are members, you
divide the formula into steps:
l
Set up Sum for A + B, and name it Step 1.
l
Set up Multiply for C x 2, and name it Step 2.
l
Set up Divide for Step 1 result divided by Step 2 result, and name it Step 3.
l
Use Show Only Members to hide Step 1 and Step 2. If you want to switch between seeing
only members, seeing only calculations, and seeing both, you can use the Hide option in
your document right-click menu.
Creating Calculations
You can use a combination of members, functions and/or operators to create a formula using
the Functions and Members tabs, as well as the operators buttons. You can create a formula by
using members and operators, without functions, or you can combine members, functions and
operators in a formula. You also can create and edit advanced expressions by manually entering
and editing the formulas.
An editor field, Formula Body, allows you to manually enter and edit the formula using a syntax
that resembles multidimensional expressions (MDX) for defining members. However, while the
syntax definition for defining members resemble the MDX format, MDX statements are not
supported in the Web Analysis calculations. A formula is created by selecting a combination of
Function and Member(s). For more information, see Using the Manual Formula Syntax.
Toolbar buttons for Cut, Copy, Paste and Validate are activated when a formula is entered in
the Formula Body. The Validate button checks the validity of the formula for any errors and
returns an error box to confirm whether validation succeeded or an error exists. The result of
the formula is shown in the Formula field and can be inserted into the report by clicking the
Insert button. Existing functions can be grouped together in one expression. If you want to
switch between seeing only members or only calculations, or both, you can use the Hide option
in the shortcut menu on your document.
Note: You can select Dynamic row or column references instead of selecting members from the
report. The formatting is applied regardless of the member selection. If a calculation refers
to a specific column, and that column is deleted through member selection, the calculation
is handled correctly. If a swap or pivot is performed, the calculation will “carry” where
possible.
ä To create a calculation:
1
Right-click a dimension member header and select Analysis Tools, then Calculation.
Calculations 405
The Calculation Definition dialog box is displayed, containing three tabs: Functions,
Members and Options.
l
l
l
2
The Functions tab is for inserting formula functions into the Definition area after selecting
a function and members. You can add and remove members and constants to the
formula. Once a function is selected, it appears in the Formula area. Members (or
dynamic references) can be added to the formula by clicking on each member/reference,
then clicking on Add to add it to the Arguments area. The Formula area is updated with
arguments once they are added. When the formula is complete, it can be inserted to the
Definition area by clicking Insert.
The Options tab provides Missing Values and Select Positions settings.
The following areas are displayed for all three tabs:
l
l
l
3
The Members tab is for selecting members and adding them to a formula (for example,
[Sales]-[COGS], outside a formula function. You can select one or more members
in the Select Members list, click Insert to insert to the formula Definition.
Name — the name of the formula.
Definition — displays the formula. It allows for manual entry and editing of the formula.
The Cut, Copy, Paste, and Validate buttons become enabled.
Mathematical Operators — symbols that provide types of calculations that you can
perform on the elements of a formula; addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*),
division (/), parenthesis (( )).
You can create a formula by using members on the Members tab. Perform the following:
l
l
l
In the Select Members area, select members.
In Advanced — click to list all dimension member combinations and add them to the
formula Definition area. When deselected, only members from one dimension are
shown.
In Dynamic References — select to enable the selection of a row or column reference
4
Click Insert to add the formula.
5
To create a formula using functions, in the Functions tab, perform the following:
a. Select a calculation type from the Function list.
b. Replace the undefined arguments, displayed with a (?) in the Arguments area, with a
member located in the Select Members area. Do this by selecting the member and
clicking the right arrow button.
c. To replace an undefined argument (?) with a value, enter a value in the Constant text
box, and click the right arrow button.
d. To replace an undefined argument from dimension member combinations, select
Advanced to display dimension member combinations. Click to select a dimension
member combinations label, and click the right arrow button to replace an undefined
argument (?).
e. Select All Members to quickly select all available dimension members.
f.
Click Insert to include the formula in the definition.
406 Using Web Analysis
g. When the calculation is defined, click Apply and OK.
The following list describes the items on the Functions tab.
l
l
l
l
Formula — displays the formula result
Functions — provides pre-written formulas such as adding values, dividing values,
calculating averages
Select Members — provides members to be included during calculation
Advanced — click to select a dimension member combination label. If the row or column
context of the calculation has multiple dimensions, Advanced shows all dimension in
the row or column. When deselected, only members from one dimension are shown.
l
All Members — select to select all dimension members
l
Dynamic References — enable to select a row or column reference.
l
l
Constant — type a value to use in a function. For example, instead of Sum(“Qtr1”,
“Qtr2”), you could have Sum(“Qtr2”, 155)..
Optional. Opposite Member — select to evaluate a dimension member argument as a
percentage of another dimension member argument. The second argument is defined
by the dimension member intersected on an opposite axis
m
Select a Percent of Member calculation from the Function list.
m
Select a dimension member argument.
m
Select a dimension member from the opposite axis using the Optional Opposite
Member list.
Note: The Opposite Member list in the arguments frame is enabled only for the Percent
of Member Calculation. This control evaluates a dimension member argument
as a percentage of another dimension member argument. The second argument
is defined by the dimension member intersected on an opposite axis.
6
On the Options tab, perform the following:
l
l
Ignore Calculations — excludes calculated members from the equation when “All
Members” is selected.
Optional. Missing Values — provides option for how missing values are treated; include,
exclude, or treat as a number that you specify.
m
Include — calculates missing values as they are stored.
m
Exclude — removes arguments populated by missing values from the calculation.
m
l
Treat as Number — populates the argument with the value indicated. Default is
zero (0).
Select Position — provides options for specifying the location of the calculated row or
column.
m
Front/Top
m
Back/Bottom
Calculations 407
m
Insert Before
m
Insert After
m
l
7
Insertion Point — If you selected Insert Before or Insert After, select an insertion
point from the corresponding list. The calculated row or column is inserted before
or after the specified dimension header.
Ignore Calculations — selected to exclude calculated members from the equation when
“All Members” is selected.
When the calculation is defined, click Apply and OK.
Using the Manual Formula Syntax
If a member name contains unsupported characters or symbols, it should be enclosed in brackets
– []; If the name does not contain such symbols, it can be used as is. Some guidelines:
1. [New York] + West + East — correct
2. East + New York — incorrect: member name New York contains spaces.
3. Old style syntax (member names are separated by “:”). For advanced members, can be used
if member names contain “good” symbols only. for example:
Qtr1:West + Qtr2:East — correct
Qtr3:New York — incorrect
4. For new MDX style syntax, a list of comma – separated member names is included between
“('and')”. Member names must be included within [] according to the same rules as for
simple members. For example:
([New York], West) — correct
(New York, West) — incorrect
5. Simple and advanced members must not be mixed in one formula body. For example:
([New York], West) + East — incorrect
Qtr1:West + South — incorrect
6. All members' specification in the script is defined by keyword @selectAllMembers. For
example:
Average(@selectAllMembers) + 1234 + [East]
7. All members' specification can be used in the script several times. For example:
Sum(@selectAllMembers) – Sum(@selectAllMembers) — correct, always zero
8. Dynamic references are specified by the following way; for rows they are in form
@row<ROW NUMBER>, for columns they are @col<COLUMN NUMBER>. For example:
@col + @col5 – @col16/[email protected] – @row3
9. In one expression, row and column dynamic references should not be mixed. For example:
@col + @row1 — incorrect. An error message occurs.
408 Using Web Analysis
10. You can mix members and dynamics references in one expression, with the following
restriction: If the axis (row or column) contains several dimensions, an advanced members'
specifications must be used. For example:
@row1 + [Qtr1] — correct only if row axis contains one dimension – Year
@col2 + Qtr1:West — correct if column contains Year and Market.
11. Opposite members are used only for one function – Percent_of_Member. An @ character
must precede the opposite member. For example:
2* Percent_of_Member (Qtr1, @Colas) — correct
[Qtr2] + Percent_Of_Member (Qtr, @Root Beers]) — correct
Percent_Of_Member (Qtr1, @ [Root Beers]) — incorrect; space after @
Modifying Calculations
ä To modify a calculation:
1
Right-click a dimension member header and select Analysis Tools, then, Analysis Tools Manager.
The Analysis Tools Manager is displayed.
2
Click a calculation definition.
3
Click Edit.
The Calculation Definition dialog box displays the arguments for the selected calculation
definition.
4
Optional: To change the calculation definition name, enter a name in Name.
5
Optional: To move the calculation position, select another option.
6
Optional: If you selected Insert Before or Insert After, select an insertion point from the corresponding
list.
The calculated row or column is inserted before or after the specified dimension header.
7
Optional: To change the calculation type, select a calculation type from Function.
Changing the calculation type requires that the user redefine all arguments. For instructions,
see “Managing Analysis Tools” on page 367.
8
Optional: To change the arguments for the calculation, perform one:
l
Click an argument, click a dimension member label, and click the arrow button.
l
Click an argument, enter a value in the Constant text box, and click the arrow button.
l
Select Advanced to display dimension member combinations. Click an argument, click
a dimension member combination label, and click the arrow button.
The calculation definition is displayed in the Formula group box.
9
When the calculation is redefined, click Apply and OK.
10 Click Close.
Calculations 409
Analytic Services Attribute Calculations
You can leverage server-based Analytic Services attribute calculations in the client. Because
server-based calculations are performed before OLAP query results are sent to clients, network
traffic and the result set are minimized.
To use attribute calculations, you use Data Layout to select the attribute calculations dimensions
to participate in the query. Then you use Dimension Browser to select the server-based
calculations to be returned by the query result set.
Note: You can reproduce many attribute calculations on the client, but you are responsible for
defining the calculations, and the client is responsible for processing the result set.
Reasons to use attributes in calculations:
l
To select, aggregate, and report on data that shares attributes
l
To select attributes by data type: text, numeric, Boolean, and data type
l
To group numeric data types into statistical ranges
l
l
l
To use sum, count, min, max, and average functions on the attribute calculations dimension
automatically generated by Analytic Services
To use numerical attribute values from calculation scripts and member formulas in
calculations
To create crosstabs of attribute data for a dimension and analyze the dimension in terms of
each attribute
Print as PDF from EPM Workspace
Web Analysis documents can be printed to Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) from the
EPM Workspace. There are two printing options:
l
l
Print Screen — Prints the content area. A print view and Microsoft Print dialog is displayed.
Print Selected Object — Prints the specified OLAP pages of the current data object (For
Example, Spreadsheet, Chart or Pinboard). A Print via PDF dialog presents print options
(orientation, scale, and an option to allow print settings to be saved with document).
Print Screen prints the current display quickly and easily. Because documents can contain
multiple data objects, Print Screen does not specify OLAP pages. If you want to include OLAP
pages or object-specific document summaries, you should select Print Selected Object.
ä To print a report as PDF, perform one:
1
Open a report and Select File , then Print via PDF , then Screen to print the screen, or, Select File , then
Print via PDF , then Selected Object to print the selected reporting object in the report. The Print via
PDF dialog is displayed. See “Print via PDF” on page 411.
410 Using Web Analysis
2
Right click a data object and select Print via PDF , then Selected Object. The Print via PDF dialog is
displayed. See “Print via PDF” on page 411.
Note: If Print via PDF is not available, the System Administrator has configured Web
Analysis to only print to HTML in the EPM Workspace and Print via PDF has been
disabled.
Print via PDF
The Print via PDF dialog is used to specify print options when you select to print Selected Object.
l
l
l
Orientation — Specifies how a document is positioned on the page
m
Portrait: Prints across the width of the page (letter style).
m
Landscape: Prints across the length of the page (spreadsheet style).
Scale — Fit to page printing. Enables you to determine how document content is broken
down into print job pages.
Allow print setting to be saved with document — Automatically inserts a print summary
into the printer output when checked.
Database Connections
Database connections are portable files that define terms, conditions, and methods for
connecting to data sources. You must use Web Analysis Studio, not Web Analysis, to create and
modify database connections.
Documents are dependent on database connection files to query data sources. A document can
use multiple database connections to connect to one or more data sources.
To access data sources, you may be prompted to provide logon credentials.
Information provided in the view pane Information tab:
l
l
Database—displays the database connection name for the current data object
Database User Name—displays the user name by which access to the database connection
is granted
Data sources and database connections supported by Web Analysis documents:
l
l
OLAP data sources
m
Analytic Services 6.5.6, 7.0.1, 7.1, and 7.1.2
m
IBM DB2 OLAP Server 7.1 Service Pack 11, 8.1 Service Pack 3, and 8.2
m
SAP BW 3.0, 3.1, and 3.5
Hyperion data sources
m
Financial Management 3.4, 3.5, 3.5.1, and 4.0
Print via PDF 411
m
l
Planning 3.3, 3.5 with Analytic Services 3.5.1, and 4.0
Relational database connections:
m
IBM DB2
m
Microsoft SQL Server
m
Oracle
m
Teradata
System RDBMS requirements vary. See the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management
System Installation and Configuration Guide for descriptions of relational system requirements.
Database Connection Files
Database connections are stored as repository files and adhere to most file management
conventions. You see only database connections that you own or to which you are granted
permissions. Various kinds of permission are needed to read, write, edit, and change database
connection file properties.
Database Connection Access and Document Permissions
Documents or presentations distributed to users may require database connections that the users
cannot access. Document access is independent of database connection access.
Database connection permissions that deny access may prevent access to only one connection.
Users can use other connections to the primary data source or to alternate data sources. Users
can leverage document definitions independently of database connections.
User and Group Permissions
Users can access database connections assigned to them or to groups to which they belong.
When documents are assigned to groups, the database connections that the document uses must
also be assigned to the groups. Otherwise, group members can access the document, but not its
data values (unless they are granted individual user access).
To mitigate the risk of conflicting permissions, store documents and their database connections
in the same folders. Whenever possible, distribute documents and database connections to
groups. It is easier to set permissions for all files in a folder and all users in a group than to
manage permissions for individual files and users.
Integrating OLAP and Relational Data
Web Analysis Studio users can construct seamless liaisons between OLAP data and relational
data sources. Navigation from OLAP to relational data is called relational drill-through.
412 Using Web Analysis
After relational drill-through is configured, users can navigate from the dimension bottom (level
0) of the OLAP database and drill down to relational data.
Relational drill-through is a client-based integration solution comparable to the server-based
Analytic Integration Services drill-through.
The Relational Drill-Through dialog box is a graphical user interface for creating SQL relational
database queries. Users can use complex SQL syntax to specify table joins and to select and order
by clauses.
Note: Relational drill-through supports an array of JDBC relational data sources but does not
support queries by levels, generations, or previously selected members.
Relational drill-through definitions are saved as properties of database connection files.
Analytic Services Database Connections
Analytic Services, the analytic solution that integrates data from multiple sources and meets the
needs of users across an enterprise, enables the quick and easy implementation of solutions, adds
value to previously inaccessible data, and transforms data into actionable information.
Analytic Services integrates with existing business intelligence infrastructure, requiring a
minimum of IT overhead and enabling organizations to realize maximum return on their IT
investments.
Various Analytic Services features are extended through the Web Analysis graphical user
interface:
l
“Restrict Data” on page 375
l
“Retrieve Only Top/Bottom” on page 377
l
“Edit Data” on page 414
l
“Suppress Missing Rows, Zeros, and Shared Members” on page 414
l
“Label Mode and Alias Tables” on page 414
l
“Analytic Services Drill Settings” on page 414
l
“Linked Reporting Objects (LROs)” on page 414
l
“Relational Drill-through” on page 415
l
“Analytic Integration Services Drill-through” on page 415
l
“Analytic Services Advanced Member Selection” on page 415
l
“Attribute Dimensions and Attribute Calculations” on page 415
Restrict Data
Restrict Data narrows the return set by requiring data values to be relevant to specific rules and
operands. Data can be filtered by two-column comparison or by single-column fixed limits.
Analytic Services Database Connections 413
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom
Retrieve Only Top/Bottom Analysis leverages Analytic Services sorting and ranking to control
the size and order of OLAP query result sets, thus protecting the network server from
transmitting and the client from processing large result sets.
Edit Data
If you have permission, you can edit data values and write edits back to Analytic Services
databases. After edits are applied, users can recalculate the databases and measure the impact of
changed values.
Suppress Missing Rows, Zeros, and Shared Members
Web Analysis documents leverage Analytic Services to suppress missing rows, zeroes, and shared
members from the query result set, thus preventing return of irrelevant information, reducing
network traffic, and increasing query speed.
Label Mode and Alias Tables
Label mode enables you to select whether members are listed by ID number, description, or
both. Label mode options are database-specific and can be set for database connections, specific
documents, and specific dimensions.
Label mode indicates whether descriptions or ID numbers are used, and Analytic Services alias
table definitions provide the displayed values.
Analytic Services Drill Settings
Web Analysis documents use Analytic Services features to provide customized drilling,
dependent upon three factors:
l
The nature of the hierarchical navigation
l
Whether current members are replaced or augmented
l
Whether drilled members are replaced or augmented
Linked Reporting Objects (LROs)
Analytic Services LROs, which include the following types, enable users to annotate data values
by associating external media with cells.
l
Text documents
l
File attachments
l
URLs
414 Using Web Analysis
Relational Drill-through
Web Analysis documents enable you to drill through to related relational data from the lowest
level of the Analytic Services outline by defining links on Analytic Services database connections.
Users can pass pages, filters, and row limits to focus and control the relational query result set.
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through
Analytic Integration Services enables you to organize, format, and present relational data as
OLAP cubes in Analytic Services. Web Analysis documents enable you to access Analytic
Integration Services data through Analytic Services linked reporting objects by drilling on cells
marked for Analytic Integration Services drill-through.
Analytic Services Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
Attribute Dimensions and Attribute Calculations
In addition to member names, locations, and relationships, Analytic Services can store
characteristics about members. Analytic Services does not store attribute dimensions as part of
OLAP cubes, but dynamically calculates them upon request. Attribute dimensions are displayed
in dimension hierarchies and used in calculations, as standard dimensions are displayed and
used.
Financial Management
Financial Management is a centralized, scalable, financial management and reporting solution.
With Financial Management, users can unify their financial information (actuals, budgets,
forecasts, statistics) in one Web-based application. Financial Management contains packaged
features to support tasks and practices:
l
l
Compliance with global reporting standards, currency management, automation of intercompany activities, and production of auditable results
Links between legal and management reporting and operating plans to achieve enterprisewide consistency and visibility
l
Multidimensional, line-of-business analysis
l
Improved collaboration through the Web
l
Key external industry metrics that provide one central point of financial intelligence
Financial Management 415
Designed for large-scale, centralized Web deployment, Financial Management acts as a shared
financial resource for thousands of users across the enterprise, enabling them to collaborate and
cooperate in the day-to-day business management. In one application, users can produce
auditable documents and forecasts for multiple consumers, such as regulatory bodies, financial
analysts, stakeholders, and business partners.
l
“Financial Management Features Available in Web Analysis Documents” on page 416
l
“Related Content” on page 416
l
“Cell Text” on page 416
l
“Line-Item Detail” on page 417
l
“Related Content Changes” on page 417
l
“Organization by Period” on page 417
l
“Financial Management Advanced Member Selection” on page 417
l
“User-Defined Fields” on page 418
l
“Display Entity Currency” on page 418
Financial Management Features Available in Web Analysis
Documents
Financial Management features extended to Web Analysis documents:
l
Organization by period
l
Advanced member selection
l
Cell text, related content
l
Line-item detail, related content
l
User-defined fields
l
Entity currency display
Related Content
The Related Content dialog box links to previously configured, related content and applications.
When LRO indicates are enabled, blue triangles are displayed in spreadsheet cells that contain
links to related content. Right-clicking linked cells and selecting Related Content displays the
Related Content dialog box.
Cell text and line-item detail are accessed as related content.
Cell Text
You can launch cell text notes, read-only text strings stored in the Financial Management data
source.
416 Using Web Analysis
Line-Item Detail
You can launch line-item-detail spreadsheets, read-only relational spreadsheets created from
Financial Management data sources.
Related Content Changes
Changes to cell text and line-item detail items are not displayed in Web Analysis documents
until Financial Management is recalculated and changes registered.
Organization by Period
Financial Management Organization by Period functionality enables an organization’s latest
consolidation structure to coexist with past structures in one application.
Thus, dimension hierarchies can be consolidated differently during different periods.
Organizational structures can change for many reasons, including acquisitions, disposals,
mergers, and reorganizations.
You can access Org by Period functionality when Org by Period is configured and set on the
Financial Management server.
When querying Financial Management database connections configured with Org by Period,
the Data Layout Options button displays an Org by Period item. The Org by Period dialog box
offers an interface for enabling Org by Period and selecting three members.
Note: You can review and set this feature only in Web Analysis Studio, but settings are observed
by the HTML Web client.
For information on Org by Period, See "Managing Metadata" in the Oracle Hyperion Financial
Management Administrator’s Guide.
Financial Management Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
Financial Management offers a smaller set of advanced member selection methods than does
Analytic Services.
Table 111
Financial Management Advanced Member Selection Methods
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
All Members
Selects all members—a Financial Management member selection method
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor
Financial Management 417
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
Select Dim Bottom
Selects the lowest descendants
Also Select Descendants
Selects the currently member and its descendants
Member List
Displays the Member List dialog box, used to select lists of members—a Financial Management member
selection method
User Defined Fields 1, 2, and 3
Displays the User Defined Field dialog box, used to select members with specific user-defined field
values
Search
Displays the Search dialog box, used to locate members
User-Defined Fields
User-defined fields are typically defined only for Account, Scenario, Entity, and custom
dimensions and are limited to 20 characters.
Users can compose compound selection statements by using multiple values for one field (for
example, User Defined Field 1= West AND User Defined Field 1= East).
To define a user-defined field, users cannot use an empty string as a value.
Display Entity Currency
Financial Management stores currency metrics in the Value dimension and as Entity dimension
attributes, thus enabling users to query data sources using selected or default currency values.
When using Financial Management data sources with defined Entity dimension currency
information, you can enable the Display Entity Currency option, to append Entity members
with their default currency values. Before querying, you use Data Layout options; after querying,
you use the Data Display right-click menu; for all subsequently created documents, you use
OLAP Server user preferences.
Note: You can use Web Analysis Studio only to review and set this feature, but settings are
observed by the HTML Web client.
Financial Management Conventions
Financial Management outlines have 12 dimensions, eight predefined (Period, View, Entity,
Account, ICP, Scenario, Value, and Year) and four custom.
l
“No Drill To Top” on page 419
l
“No Edit Data” on page 419
l
“Adding and Deleting Members” on page 419
l
“New Databases” on page 419
l
“Deleted Users” on page 419
418 Using Web Analysis
No Drill To Top
When you query Financial Management, you cannot drill to top as you can when querying
Analytic Services. Financial Management and Analytic Services track parent-child relationships
differently. The Financial Management hierarchies enable multiple consolidations, thus
enabling multiple parents for one child.
No Edit Data
Users cannot write back data to Financial Management data sources, as they can to Analytic
Services data sources.
Adding and Deleting Members
Users must click the Reload button to display added or deleted members.
New Databases
Current sessions cannot interact with Financial Management data sources added during the
session. Only data sources operating when a session is established can communicate with Web
Analysis documents. To connect to new Financial Management databases, log off and then log
on again.
Deleted Users
After you establish a Financial Management session, connection is valid until you log off, even
if your user name is deleted server-side. Access is not revoked until the current session ends.
SAP BW
You can access SAP BW data sources in Web Analysis documents. Thus, you can extend your
SAP BW investment by using advanced analytics and dashboards. Using the custom document
freeform grid component, you can present OLAP, relational, and manually entered data on one
data object and leverage all data sources in integrated dynamic calculations. Visually compelling
SAP BW documents typically surpass the presentation, reporting, and distribution requirements
of information consumers.
l
“SAP BW Prerequisites” on page 419
l
“SAP BW Conventions” on page 420
l
“SAP BW Advanced Member Selection” on page 420
SAP BW Prerequisites
After installation, you must download the SAP BW JCo driver 2.1.4 or 2.1.5 from an SAP Web
site.
SAP BW 419
Two Microsoft DLL files, MSvcr71.dll and MSvcp71.dll, are deployed to a common directory
during installation. The files are used by Production Reporting, Financial Reporting, and Web
Analysis.
You must locate the SAP BW JCo Driver in the DLL files directory.
SAP BW Conventions
SAP data sources differ from other data sources. For example, level 0 is the highest ancestor in
SAP and the lowest descendant in Analytic Services. SAP member properties are analogous to
Analytic Services attribute dimensions.
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection
In dimensions with large member sets, users can define selections with the Dimension Browser
right-click menu. Right-clicking member names enables selection by familial relationship and
database-specific options.
SAP BW and Analytic Services offer different sets of advanced member selection methods.
Table 112
SAP BW Advanced Member Selection Methods
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
All Members
Selects all members
Select Dim Top
Selects the highest ancestor, or, in multiple hierarchies, all top level ancestors
Select Dim Bottom
Selects all lowest level descendants
Also Select Descendants
Selects the current member and its descendants
Select Parent
Selects the parent of the current member
Also Select Ancestors
Selects the current member and its ancestors
Also Select Children
Selects the current member and its children
Also Select Siblings
Selects the current member and members on the same level and of the same parent
Also Select Level
Selects the current member and all members on the same level and of the same dimension
Select At Level
Selects all members at a level specified by name or number
Also Select Previous
Selects a variable number of previous members from the level of the current member; uses MDX LAG to
indicate the number of previous members to return
Also Select Next
Selects a variable number of next members from the level of the current member; uses MDX LEAD to
indicate the number of subsequent members to return
Date Time Series
Selects time members based on time definition criteria. SAP BW does not return aggregated values for
DTS selections and returns only members that satisfy the criteria.
420 Using Web Analysis
Right-Click Menu Command
Description
Select Top/Bottom
Returns a variable number of members, based on their rank
You can select top or bottom values, but not both. Rank can be calculated by percentage, sum, or count.
Sum uses a threshold value to select members up to and including the value that limits the threshold.
Result sets may differ from Dimension Browser preview, due to custom filter selections on the query.
Filter on Member Properties
Displays the Member Properties dialog box, used to select member subsets by member SAP BW property
values
Find in Tree
Locates members in large dimensions; expands the hierarchy but does not add found members to the
Selection list
Relational Access
Web Analysis documents, using one of five methods, can access OLAP, Hyperion, and supported
relational databases.
l
“Custom Document SQL Spreadsheet” on page 421
l
“Custom Document Freeform Grid” on page 421
l
“Relational Drill-through” on page 421
l
“Relational Database Connections” on page 422
l
“Analytic Integration Services Drill-through” on page 422
l
“Repository” on page 422
l
“Controlling Query Result Set Size” on page 422
Custom Document SQL Spreadsheet
SQL spreadsheet objects represent relational data sources as spreadsheets, using standard SQL
syntax queries.
Custom Document Freeform Grid
Freeform grids enable users to combine data values from multiple data sources in one data object
and thus leverage custom document database connections.
Relational Drill-through
You can construct seamless liaisons between OLAP data and relational data sources. Navigation
from OLAP to relational data is typically called relational drill-through. Users can navigate from
the dimension bottom (level 0) of OLAP databases and drill down to relational data.
Relational Access 421
Web Analysis documents store relational drill-through definitions, which can be defined with
Select statements and clauses, as database connection properties of Analytic Services database
connections. Query result sets are presented as SQL spreadsheets.
See “Integrating OLAP and Relational Data” on page 412.
Relational Database Connections
Web Analysis Studio provides users with an easy-to-use graphical interface for defining relational
database connections. You are prompted to specify relational database type and login credentials,
select a relational table, and define database-connection properties.
Web Analysis documents relational data sources, aggregates result sets, and expresses data as
OLAP cubes.
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through
Analytic Integration Services Drill-through is a server-based form of relational drill-through.
Like conventional relational drill-through, you can construct seamless connections between
OLAP and relational data. Unlike conventional relational drill-through, you can drill to
relational data sources from all Web Analysis document intersections.
Analytic Services administrators must establish Analytic Integration Services drill-through
reports. Relational queries are stored as intersection-specific metadata and flagged with LRO
indicators. When users double-click flagged cells, OLAP documents navigate to the specified
relational report.
Repository
Repository access is the only mandatory form of relational database access. The repository
centrally stores system data, user names, user preferences, and document definitions in relational
database tables. Without repository access, you cannot save information. Administrators
establish repository access during installation.
Controlling Query Result Set Size
Query governors vary for relational access methods.
Custom document SQL spreadsheets and relational drill-through methods enable users to
declare query governors as they create SQL queries or relational drill-through definitions.
When you drill from OLAP to relational data, passing only the drilled OLAP member to the
relational data source may result in a large query result set. To focus and diminish query result
sets, users can pass page and filter dimensions specified in the OLAP documents.
Other relational access methods rely on the Analysis.properties file to limit query result sets.
422 Using Web Analysis
Custom Web Analysis Documents
Web Analysis Studio provides twenty-one coding-free components, each of which can be
customized and added to custom documents multiple times. Combination options provide
almost unlimited creative opportunities for custom-document designers.
Note: Custom documents cannot be created in Web Analysis EPM Workspace.
l
“Containers” on page 423“Content Panels” on page 423
l
“Data Objects” on page 423
l
“Subscription Controls” on page 424
l
“SQL Spreadsheet and SQL Subscription” on page 424
Containers
Panel and Split Panel objects enable you to control space and layers on custom documents. It is
best to use container panels to design documents and to orient components inside panels.
Components placed with absolute alignment in the main document panel maintain position
even as other components fluctuate. Thus, components may overlap and shift.
You can size, align, and establish properties for panels. Properties control appearance and
behavior.
Content Panels
Panels that provide specialized content:
l
Label—Static or dynamic text for use as titles, labels, or captions
l
Text Area— Dynamic text used for annotations
l
l
Image—A graphic used to include graphic backgrounds, pictures, illustrations, and graphic
controls
HTML Browser—Static HTML
The panels function without additional coding. Label objects support the dynamic text labels
used in printing headers, footers, and SQL spreadsheets.
Data Objects
Data objects representing display types (on the component toolbar):
l
Chart— query result sets as charts
l
Spreadsheet— query result sets as spreadsheets
l
Freeform Grid— content from freeform grids
Custom Web Analysis Documents 423
l
Pinboard— query result sets as pinboards
SQL spreadsheet data objects are also available, at the end of the component toolbar.
Subscription Controls
You can add controls to documents to enable users to navigate dimensional hierarchies, browse
the documents, or execute commands.
l
Combo Box Subscription— View a list of members.
l
Radio Button Group Subscription— Select a member option.
l
Checkbox Group Subscription— Select multiple members.
l
Tab Group Subscription— Select a member tab.
l
l
l
Multi-level Combo Box Subscription— Select from interdependent lists (members
changing as selections change).
Slider Subscription— Select a member, based on its position on a slider bar.
Selection Button Subscription— Apply member selections to data objects that use the same
data source.
l
Alias Controller— Toggle data objects between alias table labels.
l
Services Button— Execute preset commands and create hot spots.
Subscription buttons can control data objects that share a database connection query.
SQL Spreadsheet and SQL Subscription
Components that present and control SQL query result sets.
l
SQL Spreadsheet— a data object that displays a SQL query to a relational data source
l
SQL Subscription— a subscription button designed for SQL spreadsheets
Linking Components by Query
Specifications required for document creation:
l
Data source—provides data values
l
Data object—displays data values
l
Query—Retrieves data values from data sources and returns them to data objects
Properties that customize the specifications:
l
l
Database connection properties indicate data-source type, logon credentials, database
applications, dimension formatting, and drill-through properties.
Data objects can be set to display types that feature specific options.
424 Using Web Analysis
l
Queries can be explicit, requesting information on members, or dynamic, requesting
information about all members that satisfy a set of criteria.
In Design Document mode, query definitions are referred to as data sources.
l
“Common Data Sources” on page 425
l
“Unlinking Components” on page 425
Common Data Sources
Design document components using the same data source are coordinated (follow the same
navigation lines).
Unlinking Components
If you do not want coordinated document components, you can assign multiple data sources to
a data object. Identical data sources with different names are treated as individual sources.
Linking Dimensions
You can use Custom settings to link dimensions within data objects on a document.
Dimension linking enables data objects that share dimensions but use different data sources to
remain coordinated. Links are unidirectional. Navigation on a data object triggers coordinated
navigation on the data objects linked to it. Navigation on the other data objects triggers
coordinated navigation only the objects have defined links.
Edit Data Mode
If you have permission, you can edit cell values and write edits back to Analytic Services. You
can initiate Edit Data mode only from the spreadsheet display type.
ä To initiate Edit Data mode in a Web Analysis document, right-click the data object, and
select Edit Data.
Edit Data buttons are added to the content area. Editable cells in Analytic Services are converted
to data-entry cells.
Table 113
HTML Web Client Edit Data Controls
Control
Description
Calculation list
Specifies the calculation script to use when the database is recalculated from the HTML Web client
Run
Prompts the database server to recalculate the database
Linking Dimensions 425
Control
Description
Exit
Closes Edit Data mode
Send Data
Applies edits to the database
Editing Data Values
ä To edit data values:
1
Right-click the data object, and select Edit Data.
2
To recalculate the database, from Calculation, select a calculation script, and click Run.
3
Click a cell to edit its data value.
4
Enter a data value, and click the column or row heading.
5
Click Send Data.
Only authorized users can successfully write changes to the database. The Confirmation
dialog box is displayed if write-back is successful.
6
Optional: Preform step 2 to recalculate the data.
7
Click Exit.
Note: On long spreadsheets, you may need to scroll down and to the right to locate the Send
Data and Exit buttons, on long spreadsheets.
Copying, Cutting, and Pasting To and From Excel
While in Edit Data mode, you can cut, copy, and paste ranges of cells from Excel spreadsheets
into Web Analysis spreadsheets. The edits can then be posted to Analytic Services. You can also
cut, copy, and paste between values.
Keyboard shortcuts:
l
To copy, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + C.
l
To cut, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + X.
l
To paste, select a range of cells, and press Ctrl + V.
Tips for Edit Data Mode
l
You cannot edit calculated members or attribute dimensions, because their values do not
reside in the database.
426 Using Web Analysis
l
Dimensions composed of implied shares (or user-defined hierarchies) do not aggregate as
conventional dimension hierarchies do. Therefore, implied shares may overwrite data edits
made to parents of implied shares as the model is pivoted.
Example: Actual and Budget are implied shares of the parent Scenario. Scenario, however, is a
categorical label, not an aggregation of Actual and Budget measures.
Tips for Edit Data Mode 427
428 Using Web Analysis
13
Using Oracle BI EE
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................. 429
Overview
From the Applications module of the Navigate menu, you can select the following Oracle
Business Intelligence products:
l
Oracle BI Answers
l
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards
l
Oracle BI Delivers
See Chapter 7, “Launching Applications” for additional information on availability of these
products based on user rights, roles, and availability of these products from EPM Workspace.
For additional information on setting preferences for these products, see “Setting Preferences
for Oracle BI Publisher” on page 76 and “Setting Preferences for Oracle Business Intelligence
Products” on page 77. For details on Oracle BI EE functionality available in EPM Workspace,
see the Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition New Features Guide.
Oracle BI Answers
Oracle BI Answers provides true end user ad hoc capabilities in a pure Web architecture. Users
interact with a logical view of the information—completely hidden from data structure
complexity while simultaneously preventing runaway queries—and can easily create charts,
pivot tables, reports, and visually appealing dashboards, all of which are fully interactive and
drillable and can be saved, shared, modified, formatted, or embedded in the user's personalized
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards. The results are new levels of business user self-sufficiency in
an environment that is fully secure and controlled by IT. See “Overview” on page 429 for
availability and preferences for these products.
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards
Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards provides any knowledge worker with intuitive, interactive
access to information that is actionable and dynamically personalized based on the individual's
role and identity. In the Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards environment, the end user is working
Overview 429
with live reports, prompts, charts, tables, pivot tables, graphics, and tickers in a pure Web
architecture. The user has full capability for drilling, navigating, modifying, and interacting with
these results. Oracle BI Interactive Dashboards can also aggregate content from a wide variety
of other sources, including the Internet, shared file servers, and document repositories. See
“Overview” on page 429 for availability and preferences for these products.
Oracle BI Delivers
Oracle BI Delivers is a proactive intelligence solution that provides business activity monitoring
and alerting that can reach users through multiple channels such as email, dashboards, and
mobile devices. Oracle BI Delivers includes a full Web-based self-service alert creation and
subscription portal. This next-generation product can initiate and pass contextual information
to other alerts to execute a multistep, multi-person, and multi-application analytical workflow.
Furthermore, it can dynamically determine recipients and personalized content to reach the
right users at the right time with the right information. See “Overview” on page 429 for
availability and preferences for these products.
430 Using Oracle BI EE
14
Scheduling Jobs and Batches
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................. 431
Scheduling and Running Jobs .......................................................................... 431
Scheduling Batches...................................................................................... 448
Scheduling Batches to Run ............................................................................. 448
Creating an E-mail List for Batch Bursting Recipients ................................................ 454
Setting Up E-mail Notifications ......................................................................... 454
Selecting E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling .................................................... 455
Batch Deletion ........................................................................................... 455
Retrieving the Exported Output ......................................................................... 456
Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches ............................................................. 456
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch ................................................................. 457
Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler ............................................. 457
Overview
In EPM Workspace, you use the Schedule module to perform the following tasks:
l
Run and schedule job types:
m
m
m
l
Interactive Reporting job – An Interactive Reporting document imported in EPM
Workspace as a job and its associated files.
Production Reporting job – A Production Reporting report or program and its
associated files. A Production Reporting job can be secure or nonsecure.
Generic job – A report or program from another software provider (for example, an
Oracle report or a Crystal report), and any associated files.
Run and schedule batches, which are collections of reports.
Scheduling and Running Jobs
You can manually run jobs from Explore. Select the jobs you want to run, enter the job
parameters, then view the job output. You can also run jobs automatically by scheduling your
jobs to run using events and job parameters.
The schedule module contains the following panels for scheduling jobs:
Overview 431
l
l
l
l
l
l
“Managing Job Queue” on page 442 Job queueing occurs when no Job Service is available
to process a job. Administrators can control Job Service availability using the Job Limit and
Hold properties. For more information on these properties, see Oracle Enterprise
Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
“Viewing Job Notifications” on page 442 – Use this to see the status of jobs and notifications
for jobs that are finished.
Show Parameters – Displays a list of information about job parameters. You can modify or
delete parameters from the Show Parameters page. See “Modifying Job Parameters” on page
447.
Jobs Running – Use this to list jobs which are currently running. You can cancel a job by
selecting a job, right-click and select Cancel.
Managing Events - Use this to create and manage events.
Using the Consolidated Job Status List - Use this to view a list of jobs with the option to
filter the list and modify the jobs, schedules or events. You can also use the Run Now option
on a job from the Consolidated Job List.
If your administrator enabled the pass-through feature, you can configure foreground jobs to
run without additional requests for data source login credentials. You can run jobs in the
foreground or in the background depending upon how the job was configured by the importer.
Note: You can also run any job in the background or foreground using Run Job option from
File menu.
Scheduling and Running Jobs includes the following topics:
l
“About Job Execution” on page 433
l
“Events” on page 433
l
“Event Status and Schedule Status” on page 434
l
“Job Parameters” on page 434
l
“Running Jobs” on page 435
l
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 436
l
“Using Job Output” on page 438
l
“Managing Events” on page 439
l
“Managing Job Queue” on page 442
l
“Viewing Job Notifications” on page 442
l
“Using the Consolidated Job Status List” on page 442
l
“Retrieving Jobs” on page 448
432 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
About Job Execution
When a job executes in the foreground, you must wait until the job completes before continuing
with other tasks. When a foreground job finishes executing, EPM Workspace displays:
l
For Interactive Reporting jobs, a link to the output in the folder where the job resides
l
For Production Reporting jobs, the HTML frame file
l
For generic jobs:
m
The primary output file, if there is only one
m
A list of primary output files, if there are multiple files
m
A list of all output files, if there is no primary one
When a job is executing in the background, you can perform other tasks in the foreground.
When the background job finishes executing, the output files are written to the repository, and
a notification message is displayed in the View Job Status panel of the Schedule module.
The Output link is displayed next to the job title. Click the Output link to view the job output.
l
“Job Priority” on page 433
l
“Scheduling Jobs” on page 433
Job Priority
When jobs are scheduled to process at the same time, jobs with High priority run first. You can
set the priority to High or Normal when you schedule the job.
Scheduling Jobs
Scheduling a job enables you to automatically run jobs at a date or time and/or on a recurring
basis. To schedule a job, you must associate a time event and a job parameter list with the job.
All types of jobs can be scheduled through EPM Workspace.
l
Events define the timetable for running a job
l
Job Parameters define the run time values necessary to execute a job
Note: For Production Reporting jobs, compile time parameters may also be specified with
job parameters.
l
Schedules specify the job you want to execute, as well as the event schedule and job parameter
list for running the job
Events
Events define when the job runs and whether the job runs only once or many times. You can
determine whether the job runs every Wednesday, or every fourth Friday, or after an event
occurred.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 433
Because events are not associated with a particular job, you can use them to schedule multiple
jobs. You can create personal recurring time events that only you can use. You may have access
to public recurring time events and externally triggered events your administrator created.
You can create events as you schedule a job or from the Schedule module using the Manage
Events panel. You can also view, modify, access, or delete time events.
The types of events that can be used for scheduling jobs are:
l
l
l
l
Public recurring time events – Reusable time events created by an administrator and
accessible to you with the required access privileges.
Personal recurring time events – Reusable time events created by you and accessible only to
you.
Externally triggered events – Date based events created by an administrator and accessible
to you with the required access privileges. Jobs are scheduled to run when the event is
triggered.
Custom time events – Time events created by you for one time use within a job schedule.
Custom events cannot be used by other job schedules.
Event Status and Schedule Status
Events and Schedule each maintain their own status, which is displayed by a traffic light indicator.
The following table shows how the status enables a job to run. You can set the status when you
modify the event or schedule.
Table 114
Event Status and Schedule Status
Event Status
Schedule Status
Description
active
active
The scheduled job runs
active
inactive
The scheduled job will not run
inactive
active
The scheduled job will not run
inactive
inactive
The scheduled job will not run
Job Parameters
Job parameters are run-time values that are necessary to run a job. The run-time values are the
job variables or limits you are prompted for by the job. For some Interactive Reporting jobs, job
parameters also include processing and job output options. You can save job parameters to:
l
Run or schedule jobs without being prompted for the run-time values
l
Share Public job parameters with other users
l
Run jobs using different parameters on a schedule
EPM Workspace supports the following types of job parameters:
434 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
l
l
l
Public job parameters – Reusable named job parameters created by your administrator and
accessible to you with the required access privileges.
Personal job parameters – Reusable named job parameters created by you and accessible
only by you.
Custom job parameters – Unnamed job parameters created by you and associated with a
schedule. Default job parameters are not listed or named and cannot be used with other
schedules. They are deleted when the schedule is deleted.
Note: Job parameters can only be created when creating or modifying a job schedule or
when running a job. See “Running Jobs” on page 435 or “Scheduling Jobs” on page
436 to see how to get to the job parameters section.
Job Parameter Tasks
You can modify and delete parameters from the Show Parameters page. You can also modify
job cycles.
ä To modify a job parameter, select a job name, right-click and select Modify. See “Setting
Interactive Reporting Job Properties” on page 460 to complete the Properties dialog.
ä To delete a job parameter, select a job name, right-click and select Delete.
Running Jobs
This section provides general instructions for running a job and setting your default job
parameters.
ä To run jobs:
1
From Explore, navigate to the job you want to run, then do one of the following:
l
From the menu bar, select File , then Run Job.
l
Double click the job.
l
Right-click the job, from the shortcut menu, select Run Job.
l
Right-click the job, from the shortcut menu, select Run Job in , then Foreground.
When you run jobs in the foreground, a progress bar displays status and you cannot
perform other tasks until it is complete.
l
Right-click the job, from the shortcut menu, select Run Job in , then Background.
When you run jobs in the background, you can continue working in EPM Workspace.
2
If database authentication is required, enter the user name and password for each connection in the
Database Connectivity section.
The Database Connectivity section is displayed only if database authentication is required.
3
For Production Reporting and Generic jobs, browse to specify a folder destination for the job output.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 435
The default folder is the folder where the job is located.
4
In the Job Parameters section, define parameters using an existing job parameters list or create one.
If the job has no run-time variables, the job parameters section is not displayed.
To set personal default job parameters, see “Setting Job Parameters” on page 436.
5
If you are using default parameters, click Run Job, if not continue with the following steps.
6
Set values, limits, or define or modify cycles depending upon the type of job you are running.
See “Setting Job Parameters” on page 466 and “Setting Production Reporting and Generic
Job Parameters” on page 488.
7
Click Run Job.
Job parameters selected when jobs are imported are called Publisher defaults. You can
override these Publisher defaults at run time and set your own job parameters. Your jobs
run with your Publisher defaults until you change them.
Setting Job Parameters
ä To set your default job parameters:
1
From Explore, navigate to the job you want to run, right-click, then select Run Job.
2
Select an existing job parameter list or New Values.
3
Set values, set limits, or define or modify cycles depending upon the type of job you are running.
See “Setting Job Parameters” on page 466 and “Setting Production Reporting and Generic
Job Parameters” on page 488.
4
5
Do one or more of the following steps:
l
Check Save as my default.
l
Check Save, then select Public or Private.
Click Run Job.
Your job parameters are not saved until you run the job.
Scheduling Jobs
This section provides general instructions for scheduling a job.
Note: When scheduling the Day of the Week option, it is calculated based on the server time.
ä To schedule a job:
1
Do one of the following:
l
From Explore, navigate to the job you want to run.
l
From Consolidated Job Status page, select a job.
436 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
2
Right-click the job and select Add a Schedule.
3
Fill in the properties.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Name—(Required) The Name can contain letters, numbers, the space character, and
the underscore character “_”.
Description—A meaningful description of the schedule. For example, Quarter end for
all regions. The length is limited to 250 characters.
Priority—When jobs are scheduled to process at the same time, jobs with High priority
are run first. Select High or Normal priority.
Active—This is displayed when you modify a schedule only. A traffic light that indicates
if the job is scheduled to run.
m
A green traffic light indicates that the job is scheduled to run.
m
A red traffic light indicates that the job is not scheduled to run.
Run this job—Infinitely or a specified number of times. The job automatically becomes
inactive after it runs the indicated number of times.
Job outputs inherit time to live from the job properties—Enable to automatically delete
job output.
Auto-delete job outputs after: Indicate when to delete by entering a number and
selecting a time interval (minutes, hours, days, weeks, years) after the job is run. Default
is minutes.
User name and Password—You are prompted for database authentication if it is
required.
4
Click Next.
5
For Job Parameters, select one of the following options:
l
l
l
To create job parameters from scratch, select Define job parameters starting with and
select New Values.
To create job parameters from existing job parameters, select Define job parameters
starting with and select a job parameter. This enables you to quickly create a job which
is similar to an existing job. Make changes to the parameters and save the completed
job parameters using a different name.
To use or view job parameters, select Schedule this job with existing job parameters
and select the parameters you want to use from the drop-down list. Click View if you
want to see the parameters before you move on to the next screen.
If the job has no parameters (no run time variables or limits), the job parameters section
is not displayed.
If there are no job parameters, you must create them.
6
Click Next.
7
For Set Values, select the cycles and actions for this Interactive Reporting job.
8
Select Save if you want to save the parameters for another job as your own, Personal, or available to
others as Public.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 437
9
From the Time Events page, indicate if you want to create an event or use an existing event using one
of the following options:
l
l
To create a new event, select A New Recurring Time Event from the drop-down list.
See “Creating Personal Recurring Time Events” on page 439.
A new Custom Time Event. You use custom time event in order to create a one time
schedule. The time cannot be changed by modifying event since you do not have access
to the event properties.
10 Click Next.
11 If desired, configure notification options.
l
l
l
If you want to view your notifications in the Schedule module using the Job
Notifiications panel, select Display notification in Schedule Module.
If you want to E-mail the notification, enter E-mail addresses. Separate E-mail addresses
by semicolons, colons, space characters, commas, or new lines.
If you want to attach the latest job output to the E-mail, select Attach PDF outputs to
email messages.
For Production Reporting jobs, see additional notification options in “Output Options
for Scheduling Jobs” on page 488.
12 Complete Permissions step, see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
13 Click Finish to schedule the job.
Using Job Output
When jobs run, the results are placed in job output items. This section describes modifying job
output properties and viewing job output. Job output deletion is streamlined. When you delete
jobs, you can also delete all associated outputs.
Modifying Job Output Properties
Job output properties determine which users can view the job output. Job output is listed in the
same folder as the job. Each run of the job produces job output. You can modify or view the job
output properties depending on your access privileges on the job.
ä To modify or view job output properties:
1
From Explore, navigate to the job output, and select it.
2
Select File , then Properties.
Note: You can also right-click on an artifact and select Edit Permissions.
3
Change the properties or click Permissions to change the access control.
When assigning access to additional users, groups, or roles, the adaptive state is limited to
View Only. Also, the adaptive state cannot be modified for the existing roles, groups, and
438 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
users. You can modify the adaptive state for future job output when modifying the access
control for the job.
To modify access control, see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
4
Click OK.
Viewing Job Output
You can open job output and a table of contents is displayed to navigate through the job output.
ä To view job output:
1
From Explore, right-click the job output file, then select Open.
The table of contents is displayed for items in the job output.
2
Click an item, then click Open.
3
To return to the table of contents and view other items, select the TOC tab in the content tab area.
Managing Events
From the Schedule module, use the Manage Events panel to:
l
View events which you can access
l
Make events accessible to other users using access control
l
Modify, delete, or create events
ä To manage events:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Manage Events.
2
To filter the events displayed, select Filter from the toolbar. Complete the Filter dialog fields and select
Apply.
All the events you can access are listed with their properties.
3
To modify or delete an event, select the event, right-click and select Edit or Delete.
4
To create a personal time event, see “Creating Personal Recurring Time Events” on page 439 and to
create a public recurring time event, see “Creating Public Recurring Time Events” on page 440.
Creating Personal Recurring Time Events
ä To create a personal recurring time event:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Manage Events.
2
To filter the events displayed, select Filter from the toolbar. Complete the Filter dialog fields and select
Apply.
All the events you can access are listed with their properties.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 439
3
Right-click an event and select Add , then Personal RecurringEvent.
Note: You must be an Administrator to add a Public Recurring Event or Externally
Triggered Event.
4
The Create Personal Recurring Time Event dialog wizard is displayed. Enter the time event name and
description.
5
Click Active to make the Event available for scheduling.
Note: If a schedule is associated with an inactive event, the job will not run. You can check
the event’s active status by using the Manage Events panel in the Scheduler.
6
Select the calendar you want to use for this time event.
Company calendars are created by your administrator.
7
From the Days to Run list, select the option you want to use and click Go (By Day is the default).
By Day, By Week, By Period, By Quarter, and By Year let you specify a recurring time pattern.
Advanced Days of Week and Advanced Days of Period give you the option to select days
with no pattern.
8
From the Time to Run list, select the option you want to use and click Next (Once per hour is the default.)
The options include Once Per Day, More Than Once Per Day, or After External Event.
9
Update the Starting At and Ending At time to specify a range for the event.
10 Enter a Start Date and select the option to enter an End Date or to accept the default, No End Date.
11 Click Finish.
Creating Public Recurring Time Events
ä To create a public recurring time event:
1
Repeat step 1 through step 10 10 above. The only exception is to select Public Recurring Event in place
of Personal Recurring Event.
2
Select Next.
3
Complete the permissions for this event and select Finish. For more information on setting permissions,
see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
Creating Externally Triggered Events
ä To create an externally triggered event:
1
Repeat step 1 through step 10 10 above. The only exception is to select Externally Triggered Event in
place of Personal Recurring Event.
2
Select Next.
440 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
3
Complete the permissions for this event and select Finish. For more information on setting permissions,
see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
Viewing Events
You can view all your events from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
ä To view events:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Manage Events.
A recurring and externally triggered event list is displayed.
2
To filter the events list, select Filter from the toolbar area. Complete the Filter dialog and select Apply.
Modifying Events
You can modify events from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
ä To modify events:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Manage Events.
A recurring and externally triggered event list is displayed.
2
To filter the events list, select Filter from the toolbar area. Complete the Filter dialog and select Apply.
3
Select an event, right-click and select Modify.
4
Change properties.
5
Click OK.
The modified event is displayed in the events list.
Deleting Events
You can delete events unused by schedules or other events. For example, if an external event is
used to trigger a recurring event, the recurring event needs to be deleted or disassociated from
the external event before the external event can be deleted.
ä To delete events from the Manage Events panel in the Schedule module.
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Manage Events.
An event list is displayed.
2
To filter the events list, select Filter from the toolbar area. Complete the Filter dialog and select Apply.
3
Select an event, right-click, select Delete and confirm deletion by clicking Yes.
If schedules are associated with the time event you are deleting, modify those schedules to
use another time event.
Before you delete a time event associated with an external event, disassociate the time event
from the external event or delete the external event.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 441
Managing Job Queue
Job Queueing enables users to limit the number of jobs processed in parallel and manage the
Job Queue.
ä To manage job queue:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Job Queue.
2
Go to Job Queue page. Verify that jobs with High priority are at the top of the queue.
3
Perform the following tasks to manage and validate changes are reflected in the queue:
From the right-click menu:
l
Place a job to the top of the queue – This job should be first removed from queue.
l
Place job in the bottom of the queue – The job should be removed from the queue last.
l
l
Select Hold item for the Job. Repeat for several job types – Job should not be processed,
but not removed from the queue. Check mark next to the job is displayed when Held.
Delete job from the queue. Repeat for all job types – Job should be removed from the
queue.
Note: When some scheduled jobs are in the queue, run several different jobs in Background
and Foreground. A dialog is displayed asking whether user wants to queue the Job.
Job is added to the Queue if user clicks Yes.
Viewing Job Notifications
From the Schedule module, use the Job Notifications panel to:
l
Display completion status of jobs running in the background.
l
Display notifications for jobs that have completed.
ä To view job notifications:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Job Notifications.
2
To delete job completion notifications:
l
To delete one notification, select the job, right-click, then select Delete.
l
To delete all notifications, select the jobs, right-click, then select Delete.
Using the Consolidated Job Status List
From the Schedule module, use the Consolidated Job Status panel to:
l
Filter the job list shown in the Consolidated Job Status List, see “Filtering Consolidated Job
Status List” on page 443.
442 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
l
Run Now. Run the scheduled job again with parameters used previously when the job failed.
See “Run a Scheduled Job Now” on page 444.
l
Modify job properties. See “Modifying Job Parameters” on page 447
l
Modify schedule properties. See “Modifying Schedules” on page 446
l
Modify event properties. See “Modifying Events” on page 441
l
Add schedules. See “Adding Schedules” on page 447
l
Delete schedules. See “Deleting Schedules” on page 446
ä To update a scheduled job list:
1
Select the Navigate , then Schedule , then Consolidated Job Status.
Select Filter from the toolbar. To filter the Consolidated Job Status List, see “Filtering
Consolidated Job Status List” on page 443.
The following table lists the column descriptions on the Consolidated Job Status List page.
Table 115
2
Consolidated Job Status List Columns
Job Name
Displays the job name.
Job Owner
Displays the job owner’s login id. A non-administrator user must have view access to display jobs.
Schedule Name
Displays the job schedule name.
Schedule Owner
Displays the scheduler owner’s login id. Only administrators can see schedules owned by others.
Event Name
Displays the event name.
Last Run Date
Displays the date the job last ran. If the schedule or event is inactive, this column displays Schedule Inactive or
Event Inactive.
Last Status
Displays the status from the last time the job ran.
Next Run Date
Displays the next date the job will run.
Optional: To delete schedules, select the schedule, then right-click and select Delete.
To select all schedules, click the check box at the top of the column.
Filtering Consolidated Job Status List
You can filter your job list using the filter criteria listed in Table 116. A particular filter is not set
when it is blank. The Consolidated Job Status List is sorted by the filter you selected in the Default
Sort Order field from the filter page.
ä To set filters and sort criteria for the Consolidated Job Status List:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Consolidated Job Status.
2
If default filter settings do not exist, select filter settings by selecting Filter from the toolbar. Filter dialog
is displayed.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 443
See Table 116 for more details on the filter criteria.
3
Determine the sort order by selecting the Default Sort Order from the drop-down list and the options
indicating ascending or descending order.
The default sort filter is the job name. For descriptions of sorting filters, see Table 116.
4
Click a button:
l
Apply - Saves your values for one session.
l
Save As Default - Saves your values as your default values.
l
Restore Defaults - Retrieves the values you last saved as your default values.
l
Cancel - Saves no values.
Table 116
Job Filters
Job Filter
Description
Job Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Job Owner
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Schedule Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Schedule Owner
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Event Name
Select Equals, Contains, Ends with, or Begins with and enter text.
Last Status
Select All, Is, or Is not from the first drop-down list and Successful or Cancelled from the second dropdown.
Last Run Date
Select the time period from the drop-down list.
Next Run Date
Select After, Between, or Before from the drop-down list and the year, month, and day for your selection.
Default Sort Order
Select a filter criteria from the drop-down list to sort the list. Select a radio button for ascending or
descending sort order.
Schedule State
Select the desired filter(s) for the schedule state. Active is the default.
Run a Scheduled Job Now
This functionality allows a user to run any job from Consolidated Job Status list. You can also
select multiple jobs to run at once. For applicable user rights required, see Table 117.
Table 117
User Privileges required for Run Now
Artifact
Job Type
User Rights
Generic Job
Simple
Administrator
Generic Job
Simple
Any user with lower than Modify and Run access
Generic Job
With Parameters
Schedule Manager with Modify and Run access
444 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Artifact
Job Type
User Rights
Interactive Reporting job
Simple
Schedule Manager with Modify and Run access
Interactive Reporting job
With parameters
Administrator
Interactive Reporting job
Simple
Any user with lower than Modify and Run access
Production Reporting job
Simple
Any user with lower than Modify and Run access
Production Reporting job
With parameters
Administrator
Production Reporting job
With DB connection
Schedule Manager with Modify and Run access
Production Reporting job
With DB connection
Administrator
ä To run a scheduled job now:
1
Select Navigate, then Schedule, then Consolidated Job Status.
2
Select a job which had been run successfully by the schedule with notifications enabled.
3
Right-click and select Run Now.
4
Do any of the following:
l
Go to Jobs Running page, verify that the job is running.
l
Go to Job Notifications page, check job's notification.
l
Open the output from Job Notifications page.
l
If you run a job when job service is busy, you can check the Job Queue module to see if
the job has been added to the top of the queue.
Managing Individual Job Schedules
ä To manage schedules:
1
From Explore, right-click a job and select Manage Job Schedules.
2
Review Schedules information:
Table 118
Schedules
Schedule Columns
Descriptions
Job Name
Name of job
Job Owner
Owner of job
Schedule Owner
Creator of schedule
Schedule Name
The name of the schedule
Description
A schedule description
Scheduling and Running Jobs 445
3
Schedule Columns
Descriptions
Event Name
Type of action
Next Run Date
Next scheduled run
Review Job Parameters information, select a job, right-click and select Show Parameters.
Table 119
Job Parameters
Job Parameters
Descriptions
Job Name
The name of the job
Job Type
Type of Interactive Reporting or Production Reporting job
Parameter Name
Name of parameter created for this job
Description
A parameter description
Ownership
Owner of parameter
Modifying Schedules
When your schedule needs changes, you can modify it.
ä To modify a schedule:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Consolidated Job Status.
A list of all jobs that you can access is displayed.
2
Under Job Name, locate the job.
3
Select the job, right-click and select Modify Schedule.
4
Change properties.
See “Scheduling Jobs” on page 436.
5
To deactivate or activate the schedule on the General Properties page toggle Active.
6
To modify more properties click Apply, otherwise click OK.
Deleting Schedules
ä To delete a schedule:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Consolidated Job Status.
A list of all jobs in the system is displayed.
2
Under Job Name, locate the schedule, right-click and select Delete.
446 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Adding Schedules
ä To add a schedule:
1
Do one of the following: .
l
Select Navigate, then Schedule, and then Consolidated Job Status
A list of all jobs in the system is displayed.
l
From Explorer, select a job.
2
Right-click and select Add Schedule.
3
Follow the instructions in “Scheduling Jobs” on page 436 starting on step 3 on page 437.
Viewing Job Parameters
ä To view job parameters, select Navigate, then Schedule, then Show Parameters. A list of all
jobs with schedules and parameters is displayed. See also, “Modifying Job Parameters” on
page 447 and “Deleting Job Parameters” on page 447.
Modifying Job Parameters
ä To modify job parameters:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Show Parameters.
A list of all jobs with schedules and parameters is displayed.
2
Select a job, right-click and select Modify.
3
Change properties and click OK.
Deleting Job Parameters
You can delete job parameters that are not being used by a schedule.
ä To delete job parameters:
1
Select Navigate , then Schedule , then Show Parameters.
A list of all jobs with schedules and parameters is listed.
2
Click the scheduled job.
3
Right-click and select Delete.
If no schedules are associated with it, the job parameter is deleted.
If schedules are associated with it, you must associate the schedule with other job parameters
by modifying the schedule.
Scheduling and Running Jobs 447
Retrieving Jobs
You can retrieve a Production Reporting job and its associated files.
ä To retrieve a Production Reporting job:
From Explore, right-click the job, and select Retrieve.
Scheduling Batches
Batch processing for Financial Reporting topics:
l
“Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 448
l
“Batch Deletion” on page 455
l
“Retrieving the Exported Output” on page 456
l
“Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches” on page 456
l
“Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler” on page 457
Batches are created, edited, and saved in EPM Workspace using the Batch Editor. You must have
a Global Administrator, Report Designer, Scheduler, or Content Publisher role in order to
perform these tasks. For role information, see the appendix in the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise
Performance Management System Security Administration Guide. Batches are used to group and
process sets of documents such as reports or books. You can send the output of a generated
batch to a printer. You can export batches as HTML or PDF files to an external directory. You
can e-mail users the exported output in PDF format.
Note: Oracle recommends that you print long reports or books in a batch. This keeps your
computer free while processing.
Scheduling Batches to Run
You schedule batches to run immediately or at a later date. During batch scheduling, you can
define the batch POV, set up e-mail notifications, and select the destinations of the generated
output when the batch is run. Destination types can include Print to a designated printer,
Snapshot to a designated repository folder, PDF to an external directory or attached to an email, and HTML to a designated external directory (Batch Bursting does not support HTML).
After selecting scheduled batch options, the batch is added to the batch queue from the Batch
Scheduler after a successful run.
The scheduler's batch bursting feature can run a batch for more than one member of a single
dimension on the batch POV for one data source, e-mail the PDFs generated to a recipient list,
and save the output to the file system or to the repository. For example, a batch scheduled to
run for New York and Houston can have the output for New York going to [email protected] and
the output for Houston going to [email protected] With batch bursting, you can use predefined
448 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
text functions for report labels and folder labels. You can create a Bursting Destination File (see
About the Bursting Destination File) to override default settings assigned to the batch.
About the Bursting Destination File
The Bursting Destination File contains the default settings for the scheduled batch. You can
periodically view the default settings as you navigate through the batch wizard. You can export
the Bursting File as a CSV file to specify output and permissions exceptions for a scheduled
batch, thus overriding the default settings defined in the Batch Wizard. The member settings in
the CSV Bursting Destination file can be appended to the member selections in the Batch Wizard.
For example, you may want to specify a different sub-folder for some reports, based on selected
members, or make some reports read-only. Only members that are valid for the selected
dimension are appended to the bursted file.
To edit the Bursting Destination File for a current batch, the administrator or designer exports
the file to a text editor or Excel, enters the members, if not already displayed, and edits any values
in the table. The values for each member in the dimension are: Subfolder Name, Financial
Reporting Object Name, E-mail Address, Group Name, Role Names, User Names, External Root
Folder for PDF.
Upon completion, the file must be imported into the repository (File , then Import , then File)
where it can be applied to a batch in the batch wizard. A sample Bursting Destination File is
stored in the Sample folder of your Reporting and Analysis installation.
Batch scheduling tasks:
l
“Selecting a Member for the Batch Point of View” on page 450
l
“Scheduling Job Bursting” on page 450
l
“Specifying the Batch Destination and Bursted Output Labels” on page 451
l
“Creating an E-mail List for Batch Bursting Recipients” on page 454
ä To schedule a batch to run:
1
Click Navigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select File , then New Scheduled Batch.
3
Enter a name and description for the scheduled batch.
4
Optional: To delete the batch from the scheduler after a successful run, select Delete Scheduled Batch
Entry from Scheduler if Completed Successfully.
5
Click Next to select a batch.
6
Select a batch and click Next. If required, Logon Credentials is displayed. Enter a User name and
Password and click OK (see “Providing Logon Credentials” on page 458)
7
For Start Time:
8
l
To start the scheduled batch immediately, click Now. Go to step 9.
l
To start the scheduled batch in the future, select Later, Start At Go to step 8.
To select the start time and date in the Start Time area:
Scheduling Batches to Run 449
a. In the upper left list boxes, enter the start time and the periodic time interval to run the
batch (for example, daily, weekly).
b. In the upper right drop-down lists, select a start date and end date.
9
Optional: If any of the reports and books in the batch have dimensions on the user POV, you can set
the member for those dimensions in the Scheduled Batch Point of View. For information, see “Selecting
a Member for the Batch Point of View” on page 450.
10 Optional: If you wish to use job bursting to run a batch for more than one member in a dimension on
the Batch POV, see “Scheduling Job Bursting” on page 450.
11 Click Next.
12 Change the default settings for the Destination of the batch file that you are running, and click Next.
13 To save the batch job in the Batch Scheduler with the settings you selected for the destination, click
Finish.
Selecting a Member for the Batch Point of View
Each scheduled batch has a POV based on all relevant dimensions for the reports in the batch.
If no reports or books have a member on the user POV, then there is no batch POV. When the
batch is added to the schedule, the user POV is specified as the default batch POV. You can
override the user POV settings by specifying a member for each dimension on the batch POV.
You must verify that the members selected in the batch POV are appropriate.
ä To select a member for the batch POV:
1
To arrive at Batch Scheduler, see “Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 448.
2
From theScheduled Batch Point of View area, click the dimension for which you want to select a
member. Member Selection is displayed.
3
Select the member that you want to use for the POV and click OK. For more information on Member
Selection, see Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting.”
4
Repeat step 2 and step 3 for each POV dimension.
5
Click Next to complete the batch destination of the batch. See “Specifying the Batch Destination and
Bursted Output Labels” on page 451.
Scheduling Job Bursting
With each scheduled batch, you can use job bursting to run a report on more than one member
in a dimension. When you select only a dimension for job bursting, the setting for that dimension
on the batch POV is disabled. The unselected batch POV members remain active and are
included with the batch. (If no reports or books have a member on the user POV, then there is
no batch POV or job bursting).
450 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
ä To schedule batch bursting:
1
Use the batch scheduler wizard to navigate to the Start Time screen (see “Scheduling Batches to Run”
on page 448).
2
In the Bursting Options area, select Run Batch for multiple members in the dimension, then select
the dimension for job bursting.
3
, then select the members for job bursting. For information on Member Selection, see
Click
Chapter 8, “Using Financial Reporting.”
4
In Bursting File, if you have created a CSV Bursting Recipients list for this batch and imported it into
the repository, click
5
to select the file.
Click Copy Members to add the members defined in the CSV Bursting Recipients list to the Select
Members list.
Note: Only members that are valid for the selected dimension are added.
6
Click Next, To continue to batch destination, see “Specifying the Batch Destination and Bursted Output
Labels” on page 451.
Specifying the Batch Destination and Bursted Output Labels
The Destinations area specifies the type and location of the output for the scheduled batch. Select
any combination of the following output options for your batch destination:
Note: Batch Bursting only supports output to Snapshot Reports, Books and PDF files; output
to a printer and HTML are not supported for Batch Bursting.
l
l
l
Snapshot reports or snapshot books—You can save snapshot reports and books within the
originating folder (default location) or another folder in the repository. You can assign file
permissions for viewing snapshot reports or books to users, groups, and roles.
Print—You can select a printer and specify printer properties. The Batch Scheduler shows
all printers available to the Print Server. Print Server configuration is specified in the
fr_repserver.properties file on the Financial Reporting Server computer.
Export as PDF—PDF files can be saved within a folder on the Scheduler Server or exported
to an external directory. PDF files can be attached to an e-mail. Separate e-mail files can be
sent for each report or sent once in a zip file.
Scheduling Batches to Run 451
Note: To specify a maximum attachment size for e-mail output, use the property,
MaxEmailAttachmentSize within fr_scheduler.properties file located in
BIPlus/Lib on the scheduler machine. This value, entered in kilobytes, is used to
split reports into multiple e-mails to conform to the maximum size attachments
allowed per e-mail. The default is set to unlimited (0 (zero) or -ve). When sending
an oversized attachment containing a single PDF file or numerous files, the e-mail
fails to deliver and the sender is notified. For a single oversized file attachment, the
sender can manually deliver the attachment by copying it from the scheduler server
or external directories. For numerous files attachments, the sender can rerun the batch
from the Batch Scheduler and select the option of sending individual e-mails for each
file. This property applies to bursting and non-bursting output.
l
Export as HTML—HTML files can be saved within a folder on the Scheduler Server or
exported to an external directory. Job bursting is not supported for HTML files.
ä To select batch destinations:
1
From the Destinations area, select any actions:
l
Save As Snapshot in Repository: If you select this option, you enable the In Same Folder
as Original Object and In Another Folder options. Perform an action:
m
m
Select In Same Folder as Original Object to save snapshots and snapshot books
within the same folder as the original report or book in the repository.
Select In Another Folder to save the output to another location in the repository.
Click Folder to select a destination folder in the repository, then click OK.
Note: Selecting Save As Snapshot in Repository enables File Permissions. File
Permissions allows you to assign access to users and groups for snapshot
output. For information on assigning access permissions, see Chapter 9,
“Designing Documents for Financial Reporting Batches and Books.”
l
l
Print to—The default printer is displayed. Select a different printer and printer settings.
Export as PDF—Export the batch as a PDF file on the scheduler server. To export to an
external directory, select Export to an external directory. To attach the reports as e-mail
attachments, select E-mail as PDF Attachment(s). To zip the e-mail attachments, select
Zip PDF(s). To print annotations with the report, select Print Annotations, then select
Details to specify how annotations should be printed. See “Setting Annotation Printing
Preferences” on page 74.
Note: Annotation printing preferences are one-time setups for a specific batch; they are
not saved as global preferences.
l
Export as HTML—Export the batch as an HTML file on the scheduler server. To export
to an external directory, select Export to an external directory. This option does not
support batch bursting.
452 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
Note: When Export to an external directory is selected, the enabled drop-down menu
is populated by folder locations specified in the fr_scheduler.properties
file in the <FinancialReporting>\lib directory on the Hyperion Financial
Reporting Scheduler Server computer. Here is a sample from that file: #
ExportFolderLabel1=ExportFolder1 # ExportFolderPath1=\\\\
{machine name}\\{export folder name} A system administrator must
determine all the folders where exports are permitted. Contact your system
administrator to specify a different folder location.
l
Bursted Output Labels — The Object Label and SubFolder Label fields display two
default text functions that can optionally be used to identify the report and the report's
to select additional text functions. Click
subfolder names, respectively. Click
test the functions. The available functions for bursted reports are:
m
to
<<MemberName()>> — Returns the name of the member being bursted. This
function takes no parameters.
m
<<MemberAlias()>> — Returns the alias of the member being bursted. This
function takes no parameters
m
<<MemberDescription()>> — Returns the description of the member being
bursted. This function takes no parameters.
m
<<BatchPovMember(DataSrcName , DimName)>> — Returns the name of the
POV member being bursted where DataSrcName is the name of a data source of
the desired POV (a batch can point to two or more POVs) and DimName is the name
of the dimension under the given POV whose member name is to be extracted.
m
m
m
m
m
<<BatchPovAlias(DataSrcName , DimName)>> — Returns the alias of the POV
member of the report being bursted where DataSrcName is the name of a data
source of the desired POV (a batch can point to two or more POVs), and
DimName is the name of the dimension under the given POV whose member
description is to be de extracted.
<<BatchPovDescription (DataSrcName, DimName)>> — Returns the description
of the POV member of the report being bursted, where DataSrcName is the name
of a data source of the desired POV (a batch can point to two or more POVs), and
DimName is the name of the dimension under the given POV whose member
description is to be extracted.
<<FinancialReportingObjectName()>> — Returns the name of the Financial
Reporting object being bursted. This is typically the report name. This function
takes no parameters.
<<Financial ReportingObjectDescription()>> — Returns the description of the
Financial Reporting object being bursted. This is typically the report description.
This function takes no parameters.
<<Date(“format”)>> — Returns the date and time that an online report is
populated with data, or the date and time a snapshot report is saved, where
format is a list of characters enclosed in quotes that define the format of the date
and time. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide, Using
Functions chapter for a list of all the format date and time characters.
Scheduling Batches to Run 453
l
2
l
l
Preview Bursting List — Select to preview the CSV bursting list. The list shows the
default settings selected for members in the job bursting batch. For information, see
About the Bursting Destination File.
Click Next.
If your scheduled batch includes e-mail PDF attachments with job bursting, the PDF
Attachment Email dialog box is displayed. For instructions, see “Creating an E-mail List for
Batch Bursting Recipients” on page 454.
If your scheduled batch includes e-mail PDF attachments without job bursting, the
Scheduled Batch Details dialog box is displayed. For instructions, see “Setting Up E-mail
Notifications” on page 454.
Creating an E-mail List for Batch Bursting Recipients
You can create a recipient list, a subject, and a message for recipients who will receive e-mails
with PDF attachments through batch bursting.
ä To create an e-mail recipient list:
1
Click Select to select and/or add e-mails addresses to the recipient list. For information, see “Selecting
E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling” on page 455.
2
You can accept the default text, or customize Message Subject and Message Body. Click
text function, and
to add a
to test the function.
3
Click Preview Bursting List to view the default settings for the POV members.
4
Click Next to notify recipients on batch job status by e-mail. For information, see “Setting Up E-mail
Notifications” on page 454.
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
You can send a status of Successful and/or Unsuccessful by e-mail when batches scheduled for
PDF output are completed. For unbursted batches, the e-mail contains the notification and PDF
attachments; for bursted batches, the e-mail contains only the notification.
ä To set up e-mail notifications:
1
To arrive at Scheduled Batch Details, start the batch wizard. See“Scheduling Batches to Run” on page
448.
2
To notify recipients of a successful batch run, select If Successful, E-mail Details to and click Select to
add e-mail recipients (for information, see “Selecting E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling” on page
455). Enter a short remark in Message Subject.
To notify recipients of an unsuccessful batch run, select If Unsuccessful, E-mail Details to
and click Select to add e-mail recipients (for information see “Selecting E-mail Addresses
for Batch Scheduling” on page 455). Enter a short remark in Message Subject.
454 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
3
Optional. For job bursting batches, click Preview Bursting List to view and export the Bursting Destination
file. This file contains default settings selected for the members in the bursted batch. For information
on this file, see About the Bursting Destination File.
Selecting E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling
You can set up the scheduler to send an e-mail when a scheduled batch is completed successfully
or unsuccessfully. The e-mail includes status details of the batch and optionally the PDF output
of the batch. You can select, add, or delete e-mail addresses.
ä To select recipient e-mails:
1
To arrive at Select E-mail Recipients for Scheduling, start the batch wizard. See “Scheduling Batches
to Run” on page 448.
2
In Available Recipients, select an e-mail address and click
l
l
.
To add new recipient e-mails, click Add. In Add Address to List of Recipients, add e-mail
addresses, separated with a comma and click OK.
To Remove recipients' e-mail, select an e-mail address and click Remove
Batch Deletion
You can delete batches in these ways:
l
l
If you have a Global Administrator, Report Designer, Scheduler, or Content Publisher role
and proper file permissions, you can delete batches from the repository.
You can delete scheduled batches from the Batch Scheduler.
Deleting Batches from the Repository
You can delete numerous batches from the repository at once. To delete batches, see Chapter 3,
“Exploring and Managing Items ”.
Deleting Batches from the Batch Scheduler
During batch scheduling, you have the option of deleting the scheduled batch from the scheduler
if completed successfully. If this option is not selected, the successful batches are saved in the
Batch Scheduler. Batches with an “error” status are always saved in the Batch Scheduler. All
batches can also be deleted from the Batch Scheduler.
ä To delete scheduled batches from the Batch Scheduler:
1
ClickNavigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select the batches for deletion.
Selecting E-mail Addresses for Batch Scheduling 455
Tip: To select multiple batches hold down the CTRL key and click each batch in the list.
3
Select Edit , then Delete.
4
When prompted, click Yes.
Automatic Removal of Batch Scheduler Results
You can configure the Batch Scheduler to automatically remove batch results that exceed a
specified future age. For example, you can remove batch results that are more than a week old
and any associated result files that are stored on the scheduler server.
The automatic removal option is turned off by default. You can enable it by editing the
fr_scheduler.properties file to specify how old the results should be before they are deleted
and how often the system checks for them. The fr_scheduler.properties file is in the
<Financial Reporting>\lib directory on the Hyperion Financial Reporting Scheduler
Server computer.
Retrieving the Exported Output
After a scheduled batch is run, you can retrieve a zipped HTML or PDF output file using the
Retrieve Output option to rename and relocate the zipped file to your local drive from the
scheduler server’s \data\SchedulerOutput\Output directory. You must have access to the batch
to retrieve the exported output.
Note: If you delete a batch after scheduling one, you cannot retrieve the output. Retrieval is only
valid for non-bursted batch files.
ä To retrieve output:
1
Click Navigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select a completed scheduled batch that produced exported output.
3
Select Action , then Retrieve Output. The file is presented as a zip file.
4
Select the files to export and click Extract to export the files to a directory on your machine.
Viewing the Status of Scheduled Batches
Scheduled batches can be viewed in a list format. Items such as the start time, destination, status,
and so on that occurred while running the batch are displayed in a row and column format.
ä To view the status of a scheduled batch that has run:
Click Navigate, then Schedule, then Batch Scheduler. The Batch Scheduler displays the list of
batches that have run or are scheduled to run. You can click any heading text to sort the batches
456 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
in the list. Headings include: Name, Description, Start Time, Destination, Status, user ID, and
Path.
Tip: Click any column heading to perform a sort.
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch
You can review the details of a particular batch, which includes a summary and server activity
in Show Details.
ä To view the details of a scheduled batch:
1
Click Navigate , thenSchedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select a batch.
3
Select Action , then Show Details. Show Details provides the following information:
l
Summary information:
m
l
4
Destination of the batch
Server activity:
m
Start time of the batch
m
Exception messages
m
End time and date
m
Whether the batch was ran successfully and if e-mail was sent
To copy the details to the Clipboard:
a. Right-click in Show Details and select Select All.
b. Right-click and select Copy.
5
Click Close.
Preparing Batch Files for the Command Line Scheduler
You can use an external scheduler to schedule batch jobs in EPM Workspace. You automate the
process of launching batches using an external scheduler or launching batches after an external
event occurs, such as the completion of a consolidation. For more information, see the Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Note: For Financial Reporting the external batch command line scheduler only supports a single
batch request. If you attempt to process multiple batches, only the batch in the first line
is executed by the external batch command line scheduler.
Viewing Details of a Scheduled Batch 457
ä To export an existing batch file for command line scheduling:
1
Click Navigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select a completed scheduled batch that was successful and produced exported
output.
3
Select Action , then Export for Command Line Scheduling.
4
In File Download, save the XML file in the <FR>\bin directory as mybatch.xml where mybatch is
the name of your batch input file. For more information, see the Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
ä To create a batch file for command line scheduling:
1
Click Navigate , then Schedule , then Batch Scheduler.
2
In Batch Scheduler, select Action , then Create File for Command Line Scheduling.
3
In Schedule Batch, select a batch file and click Next. To complete the remaining steps of this dialog,
see “Scheduling Batches to Run” on page 448.
4
At the end of batch creation, File Download is displayed.
5
Save the XML file in the <FR>\bin directory as mybatch.xml where mybatch is the name of your
batch input file. For more information, see the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s
Guide.
Providing Logon Credentials
Logon credentials must be provided in order to run a scheduled batch at a future date.
ä To enter logon credentials:
1
Enter a user name and Password for the Financial Reporting server.
2
Enter a user name and Password for the Database Connection Name you are using.
3
Select OK.
458 Scheduling Jobs and Batches
15
Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
In This Chapter
Interactive Reporting Jobs............................................................................... 459
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties........................................................... 460
Selecting Database-Connection File Options.......................................................... 464
Setting Job Parameters.................................................................................. 466
Job Parameter Options .................................................................................. 468
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job ............................................................ 473
Interactive Reporting Jobs
Interactive Reporting jobs are created with Interactive Reporting Studio and defined by
properties and parameters. You can import, run, and schedule Interactive Reporting jobs.
Import Requirements
To import an Interactive Reporting, you need this information:
l
l
l
Interactive Reporting database connection file names, to connect to the database for
processing queries
Custom calendar name, if not using the default calendar, to resolve dynamic date parameters
Filter names and values, if running a job with parameters that must be specified. (See
“Parameters” on page 460.)
l
E-mail addresses if sending results directly to users
l
Output directory name if sending results to a directory
l
Database create-and-insert privileges if processing results to a database table
l
Database grant access if giving additional users access to a database table.
See “Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job” on page 473.
Pass-Through Feature
Pass-through enables users to log on once and access data sources without additional
authentication. Pass-through is enabled per authentication system and per Interactive Reporting
Interactive Reporting Jobs 459
database connection file. Pass-through can be used for foreground jobs and all Interactive
Reporting documents.
After your administrator enables pass-through for authentication systems, you can enable or
disable it for Interactive Reporting database connection files.
Parameters
Interactive Reporting job parameters include runtime values, processing options, and joboutput options. Processing and job-output options are defined using cycles and actions. A cycle
contains job actions and job filters. Actions define how documents are processed and results are
distributed. Filters are the values for the run-time variables. Job cycles are named and associated
with jobs.
When importing a job, you specify whether users can create cycles (multiple-cycle jobs) or use
only the default cycle (single-cycle jobs).
l
l
Single-cycle jobs—Limited to one cycle. The default processing and printing actions are
used. All single-cycle job results are processed to file as job output. The job output is listed
with the job in the Browse item list.
Multiple-cycle jobs—Processed according to how many cycles are defined. Cycles can be
created using processing, printing, and exporting actions. You can design jobs to process as
many times as necessary at each scheduled run, each process having different parameters
(or filters) and job output options.
Example
Your document queries sales transactions within a region. The region is specified through a
variable filter on the query to make the data available to each sales manager on Monday
mornings.
When scheduling the job, you can add a job cycle for each region. You can resolve the variable
and filter for each run to retrieve numbers for only one region, and e-mail the numbers from
each run directly to the regional manager. All job-run cycles are part of one job, which is easier
to track and update.
Supporting Exceptions in Interactive Reporting Programs
This section is for Interactive Reporting programmers who support exception notifications to
users. (Users can receive e-mail notifications or see a graphic indicator on the Exceptions
Dashboard on Personal Pages.)
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties
These topics describe the properties for Interactive Reporting importing and modifying
Interactive Reporting jobs:
l
Setting Advanced Options
460 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
l
Setting Data Source and Query Properties
l
Setting Interactive Reporting General Properties and Options
l
Setting Job Defaults
For details on general properties and advanced options, see “Working with Properties” on page
134.
ä To access properties:
1
From Explore, select an item.
2
Select File , then Properties.
Setting Advanced Options
In addition to the advanced option detailed in “Working with Properties” on page 134, two
options specific to Interactive Reporting jobs are available.
Option
Description
MIME Type
Displays the file type.
Priority
Job priority when run:
l
High
l
Normal — default
Run this job in the background
Enable running of your job in the background.
Hidden File
Set file to hidden.
Auto-delete file on this date
Select a time period and enter a number to specify when output is automatically deleted.
Auto-delete job outputs after
Deleted job output after a specified time. Enter a number, and select a time element:
l
Minutes
l
Hours
l
Days
l
Weeks
If exceptions are generated, allow users to
add to their Exceptions Dashboard
Enables users to report exceptions to Exceptions Dashboards.
Automatically generate keywords
Automatically generates keywords in <Assigned Keywords>.
.
l
To add, enter keywords and click
l
To remove, select from <Assigned Keyword> and click
.
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties 461
Setting Data Source and Query Properties
Interactive Reporting database connection files are used by Interactive Reporting jobs and files
to connect to databases. Queries in a document can use different databases. In addition, an
Interactive Reporting database connection file can be specified for each query of an file or job.
Before you can import files and jobs, you need access to all Interactive Reporting database
connections that your document uses. Otherwise, the required database connection files are not
displayed in the connection list. Ask your administrator for access to the required Interactive
Reporting database connections.
If you use pass-through, see “Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting, DatabaseConnection Files” on page 464.
Note: If no Interactive Reporting database connection file is specified for a query, users accessing
the document cannot process the query unless it uses only local results.
ä To access data source and query properties, from Properties, click Interactive Reporting on
the left.
Property
Description
Apply Option to All
Queries
Select a method for obtaining user names and password for queries:
l
Use Default User Name & Password—Uses the defaults for database access.
l
Prompt for User Name & Password—Prompts the user for a user name and password per data connection. The
word prompt is displayed in the user name and password fields.
l
Specify Now—Prompts the importer for a user name and password for all queries. The user name is displayed
in all user name fields. The password is not retractable.
You can override individual username or password combinations by selecting a method for each query connection.
Connection
Select an Interactive Reporting database connection file to use the query. For queries using only local results, select
<No Connection>.
If you are using pass-through, see “Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting, Database-Connection Files”
on page 464.
User name
Enter a user name, set one globally with the Connecting to Data Sources list; or set a one individually with the
options list.
Password
Enter the password to use for this query; or set globally with the Connecting to Data Sources list; or set individually
with the options list.
Options
Set the username and password using the selected method (default or prompted)
Query Connections
and Processing
Validate all queries that you process at runtime.
462 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Setting Interactive Reporting General Properties and Options
The properties page for an Interactive Reporting job contains general properties and the
Interactive Reporting options.
ä To access general properties, from Properties, click the Properties tab at the top.
Table 120
General Properties
Property
Description
Calendar
Calendar selected for resolving dynamic date parameters.
Users running this job can
define their own cycles and
actions
Allow users to define cycles and parameters for the job, thus creating a multiple-cycle job. The default is
not selected (single-cycle jobs).
Only single-cycle jobs can be viewed in View Manager.
Note: If you select the option now, you can deselect it later. If you do not select it now, you can never select
it.
Table 121
Interactive Reporting Options
Option
Description
Enable ADR
Browser refreshes the document automatically.
Setting Job Defaults
Job Defaults are detailed in Table 122 gives you the option to include HTML as a default, joboutput format and to set default, job-parameter values. See “Setting Job Parameters” on page
466.
ä To access Job Defaults:
From Properties, click the Job Defaults tab at the top.
Table 122
Job Defaults
Default
Description
Include static HTML as a
default output format
Select to make HTML and the default output format (the standard Interactive Reporting document) your
default output format.
Set Values
Set default job-parameter values. See For field definitions to set values, see “Setting Job Parameters”
on page 466“Modifying Job Parameters” on page 466.
Modify Filter
Set default filter options. See “Filter Options” on page 468.
Set Locale
Set locale properties:
(Interactive Reporting)
l
Language — Determines the sort order and the job log language.
l
Country — Determines the data format (for example, the date/time format).
Setting Interactive Reporting Job Properties 463
Click OK to close Properties. You can schedule the job later from the Browse web module. See
“Scheduling Jobs and Batches” on page 431.
To complete the Import dialog wizard for Interactive Reporting (.bqy) files, see “Importing Files
as Jobs” on page 126.
Selecting Database-Connection File Options
Interactive Reporting jobs and files use database-connection files to connect to databases. An
Interactive Reporting, database-connection file must be specified for each query of an Interactive
Reporting file or job, except for queries that use only local results, so users can process the query.
Pass-Through Using Multiple, Interactive Reporting,
Database-Connection Files
If enabled by your administrator, pass-through enables you to access data sources without
entering a username and password for each data source. For pass-through to work for Interactive
Reporting jobs or files associated with multiple, Interactive Reporting database connections,
these conditions are necessary:
l
Interactive Reporting database connections is configured for pass-through.
l
Credentials required to access each data source are identical.
Note: Oracle recommends selecting similarly configured Interactive Reporting, database-
connection files when importing Interactive Reporting documents. To enable users
doing imports to make this selection, Interactive Reporting database connection
names should indicate whether the database connection is configured for passthrough.
When Interactive Reporting jobs and files with some but not all Interactive Reporting database
connections configured for pass-through are processed:
l
l
Interactive Reporting database connections configured for pass-through—Users are not
prompted for logon credentials.
Interactive Reporting database connections not configured for pass-through—The
credential option selected when the job or file was imported (prompt user, specify now, or
use the default) is used.
Caution!
For pass-through processing of all queries, Interactive Reporting database
connections must have identical database credentials.
Setting Processing and Metadata Options
Three options types specific to Interactive Reporting, database-connection file are offered:
processing and metadata.
464 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Processing Open Catalog Extension (OCE) options store database connection information.
Table 123
Processing Database-Connection Options
Option
Description
Data source access
Select a method for the Interactive Reporting database-connection file to use a username and password
when a job is run or a file is processed.
l
Use the username/password specified below—You enter the database username and password.
l
Prompt for user name/password—You are prompted for the database username and password when
the job is run or scheduled or the file is processed. This is the default when pass-through is disabled.
User name
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter the database user name.
Password
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter in the database password.
Allow pass-through where
end user’s authentication
system is enabled for it
Select to allow pass-through credentials for data source access.
Metadata options store a file that contains extra information about the Interactive Reporting
database connection.
Table 124
Metadata Options
Option
Description
This Interactive Reporting
database connection (.
oce) uses metadata
defined in another
connection
Metadata is used and the metadata connection is not specified in the Interactive Reporting, databaseconnection file. All fields in this group are disabled if this field is not selected.
Select metadata
connection
If metadata is used and the metadata connection is not specified in the Interactive Reporting, database
connection file, select the Interactive Reporting database-connection file for the metadata.
Metadata access
Select one of the following:
l
Use processing OCE’s credential for metadata connection – Use that username and password associated
with the Interactive Reporting database connection to access the metadata.
l
Use specified user name/password – Use the specified user name and password to access the metadata.
User name
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter the database user name.
Password
If Data source access is set to use this field, enter in the database password.
Table 125
Interactive Reporting Database Connection
Option
Description
Connection Software
Connection software name used by this Interactive ReportingInteractive Reporting database connection file (.oce)
to connect to the database server, for example, ODBC or EssbaseOracle Essbase.
Selecting Database-Connection File Options 465
Option
Description
Database
Type of the database or database connectivity to which this Interactive Reporting Connection file (.oce) is used to
connect, for example ORA8, Essbase, ODBC, OLEDB and so on.
Host
Identifier or alias for the specific information needed to connect to the client, for example, host name or DSN.
To complete the Import dialog wizard for Interactive Reporting Database Connection (.oce)
files, see “Importing Files” on page 125.
Setting Job Parameters
With single-cycle jobs, job parameters contain job variables filters. With multiple-cycle jobs, job
parameters contain job variables or filters and job cycles, which contain processing options and
job actions.
Note: You can create job parameters only when creating or modifying a job schedule or running
a job.
Setting Single-Cycle Job Parameters
Only single-cycle jobs with variables filters have job parameters.
ä To set job parameters for a single-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1
From Explore, right-click the Interactive Reporting job, and select Run Job.
This job is stored in a folder to which you have Run Job access rights. The Job Parameters
window displays the parameter values that are set.
2
Select a job parameter definition.
3
Click Go to use the definition as is or click Edit to modify it.
4
If you clicked Edit, proceed to the following topic.
Modifying Job Parameters
The following procedure assumes that you clicked edit in the preceding procedure.
ä To edit a job parameter definition:
1
Under Job Parameters next to Define Job Parameters starting with and just to the right of Go, click
Edit.
2
From Show Parameters, select a Job Name.
Right-click and selectModify .
3
From the Properties dialog, in Name, enter a name.
466 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
4
In Description, enter a description.
5
To change owner for this job, select Change Owner.
6
Select the new owner and clickOK. For additional information, see “Changing Ownership of Artifacts”
on page 135.
7
Under Set Local, change the language:
l
In Language, select the language.
l
In Country, select a country.
8
Optional: Modify filters (available only if filters exist in the file). See “Filter Options” on page 468.
9
Take one action:
l
Select Save as my default
l
To save your job parameters, select Save, select parameter type, and enter a name.
10 Optional: Click Permissions in the left pane of the properties dialog to change access permissions. For
more information, see “Setting Permissions” on page 129.
Setting Multiple-Cycle Job Parameters
When creating job parameters for multiple-cycle jobs, you can save the cycles and the job
parameters associated with the job that you are running or scheduling.
Note: You can create job parameters only when creating or modifying job schedules or running
jobs.
ä To set job parameters for multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1
From Explore, right-click the Interactive Reporting job, and select Run Job.
This Interactive Reporting job is stored in a folder to which you have Run Job access rights.
The Job Parameters window shows the parameter values that are set.
2
Under Cycles, you can perform the following:
l
To add a cycle click Go.
l
To modify cycle, click Modify, or to add new cycles, click Go.
m
Under Define Cycle, enter cycle information:
o
o
o
3
In Cycle Name, enter a name.
Select Save Job Output with the job or Save job output in another folder and
enter a file path.
Click Edit Cycle Permissions for permissions access.
l
To copy, click Copy.
l
If filters exist, see “Filter Options” on page 468.
Select Process Options. See “Process Options” on page 470.
Setting Job Parameters 467
The connection file and database to which you are connected determine whether you can
process the results to a database table.
4
Select Action.
For details on action options, see Table 128.
5
Click OK.
6
Select Save Job Parameters, and enter a name.
Job Parameter Options
This following topics provide details on Interactive Reporting, job-parameter options:
l
Filter options—For single-cycle and multiple-cycle jobs
l
Processing options—For multiple-cycle jobs only
l
Actions options—For multiple-cycle jobs only
Filter Options
In Interactive Reporting Studio, filters enable you to control how much data is processed and
displayed during relational or OLAP database queries.
Query filters which are created initially in Interactive Reporting Studio, can be static or variable.
Static filter values cannot be changed. You can change variable filter values at runtime from Set
Values. The Set Values area displays information for relational and OLAP databases.
These topics detail the information displayed in the Set Values area during relational or OLAP
database queries:
l
Setting Filter Values for Relational Databases
l
Setting Filter and Slicer Values for OLAP Queries
Setting Filter Values for Relational Databases
The Set Values area displays the values for the filters.
ä To access properties:
1
From Explore, select an item.
2
Right-click a job and selectRun Job.
Properties is displayed.
Option
Description
Query Name
(Read-only) Query name
Filter Name
(Read-only) Name of the field that the filter is on from the Interactive Reporting job
468 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Option
Description
Operator
(Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, or >
Values
(Read-only) The values that the filter uses (Variable system values such as $USER, are acceptable. The values are
from the database that the query is using.)
Ignore
Disables the filter when the query is processed
Don’t Prompt
Disables prompting for runtime values. (A dynamic value, such as a system variable can be used for a value(s).
This option essentially changes the variable filter to a static filter with fixed values.)
Modify Filter
Enables modification of a selected filter.
Include nulls
Enables inclusion of an “is null” condition in the SQL sent to the database when the query is processed.
Operator
(Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, and >
Show values
Retrieves from the database all available values associated with the item you can consider and select from the
range of values when applying a filter.
Custom values
Lists available values saved with the filter or read from a file, you can select values from a pre-defined pool. You
can create and save a custom list with each filter.
Setting Filter and Slicer Values for OLAP Queries
You can set OLAP variable filters and slicers when importing or scheduling a job with an OLAP
query. In the query, you can filter data on cube dimension levels to be displayed in the top or
side labels of the query.
Slicers are filters on a dimension that are not in top or side labels but are visible in the data
displayed. The filters list on Set Values displays the slicers last.
Note: When modifying filters, you cannot remove the last filter. You need at least one filter value
per filter.
ä To access filter and slicer values:
1
From Explore, select
an Interactive Reporting job.
2
Select Run Job.
3
Click Go to add a schedule.
4
Enter the schedule properties and click Next until you can define the value and filter options.
Job Parameter Options 469
Table 126
Option
Description
Set Values
(MDD)
OLAP Query Name — (Read-only) Query name
Filter On — (Read-only) The dimension level on which the filter is applied
Operator Type — (Read-only) The type that is set
Data Operator — (Read-only) The operator that the filter uses, such as =, <, and >. (Slicers have no data operators.
)
Value(s) — (Read-only) The values that the filter uses (Variable system values such as $USER are acceptable. The
values are from the database that the query is using.)
Ignore — Disables the filter when the query is processed
Don’t Prompt — Disables prompting for runtime values. (A dynamic value such as a system variable can be used for
a value. This option essentially changes the variable filter to a static filter with fixed values.)
Modify Filter
Lists OLAP Query Name/Filter On values. Toggles filter list to filters applied for selected OLAP Query section and filter.
Operator
Type
Availability determined by the database:
l
Select Members From Database
l
Select By Measure
l
Top N
l
Bottom N
l
Top Sum
l
Bottom Sum
l
Top N%
l
Bottom N%
l
Select Members
l
User Defined Attributes
l
Substitution Variables
Available operator types are displayed in the filter list. Slicers have no operator types.
Process Options
Process options, are displayed in the section below the Modify Filters options. The connection
file and database to which you connect determine whether you can process the results to a
database table. You need Create and Insert privileges on the database to process to a database
table.
ä To set process options for a multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1
From Explore, right-click the job and select Run Job.
2
Click Go to add another cycle to this job.
3
Click Process Options (+) to display all process options.
470 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Table 127
Option
Description
Save job output with the job
For storing the job output in the folder containing the job
Save job output in another folder
For specifying an output folder
Process results to Interactive
Reporting file
For processing queries to the Interactive Reporting file Results section
Process results to database table
For creating a database table to store the data set. (Items on the Request line become the
column headings. You can append columns to the table and query it. You need Create and
Insert privileges on the database to process to a database table.)
Query
For selecting the query to process to a database table.
Table Name
For entering the name of the table that you are creating or to which you are appending columns
(See your database administrator if you want to use a new table.)
Create a table for each run,
appending date to table name
For creating a table for each job run and appending the date to its name
Delete and recreate table for each
job run
For deleting the old table and creates a table for each job run (Runs use the same table name.
)
Create table on initial run, and
then append data to existing table
For creating a table on the initial run and adding data to the table
Grant access to:
For entering additional usernames (separated by commas) (You need Grant privileges to use
this field. If Grant Access to is not selected, the table is granted only to your user name.)
Action Options for Multiple-Cycle Jobs
The action is the output method. The options on the actions page vary depending on the action.
Actions and items to which they apply:
l
l
l
l
Export—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, OLAPQuery, and an entire document
as a web page
Save Document—Entire Interactive Reporting file
Print—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery (Available if the
administrator defined a printer for Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive Reporting Studio)
Import Document—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, OLAPQuery, and an entire
document as a web page.
l
E-mail Section—Dashboard, Report, Results, Chart, Pivot, and OLAPQuery
l
E-mail Document—Entire Interactive Reporting file
Note: A cycle can have only one Save As Job Output action. It can have multiple save actions
but can be saved as a file on only some output folders.
Job Parameter Options 471
ä To set action options for a multiple-cycle, Interactive Reporting job:
1
From Explore, right-click the job, and select Run Job.
2
Click Go to add another cycle to this job.
3
From the actions list, select a value and click Go.
Table 128
Export Action Options
Option
Description
Section
Section to be saved, printed, mailed, or exported.
Filename
Export file name (no extension)
Format
Export file format:
l
Microsoft Office Web Archive (*.mhtml)
l
Excel (*.xls)
l
HTML (*.htm)
l
Lotus 1-2-3 (*.wks)
l
Text (Tab Delimited)(*.txt)
l
Text (Comma Delimited)(*.csv)
l
Adobe Acrobat (*.pdf)
l
Graphics file (*.jpg)
Note: The choices depend on the export section type and text port action type.
Export as job output
For exporting the section to the current job folder in the repository. (The filename is not used with this
option.)
Save as job output
For saving the section to the current job folder in the repository. (The file name is not used with this
option.)
Output Directory
The directory for saving the export file or Interactive Reporting document
Append Unique Identifier
to Filename
For appending the job ID# and report cycle name to the saved document or export file; ensures that
the file is recognizable if similar files are saved to one directory.
Append Date to Filename
For appending the date (year, month, and day) to the saved document or exported file
Save Results with
Document
For saving Results section contents with the document
Save Computed Values with
Document
For saving the computed values with the document.
Save in Compressed
Format
For saving the job file in Interactive Reporting, compressed-file format.
Send Files
For including the scheduled file in an e-mail message
Send Results
For including Results section contents with the e-mailed document
Send Computed Values
For including computed values with the e-mailed document.
472 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
Option
Description
Send Compressed
For sending the saved job file in Interactive Reporting compressed-file format.
Additional Message
Enter e-mail message text.
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job
This example illustrates importing and scheduling of an Interactive Reporting job. In this
example, you import and schedule sample1.bqy to run once per quarter.
ä To import sample1.bqy:
1
Navigate to the folder to which to import the job.
2
Select File , then Import , then File as Job.
3
In File, click Browse to search for the file sample1.bqy. Click Next.
4
For Query, on Connecting to Data Sources, under Connection, select Sample for the Query/
DataModel name called SalesQuery, and click Next.
5
For Interactive Reporting Job Properties, select Users running this job can define their own cycles
and actions, and click Next.
6
For Job Defaults, set General Properties and Locale and click Next.
7
On Permissions,
give the World group access to sample1.bqy.
a. Under Users, Groups, and Roles, click Update List.
b. Select a user and click
.
c. Under Selected Users, Groups, and Roles, select the user and click Edit.
d. On Permissions, select the access permissions level for the job and the job output, and
set the adaptive state.
l
Access to Job—Full Control
l
Adaptive state—View
e. Click Finish.
Permissions is displayed.
8
Click Finish and Schedule.
9
On General Properties, in Name, enter Quarterly, and click Next.
10 On Job Parameters, click Next.
11 On Cycles, by Add another cycle to this job, click Go.
12 Define a cycle:
l
Under Define Cycle, in Cycle Name, enter Weekly.
Example: Importing and Scheduling a Job 473
l
Under Add a(n) (blank) Action to this Cycle, select Email Document, and click Go.
13 On Add/Modify Action: Email Document, in To, enter your email address.
14 Select Send File and/or Send Results, and click OK.
15 On Define Cycle, click OK.
16 On Cycles, select Save Job Parameter Name, select Personal from the drop-down list, enter a name
in the box, and click Next.
17 On Time Events, select Define when to run this job starting with, and select A New Recurring Time
Event, and click Next.
18 On Define Event:
l
In Name, enter a name.
l
In Days to Run, select By Quarter.
l
Click Next.
19 Under Notification, select Display notification in Schedule Module, and click Finish.
The job is now scheduled to run.
474 Using Interactive Reporting Jobs
16
Using Production Reporting
and Generic Jobs
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................................. 475
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs ........................................................................ 475
Job Properties ............................................................................................ 476
Generic Job Properties................................................................................... 485
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties ........................................ 487
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job Parameters .......................................... 488
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs.................................................................... 488
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs ...................................................... 490
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or Generic Programs............................... 492
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically........................................................... 492
Overview
Production Reporting jobs are created with Oracle's Hyperion® SQR® Production Reporting
Studio. Generic jobs are created using applications with a command-line Production Reporting
interface. You can use the Explore and Schedule modules to import, run, and schedule
Production Reporting and generic jobs. You also use properties and parameters to further define
Production Reporting and generic job options.
This chapter explains the properties specific to Production Reporting jobs, generic jobs, and
Production Reporting documents (Production Reporting job output).
For basic importing procedures, see Chapter 5, “Importing Artifacts.” For basic job execution
and scheduling procedures, see Chapter 14, “Scheduling Jobs and Batches.”
Prerequisites for Importing Jobs
Information needed for importing a Production Reporting job:
l
l
Database connectivity, database type, and Production Reporting version needed to run the
Production Reporting program that you are adding (select from the list); for example,
Marketing Production Reporting v. 9
Files that the Production Reporting program references:
m
Include files (#INCLUDE commands)
Overview 475
l
l
m
Input data files (open for-reading commands)
m
Image files (print-image and declare-image commands)
Compile-time parameters (ASK commands) and runtime parameters (INPUT commands).
For secure Production Reporting jobs, the security organization of the program: which users
have access to which data and how the output is (divided) (bursted).
Job Properties
The properties explained in the following topics pertain only to Production Reporting and
generic jobs. Properties that do not apply to generic jobs are noted. See “Generic Job Properties”
on page 485 for properties unique to generic jobs.
Production Reporting jobs have these properties:
l
General properties
l
Advanced options
l
Connectivity and run options
l
Parameters
l
Output
Production Reporting and generic jobs and other items, such as BQY jobs share many general
properties and advanced options. See “Working with Properties” on page 134.
ä To access properties:
1
From Explore, select a Production Reporting job.
2
Select File , then Properties.
Review properties:
l
Click General. See “General Properties” on page 135.
l
Click Advanced. See “Advanced Properties” on page 136.
l
Click Production Report to review Production Reporting properties:
m
Click Required Files. See “Required Files” on page 478.
m
Click Connect. See “Connection and Run Options” on page 478.
m
Click Parameters. See “Parameters” on page 480.
m
Click Output Options. See “Job Output” on page 483.
m
Click Advanced. See “Advanced Production Reporting Options” on page 480.
Dependency Analysis Commands
When importing Production Reporting job, the system can analyze your Production Reporting
program for dependencies. The analysis occurs if you request the system to scan for required
476 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
files and INPUT and ASK parameters. Analysis can be time-consuming if your Production
Reporting program is large.
The system examines these commands in your Production Reporting program:
l
l
INCLUDE—Includes an external source file in the Production Reporting report
specification; for example, a Production Reporting code file, charts.sqi, required by
stocks.sqr when it compiles
OPEN—Opens an operating system file for reading or writing; for example, an OPEN
statement that opens a file for sequential reading the data in the file, which is identified to
the program as 1:
open 'stocks.dat'as 1 for-reading record=100
l
DECLARE-IMAGE—Declares the type, size, and source of an image to be printed; for
example:
declare-image control flow
type = eps-file
source = 'controlf.eps'
image-size = (321, 309)
end-declare
l
l
l
l
l
PRINT-IMAGE—Prints an image in any report section (As with the declare-image
command, the print-image command accepts type, size, and source arguments.)
ASK—Retrieves a compile-time substitution variable (Retrieval can be by user input,
command-line arguments, or entries in the @file on the command line.)
INPUT—Retrieves a runtime variable (Retrieval can receive by user input, command-line
arguments, or entries in the @file on the command line.)
PRINT URL=”...”—Prints the file found at the URL location, usually an image file (The file
is listed with the required files for the job.)
SECURE—Retrieves the secure tag
Advanced Options
The Security Tags Included property, which is read-only, indicates whether the job is secure.
Secure jobs can have only HTML output. All other advanced options are explained in “Working
with Properties” on page 134.
Connectivity and Run Options
These topics describe all data source connection properties and run properties for Production
Reporting jobs:
l
Connection and Run Options
l
Required Files
l
Required-File Addition
l
Advanced Production Reporting Options
Job Properties 477
Connection and Run Options
Use these options, which apply only to Production Reporting jobs, to configure or change the
database connections and the Production Reporting engine for the job.
Connection and Run Options
Descriptions
Data Source and Production
Reporting Engine
For selecting a data source and a Production Reporting engine
Database Connectivity
Use Job Service connectivity for this data source—For using the default username and password
If the data source or engine that you need is not available, see your administrator.
Prompt for username/password—For prompting users to enter IDs and passwords at runtime
Use the username/password specified below—For setting the username and password now on
import
Allow pass-through where end
user’s authentication system is
enabled for it
For enabling users to access data sources without additional credentials.
Required Files
When importing a file or job, you can identify and locate required files by scanning the
Production Reporting program, or you can manually enter the required files.
Note: Scanning the Production Reporting program to locate required files is possible only
during the import process.
As you identify and locate required files, they are added to the required files screen. For generic
jobs, you must manually enter required files.
Files that can be associated with a job or Production Reporting document and required for
successful execution:
l
For Production Reporting jobs, Include, Data, Image files, and INI file
l
For generic jobs, associated files used for running the job
l
Production Reporting documents and associated files used in viewing the document
This chapter concentrates on required files managed through a listing interface, namely files for
Production Reporting and generic jobs and Production Reporting documents. The INI file and
the custom-form required files are managed through another interface.
Note: Scan for required files before manually entering required files, because the scanned results
replace the required files list. If duplicate required files are listed, you must delete the extra
files.
478 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Table 129
Job Properties
Descriptions
Name
Required-file name
The local file icon next to the name indicates that the file is on your local system.
Location
Required-file path
If the location is not listed, you must find the file by selecting Modify or delete the file.
Type
The type (INCLUDE, IMAGE, DATA), as determined by the system.
Manually entered JPEG, GIF, and HTML files are given the IMAGE type. You must select a type for other manually entered
files. All files must have a type before you can continue the importing process.
Action
Retrieve—For opening any type of required file
Replace—For replacing the file with one selected from your local computer or EPM Workspace repository
Delete—For deleting the file
Modify—For browsing your local system for files that the system could not locate
Add Files
Manually
Default method to locate required files for a job
Note: Scanning
is available only
during the import
process.
You can enter each required file separately or zip the required files and enter the zip file manually. EPM Workspace
extracts the zipped files and adds them to the required files summary list.
Scan Folders Specified in Preferences — The Production Reporting program scans listed folders for required files.
Files not located are listed on the summary screen with the File not found message under location. Locate missing
files by selecting Modify.
Scan All of Oracle's Hyperion Reporting and Analysis — The Production Reporting program is scanned for required
files, and files in the EPM Workspace repository are listed on the required files summary list.
If your program uses variables for file names in the OPEN, DECLARE-IMAGE, or PRINT-IMAGE commands, you receive
a warning message that the system cannot find the files unless you provide their names. Ignore the message, if you
enter the required files manually or if the variables point to files that reside on the Job Service numbers. Otherwise,
exit the import process and modify your Production Reporting program.
Required-File Addition
Browse your local system or the repository for required files to add manually.
Table 130
Add Required File Parameters
File Parameters
Descriptions
Add File from my PC
Add a file from your local hard drive.
Add File from the Repository
Add a file from the database.
Browse
Click to search files.
Job Properties 479
Advanced Production Reporting Options
Advanced Production Reporting options apply only to Production Reporting jobs. For more
information on command-line flags and the SQR.ini file, see Hyperion SQR Production
Reporting Developer’s Guide Volume 2: Language Reference.
Advanced Options
Descriptions
Compile
For compiling the program
Benefits:
Command-line flags for Job
Execution
l
Save time later when running the job
l
Validate SQL ASK parameters
l
Check program validity
Optional command-line flags
Some flags can be over-ridden by job-output option formats and demand-paging options, for example, burst and -printer.XX where XX is a format type.
This command-line flag option is unavailable: -EH_CSVONLY.
The system accepts 250 characters on the command line.
Use SQR.ini from File
System on Job Factory Host
For using the SQR.ini file location
Custom SQR.ini
Path to a custom SQR.ini file
Browse for the file locally or in the repository.
l
Add File from my PC—Select a local file.
l
Add File from the Repository—Select a file from the database.
Enable search indexing
Allows keywords generation during job execution. This is in support of searching for Production Reporting
jobs.
Persist foreground job
output in repository when
running this job
Stores output in the repository.
Allow Job Runners the
option to change the
persistence option
When this is selected, Persist foreground job output when running this job is available to users when
running the job in real time.
Parameters
Production Reporting jobs have two parameter types, ASK and INPUT. ASK parameters
(variables) are used at compile time. INPUT parameters (variables) are used when the job is
executed and are displayed as prompts when users run the job. You can add ASK and INPUT
parameters to the parameter list. Only Production Reporting jobs have ASK parameters.
Production Reporting and generic jobs can have INPUT parameters. Further define a parameter
by selecting Modify for the parameter. Also select custom forms for user input of parameters.
480 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Parameter Settings
You use Parameters to view scanned parameter or manually enter new ones.Table 131 details
the define parameter properties.
Table 131
Parameter Properties
Parameter Properties
Descriptions
Manually entering parameters
Default method for entering ASK and INPUT parameters . See “Dependency Analysis Commands”
on page 476(Parameters are listed as you add them.)
Scanning job and reading
parameters from the Production
Reporting code
Option to enable automatic scenery of the Production Reporting job and the INPUT and ASK
parameters list
Available during the import
process.
Add another parameter to this job
Select INPUT or ASKand click GO. See “INPUT Parameters” on page 482.
Prompt
The prompt for values for the parameter
Display
The display format (Text, SQL Choice, Choice Box) for the parameters (Default is Text.)
Default Value
Default value for the parameter
Modify
Select to modify these properties for each parameter: prompt, display format, and default value
Arrow icons
Arrows to reorder the parameter. (The parameters are processed in the order that they are displayed
on this list.)
Garbage can icon
Select to delete the parameter.
ASK Parameters
ASK parameters can be entered as text or as an SQL query.
Table 132
ASK Parameter Properties
Parameter Properties
Descriptions
Display parameter on form as:
Select a parameter display type:
l
Text Entry
l
Choice of Values obtained from SQL Query
Prompt
The prompt for the parameter
Default value
For entering a default value or allowing users to change the value (text entry only)
The system requires a default value or section of End-user can change value.
End-user can change value
For allowing users to enter default values during runtime
SELECT/FROM/WHERE
SQL commands for retrieving the parameter list (SQL query only).
Job Properties 481
INPUT Parameters
INPUT parameters can be entered as text, predetermined values, or an SQL query.
Table 133
INPUT Parameter Properties
Input Parameter
Properties
Descriptions
Display parameter on
form as:
Select a parameter display type:
l
Text Entry
l
Choice of Pre-Determined Values
l
Choice of Values Obtained from SQL Query
Prompt
The prompt for the parameter
Data Type
The data type (text, numeric, or date; default is text)
Presentation
The presentation format: drop-down list, option buttons, or list box (Pre-determined and SQL query only)
Default value
For entering a default value or allowing users to change the value (predetermined and text entry)
If Value optional is unavailable, the system requires a default value or requires that End-user can change
value is selected.
When $FIXED_USERNAME is selected, Value optional and End-user can change value are disabled.
Value optional
For allowing the parameter to have no default value and enabling users to execute jobs with no value for the
parameter
End-user can change
value
For allowing users to enter default values during runtime
If no default is specified and this option is selected, users must specify default values.
When this option is selected, the allow multiple values field is selectable (predetermined and SQL query only).
Allow multiple values
For allowing multiple values (list box presentation only)
If multiple values selected are used to create dynamic selection criteria within the Production Reporting
program, the program must be designed to construct a WHERE clause.
Validation Type
Validation type (text only).
Validation Mask
A standard or custom validation mask (text only)
List Values
For entering values that are moved to the list with the right-facing arrows (predetermined only)
Delete values by selecting them in the list and selecting the left-facing arrows.
SELECT/FROM/WHERE
SQL commands for retrieving the parameter list (SQL query only).
Custom Forms
You can select a custom JSP parameter form or use the standard form for INPUT parameter
intake when the job is run. Parameter forms JSPs with input fields. They can also be more
complex, invoking JavaScript or applets. You can select a customized parameter collection form
developed by your company.
482 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
The assigned form is stored in the repository. You can assign a custom form from your local
system or from the repository.
Custom Form Options
Descriptions
Standard Form
Default HTML parameter form, which is displayed only when properties are being modified
Custom Form
For uploading the custom-form file by clicking ADD (next to Custom Form) and browsing to it
Required Files
For adding supporting files, such as images, used by the selected form
Name - Required-file name
Location - Required-file path (The icon next to the name indicates that the file is on your local system.)
Action
Replace—For replacing the file with one selected from your local system or the repository
Delete—For deleting the file
Add Files Manually
For add required files by clicking Go.
Parameter List Options
Table 133 details the INPUT parameter list options.
Parameter List options
Descriptions
Smartform allows user to choose a Parameter list
For allowing users to choose parameter lists at runtime
Smartform allows user to save as Job Parameter
For allowing users to save a parameter for values entered in the input fields
Job Output
HTML format is always selected for an output format. You can add additional output formats
by selecting them or listing them in the text box.
Output Options
Table 134 details the output options.
Job Properties 483
Table 134
Output Options
Output
Options
Descriptions
Output
Options
Output formats to be generated from your Production Reporting program:
l
HTML
l
Interactive Reporting Data (bqd)
l
Smart View
l
Adobe Acrobat
l
PowerPoint
l
PostScript
l
HP Printer
l
Excel
l
XML
l
Comma Delimited
l
Line Printer
l
Word
l
Excel
HTML is the default.
Values entered in other are stored as a custom property.
Formats selected here override output formats specified in other Production Reporting Command-Line Option interfaces.
Note: “SPF output” is used to show or hide SPF output, which is always generated, in the output listing.
Demand Paging
Demand paging offers options for splitting, or bursting, the report into separate files for better
performance. By bursting a report, you avoid downloading the report in its entirety into the
browser.
For secure Production Reporting jobs, you should choose an HTML Demand Paging option
according to how the report divides the output among users or groups.
Demand paging is for Web output types which include HTML, BQD, XLC, and CSV. Printed
output types include PDF, SPF, PS,LP, and HP.
Table 135
Demand Paging Options
Demand Paging Options
Descriptions
Write the entire report as
one file
For writing report output to one HTML file (Not available for a secure Production Reporting job)
Write a separate file every
__ pages
For creating an HTML file for every N pages
For example; if you enter 1, an HTML file is created for every report page; if you enter 20, an HTML file is
created for every 20 pages.
Default: An HTML file for every page in the report
484 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Demand Paging Options
Descriptions
Write a separate file
based on table of
contents level
For creating HTML files for the table of contents
If you enter 1, a separate HTML file is created for each level 1 entry in the table of contents. If you enter 2,
an HTML file is created for each level 1 and level 2 entry.
Default: An HTML file for each level 1 entry
Note: If no table of contents exists, the report is saved as one HTML file.
Advanced Output Options
Table 136 details the advanced output properties.
Table 136
Advanced Output Options
Advanced Output Options
Description
Allow users to add job output to a Personal Page
For allowing users to embed job output contents (HTML only) in personal pages
Command-line flags for Job Output
Command-line flags to be used in output bursting.
Auto delete job outputs after
For specifying when to delete job output automatically
Compile Properties
You can compile Production Reporting programs before you run them. All precompile programs
recompile if INCLUDE file is modified.
Compile Properties
Descriptions
Compile-Time flags
Command-line flags for use at compile time
Database user name
Username to access the database
Database password
Password for the username
ASK parameters
For modifying default values for ASK parameters required by the Production Reporting job
A Production Reporting document is a printer-independent file format that accommodates all
Production Reporting graphical features, including fonts, lines, boxes, shaded areas, charts, bar
codes, and images. Production Reporting portable files have a default extension of SPF or SNN
(for multiple reports).This file format is very useful for saving report output. Production
Reporting documents can be distributed electronically and read with the Production Reporting
viewer. You can decide later where to print a document.
Generic Job Properties
Most generic job properties and Production Reporting job properties are the same. General
properties, advanced options, and parameter properties are the same except where noted in the
Production Reporting Job Properties section.
Generic Job Properties 485
Job input and output properties are unique to generic jobs and are explained in the following
topics.
Generic Job Output Options
If the application that you need to run your program is not available, see your administrator to
configure a job service with the application that you need.
Generic Job Output Options
Descriptions
Job Factory Application
The application to run your program
If the required application is not on the list, a job service must be configured for the application before
you proceeding with the job setup. Contact your system administrator to configure the application.
Command-line flags for Job
Execution
Command-line flags to be passed to the application
Required Files for Generic Jobs
Identify and locate required files by manually entering the required files. As you identify and
locate required files, they are added to the required files page.
Properties of
Required Files
Descriptions
Name
Required-file name
The icon next to the name indicates that the file is on your local system.
Location
Required-file path
If the location is not listed, you must find the file by clicking the modify icon or delete the file.
Action
Retrieve—For downloading the file
Replace—For replacing the file with one from your local computer or the EPM Workspace repository with the same
name
Delete—For deleting the file
Add Files
Manually
Method for locating required files for a job
Enter files separately or zip them and enter the zip file name. EPM Workspace extracts the zipped files and adds them
to the required file summary list.
Database Connectivity for Generic Jobs
Enter a database username, password, and connect string.
DB Connectivity for Generic Jobs Properties
Descriptions
User name
User name for the data source
486 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
DB Connectivity for Generic Jobs Properties
Descriptions
Password
Password for the data source
Database Connect String
Database connect string for the data source
Allow pass-through where end user’s authentication system
is enabled for it
For allowing users to access data sources without entering credentials
Output Options for Generic Jobs
Define the job and output options.
Output Options for Generic Jobs
Descriptions
Display this primary output file after
running the job:
Primary output format
Separate formats with semicolons; for example, *.html; *.pdf. When a format matches,
remaining formats are ignored.
Default: All formats are shown
Output types generated by this job
Value to be stored as the property SYS_OUTPUTFILETYPE.
Use API in your application to access this property.
Auto-delete output after the job is run
For specifying when job output is deleted automatically
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job
Properties
The properties of Production Reporting and generic jobs can be modified. See “Working with
Properties” on page 134.
The Output Summary section, from which you can delete output, is available when you modify
properties.
SQR and Generic Job Properties
Descriptions
Last Run Date
Lists the date the job was last run.
Output Formats
Lists the output formats generated.
Delete Selected
In the first column, select dates, then click Delete Selected to delete.
Page
Navigate through multiple pages of output by entering a page in this text box, or by clicking the arrows.
Modifying Production Reporting and Generic Job Properties 487
Setting Production Reporting and Generic Job
Parameters
You must to set the necessary runtime values for a job before the job is run or scheduled. You
can save the values as personal job parameters, so they can be used again.
ä To set job parameters for Production Reporting and generic jobs:
1
Run or schedule a job.
See “Running Jobs” on page 435 or “Scheduling Jobs” on page 436.
2
Enter the necessary runtime values in the Set Values section if you are running the job or on Parameters
if you are scheduling the job.
You must specify values for all ASK parameters unless you specified default values when
importing the job or unless you have a saved job parameter in the Job Parameter list.
3
Optional: To save the values as personal job parameters, click Save and enter a name for the parameters.
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs
The standard job output options are explained in “Scheduling Jobs” on page 436. Production
Reporting jobs offer additional e-mail notification options and output directory options.
E-mail Notification Options
Production Reporting jobs offers e-mail notification options.
Email Notification
Options
Descriptions
Email Address(es)
E-mail addresses for sending status reports; separate with semicolons, colons, space characters, commas, or
lines.
488 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Email Notification
Options
Descriptions
Attach job outputs to
email messages in
these formats
Select formats for e-mail attachments:
Default: HTML
l
HTML—Default
l
Comma Delimited
l
Line Printer
l
Include Dependent Files
—For including all e-mail attachment files dependent on this job.
Zip Options
l
SPF
l
Interactive Reporting Data
l
Smart View
l
Adobe Acrobat
l
Postscript
l
HP Printer
l
Other—Enter a file type.
Zip file options:
l
Do not compress attachment files—Zip file not created
l
Combine all attachments into one Zip file—Zip file contains HTML and selected file formats
l
Combine only HTML and Graphics into Zip file—Zip file contains HTML and selected graphic file formats
Output Directory Options
Production Reporting jobs offer output directory options.
Note: The Save to Output Directory section is displayed only if the administrator has configured
an output directory.
Table 137
Output Directory Options
Output Directory Options
Descriptions
Output Directory
For saving job output is automatically in the directory containing the job
When you select an output directory, job output is saved to the selected directory. (Your administrator
configures the directory list.)
Save output in these
formats
For saving job output in additional formats
Include dependent files
For including all files dependent on your job.
Status Report
For receiving all status reports
HTML is automatically generated. These options work only if you select a directory from the list.
Default: Receive status reports only when errors occur
Output Options for Scheduling Jobs 489
Output Directory Options
Descriptions
Email Status to
E-mail addresses for sending status reports; separate with semicolons, colons, space characters, commas,
or lines
Note: A user can list all output formats using a delimiter (;) in the Other Formats text field for
Schedule Output Properties.
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs
Secure and insecure Production Reporting jobs are handled differently. For secure jobs, security
tags are applied to report sections. The following topics explain what secure jobs are and how
their security is accomplished and protected.
If the Production Reporting programmer applies security tags to report sections, thereby
restricting access to the sections to specified users, the report is secure. Production Reporting
produces only HTML output (with images) for a secure report. For details on programming a
secure Production Reporting report, see your Production Reporting documentation.
When a secure Production Reporting job is run, the security tags are written to the Production
Reporting. When the document is executed, each resulting HTML file is given a security tag
assuring that only users authorized to see all data in the file can see the file.
It is important to set the bursting (or demand paging) options appropriately for a secure report,
so the resulting files correspond to the way that the Production Reporting program divided data
among users. If you do not burst the Production Reporting document correctly, security is
preserved, but some users may not have access to data that they should be able to see.
The Production Reporting document written by running a Production Reporting program can
be imported into the repository. Executing a secure document yields the same output with the
same access privileges as executing the secure job.
Access Privileges on Secure Production Reporting Jobs
Access privileges on output files are derived, first, from the user’s access when the job is executed
or from the job output access privileges, if the privileges are set. Each output file may also have
an associated set of security tags. Job owners can change the access privileges on SPF or output
files. In a Production Reporting document, which contains all data, broadening access means
relaxing security on the report.
Users need all these privileges to see output files:
l
View access on the report folder
l
View access on the files
l
Access granted by the Production Reporting security tags of the output files (The access is
derived from the security tags in the code.)
490 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
Security tags are not checked when job output is deleted. Only normal access privilege checking
is performed. Thus, a job output file owner can delete the file, regardless of whether the security
tags enable the owner to view the file contents. If a secure report creates data file through a
Production Reporting OPEN statement, only the job owner has view access to the file. The owner
can relax security for the file.
Security Mode
Every item in Production Reporting has a security mode that is on or off.
The security mode for all items derived from a secure Production Reporting file is on. These
items include the Production Reporting document, all output files, the Production Reporting
ProgramOutput item, and the SPFFileOutputCollection item. If a file is secure, this information
is displayed in Properties (on the Advanced tab).
It is possible to create a secure Production Reporting program that produces secure and
nonsecure output. The Production Reporting program can be coded so that some pages are
output without security, while the rest are secure. In this case, users with access to the output
files through normal EPM Workspace access control see the nonsecure output pages and the
secure pages that they are authorized to see. The ability to create secure and nonsecure pages
within a secure Production Reporting program is governed with the security command in
Production Reporting.
You can create on replace a version of a secure report, but the security mode for the new version
and the original must match.
Recommendations for Security
Recommendations for ensuring the security of secure Production Reporting jobs and documents
in EPM Workspace:
l
Establish dedicated user accounts for secure Production Reporting or SPF jobs.
l
Use a dedicated account for one secure report or a group of related secure reports.
l
Ensure that secure jobs are run only from dedicated accounts.
l
Limit access to the dedicated account to as few people as possible, because everyone with
access to it can import secure jobs and access the Production Reporting document, which
contains all data.
Programmer Conventions
Production Reporting has built-in conventions for designating security tags to EPM Workspace
users or groups. A security tag that begins with u# represents a user. A security tag that begins
with g# represents a group.
Working with Secure Production Reporting Jobs 491
Viewing Security Information
Secure Production Reporting programs tailor their output for multiple users and restrict access
accordingly. You can determine whether a file related to the Production Reporting program is
secure by viewing its security mode.
For secure Production Reporting file and its related files, the Secure mode property is set to on.
The related files include Production Reporting output files, document collections, and
Production Reporting documents output collections.
ä To view the security mode of a file:
1
Select the file, and Modify.
2
Open the Advanced Options section.
If the file is secure, the Security Tags Included box is checked.
Supporting Exceptions in Production Reporting or
Generic Programs
The following topics are for Production Reporting and generic report programmers, who
support exception notifications to users. (Users can receive e-mail notifications or see a graphic
indicator on the Exceptions Dashboard on personal pages.)
Production Reporting Programming
For Production Reporting programs to support exceptions, they must include these lines:
open 'output.properties' as 0 for-append record=32767:vary
write 0 from 'exception.default=on'
write 0 from 'exception.default.text=<exception text>
close 0
Generic Report Programming
For generic jobs or files to support exceptions. Programmers must use the EPM Workspace API
to configure exception reporting through the job output properties, exception present and
exception text.
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically
In Production Reporting programs, you can set the output as high priority. In Explore module
listings, users see the high-priority icon next to any high-priority job output or version. Users
can also sort by priority (normal or high).
492 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
To set priority to high on the output, a program writes the string rating=high-priority to
the output.properties file used by the job service. This code excerpt accomplishes this
objective:
open 'output.properties' as 0 for-append record=32767:vary
write 0 from 'rating=high-priority'
close 0
Setting Priority on Output Programmatically 493
494 Using Production Reporting and Generic Jobs
17
Using Custom Parameter Forms
for Production Reporting Jobs
In This Chapter
Customizing Parameter Forms .......................................................................... 495
Parameter Form Elements............................................................................... 497
Standard Parameter Form............................................................................... 501
Standard Parameter Form Example .................................................................... 501
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip .................................................................... 504
Customizing Parameter Forms
An Production Reporting job uses a parameter form to obtain INPUT parameter values at
runtime. This section explains how to customize parameter forms.
Note: The parameter forms are in JSP. Customizing the standard form provided with
Production Reporting requires a working knowledge of JSP and Java.
By default, when you run an Production Reporting job or create or modify a parameter list, EPM
Workspace generates a standard form to collect parameter information. You can customize the
form. For example, some jobs may require a more sophisticated field layout, or your organization
may require certain conventions.
You can associate custom parameter forms with jobs at runtime. You run or schedule a job that
is associated with a custom form, which is displayed instead of the standard form.
A parameter form is a JSP containing input fields. Forms can also be more complex, invoking
JavaScript or an applet.
Parameter Form Process
The parameter form associated with a job or the standard form is displayed when you perform
any of these actions:
l
Select Run Job from the job shortcut menu
l
From an item list, select the job name
l
Create or modify parameter list while scheduling the job
Customizing Parameter Forms 495
After you submit a completed form for execution, EPM Workspace performs these actions:
1. Validates parameters for which validation is defined
2. Processes the form
The form can collect parameter values and database logon information, as required by the
job. For scheduling, the form can also collect the parameter list name and description.
3. Creates or modifies the parameter list or runs the job, as applicable
4. If the job was run, retrieves and displays job output
Assigning Parameter Forms Jobs
This procedure applies only to custom parameter forms created for use in Production Reporting.
Note: Custom parameter forms created prior to Production Reporting are in HTML and must
be recreated as JSP forms for use with Production Reporting.
ä To assign a custom parameter form to a Production Reporting job:
1
In the browser, navigate to the job, and right-click the job name.
2
Select Properties from the top menu.
3
Select Custom Form, and browse to the file to use.
4
If your form uses additional files, such as GIFs, select Show Required Files.
5
When you finish changing form properties, click OK.
Assigning the Standard Form
After assigning a custom form to a job, you can reassign the standard form.
ä To assign the standard form to a job:
1
In the browser, navigate to the desired Production Reporting job, right-click the job name and select
Properties.
2
Select Production Report and Parameters from the top menu.
3
Select Standard Form.
4
Select OK.
Editing Parameter Forms
Edit a custom form before you assign it to a job. To edit a form after it is assigned to a job,
download it, change it, and upload it to the repository. An edited standard form is uploaded as
a custom form.
496 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Production Reporting parameter forms contain JSP tags or scriptlets that graphical HTML
editors cannot display correctly. However, the tags are designed so that you can use some
graphical HTML editors to modify layouts. Before using an editor, ensure that it does not alter
code.
Using an editor to modify a parameter form requires knowledge of Production Reporting
parameter-form API and JSP tags. When editing a parameter form, keep the scriplet code blocks
together. Otherwise, it may not work correctly.
To edit a parameter form, use a nongraphical HTML editor, such as Macromedia Homesite. Be
careful not to alter the JSP tags.
ä To edit a parameter form:
1
In the browser, navigate to the Production Reporting job, right-click the job name and
select Properties.
2
From the top menu, select Parameters.
3
Select Custom Form.
4
Select Modify, select Add next to Custom Form.
5
Download the standard form, or browse your PC or the repository for a custom form.
6
If editing the standard form, specify a location for saving an editable copy, and enter a name for the
new custom form.
7
Edit the form locally.
See “Parameter Form Elements” on page 497.
8
Click OK to save changes.
Parameter Form Elements
You create a parameter form as an HTML file that contains special elements. Before displaying
a parameter form, EPM Workspace interprets and processes elements that it encounters in the
form. Typically, EPM Workspace processes an element by replacing it with the value indicated
by the element. For example, it replaces <%=targetFormParameter.getJobName()%> with
the job name.
Note: Parameter form elements are case sensitive.
Element Types
The main element types of parameter forms:
l
Basic
l
Conditional
l
Looping
Parameter Form Elements 497
Basic Elements
Basic elements have the form <%=(bean).getxxx()%>>.
Example: <%=targetFormParameter.getJobName()%>.
Conditional Elements
A conditional element has the standard JSP or Java conditional code:
if () {}
else {}
You can insert HTML or applicable parameter form elements between the start and end tag.
Production Reporting evaluates whether the condition indicated by the has Value argument is
true or false. If true, the enclosed HTML is included in the displayed form, If false, the HTML
between the start and end tags is ignored.
Looping Elements
Looping elements have this form:
<getxxxLoop>
...
</getxxxLoop>.
An example is getParameterPickListLoop. You can insert HTML elements between the start
and end tags. When EPM Workspace processes the elements, it processes the loop contents until
the loop finishes. The loop termination condition depends on the element.
Required Elements
A parameter form provides required elements and elements to use if, for example, you are setting
up a parameter pick list or must access information from a database.
Required elements include elements that identify a file as a parameter form file, return parameter
information, and return the URL to use when you submit the form for processing. See
Table 138.
Table 138
Required Elements
Elements
Function
setParameterAskCond(String n)
Selects the Nth ASK parameter, where n is from 1 to the total number of ASK
parameters.
getParameterFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field for setting the value of the parameter selected
in ParameterInputCond or ParameterAskCond
setParameterInputCond(String n)
Selects the Nth INPUT parameter, where n is from 1 to the number of INPUT parameters
getParameterName()
Returns the current parameter name
498 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Elements
Function
getParameterValue()
Returns the value of the current parameter or, for a parameter list, the current value
of the parameter
The following topics show code snippets using the required elements.
Name Specification Elements
The element that follows specifies the import file name for the parameter form.
<jsp:include page=”jsp/shared/formparameterFormJavaScript.jsp'flush=true>>
Parameter List Elements
Scheduling a job requires the creation of a parameter list, which has a name and description and
contains a value for each parameter associated with the job. When scheduling a job, you select
a parameter list, which provides the set of parameters that EPM Workspace uses when it runs
the job.
Parameter Display Elements
The following code snippet shows the use of elements for handling parameter values. If your
form uses a parameter pick list, see the sample code at the end of this topic.
<getParameterInputCond hasValue="1">
<!-- 1st parameter -->
<!-- Name of parameter -->
<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE">
<FONT face="Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif" size="-1">
<B><getParameterName/></B>
</FONT>
</TD>
<TD VALIGN="MIDDLE" COLSPAN="2">
<INPUT TYPE="text" NAME="<getParameterFieldName/>"
VALUE="<getParameterValue/>" SIZE="30">
</TD>
</getParameterInputCond>
The <getParameterInputCond> and <getParameterAskCond> tags select the INPUT or
ASK parameter that is used to resolve the <getParameterName/
>,<getParameterFieldName/> and <getParameterValue> tags. You must set the
hasValue argument from 1 to the number of INPUT or ASK parameters.
Nonrequired Elements
For parameter forms, you can use nonrequired and required elements.
Parameter Form Elements 499
Table 139
Nonrequired Elements
Elements
Function
getEmbedParameterValidationRoutines()
Adds the JavaScript parameter validation routines to the form
isFormUsesParameterValidationCond()
Returns true if the current job requires JavaScript validation
routines
isParameterValidationCond()
Tests the current parameter for a validation function
isParameterValidationMaskCond()
Returns true if a mask is associated with the validation function
of the current parameter
resetParameterPickList()
Initializes the static or dynamic choice options of the current
parameter and prints an error message if initialization fails
isParameterMultiValuesCond()
Returns true if the parameter accepts multiple values
see getParameterType()
Returns the current parameter type number:
Text edit = 0
Drop-down list = 1
Radio button = 2
List box = 3
getParameterType()
Returns the current parameter type number:
Text edit = 0
Drop-down list = 1
Radio button = 2
List box = 3
getParameterListPublisherDefaultsFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field used for the Publisher
Defaults parameter list
processParameterPickListLoop()
Iterates through a parameter pick list values.
getPickListParameterValue()
Used within a loop construct for
processParameterPickListLoop()
Returns the next value in a parameter pick list;
getParameterPickListValueSelected(String
presentationType)
Must be used within a Java loop construct. Returns "selected"
if the next value in the pick list is the current value for the
parameter;
Note: You can set presentationType to "select" or
"check." For a pick list for a parameter with only a few values,
you can use buttons to display the options. In this case, setting
the presentationType to "check" returns "checked." You
can use this option to indicate which option is the current value
for the parameter
getParameterValidationMask()
500 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
Returns the mask associated with the current parameter of the
validation function
Elements
Function
getParameterValidationName()
Returns the name of the current parameter of the validation
function
getPublisherDefaultsParameterValue()
Returns the value of the current parameter in the Publisher
Defaults parameter list
isRequiredParameterCond()
Returns true if the current parameter is required
getSaveDefaultsCheckboxFieldName()
Returns the name of the HTML form field that represents the
“save default” box
isShowFormsParameterListCond()
Determines whether to display parameter lists
isShowFormsSaveMyDefaultsCond()
Determines whether the publisher selected “save as my
defaults”
isShowParameterListPublisherDefaultsCond()
Returns true if the job is configured to display Publisher
Defaults
Standard Parameter Form
The standard parameter form for Oracle's Hyperion® SQR® Production Reporting is in JSP.
Notice the required import tags in the standard form example. A
JavaBeanIFormParameter View statement is used to access all form APIs to obtain
information regarding the form parameter list.
Note: You can create a custom parameter form by modifying the standard form. Java and JSP
can be leveraged to enhance the form.
Standard Parameter Form Example
<%@ include file=”/jsp/shared/common.inc”%>
<%@ page import=”com.brio.one.web.ui.JSPUtility, com.brio.one.web.browser.ui.*,
com.brio.one.web.ui.config.*, java.util.*”%>
<jsp:useBean id=”targetFormParameter” scope=”request”
type=”com.brio.one.web.ui.IFormParameterView”/>
<!-This template is used for these purposes:
1) Run a job that requires parameters or database user information
2) Create a parameter list for a job
3) Edit a parameter list for a job
This template is used when there is no custom ONE/SmartForm associated with the job.
-->
<jsp:include page=”/jsp/shared/form/parameterFormJavaScript.jsp” flush=”true”/>
<TABLE border=”0” width=”98%” cellpadding=”0” cellspacing=”0”>
<TR>
<TD WIDTH=”45”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%>
WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
<TD WIDTH=”15”></TD>
Standard Parameter Form 501
<TD WIDTH=”160”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%>
WIDTH=”160” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
<TD WIDTH=”100%”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%>
WIDTH=”10” HEIGHT=”1” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”4”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%>
WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
<!-- Start Display of Parameters -->
<%
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterCond()) {
// initialize the parameter loop
targetFormParameter.resetParameterLoop();
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterLoop()) {
if (!targetFormParameter.isParameterHiddenCond()) {%>
<TR>
<TD><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)
%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”5” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
<TD VALIGN=”middle” COLSPAN=”3”><IMG <
%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request, “space.gif”)%> width=”20” height=”5” ALT=””></
TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”2”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
<!-- Name of parameter -->
<TD VALIGN=”MIDDLE” class=”SystemDataText”><
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterName()%>:</TD>
<TD VALIGN=”MIDDLE” COLSPAN=”2”>
<%
int type = targetFormParameter.getParameterType();
if (type == targetFormParameter.TEXT_EDIT) {%>
<INPUT TYPE=”text” CLASS=”Inputfield” onchange=”onParamChange()”
NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” VALUE=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>” SIZE=”30”><%
}
if (type == targetFormParameter.DROPDOWN_LIST) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList(); %>
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop” NAME=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()” ><%
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=””></OPTION><%
}
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>” <
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“select”)%>> <
%=targetFormParameter.getHTMLEscapedCurrentPickListParameterValue()%> </OPTION> <%
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
502 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
if (type == targetFormParameter.LIST_BOX) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList();
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterMultiValuesCond()) {%>
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop” NAME=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()”
size=”5”><%
} else {%>
multiple
<SELECT class=”DataFrameDrop” NAME=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” onchange=”onParamChange()” size = “5”><
%
}
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=””></OPTION><%
}
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<OPTION VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>” <
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“select”)%>> <
%=targetFormParameter.getHTMLEscapedCurrentPickListParameterValue()%> </OPTION><%
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
if (type == targetFormParameter.RADIO_BUTTONS) {
targetFormParameter.resetParameterPickList();
if (!targetFormParameter.isRequiredParameterCond()) { %>
<input type=”Radio” class=”RadioButton”
onchange=”onParamChange()” name=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>”
value=”” checked><span class=”RadioButtonText”>No Selection Made</span><br><%
}
while (targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop()) {%>
<input type=”Radio” class=”RadioButton” onchange=”onParamChange()” name=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>” value=”<
%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%>” <
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected(“check”)%>><span
class=”RadioButtonText”><%=targetFormParameter.getPickListParameterValue()%></span><br><
%
}
}
%>
<TD VALIGN=”TOP” COLSPAN=”2”></TR><%
}
if (targetFormParameter.isParameterHiddenCond()) {%>
<INPUT TYPE=”hidden” NAME=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()
%>” VALUE=”<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>”><%
Standard Parameter Form Example 503
}
}
}
%>
<TR>
<TD COLSPAN=”4”><IMG <%=imgLocator.getSrcAltAttribute(request,
“space.gif”)%> WIDTH=”45” HEIGHT=”12” BORDER=”0” ALT=””></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
All form parameter APIs are directly accessed through the Java bean; for example:
targetFormParameter.getParameterHame()
Use Java scriptlet tags to run Java code blocks within the tags; for example:
<% String start=”abc”;%>
Use a JSP expression embedded in HTML to resolve variables to values at runtime; for example:
<HTML>
<BODY>
The start of the alphabet is <%=start%>
</BODY>
</HTML>
Parameter form information can also be accessed through the parameter form APIs. This
example resolves the current value of the parameter name and display the name in the form:
<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterValue()%>
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip
The following code snippet shows tag use for parameter pick lists.
<!-- Parameter Pick List example -->
<%
if (targetForm.setParameterInputCond("1")) {%>
<SELECT NAME="<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterFieldName()%>"><%
targetFormParameter.restParameterPickList();
while(targetFormParameter.processParameterPickListLoop() {%>
<OPTION VALUE="<%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValue()%>" <
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValueSelected("select")%>><
%=targetFormParameter.getParameterPickListValue()%>
</OPTION>
}%>
</SELECT><%
}
%>
Custom form can import JSPs and thus become more modular. For example, the standard form
example, includes a jsp include tag. The <jsp:include> tag is a standard JSP tag:
<jsp:includpage=”/jsp/shared/form/parameterFormJavaScript.jsp” flush=”true”/>
504 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
The preceding example causes the parameterFormJavaScript.jsp file to be imported and
executed with the standard form. Custom forms that include context, such as images, must be
defined in the required files section.
Parameter Forms: Example and Tip 505
506 Using Custom Parameter Forms for Production Reporting Jobs
18
Annotation Service
In This Chapter
Showing Annotations .................................................................................... 508
Creating Annotations .................................................................................... 508
Viewing an Annotation Summary ....................................................................... 509
Viewing Annotation Details.............................................................................. 509
Searching for Annotations............................................................................... 510
Setting Annotation Permissions ........................................................................ 511
Responding to Annotations ............................................................................. 512
Deleting Annotations .................................................................................... 512
Setting Preferences for Printing Annotations .......................................................... 513
Annotation Service, used with Financial Reporting reports, provides a collaborative tool that
captures collective information that can be shared on particular documents and data. It provides
a range of flexibility from simple notations to full-fledged threaded discussions, laying the
foundation for collaboration, compliance reporting, and business process analysis. Authorized
users have the ability to create, remove, and respond to annotations. Annotations can be attached
to a report object (grid object, text object, chart object, and image object), and can reference a
full or partial POV. Annotations included in reports can be viewed when selected for books and
snapshot books.
Note: Annotations cannot be applied to objects in the report's header or footer.
Note: Annotations in Snapshot reports, represented with an eye icon, and snapshot books and
batches are limited to read-only permissions.
Multiple attachments per annotation is supported as well as the referencing of URLs. On hover,
the icon displays the underlying attachment title. If multiple attachments exist, the hover displays
the list of attachments.
Annotations elements are:
l
Annotation header—A high level description of the commentary; includes Subject, Creation
Date, Author, and Category. There is one summary heading for each annotation.
507
l
Body of text—The text can be formatted to include font size, font type, bold, italics,
underline, color, left, right, center and justify alignment, indent, and bullet lists with hanging
indent.
The annotation creator can apply access control and permission options to groups or users.
Annotations can be added to a single value, a row or column, or a range of rows and columns.
A warning icon is displayed when a report containing an annotation is deleted.
A designer can add text cells or text objects to a report and apply an Annotation function that
will reference specific annotations or annotation elements in a grid. This is done through
Financial Reporting Studio. See the Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting Studio User’s Guide.
In Annotation Manage, administrators can search and access annotations across the
environment, modify context associated with a context, modify properties, including metadata,
and remove annotations from the system. See the Oracle Enterprise Performance Management
Workspace Administrator’s Guide.
Showing Annotations
Use the View menu to enable or showing or hiding annotations. To view annotations select
View > Show Annotation. To hide annotations, select View > Hide Annotations.
Creating Annotations
Annotations can be attached to a report object, grid object, text object, chart object, and image
object, and can reference a full or partial POV. You create a new annotation in the New
Annotation dialog box. Three tabs in the New Annotation dialog box allow you to define the
annotation:
l
l
Annotation tab — capture the title, description and a predefined category.
Context tab — capture Object and Dimension information. Object information can be a
datasource or any object on the report. For example:
m
m
m
l
a data source — the annotation is attached to any Financial Reporting report using the
specified data source.
Grid:data source — the annotation is attached to the specified grid and data source.
Text, Chart, or Grid — the annotation is attached the specified object with no
dimensions on the object.
Attachments tab — Link attachments to an annotation. Attachments can be a file on your
local drive, any object in the repository, or a URL.
ä To create an annotation
1. Right–click on any report object and select New Annotation. The New Annotation dialog box
is displayed.
508 Annotation Service
2. On the Annotation tab, enter a title, description and select a Category.
3. On the Context tab, select an object and, if applicable, deselect any dimensions that you want
excluded.
Note: To select members for a dimension, click the dimension name.
4. On the Attachments tab, click File to attach a document that is located on your computer,
click Report to attach a document from the repository, or click URL to select a link to a Web
site.
5. Click OK. An Annotation icon is displayed in the report.
Viewing an Annotation Summary
Initial summary annotation text can be viewed in a “bubble” by right-clicking the annotation
icon. Within the bubble, you can click icons to view attachments, reply to annotations, or view
annotation details, if applicable.
Viewing Annotation Details
The detail annotations, which may include responses and attachments, can be viewed in the
Annotation List Panel. The following information is presented for each annotation:
l
Status — Displays an Eye icon to indicate viewing rights only, an exclamation icon to indicate
that this annotation is no longer associated with an object in repository, or is blank to indicate
that this annotation can be viewed and responded to.
l
Title — The annotations title
l
Author — The creator of the annotation
l
Description — The annotation description
l
Posted — The date the annotation was created
l
Source — The database used in the report
l
l
Context — The object associated with the annotation. If the object is a Grid, the dimension
and members are displayed. If the object is an image, text or chart, the path of the report
and object ID is displayed.
Category — Predefined categories describing the nature of the annotation. Categories are
Comment, Assessment, FYI, Misc (Miscellaneous), Other, Performance, or Target.
To view annotation details, in a report that contains annotations, do one of the following
l
l
Click an annotation icon, then click the Show Details icon to view the annotation in the
Annotation List Panel.
Locate the Annotation List Panel at the bottom of the screen, hover over the Show panel
and click it.
Viewing an Annotation Summary 509
Searching for Annotations
The Search option returns a list of annotations based on specified criteria.
ä To search for annotations:
1. From EPM Workspace, expand the annotation panel located at the bottom of the screen.
2. From the Search drop-down, select a search method.
l
l
All — A search based on text located in Title, Author, Category, Description, or Context.
Case-insensitive text, trailing asterisks and wildcard strings are acceptable.
Title — A search based on text located in Title. Case-insensitive text, trailing asterisks
and wildcard strings are acceptable.
l
Author — A search based on text located in Author.
l
Category — Search on category. Click the drop-down list to select a category.
l
l
l
Description — A search based on text located in Description. Case-insensitive text,
trailing asterisks and wildcard strings are acceptable.
Context — Search on context. The Search lookup displays the Context Lookup dialog
box where you can define your search based on a data source, element name, and,
optionally, an element value. See “Context Lookup” on page 510
Advanced Search — The Search lookup displays the Advanced Search dialog box where
you can define your search based on a combination of Title, Author, Description, Posted
Date Range, Category or Context. See “Advanced Search” on page 511
3. To view annotation content, click the annotation.
Context Lookup
You can refine your search based on a data source, element name, and element values.
ä To define your search in Context Lookup:
1. In the Data Source drop-down, select a data source.
Note: Data sources are displayed for existing annotations. Thefr data source is displayed
when annotations are set on a report object; .fr followed by a data source indicates
annotations set on that data source for a particular report.
2. In the Element Name drop-down, select an element.
Note: The selected element is removed from the list and cannot be re-selected.
3. In Element Values, specify the value. To specify multiple values, separate each value with a
comma (,).
Note: Only one of the multiple values need to be met.
510 Annotation Service
4. To add additional search criteria, repeat steps 2 and 3.
Note: When you specify multiple element names, a value for each element name must be
met.
Advanced Search
You can refine your search for annotations based on a combination of criteria:
ä To use the Advanced search:
1. From the search drop-down, select Advanced Search.
2. in the Advanced Search dialog box, enter search criteria:
l
Title — Annotation title.
l
Author — Annotation author.
l
Description — Annotation description.
l
l
l
Posted Date Range From/To — The inclusive beginning and end past dates of
annotations. Calendar lookup selections are provided in the From and To drop-downs.
Category — The topic, or subject, associated with the annotations. Select a category
from the Category drop-down.
Context — Select a data source, element name and element values using the Context
Lookup. Click the Lookup icon to display the Context Lookup dialog box. See “Context
Lookup” on page 510.
Setting Annotation Permissions
The annotation creator can apply access control and permission options to selected users,
groups, or roles. Access control applies to the top level annotation (the root) and all subsequent
replies. Permission options define what kind of access a user has to the annotation. You can
organize and control the view of annotations to which you have access.
Permissions options are:
l
No Access—Users cannot view annotations.
l
View—Users can view all annotations but cannot create or respond to annotations.
l
Modify—Users can create and respond to annotations, but not delete.
l
Full Control—Users can create, respond to, and perform administrative functions
associated with the repository object.
ä To set annotation permissions:
1. Click the annotation, then click the Show Details icon to view the annotation in the
Annotation List Panel.
Setting Annotation Permissions 511
2. In the Annotation List Panel, highlight the annotation to which you want to set permissions
and click the Permissions icon.
3. In the Permissions dialog box highlight the users, groups, or roles to which you want to
apply permissions, then click on the right-facing arrow to move them to the Selected Users,
Groups and Roles panel.
4. From the Access drop-down, select the permissions, and click OK.
Responding to Annotations
Users with the Modify or Full Control permissions can respond to annotations through the
annotations bubble or the Annotation List Panel in a Financial Reporting report. While replying,
one can change the category and also add attachments like EPM Workspace documents, local
documents on your computer, or URLs.
Note: When responding to annotations, the Annotation tab and Attachments tabs are enabled.
ä To respond to annotations:
1. In a report that contains annotations, do one of the following:
l
l
Click an annotation icon, then click the Reply icon and respond to the annotation.
Locate the Annotation List Panel at the bottom of the screen, hover over the Show panel
and click it. Then click the Reply icon and respond to the annotation.
2. Click OK.
Deleting Annotations
If you are the annotation author, or have Full Control permissions, you can delete annotations.
ä To delete annotations:
1. In a report that contains annotations, do one of the following:
l
l
Click an annotation icon, then click the Show Details icon to view the annotation in the
Annotation List Panel.
Locate the Annotation List Panel at the bottom of the screen, hover over the Show panel
and click it.
2. Highlight the annotation you want to delete, and click the Delete icon.
512 Annotation Service
Setting Preferences for Printing Annotations
Annotations or their elements can be printed with the report. Use the Preferences option to
specify how annotations should be printed. See “Setting Annotation Printing Preferences” on
page 74.
Setting Preferences for Printing Annotations 513
514 Annotation Service
Accessibility
A
In This Appendix
Enabling Screen Reader Support for EPM Workspace................................................ 515
Using the Tab Key in the EPM Workspace UI .......................................................... 516
Using Global Navigation Shortcuts ..................................................................... 516
Accessibility Behaviors for General UI Elements ...................................................... 518
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls..................................................... 519
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Pages ............................................................... 524
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Template Selector Dialog ......................................... 524
Accessibility for Financial Reporting.................................................................... 524
Accessibility for Foundation Services .................................................................. 525
Accessibility for Interactive Reporting .................................................................. 526
Accessibility for Online Help ............................................................................ 527
Considerations ........................................................................................... 527
Note: This appendix describes EPM Workspace accessibility and compatibility features. For
information regarding the recommended screen reader and magnifier to use with this
product, refer to Oracle's Hyperion Reporting and Analysis Readme.
Enabling Screen Reader Support for EPM Workspace
The Screen Reader Support preference for EPM Workspace enables screen readers and
magnifiers to access and work with EPM Workspace. If you change this setting during a session,
you must restart your browser to enable the changes.
For Interactive Reporting, you must install additional scripts in order to work with JAWS. Install
JAWS Scripts by selecting Tools, then Install, then JAWS Scripts. The JAWS Scripts option is
only available when a BQY file is open in EPM Workspace.
Note: The Enable Screen Reader Support option is displayed in EPM Workspace user
preferences General tab when using Internet Explorer 6 and 7.
ä To enable accessibility:
1
Select File, then Preferences.
Enabling Screen Reader Support for EPM Workspace 515
2
From Accessibility Mode, select Enable Screen Reader Support.
3
Click OK.
Setting High-Contrast Mode
A high-contrast color mode is available for accessibility. This option is supported only on the
same platforms on which Screen Readers are supported.
ä To set high-contrast mode:
1
Perform an action:
l
l
2
Select File, then Preferences. From Accessibility Mode, from the Select Theme menu
select High Contrast.
A shortcut key is also available to toggle between high-contrast and regular mode. Ctrl
+Shift+H toggles the theme and prompts you to either restart EPM Workspace or
continue working. You must restart EPM Workspace to see the theme changes. If you
continue working, theme changes take effect at your next logon.
Click OK.
Using the Tab Key in the EPM Workspace UI
Default tab order in the EPM Workspace UI flows from left to right, top to bottom. The
component order: toolbar, search control, view pane, content area, content area (bottom) tab
bar. The tab order loops in both directions so that tabbing from the last item focuses the first
item, and reverse-tabbing from the first item focuses the last item. The following elements are
not included in the tab order:
l
Navigate menu
l
Main menu bar (use shortcut keys to access menu items)
l
The “Welcome <username>” message and the accompanying logoff text link (use logoff or
exit icon in toolbar or items from File menu instead)
Using Global Navigation Shortcuts
EPM Workspace provides keyboard shortcuts for general navigation:
Table 140
Global Navigation Shortcuts
Key
Action
F10
Move the focus to the first menu in the menu bar.
Ctrl+0
Focus current view pane (because a view pane cannot have focus itself, this focuses the first valid child in the tab
order). If there is no view pane, nothing happens.
516 Accessibility
Key
Action
Ctrl+1,2...9
As with Ctrl+0, but select the first, second, through ninth view pane and move focus to its first focusable child.
Ctrl+B
Focus Annotations Area control. (for Financial Reporting only, see “Accessibility for File Accumulator” on page
523.
Ctrl+G
Focus bottom Content tab bar of EPM Workspace (which lists open modules). Focus goes to current module tab. If
multiple documents are open, the current module tab is highlighted. If no tabs are open, nothing happens.
Ctrl+F
Focus the Search field.
Ctrl+T
Focus the Standard toolbar. Use the Tab key to select individual buttons.
Ctrl+Y
Focus the Content area. This transfers focus to the first valid child in the tab order of the Content area of an active
document.
Ctrl+F4
Close current active module - document, tasks, or files. If none are open, nothing happens.
Ctrl+Shift+H
Toggle the selected theme to change the color scheme of the user interface (UI).
Ctrl+F6
Enter a frame's content area and focus the first focusable element (if any).
Ctrl+Shift+F6
Exit the content area of a frame and return focus to the frame itself. You cannot immediately press Ctrl+F6 to return
to the iframe, but you can tab to the other controls outside of iframe. To return to iframe after pressing Ctrl+Shift+F6,
you can press Tab to move to another control, then Shift+Tab to bring focus back to the iframe and finally Ctrl+F6 to
enter the iframe.
Arrow keys (left/
right/bottom/
top).
The built-in way to move around Explore module and access different cells and rows in a grid or tree view.
Ctrl+L
Presents a list of selectable navigation targets in the Links List window:
l
Go to View Pane
l
Go to Content Area
l
Go to Annotations Area
l
Go to Tab Bar
l
Go to toolbar
EPM Workspace Graphic with Callouts
The graphic below shows how to navigate Explore using keyboard shortcuts; other EPM
Workspace modes use the same shortcuts.
Using Global Navigation Shortcuts 517
The EPM Workspace user interface includes these areas.
1. Menu bar (F10) — Commands and sub-commands that organize tasks and modules.
2. Standard toolbar (Ctrl+T) — Buttons for performing tasks.
3. View pane (Ctrl+0) — Area that provides buttons that enable jumps between zero or more
panels, each panel having a specific use and corresponding controls.
4. View pane and content area adjuster (Ctrl+Alt+1) — Setting to adjust the size of the View
pane and content area. Hiding the view pane provides a larger content frame in which to
use EPM Workspace. Select View, then View Pane to hide or display the View pane.
5. Content area (Ctrl+Y) — Area in which you view active module documents, tasks, or files.
6. Content tab bar (Ctrl+G) — Information bar specific to the current module. If multiple
documents are open, the current document tab is highlighted.
7. Search field (Ctrl+F) — A space where you enter text you want to search for within the
Repository.
Accessibility Behaviors for General UI Elements
Listed below are specific keystrokes that are handled by individual User Interface (UI) elements,
as well as expected behavior of screen readers when the UI element is focused:
518 Accessibility
Table 141
User Interface Element Types
UI Element
Key Event
Button
Either Enter or Space will activate the button, causing the same action as a left click.
ComboBox
1. Up or down arrow keys display the popup menu and allow selection of combobox values.
2. Space or Enter selects a combobox item from the popup.
3. If editable, alphanumeric keys cause an edit.
Dialog
1. If the dialog has an accept button defined, Enter key activates it.
2. The dialog is modal and blocks all other keyboard events.
Content Area
(IFrame)
1. Press Ctrl+F6 to enter a frame, then you may need to press Tab to select the first focusable item.
Note: If frame contains text or HTML, and there are no focusable items, you have to use Virtual PC Cursor option in
JAWS in order to read the text. Press Insert+Z to toggle the Virtual PC Cursor and use up and down arrows to go to the
previous and next lines. Turn Virtual PC Cursor off before exiting IFrame.
2. Press Ctrl+Shift+F6 to exit the content area of a frame and return focus to the frame itself.
List
1. The up or down arrow keys move selection focus up or down through the list elements. The selection is continually
updated. An arrow key press results in a selection event.
2. Ctrl+Up or Down key: item focus moves up or down without changing the current selection. Spacebar can be used to
add the focused item to the selection.
3. Shift+Up or Down key: item focus moves up or down and the newly focused item is added to the selection.
Note: If the list supports only a single selection, the Ctrl and Shift modifiers have no effect.
Tab Bar
Left or right arrow key moves selection focus and selects the new tab immediately. Selection focus wraps around the ends
of the tab bar.
Text Field
1. If editable, alphanumeric keys cause an edit.
2. Tab proceeds in the tab order. Tab cannot be entered as a character in the text field.
Tree
The left and right arrow keys collapse or expand the current node if it has children. If it has no children, there is no effect.
The expansion is non-recursive. However, if the tree is capable of remembering previous expansion state of any subnodes,
it should do so.
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls
The following text describes the accessibility behaviors for non-standard controls:
l
“Content Tab Bar” on page 520
l
“Accessibility for File Type Drop-down” on page 520
l
“Accessibility for Sidebar Icon List (File Preferences/Properties)” on page 520
l
“Accessibility for Show Columns dialog” on page 520
l
“Accessibility for Favorites Manager Dialog” on page 521
l
“Accessibility for Explore” on page 521
l
“Accessibility for File Dialog” on page 522
l
“Accessibility for File Accumulator” on page 523
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls 519
Content Tab Bar
When the Content tab bar is focused, selection focus is on the current tab, if any.
Content Tab Bar— Accessibility Keys
Table 142
Key
Action
Content Tab Bar
Right/Up arrows
When on any document content tab, to select next tab on right. The selection will wrap.
Left/Down arrows
when on any document content tab, to select next tab on left. The selection will wrap.
Accessibility for File Type Drop-down
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported in the File Type drop-down:
Table 143
File Type Drop-Down — Accessibility Keys
Keys
Action
Down arrow
Drop the menu.
Arrow up or down
Change selection.
Enter
Make selection.
Accessibility for Sidebar Icon List (File Preferences/
Properties)
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported on the sidebar icon list:
Table 144
Sidebar Icon List — Accessibility Keys
Keys
Action
Tab/Shift+Tab
Navigate up/down the items in the list.
Space bar
Select focused item in the list.
Accessibility for Show Columns dialog
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported in the Show Columns dialog:
Table 145
Show Columns dialog — Accessibility Keys
Keys
Grid
520 Accessibility
Action
Keys
Action
Arrow Up/Down
Change selection.
Space bar
Check/uncheck the check box. Uncheck to hide that column in the
Explore list.
Move item/up/down arrow image to change the item's order
in the list
Arrow Up/Down
Select the item to be moved.
Tab to Up/Down arrow image
Move item up or down.
Space bar
Activate to move item up/down.
Accessibility for Favorites Manager Dialog
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported in the Favorites Manager dialog:
Table 146
Favorites Manager Dialog — Accessibility Keys
Keys
Action
Grid
Up/Down/Left/Right arrows
Change current cell selection.
Space bar
Check/uncheck cell.
Accessibility for Explore
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported for Explore/Subheadings:
Table 147
Explore — Accessibility Keys
Key
Action
Explore Tree
Down arrow
When on any node, select next node below current. Selection will not wrap.
Up arrow
When on any node, select next node above current. Selection will not wrap.
Page up
When on any node, get to the last visible node on the previous page, or if there is no previous page, the first node
on the current page.
Page down
When on any node, get to the first visible node on the next page, or, if there is no next page, the last node on the
current page.
Right arrow
When on a folder node with plus icon, expand a node.
Left arrow
When on a folder node with plus icon, go up to next expanded folder
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls 521
Key
Action
Right arrow
When on folder node with minus icon, go to next folder.
Left arrow
when on folder node with minus icon, collapse a node.
Explore List
Down arrow
When on any node, select next node below current. Selection will not wrap.
Up arrow
When on any node, select next node above current. Selection will not wrap.
Page up
When on any node, get to the last visible node on the previous page, or, if there is no previous page, the first
node on the current page.
Page down
When on any node, get to the first visible node on next page, or, if there is no next page, the last node on the
current page.
Ctrl+Up/Down arrow
When on any node, allows navigation without losing selection.
Ctrl+Space
When on any node, select/deselect currently focused item.
Ctrl+A
When on any node, select all nodes.
Shift+Up/Down arrow
when on any node, select/deselect sequential list of items.
Enter key
When on a folder node, drill into the folder.
Enter key
when on any node except folder node, launch the item.
Accessibility for File Dialog
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported for the File dialog:
Table 148
File Dialog — Accessibility Keys
Key
Action
Down arrow
When on any node, select next node below current. Selection will not wrap.
Up arrow
When on any node, select next node above current. Selection will not wrap.
page up
When on any node, get to last visible node on previous page, or, if there is no previous page, the last node on the current
page.
Page down
When on any node, get to the first visible node on next page, or, if there is no next page, the last node on the current page.
Left arrow
When on any node, drill up to folder node (parent of current node). If already at root node, nothing happens.
Right arrow
When on a folder node, drill down into folder and present contents.
Enter key
When on any node except folder node, select the item.
522 Accessibility
Accessibility for File Accumulator
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported for the File Accumulator:
Table 149
File Accumulator — Accessibility Keys
Key
Action
Left side with items to be added to selected list
Down arrow
When on any node, select next node below current. Selection will not wrap.
Up arrow
When on any node, select next node above current. Selection will not wrap.
Page up
When on any node, move to last visible node on previous page, or, if there is no previous page, the
first node on the current page.
Page down
When on any node, moves to first visible node on next page, or, if there is no next page, the last node
on the current page.
Left arrow
When on any node, drill up to folder node (parent of current node). If already at root node, nothing
happens.
Ctrl+Up/Down arrow
When on any node, allows navigation without losing selection.
Ctrl+Space
when on any node, select/deselect currently focused item.
Shift+Up/Down
When on any node, select/deselect sequential list of items.
Ctrl+A
When on any node, select all nodes.
Right arrow
When on a folder node, drill down into folder and present contents.
Right arrow
When on any node except folder node, add item to selected list.
Right List with items in the selected list
Down arrow
When on any node, select next node below current. Selection will not wrap.
Up arrow
When on any node, select next node above current. Selection will not wrap.
Page up
When on any node, go to last visible node on previous page, or, if there is no previous page, the first
node on the current page.
Page down
When on any node, go to first visible node on next page, or, if there is no next page, the last node on
the current page.
Left arrow
When on any node, remove item from selected list.
Move Up/Down arrow image to
change the item's order in the
list
Arrow Up/Down
Select the item to be moved.
Tab to Up/Down arrow image
Move item up or down.
Space bar
Activate to move item up/down.
Accessibility Behavior for Non-standard Controls 523
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Pages
The following keyboard shortcuts are supported by the content area in EPM Workspace pages:
Table 150
Workspace Pages — Accessibility keys
Keys
Action
Arrow keys
Used to Navigate between layout areas on a Workspace page.
Note: If you want to use the arrow keys to move among the layout areas, make sure you are on a layout area and not
in the inner frame of the layout area. To get out of the inner frame of the layout area, press Shift+Tab. To get out of the
inner frame of Recently Opened, Workspace Pages, or Quick Links portlet on the Home Page, press Shift+Tab twice.
a
If focus is on a layout area, then pressing this key adds the selected content in the Content Browser to the layout area.
Ctrl+a
If focus is on the Content Browser, then pressing this key combination adds the selected content in the left pane as
content to the page.
r
If focus is on a layout area, then pressing this key triggers the remove action on the layout area.
e
If focus is on a layout area, then pressing this key triggers the edit action on the layout area if the edit action is available
for the layout area.
l
If focus is on a layout area, then pressing this key triggers the launch action on the layout area if the launch action is
available for the layout area.
m
If focus is on a layout area, and the layout area is not maximized, then pressing this key triggers the maximize action on
the layout area or else it triggers the restore action on the layout area. The maximize option must be enabled on the layout
area.
Tab/Shift+Tab
Used to navigate to the layout area content (inner frame) or out of the inner frame and return focus back to layout area
itself.
Accessibility for EPM Workspace Template Selector
Dialog
The following table provides keyboard shortcuts for the Template Selector Dialog:
Table 151
Template Selector Dialog — Accessibility key
Key
Action
Up/Down/Left/Right
1. Up/Down/Left/Right arrow to navigate and select item in the group.
Accessibility for Financial Reporting
The following table provides keyboard shortcuts for Financial Reporting.
524 Accessibility
Table 152
Financial Reporting — Shortcut Keys
Keys
Action
Ctrl+F6, followed by Tab
To select report in books and batches, if focus is on the whole list.
Enter
To show report, if report is selected in the list.
Member Selection
Arrow keys
Navigate through open members, if focus is on option.
Enter
To open or close tree node, if focus is on +/- sign or open/close folder image.
POV Bar
Tab
Navigate through dimension buttons, if focus is on whole POV bar.
Enter
Used to launch member selection dialog.
Financial Reporting Graphic with Callouts
The EPM Workspace displays a Oracle Hyperion Financial Reporting, Fusion Edition report
and the Annotation area.
1. Annotation area (Ctrl+B) — Area that displays annotation information associated with the
report.
2. Annotation pane area and content adjuster (Ctrl+Alt+2) — Setting to adjust the size of the
annotation pane and content area. Hiding the annotation pane provides a larger content
frame in which to use EPM Workspace. Select View, then View Annotations to hide/display
the Annotation pane.
Accessibility for Foundation Services
The following table provides keyboard shortcuts for Oracle's Hyperion® Foundation Services:
Accessibility for Foundation Services 525
Table 153
Foundation Services — Shortcut Keys
Keys
Action
Tab
Apart from its standard function, this key is used to get to the right pane from folders' list.
Space
Apart from its standard function, this key can be used to switch between tabs in various Properties
dialogs. It can also be used to sort items in Users, Groups, Roles' table of Properties dialog on Permissions
tab.
Ctrl+<column_number>
This key combination can be used to sort items in Selected table of Properties dialog on Permissions
tab.
Enter
Apart from its standard function, this key can be used to switch between tabs in Import dialogs.
<column_number>
Press the corresponding table column number to sort the outputs in Jobs’ Output Collection.
Keyboard context menu button
Show context menu for the item over which the mouse cursor is placed (but not for the one which is
focused).
Accessibility for Interactive Reporting
The following table provides keyboard shortcuts for Interactive Reporting.
Note: Keyboard navigation has been enabled by default in both screen reader and non-screen
reader modes for Interactive Reporting documents in EPM Workspace.
Table 154
Interactive Reporting — Shortcut Keys
Keys
Action
Ctrl+F6 followed by Tab
If focus is on whole content pane of an Oracle's Hyperion® Interactive Reporting file opened in Oracle
Enterprise Performance Management Workspace, Fusion Edition, use these keys to navigate into the section
and its elements.
Ctrl+Shift+Enter
Display tool tip and read the status bar.
Shift+F10
Open and close context menu.
Arrow keys
Navigate through context menu.
Results/Table Section
Arrow keys or Tab
Navigate through the individual cells.
Shift+Arrow keys
Used to scroll, if the focus is on whole content pane of Results/Table sections.
Ctrl+Alt+Arrow keys
Select two or more columns.
Ctrl+Space
Add/remove current column to the selection.
Pivot Section
Arrow keys or Tab
526 Accessibility
Navigate through the individual cells.
Keys
Action
Chart Section
Ctrl+Shift
Apart from its standard function, these keys can be used for working with Chart, where there is a two-layer
navigation: all the elements are placed in groups (for example, one group includes axis labels, the other
one includes pie slices). The user goes between the groups by pressing Tab, and may drill down into
particular group and start tabbing in it by pressing Ctrl+Shift.
Report Section
Ctrl+Shift
Visit individual elements of Embedded Objects.
Alt+I
Go through the tables within one Report page.
Dashboard Section
Ctrl+Shift
Visit individual elements of Embedded Objects.
Query/CubeQuery Section
Ctrl+Shift+Arrow keys or Tab
Navigate through the individual cells of CubeQuery table.
Accessibility for Online Help
The table that follows lists the keyboard shortcuts for online help.
Table 155
Online Help — Keyboard Shortcuts
Shortcut
Description
Ctrl+Shift+1
Open and move focus to the Contents tab.
Ctrl+Shift+2
Open and move focus to the Index tab.
Ctr+Shift+3
Open and move focus to the Search tab.
Ctrl+Shift+4
Move focus to the content frame, which is the frame that contains help topics.
Considerations
The following items are noteworthy for accessibility users of this release.
Note: Review the Oracle Hyperion Enterprise Performance Management System Certification
Matrix for information on system requirements. You can find it at http://
www.oracle.com/technology/software/products/ias/files/fusion_certification.html. In
the table, under the Product Area heading, select Oracle Business Intelligence.
l
When the screen reader is used and the Virtual PC Cursor is disabled, a “blank” word is
heard before the actual title or text. This occurs in Menu and Explore when using the Up
Accessibility for Online Help 527
and Down arrow keys. The buttons “Delete” and “Backspace” may also cause the “blank”
word.
l
Keyboard navigation has been enabled by default in both the screen reader and non-screen
reader modes for Interactive Reporting documents in the EPM Workspace. You can disable
keyboard navigation when the screen reader setting is not active. To disable keyboard
navigation: add the parameter:
DISABLE_KEYBOARD_NAV_IN_NON_508_MODE=true to the Hyperion Interactive
Reporting Service (BI) in Dynamic Service properties through the Configuration and
Monitoring Console (CMC). For more information, see Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace, Fusion Edition, Administrator’s Guide.
l
l
l
In some circumstances, the screen reader may read more information than required, such
as the image URLs.
List box controls may not render properly when Oracle Enterprise Performance
Management Workspace, Fusion Edition is used in accessibility mode and the display is
scrolled. Internet Explorer version 7 and up generally does not have these scrolling issues,
although in some circumstances older video cards or drivers may display them. In addition,
some list boxes may render as dropdown controls when in accessibility mode
When pressing Esc to exit the main menu, you must press Esc one more time after the menu
closes to remove focus from the menu bar.
528 Accessibility
Glossary
! See bang character (!).
#MISSING See missing data (#MISSING).
access permissions A set of operations that a user can
perform on a resource.
accessor Input and output data specifications for data
mining algorithms.
account blocking The process by which accounts accept input
data in the consolidated file. Blocked accounts do not
receive their value through the additive consolidation
process.
account eliminations Accounts which have their values set to
zero in the consolidated file during consolidation.
account type How an account's value flows over time, and its
sign behavior. Account type options can include expense,
income, asset, liability, and equity.
accountability map A visual, hierarchical representation of
the responsibility, reporting, and dependency structure of
the accountability teams (also known as critical business
areas) in an organization.
accounts dimension A dimension type that makes accounting
intelligence available. Only one dimension can be defined
as Accounts.
active service A service whose Run Type is set to Start rather
than Hold.
activity-level authorization Defines user access to applications
and the types of activities they can perform on applications,
independent of the data that will be operated on.
ad hoc report An online analytical query created on-the-fly
by an end user.
adapter Software that enables a program to integrate with
adaptive states Interactive Reporting Web Client level of
permission.
adjustment See journal entry (JE).
Advanced Relational Access The integration of a relational
database with an Essbase multidimensional database so that
all data remains in the relational database and is mapped to
summary-level data residing in the Essbase database.
agent An Essbase server process that starts and stops
applications and databases, manages connections from
users, and handles user-access security. The agent is referred
to as ESSBASE.EXE.
aggregate cell A cell comprising several cells. For example, a
data cell that uses Children(Year) expands to four cells
containing Quarter 1, Quarter 2, Quarter 3, and Quarter 4
data.
aggregate function A type of function, such as sum or
calculation of an average, that summarizes or performs
analysis on data.
aggregate limit A limit placed on an aggregated request line
item or aggregated metatopic item.
aggregate storage database The database storage model
designed to support large-scale, sparsely distributed data
which is categorized into many, potentially large
dimensions. Upper level members and formulas are
dynamically calculated, and selected data values are
aggregated and stored, typically with improvements in
overall aggregation time.
aggregate view A collection of aggregate cells based on the
levels of the members within each dimension. To reduce
calculation time, values are pre-aggregated and stored as
aggregate views. Retrievals start from aggregate view totals
and add up from there.
data and metadata from target and source systems.
Glossary 529
aggregation The process of rolling up and storing values in
assignment The association of a source and destination in
an aggregate storage database; the stored result of the
aggregation process.
the allocation model that controls the direction of allocated
costs or revenue flow within Profitability and Cost
Management.
aggregation script In aggregate storage databases only, a file
that defines a selection of aggregate views to be built into an
aggregation.
alias An alternative name. For example, for a more easily
identifiable column descriptor you can display the alias
instead of the member name.
alias table A table that contains alternate names for
members.
alternate hierarchy A hierarchy of shared members. An
alternate hierarchy is based upon an existing hierarchy in a
database outline, but has alternate levels in the dimension.
An alternate hierarchy allows the same data to be seen from
different points of view.
ancestor A branch member that has members below it. For
example, the members Qtr2 and 2006 are ancestors of the
member April.
appender A Log4j term for destination.
application (1) A software program designed to run a specific
task or group of tasks such as a spreadsheet program or
database management system. (2) A related set of
dimensions and dimension members that are used to meet
a specific set of analytical and/or reporting requirements.
application currency The default reporting currency for the
application.
area A predefined set of members and values that makes up
a partition.
arithmetic data load A data load that performs operations on
values in the database, such as adding 10 to each value.
artifact An individual application or repository item; for
example, scripts, forms, rules files, Interactive Reporting
documents, and financial reports. Also known as an object.
assemblies Installation files for EPM System products or
components.
asset account An account type that stores values that
represent a company's assets.
attribute Characteristic of a dimension member. For
example, Employee dimension members may have
attributes of Name, Age, or Address. Product dimension
members can have several attributes, such as a size and
flavor.
attribute association A relationship in a database outline
whereby a member in an attribute dimension describes a
characteristic of a member of its base dimension. For
example, if product 100-10 has a grape flavor, the product
100-10 has the Flavor attribute association of grape. Thus,
the 100-10 member of the Product dimension is associated
with the Grape member of the Flavor attribute dimension.
Attribute Calculations dimension A system-defined dimension
that performs these calculation operations on groups of
members: Sum, Count, Avg, Min, and Max. This dimension
is calculated dynamically and is not visible in the database
outline. For example, using the Avg member, you can
calculate the average sales value for Red products in New
York in January.
attribute dimension A type of dimension that enables analysis
based on the attributes or qualities of dimension members.
attribute reporting A reporting process based on the attributes
of the base dimension members. See also base dimension.
attribute type A text, numeric, Boolean, date, or linked-
attribute type that enables different functions for grouping,
selecting, or calculating data. For example, because the
Ounces attribute dimension has the type numeric, the
number of ounces specified as the attribute of each product
can be used to calculate the profit per ounce for that
product.
authentication Verification of identity as a security measure.
Authentication is typically based on a user name and
password. Passwords and digital signatures are forms of
authentication.
authentication service A core service that manages one
authentication system.
auto-reversing journal A journal for entering adjustments that
you want to reverse in the next period.
530 Glossary
automated stage A stage that does not require human
batch POV A collection of all dimensions on the user POV of
intervention, for example, a data load.
every report and book in the batch. While scheduling the
batch, you can set the members selected on the batch POV.
axis (1) A straight line that passes through a graphic used
for measurement and categorization. (2) A report aspect
used to arrange and relate multidimensional data, such as
filters, pages, rows, and columns. For example, for a data
query in Simple Basic, an axis can define columns for values
for Qtr1, Qtr2, Qtr3, and Qtr4. Row data would be retrieved
with totals in the following hierarchy: Market, Product.
backup A duplicate copy of an application instance.
balance account An account type that stores unsigned values
that relate to a particular point in time.
balanced journal A journal in which the